UC-NRLF 


B   3   &^y   2SD 


m 


^^ 


\imL 


LieR.ARV  j 

oi-  Tin:  j 

University  of  California.  | 

OIKT  OF"  i 

PACIFIC   THEOLOGICAL    SEMINARY.  I 


zAccessiou 


Class 


pacific   theological   ^gminai^H 
ALCOVE,  SHELF, 

"S  PRESENTED     BV 


EXPOSITION 


OF   THE 


MOYEMENT-CUPiE. 


\ 


AN 


EXPOSITION 


SWEDISH  MOYEMENT-CURE. 


EMBRAOLNTx 

THE   HISTORY   AM)    PHILOSOPHY    OF    THIS    SYSTEM   OF   IfEDICAL    TREATMENT, 

WITH   EXA3IPLES   OF   SINGLE   MOVEMENTS,    AND   DIRECTIONS   FOR 

THEIR   USE   IN   VARIOUS   FORJIS   OF   CHRONIC   DISEASE, 

FORMING   A   COMPLETE   JLAJfUAL    OF   EXERCISES  : 


TOGETHER   WITH 

A  SUMMARY  OF  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  GENERAL  HYGIEXE. 


BY 

GEO.  H.  TAYLOR,  A.M.,  M.D., 

PBINOIPAL  PHYSICIAN   TO   THE   EEMEDIAL  HYGIENIC  INSTITUTE   OF  NEW  YORK  CITY 

Nrtu  ¥orU: 
Fowler  and  ^Vells,  Publishers, 

No.    308    BEOADWAY. 

1  SCO. 


,u^: 


ft 


f^^^ 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1860,  by 

GEO.     H.    TAYLOE, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for  the  Southern 
District  of  New  Yorli. 


Da  VIES  &  Kext, 

STEREOTYPEES   AND    ELECTIIOTTPERS, 

113  Nassau  Street,  ]V.  Y. 


3lo  t)is  JFricntis, 
PROF.  GABRIEL  BRANTIXG, 

FOR   FOETT-FIYE   TEARS    DIRECTOR   OF   THE    SWEDISH   CENTRAL 
GYMNASTIC    INSTITUTE, 

AND 

HERMAI  SATHEKBURG,  M.D., 

PROFESSOR   OF    OETHOPOEDIC    SURGERY   IN    THE    CAROLINIAN   MEDICO- 
CHIRURGICAL    INSTITUTE,    STOCKHOLM, 

AS     A     TESTIMONIAL     OF     GKATITUDE 

FOR 
THEIR   KIND    PERSONAL    INSTRUCTIONS    AND    GENEROUS    HOSPITALITY, 


^Ijis  matli, 


BEING  AN  ATTEMPT  TO  CARRY  OUT,  IN  A  NEW  DIRECTION, 

THOSE     PRINCIPLES 

TO    THE    ELUCIDATION    AND     PRACTICE    OF   WHICH    THEY    HAVE    SO 
ASSIDUOUSLY   AND    SUCCESSFULLY    DEVOTED  THEMSELVES, 

IS 

AFFECTIONATELY     AND     RESPECTFULLY     DEDICATED 

BY 


_ 84551 


PREFACE. 


To  do  what  he  can  to  encourage  and  assist 
people  in  a  rational  endeavor  to  acquire  and 
maintain  an  intelligent  control  of  their  entire 
physiological  being — to  bring  into  and  keep  in 
healthful  and  effective  play  all  the  complex 
machinery  of  their  organism,  has  been  the  sole 
aim  of  the  writer  in  this  work.  The  importance 
of  the  agency  proposed  to  effect  this  is  conceded 
in  general  terms  by  all ;  it  never  was  disputed, 
indeed.  But  this  admission,  so  freely  and  so 
gi^acefully  rendered,  amounts  to  very  little ;  it  is 
not  much  better,  really,  than  a  virtual  confes- 
sion of  inability  to  rebut  the  arguments  directly 
or  indirectly  advanced  in  every  sound  physio- 
logical treatise. 

The  plan  of  the  present  work,  so  far  as  I  am 


Vlll  PEKFACE. 

aware,  is  quite  new,  no  attempt  having  been 
hitherto  made  to  analyze  single  movements^  with 
a  view  to  the  production  of  such  a  combination 
of  effects  as  are  wanted  to  meet  the  various 
pathological  needs  of  the  system.  This  object, 
I  am  quite  certain,  has  been,  at  best,  very  imper- 
fectly accomplished ;  but  I  would  feign  indulge 
the  hope  that  I  have  at  least  done  the  work  of 
a  humble  pioneer,  in  breaking  the  ground  and 
throwing  out  some  hints  and  suggestions  that 
may  prove  useful  to  the  future  laborer  in  this 
wide  and  fertile  field. 

The  Author  can  not  but  hope,  too,  that  he 
has  furnished  to  his  medical  readers  some  food 
for  thought  that  may  lead  to  results  in  their  prac- 
tice that  shall  more  than  compensate  for  the 
time  and  strength  expended  in  the  work. 

To  a  thorough  understanding  of  all  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  MovEMENT-CcTEE,  au  intimate  ac- 
quaintance with  Anatomy  and  Physiology^  and, 
indeed,  with  medical  science  generally,  is  abso- 
lutely essential.  Of  course,  skill  in  diagnosis^ 
and  in  the  practical  application  of  these  princi- 
ples in  the  treatment  of  the  countless  ills  of  hu- 
man flesh,  can  be  acquired  only  by  long  and 
patient  training  and  study.  I  do  not  expect,  for 
I  know  it  would  be  quite  impossible  in  the  nature 


PREFACE.  IX 

of  things,  to  turn  every  good-natured  person  wlio 
may  do  me  the  kindness  to  peruse  these  chapters 
into  a  good  doctor.  I  should  be  entirely  satis- 
fied— the  height  of  my  ambition  would  be  reach- 
ed— could  I  but  prevent  a  few  hundreds  of  my 
Christian  fellow-men  and  women  from  maldng 
had  doctors  of  tJiemselves, 

I  have  not  endeavored  to  shake  my  reader's 
faith  in  the  wise,  prudent,  conscientious,  and 
learned  physician.  No  one  honors  him  more 
than  does  the  writer.  Blessed,  say  I,  is  the 
man  or  woman  who  has  a  good  doctor^  but  more 
blessed  he  lolio  can  do  ivithout  him  !  To  enable 
my  reader  so  to  do  has  been  my  main  aim  in  the 
preparation  of  this  manual. 

In  Part  I.  is  given  what  I  conceive  to  be  the 
more  important  principles  upon  which  is  based 
the  practice  of  the  Movement-Cure.  These  prin- 
ciples are  mostly  simple  deductions  from  phys- 
iological science,  and  the  cui^e  is  only  the  prac- 
tical application  of  demonstrated  jDhysiological 
truths 

In  Fart  11.  are  given  a  number  of  examples  of 
the  method  of  carrying  these  principles  into 
practice. 

In  Part  III.  the  pathology  of  various  common 
chronic  affections  is  briefly  discussed,  and  certain 

1^ 


PKEFACE. 


means  of  preserving  the  healtli  and  improving 
the  strength  are  noticed. 

Part  IV.  contains  a  concise  statement  of  some 
of  the  relations  of  the  system  to  temperature^  air^ 
foocl^  lights  lieat^  etc.,  with  observations  upon  the 
superior  advantages  of  obeying  the  laws  of  life, 
with  a  view  to  the  maintenance  or  the  restora- 
tion of  health  and  vigor,  over  irrational  and  in- 
discriminate drug  dosing. 

GEO.  H.  TAYLOR. 
No.  67  West  SSth  Steeet,  New  Yoek. 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS. 


PEINCIPLES  CONNECTED  WITH  THE  USE  OF  MOVEMENTS. 
CHAPTER  I. 

INTRODUCTORY. 

PAGE 
Physical  Self-Training,  and  the  Classes  of  Persons  for  whom  it  is  specially 

needful 17 

1.  After  Duplicated  Movements \ 19 

2.  Those  who  are  but  Slightly  AflFected  by  Disease 20 

8.  Sedentary  Persons ' 21 

4.  Persons  Enoaged  in  Mental  Toil 21 

5.  Young  Students  of  both  Sexes 22 

6.  Tendency  to  Diminish  the   Drug  Practice 24 

CHAPTER  n. 

HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

Movements  among  the  Chinese 32 

Movements  in  India 39 

Movements  among  the  Greeks  and  Romans 41 

Biography  of  Ling.   47 

'Ling's  Statements  of  Principles 53 

The  Movement  System  in  Stockholrfi 59 

Testimony  of  Philosophers— Dally,  Hoffman,  Rousseau,  Pliny,  Galen,  Plato, 

Bacon,  Georgii 62 

CHAPTER  III. 

THE    RELATIONS    OF    CHEMICAL    AND    MOLECULAR    CHANGES   TO    THE 
ORIGIN   OF    FORCE    IN    THE    BODY. 

Importance  of  First  Principles 68 

These  Forces  a  Product  of  Vital  Action 71 

Different  kinds  of  Motion 77 

Reciprocity  of  Actions 80 

The  System  as  a  Reservoir  of  Force 82 

Description  of  Muscle. 83 

Physiological  Effects  of  Exercise       85 

Effects  of  Musculay  Contraction  on  the  Local  Circulation 86 

Effect  on  Respiration 87 

Effect  on  the  Secretions 88 

Effect  on  the  Excretions 89 

Effect  on  Absorption 89 

Effect  on  the  Quality  of  the  Blood 90 

Effect  on  the  Digestion 90 

Effect  on  the  Organizing  Process 91 

Movements  Stimulate  the  Vitalizing  Processes , 92 

Co-ordination  of  Motions  by  the  Nerves 93 

The  foregoing  Effects 96 


84551 


Xll  CONTENTS. 


CHAPTEK  IV. 

MOVEMENTS,  AND  THE  PEINCIPLES  GOTEENING  THEIE  APPLICATION. 

PAGE 

Definition 9T 

Different  kinds  of  Movements,  Active  and  Passive 93 

Single  and  Duplicated  Movements 99 

Concentric  and  Eccentric  Movements 102 

General  and  Localized  Movements 105 

Influence  of  Movemen's  in  Regulating  the  Forces  of  tlie  Body 109 

Relations  of  tiie  Action  of  the  VVill  and  of  the  Muscles  in  Movements 112 

Movements  as  a  Specific  Medical  Agency 116 

Movemeots  ms  related  to  Pathology 120 

Province  of  Movements 121 

Morale  of  Movements 122 

CHAPTER  Y. 

MOTEMENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMNASTICS. 
The  Muscles  a  Medium  of  Language,  and  of  the  Manifestation  of  Character . .    129 

CHAPTER  YI. 

DIRECTIONS  FOR  PRESCRIBING  AND  APPLYING  MOVEMENTS. 

Time  Considered 135 

Manner 136 

Pvhythm 136 

Exertion 137 

Number 137 

Order 13S 

Eelation  to  Diseased  Parts 139 

Eegions  of  the  Body 140 

CHAPTER  Yn. 

TERMINOLOGY    OF    POSITIONS. 

Importance  of  System 142 

Positions  and  Movements 144 

Commencing  Positions 145 

Principal  Positions  of  the  Trunk 145 

Standing  Positions— Erect,  Fall,  and  Bent  Standing 145 

Kneeling  Positions — Erect  and  Fall  Kneeling 146 

Sittina:  Positions— Sitting,  Short,  and  Long 146 

Lie-Sitting,  Half-Lying.^Fall  and  Stride  Sitting 147 

Lying— Forward.  Backward.  Sidewise,  Trunk,  and  Leg 147 

Head-and-Heels,  Elbows-and-Toes,  Sidewise  and  Balance  Lying 148 

Hanging 148 

Positions  of  the  Arms  and  Legs 14S 

Arm  Positions  seen  in  a  Front  View  of  the  Body 150 

Arm  Positions  seen  in  a  Side  View  of  the  Body 152 

Leg  Positions 154 

Lower  Leg  Positions 155 

Stride,  Walk,  Step-Standing,  and  Foot-Support-Standing 155 

Squat  and  Leg-Angle  Positions 156 


CONTENTS.  XUl 


fart  ®to0. 

EXAMPLES  OF  SINGLE  MOVEMENTS. 
CHAPTER  VIII. 

EEGION   OF    THE    FEET. 

PAGE 

Kemarks  on  Movements  of  the  Feet 157 

Examples  of  Movements  of  the  Region  of  the  Feet 160 

1.  Standing,  Feet-Extinding IGO 

2.  Toe-Support,  Half-Standing,  Ileel-rressing  161 

3.  AVing-Walk,  Toe  Wall-Standing,  Foot-Eending 162 

4.  Long  Sitting,  Feet  Sidewisc-Bending  16i 

Long-Sitting,  Feet-Kotation 163 

Foot-Percussion 164 

Foot-Eotation  (Passive) 165 

Support  Half- Standing,  Leg-Swinging 166 

CHAPTER  IX. 

EEGIOX    OF    THE   LEGS. 

Eemarks  on  Movements  of  the  Legs 167 

Walking 167 

Examples  of  Movements  of  the  Legs 170 

Wing-Stride-Standing,  Curtseying 170 

Half-Standing,  Curtseying 171 

Balance-Standing,  Curtseying 172 

Wing-Kneeling,  Knee-Stretching 172 

Half-Standing,  Alternate  Twisting 173 

Wing- Walk,  Forward-Fall-Standing,  Knee-Bending 374 

Leg-Angle,  Half-Standing,  Leg-Clapping 174 

Region  of  the  Hips 17o 

Eemarks  on  the  Region  of  the  Hips 175 

Wing-Stride,  Short-Sitting,  Leg  Outward-Stretching 176 

Leg-Angle,  Half-Standing  Knee-Stretching 177 

Wing-Recline,  Support-Sitting,  Knees-Raising 177 

Half-Standing,  Leg  Forward-Raising 178 

H;df  Standing,  Leg  Backward-Raising 179 

Half-Sianding,  Leg  Sidewise-Raising 179 

Forward-Fall,  Head-Support-Standing,  Leg-Raising ISO 

Half-Standing,  Leg-Rotation 181 

Wing-Sitting,  Double  Leg-Twisting ISl 

Legs- Angle,  Lie-Sitting,  Knees-Stretching 182 

Shelter  Trunk-Backward -Lying,  Legs-Raising 1-^3 

Kick  Backward-Lying,  Legs-Separation 184 

Sidewise-Lying,  Lt*g-Raising 184 

Backward-Lying,  Legs-Rotation 185 

W^ing  Leg-Angle  Half-Lying,  Knee-Stretching 185 

Thigh-Rotation 186 

Chine-Knocking 187 

CHAPTER  X. 

EEGIOX    OF    THE    TEUXK. 

Remarks  on  the  Region  of  the  Trunk 183 

Movements  of  the  Digestive  Organs 189 

Movements  of  the  Respiratory  Orgaiis ; . . . .  193 

Stretch-Stride  Short- Sitting,  trunk  Forward-Sidewise  Falling 198 

Stretch-Stride  Short-Sitting,  Trunk  Backward-Sidewise  Falling 199 

Stretch-Sitting,  Trunk  Backward-Falling 199 

Half-Stretch,  Half-Wing,  Stride  Short-Sitting,  Trunk  Si  lewise  Bending 200 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Ilalf-Stretch,  Half-Wing,  Stride-Sitting,  Trunk-Twisting 201 

Shelter  Stride-Sitting,  Cliange-Twisting 202 

Yard-Sitting,  Arms  Swaving 203 

StrL-tcli-Stri(K'-Knceliiig. "Trunk  Backward-Bending 2n4 

Half  Strttcli.  Ilaif-Wing.  Keclined  Stride-Kneeling,  Trunk-Twisting 206 

Ilalf-Sirctcli,  Il.iir-Wiiig,  Walk-Kneeling,  Trunk-Twisting 206 

Arm.— Anirle,  INclincd  Kneeling,  Arms  Stretching 207 

Rark-K.clinr.l  Stride-Kneeliiig,  Arms  Backward-Striking 208 

WiiiLC  Stridf-lviK-rliiig,  Ringing 208 

Yar.i  Stride  Jviieelinir,  Swaying 209 

Stride-Sitting,  Arms  Sidewise-Kaising 210 

Stretch  Half- Walk,  Half  Krietling,  Trunk  Backward-Bending 211 

Ilalf-Wing,  Half-Curve  (weight  held)  Step-Eeclined-Standing,  Trunk  Sidewise- 

Bending 211 

Half-  A  ing,  Half-Stretch,  Step  Standing,  Trunk  Sidewise-Bending 212 

Half-Stretch,  Half-Wing,  Half-Kick,  Eeclined  Standing,  Trunk  Sidewise-Bend- 
ing   213 

Half-Stretch,  Eeclined  Kick-Standing,  Trunk-Twisting 213 

Shelter  Long-Sitting,  Trunk  Forward-Bending 214 

Arms-Angle,  Half-Kick  (foot  supported)  Eeclined-Standing,  Arms-Stretching. .  214 

Yard-Eeclmed,  Half-Kick  Standing,  Swaving 216 

Half-Stretch,  Half-Wing,  Walk,  Trunk  Sidewise-Bent,  Standing,  Trunk-Twist- 
ing   216 

Yard  Walk-Standing,  Trunk  Backward-Bending 21T 

Upward-Sidewise  Stretch  Doorway-Standing,  Walking 217 

Shelter,  Sidewise-Bent  Stride-Standing,  Trunk  Eotation 218 

Head-aiid- 1 1  eels  Lving,  Holding 219 

Elbow-and-Toes  Lying,  Holding. 220 

Elbow-and-Leg  Sidewise-Lying^  Hips  Eaising 221 

Shelter  Baek-Lving,  Head-and-Legs  Eaising 222 

Back  Lying,  Holding 222 

Wing-Suide  Leg-Angle  Standing,  Trunk  Vibration 223 

Operations  upon  the  Digestive  Organs 223 

Kneading,  Snaking,  Stroking,  Circular  Stroking,  Point  Pressure,  Clapping 224 

Agitation  of  the  Abdomen  and  Diaphragm 226 

CHAPTER  XI. 

EEGION   OF   THE    AEMS. 

Eemarks  on  this  Eegion 227 

Stretch  Backward-Lying,  Weight-Holding 229 

Eack  Grasp,  Forward  Fall-Standing,  Arms  Angling 230 

Stretch-Grasp  Standing,  Hip  Eotation 231 

Half  Stretch  Grasp  Standing,  Arm  Twisting 232 

Yard  Stride-Sitting,  Arms  Twisting 232 

Standing,  Arms  Eotating. 233 

Hanging,  Swinging 234 

Swing-Hang-Standing,  Trunk  Eotating 236 

Trunk  Forward-Fall  Hanging,  Holding 237 

Backward-  Fall  Elbows  Support  Lying,  Holding 238 

Half-Stretch  Support  Half  Standing,  Stretching 239 

Stretch-Stride  Standing  or  Star-Standing,  Stretching 240 

CHAPTER  Xn. 

EEGION    OF    THE    HEAD    AND   NEOK. 

Eemarks  on  the  Eegion  of  the  Head  and  Neck 241 


Head  Turnin 


242 


Head  Forward  Bending 242 

Head  Backward  Bending !...!!!.'.!.'. 243 

Head  Backward  Bending  and  Twisting  (Screw-Raising).*. .....'........'.'.'. 


CONTENTS.  XV 


fart  %\xtt 

THE  PATHOLOGY  OF  SEVERAL  FORMS  OF  CHRONIC  DISEASE. 
CHAPTER  Xin. 

THE    EELATIONS    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

PAGE 

Kemark 246 

Indigestion,  Dyspepsia 247 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

NERVOUSNESS. 

Nervousness 262 

Seminal  Disease 271 

Neuralgia 273 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Scrofulous  Aflfections 277 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Pulmonary  Affections— Consumption 286 

CHAPTER  XVn. 
Paralysis  of  the  Nerves  of  Motion 300 

CHAPTER  XVin. 

CONSTIPATION,    DIARRHEA,    AND   PILES. 

Constipation 808 

Diarriiea 315 

Piles 31T 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
Deformities  of  the  Spine 320 

CHAPTER  XX. 
Female  Diseases 323 

CHAPTER  XXL 

MISCELLANEOUS   APPLICATIONS   OF  MOVEMENTS. 

MoTements  to  Kemove  Fatigue 340 

To  Stop  Nose-Bleed 341 

To  Induce  Vomiting 342 

To  Remove  Chilblains 348 

To  Relieve  Headache 344 

Worms  in  Children 345 

Hernia 346 

Prolapsus  of  the  Womb  and  Bowels  — 347 

To  Relieve  Backache 347 

Amenorrhea 347 

To  Excite  Action  of  the  Lower  Bowels 347 


XVI  CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XXn. 

DIFFERENT    EFFECTS   OF  VAEIOIJS    COMMON   EXEECISES   UPON   PEESONS 
IN   HEALTH. 

PAGE 

Walking 348 

Running 348 

Dancing 349 

Sewing 349 

Agricultural  Labors 350 

Painting,  etc 351 

Study 351 

CHAPTER  XXni. 

MOVEMENTS    ADAPTED    TO   THE    USE    OF    SCHOOLS. 
Order  of  Command  for  Free-Sitting  Movements 355 


!art  imx. 


HYGIENE. 
CHAPTER  XXIV. 

THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF   HYGIENE. 

Food 36S 

Quantity 353 

Quality 360 

Salt 362 

Preparation  of  Food— Cooking 363 

Proper  Times  for  Eating 364 

Drinks 366 

Milk 366 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

TEMPEEATUEE. 

Physiological  Effect  of  Heat  and  Cold 36S 

Origin  of  Colds 371' 

Effect  of  Continued  and  Great  Extremes 373 

Importance  of  Cold 374 

The  Water-Cure 374 

The  Cold  Bath 375 

The  Warm  Bath 376 

The  Hot  Bath 377 

Local  Baths 377 

Effect  on  the  Nerves 378 

Compresses  379 

The  Air  Bath 879 

The  Cold  General  Bath 880 

Eeaction 3S1 

Shower  and  Douche  Baths 3sl 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 
Light 383 

CHAPTER  XXVn. 
Mental  Hygiene 3S6 


A  MANUAL  OF  EXERCISES 


PART     I. 

PEINCIPLES  COXKECTED  WITH  THE  USE  OF  MOVEMENTS. 


INTRODUCTORY. 

Physical  Self-teaiotng,  aub  the  Classes  of  Persons 
FOR  WHOM  IT  IS  SPECIALLY  JSTeedful. — ^Therc  are  not  in 
nature  nicer  or  wiser  adaptations  of  means  trends,  than 
are  exhibited  in  the  arrangements*  of  the  miman  sys- 
tem for  the  maintenance  in  perfect  order  and  health  of 
its  functions.  Such  provision  implies  the  reverse  of 
chance  or  accident  as  its  controlling  cause,  and  in  fact 
intelligence  in  the  arrangement  of  its  activities  and 
relations,  if  indeed  safety  and  perpetuity  be  the  object 
contemplated  in  it.  That  all  may  have  to  a  certain 
and  sufficient  extent  the  control  of  their  own  physical 
systems,  will  scarcely  be  denied ;  for  it  is  on  this  fact 
that  human  actions  and  human  responsibility  are  based. 
The  acknowledgment  of  this  evidently  throws  the 
responsibility  for  his  health,  efficiency,  and  happiness 
upon  his  own  shoulders,  where  every  man  should  feel 
that  it  belongs. 

.  84551 


18  INTEODUCTOEY. 

The  moral  and  intellectual  natures  of  man  have  ever 
been  regarded  as  proper  subjects  for  training  and  de- 
velopment, in  order  to  secure  their  due  healthful 
exercise.  The  physical  system  is  manifestly  a  subject 
for  corresponding  attention ;  and  its  right  to  this  ad- 
vantage should  be  recognized,  and  receive  in  civilized 
communities  no  less  regard.  That  physical  culture 
should  claim  the  precedence,  would  seem  to  be  indi- 
cated by  the  fact  that  the  physical  is  prior  in  the  order 
of  development,  not  only  as  respects  the  individuals 
who  is,  through  the  physical^  fitted  for  his  destiny  as 
an  intellectual  being,  but  also  in  the  progressive  un- 
folding of  the  powers  of  the  race. 

Physical  culture,  then,  should  be  promoted  both  as 
a  science  and  as  an  art.  in  all  the  numerous  applica- 
tions of  which  it  is  susceptible,  till  it  assumes  a  posi- 
tion in  the  public  esteem  commensurate  with  its  im- 
portance. The  particular  form  it  shall  ta]?:e,  and  the 
modes  of  carrying  it  out,  will  long  remain  a  matter  of 
abstract  md  experjmentaj  investigation;  each  person 
interested  contributing  something  of  his  experience 
and  thought  toward  the  realization  of  the  grand  objecj^ 
— the  highest  efficiency  and  well-being  of  mankind,, 
physical  and  moral. 

This  subject  is  one  that  receives  much  superficial  at- 
tention. It  is  one  concerning  which  an  abundance  of 
"vague  and  glittering  generalities"  have  been  ex- 
pressed, but  only  a  very  few  practical  precepts  or  defi- 
nite directions  given.  While  all  seem  familiar  with 
the  subject  of  exercise,  in  its  relations  to  the  health, 
but  very  few  admit  that  they  are  prepared  to  meet, 
with  suitable  applications,  any  given  case  requiring 
treatment-  The  feeble  person  and  the  invalid  are  con- 
stantly advised  to  take  exercise.     The  popular  lecturer, 


INTRODUCTORY.  19 

books,  friends,  physicians  unite  in  confirming  the  dic- 
tates of  his  common  sense  in  this  respect;  but  the  in- 
quirer looks  ahnost  in  vain  to  all  these  sources  for  any 
definite  and  satisfactory  information  based  on  physi- 
ology and  the  laws  of  life,  such  as  will  tell  him  liow  the 
remedy  operates,  and  also  liow  it  should  he  applied. 

The  i:)resent  treatise,  it  is  hoped,  will  assist  in  sup- 
plying the  needs  here  referred  to,  in  the  several  direc- 
tions now  to  be  named. 

1.  The  class  of  persons  who  will  best  understand 
the  meaning  as  well  as  the  method  of  the  present 
treatise,  consists  of  those  who  have  been,  or  are,  under 
my  medical  direction.  Indeed,  this  is  the  class  that 
loudly  call  for  the  work,  and  who  have  constantly 
spurred  me  on  to  its  completion.  After  receiving  for 
a  while  a  full  prescription  of  duplicated  movements, 
until  their  health  has  become  much  improved,  such 
persons  require,  at  every  stage  of  their  progress  toward 
the  goal  of  perfect  health,  directions  for  self^eatment 
— for  a  continuation,  in  a  modified  form,  of  the  measures 
previously  employed.  I  have  felt,  as  others  have  and 
will,  the  need  of  such  particular  directions  as  each 
patient  may  require,  and  which  this  treatise  is  an 
attempt  to  furnish.  In  this  way,  the  purposes  of  both 
physician  and  patient  are  equally  served,  and  the  desired 
object  of  extending  the  practice  of  movements  in  a  do- 
mestic way  is  to  a  limited  extent  realized.  But  the 
reader  must  understand  at  the  outset,  that  the  move- 
ment-cure can  be  practiced  in  this  way  (/lily  to  a  limited 
extent,  both  on  account  of  the  obscure  nature  of  the 
diseases  for  which  it  is  applied,  and  also  from  the  kind 
of  processes  which  it  employs. 

The  present  treatise  is  therefore  confined  to  the  dis- 


20  INTRODUCTORY. 

ciission  of  a  few  single  movements.  With  those  who 
have  had  a  previous  training  with  the  duplicated  move- 
ments^ the  directions  herein  contained  will  be  of  the 
greatest  service,  not  only  for  the  purpose  of  carrying 
on  the  curative  processes  to  results  of  greater  perfec- 
tion, but  also  for  preventing  a  recurrence  of  the  com- 
plaint, since  it  is  the  prime  object  of  the  treatment  to 
secure  to  the  invalid  the  intelligent  and  permanent 
command  of  himself. 

2.  There  is  in  the  community  a  very  large  class  of 
persons  who  might  be  called  half-invalids — ^persons 
who  do  not  possess  a  satisfactory  amount  of  health, 
but  who  at  the  same  time  feel  that  they  are  not  the 
proper  subjects  for  medical  care.  Such  persons  feel 
that  they  are  forewarned  of  disease,  and  would  gladly 
attempt  to  avert  it,  could  they  obtain  such  directions 
for  doing  so  as  would  meet  the  approbation  of  their 
reason  or  instinctive  sense  of  physiological  propriety. 
Current ^edical  practice  takes  no  cognizance  of  these 
cases ;  or  if  it  does,  it  is  in  such  a  way  as  often  to  confirm 
the  subject  in  serious  and  prolonged  disease.  Aware 
of  this  fact,  many  keep  aloof  from  medical  advice  of 
any  kind,  and  insist  that  suffering  in  any  of  the  more 
moderate  forms  is  less  a  misfortune  than  the  habit  of 
gulping  drugs  for  the  palliation  they  afford.  For  per- 
sons of  this  class,  it  is  evident  that  it  is  not  drugs,  but 
such  easily  performed  self -training  as  that  of  which 
examples  and  directions  are  here  given,  that  is  i-e- 
quired.  By  this  means,  the  abundant  latent  powers 
which  they  possess  are  developed  into  activity  and 
harmony,  and  they  soon  rejoice  in  health,  while  the  neg- 
lect or  continued  misdirection  of  these  would  eventually 
have  degenerated  into  grave,  and  perhaps  fatal,  disease. 


INTRODUCTORY.  21 

3.  Besides  these,  there  are  many  whose  avocations 
are  sedentary,  yet  such  as  require  the  continued  and 
often  severe  employment  of  a  part  of  their  muscles. 
/This  tends  to  an  undue  and  disproportionate  activity 
of  some  parts  of  the  body  to  the  detriment  of  others. 
Such  avocations  constitute  in  many  constitutions  a 
potent  cause  of  ill  health;  but  the  ill  effects  of  them 
can,  in  general,  be  easily  counteracted  by  a  recourse 
to  such  means  as  are  prescribed  in  this  treatise.  Per- 
sons suftering  from  the  causes  here  alluded  to,  will  be 
enabled  to  remove  fatigue  and  congestion  from  the 
parts  of  the  body  that  have  been  abused  by  too  con- 
tinuous exercise,  and  thus  to  prevent  the  occurrence  of 
the  grievous  symptoms  so  commonly  resulting  from 
such  causes. 

4.  Persons  of  literary  and  of  husiiiess  habits  require 
a  similar  aid  to  preserve  them  from  falling  into  habit- 
ual ill  health.  The  habit  of  this  class  of  persons  is,  to 
employ  all  the  available  forces  of  their  ^organism 
through  a  particular  channel — the  brain  and  nerves, 
and  of  course  to  excite  nutrition  chiefly  in  a  single  de- 
partment of  their  organism.  This  is  contrary  to  the 
laws  of  the  system,  and  ill  consequences  are  necessa- 
rily ere  long  felt.  This  disproportionate  use  and  un- 
balanced nutrition,  whereby  one  set  of  functions  is 
heightened,  is,  of  course,  to  the  detriment  of  another 
set  of  functions,  which,  becoming  reduced  in  power, 
are,  at  last,  literally  starved  out.  Examples  of  this 
class  of  persons  are  met  with  everywhere,  and  gener- 
ally recognized  at  sight.  It  is  to  be  hoped  the  time 
will  come  when  such  physiological  abuse  will  meet  the 
general  reprehension  it  so  much  deserves. 

The  principles  advocated,  and  the  practical  examples 


22  INTRODUCTORT. 

afforded  in  this  work,  are  adapted  to  obviate  all  such 
unfortunate  results.  Persons  whose  tastes  or  necessities 
lead  them  to  employ  the  nervous  department  of  their 
being  chiefly,  may^  if  they  choose  to  learn  how^  counter- 
act any  disproportionate  nervous  wear,  and  by  attend- 
ing to  its  cultivation,  maintain  their  physical  vigor. 

5.  As  a  necessary  element  in  the  education  of  the 
young,  2)1iysical  culture  should  hold  a  place  co-ordi- 
nate with  that  of  the  intellect — 'it  should  be  a  part  of 
all  academic  training.  For  the  want  of  this  culture, 
educational  means  and  appliances  too  often  defeat  their 
own  2)urposes ;  for  the  due  co-ordination  of  the  powers 
of  the  body,  under  the  order  of  civilizational  develop- 
ment, can  not  with  safety  be  left  to  chance.  If  we  are 
to  judge  of  the  utility  of  institutions  of  learning  by 
many  of  the  specimens  of  manhood  which  they  turn 
out,  our  decisions  respecting  them  can  not  be  unquali- 
fiedly favorable.  Sadly  true  will  this  appear  when  we 
come  to  set  against  the  fulfillment  of  the  highest  hopes 
of  parent,  teacher,  and  friend,  in  regard  to  intellectual 
advantages,  the  destruction  of  the  power  to  use  them. 
"With  physical  health  broken  down,  and  stamina  de- 
stroyed, we  are  led  to  inquire  if  the  advantages  are 
not  quite  counterbalanced.  "We  are  at  least  justified 
in  making  the  inference,  that  the  irrocesses  tending  to 
such  results  are  radicaUy  defective.  The  hardy  team- 
ster or  plowman,  with  few  intellectual  resources,  has, 
with  nothing  to  boast  of,  in  fact,  besides  an  excellent 
physique,  in  the  comparison,  plainly  the  best  of  it;  for 
though  the  college  youth  has  satisfied  the  ambirion  of 
his  friends  in  the  matter  of  intellectual  culture,  his 
success  j^roves  of  little  avail  as  a  source  of  rational 
enjoyment,  or  as  contributing  to  the  world's  advance- 


INTRODUCTORY.  23 

ment ;  since  he  lias  at  the  same  time  acquired  a  fear- 
ful drawback  in  the  form  of  the  life-lease  of  a  narrow 
chesf,  shrunken  and  flabby  muscles,  and  a  general  dys- 
peptic or  consumptive  habit.  While  learning  was 
being  put  into  him,  his  natural  i^luck  was  driven  out 
of  him — an  exchange  of  very  questionable  advantage. 

With  females,  the  case  is  even  worse.  The  girl  is 
sacrificed  to  society's  conventionalisms,  senseless  and 
even  vicious  though  they  may  be ;  while  the  boy  may 
rudely  thrust  these  aside.  Many  of  the  world's  lead- 
ers have  acquired  the  power  to  be  such,  by  shocking 
their  friends  in  their  boyhood.  But,  her  parents  or 
teachers  knowing  nothing  nor  caring  for  vital  laws,  the 
girl  is  restrained  in  the  opportunities  for  bodily  activity 
that  nature  would  seek ;  and  by  the  time  that  her  edu- 
cation is  ''finished,"  she  is  rendered,  physically, 
thoroughly  useless,  both  from  want  of  powder  and  of 
disposition  to  be  otherwise.  Regardless  of  the  neces- 
sary physical  conditions,  her  intellectual  powers  can 
not  be  sustained ;  and,  in  too  many  instances,  she  is  ren- 
dered incapable  of  reaching  or  appreciating  the  higher 
ends  of  life,  and  becomes  satisfied  with  a  merely  senso- 
rial existence. 

We  may  conclude,  then,  that  the  prevalent  amount 
of  disease  among  females  is  not  a  sacred  birthright  de- 
rived from  the  providential  constitution  of  things,  but 
that  it  is  acquired^  and  follows  as  the  necessary  conse- 
quence of  the  inharmonious  action  of  the  organism, 
imposed  by  the  customs  of  society  and  the  neglect  of 
bodily  cultm-e.  It  is  thus  that  the  chlorosis,  the  ner- 
vousness, the  dyspepsia,  the  deformity  of  spine  and 
chest,  the  loss  of  the  attractions  that  should  belong  to 
the  sex,  and  divers  other  afSictions,  so  common  with 
females,  are  fully  accounted  for. 


24  mTEODUCTOKY. 

It  may  be  said  that  physical  training,  when  subjected 
to  rules,  is  unnatural,  and  that  this  matter  is  better 
left  to  the  spontaneous  suggestions  of  nature. 

I  would  reply  to  this,  that  if  so,  all  education,  any 
training,  is  equally  "  unnatural."  The  object  of  all  true 
culture  is  to  aid  the  designs  of  nature ;  and  our  plans 
must  be  carried  out  conformably  to  her  laws,  in  order 
that  we  may  attain  satisfactory  results.  We  are  pur- 
posely so  constituted  as  to  be  susceptible  of  improve- 
ment in  every  department  of  our  being ;  and  such  im- 
provement becomes  a  duty  we  owe  ourselves.  Civili- 
zation proceeds  by  steps ;  and  when  any  custom  or 
mode  of  life  exists  that  is  attended  by  unwholesome 
effects,  it  is  an  indication  that  further  knowledge  is  re- 
quired for  their  counteraction ;  for  that  civilization  is 
faulty  which  does  not  prevent  the  evil  results  of  any 
habits  that  cultivated  society  may  impose. 

The  prmGi2Jle  of  cultivating  the  body  along  with  the 
mind,  so  as  by  preserving  the  health  to  render  mental 
culture  available,  is  far  from  being  new.  It  has  been 
often  recognized  and  put  in  practice ;  and  laudable  and 
successful  examples  have  existed  both  in  ancient^  and 
in  modern  times.  But  it  has  been  culpably  overlooked 
or  slighted  by  us,  the  American  people ;  and  for  such 
neglect  we,  as  a  nation,  are  now  receiving  the  castigation 
necessary  to  correct  our  short-comings  in  this  respect. 

6.  It  need  not  be  concealed  that  the  influence  of  the 
principles  of  physical  culture,  such  as  it  is  my  present 


*  The  Greeks  made  the  education  of  their  children  of  boih  sexes  an  affair  of  state 
—it  -was  done  at  the  public  expense.  In  this  way  they  became  the  type  of  the  hu- 
man race  in  its  best  characteristics.  In  form  they  were  all  but  perfect ;  in  courage 
unequaled ;  they  excelled  in  the  arts  and  sciences ;  in  polite  literature,  in  poetry  and 
history,  they  are  still  our  masters.  Their  theory  of  education,  and  the  practical  re- 
sults of  it,  ^vere  better  than  ours  at  this  day.— De.  CHAPiiAS. 


IXTRODUCTORY.  26 

purpose  to  inculcate,  is  to  a  considerable  extent  inimi- 
cal to  the  interests  of  the  current  medical  practice. 
So  far  as  this  influence  is  based  upon  the  timth^  it 
must  inevitably  prevail,  and  to  a  certain  extent  will 
enable  us,  eventually,  to  dispense  with  the  old  style  of 
medication. 

It  must  be  conceded,  upon  a  little  reflection,  that 
current  medical  science  does  not  answer  the  require- 
ments of  the  age.  Its  scope  is  too  narrow — it  does  not 
attempt  to  supply  the  most  pressing  wants  of  a  civilized 
community.  For  the  chief  want  is,  not  some  mighty 
cure-all^  much  less  the  faltering,  unsatisfactory  attempts 
at  curing,  so  exhausting  to  the  limited  vital  resources 
— but  to  be  kept  well.  In  spite  of  the  antiquity  and 
respectability  of  the  medical  art,  the  community  is 
not  restrained  througli  its  influence  from  wasting 
in  the  most  prodigal  manner  its  precious  boon  of 
health. 

The  popularity  of  the  received  medical  practice  de- 
pends on  the  common  belief,  that  there  really  exists  a 
connection,  yet  not  well  understood,  between  the  drug 
and  certain  curative  results.  It  is  plain  that  the  im- 
plied promise  to  cure  thus  furnislied,  so  far  as  credence 
is  given  it,  in  eflTect  lessens  the  fear  of  the  pain,  which 
is  the  penalty  of  physiological  misdeeds  ;  and  thus  the 
barrier  to  the  perpetration  of  such  acts  is  taken  away. 
Such  credence  is  palpably  demoralizing  in  its  influence, 
for  it  not  only  countenances  the  infringement  of  physio- 
logical law,  but  discourages  the  desire  to  understand, 
and  to  practice  according  to  the  dictates  of  a  correct 
physiology. 

It  behooves  us  to  look  more  closely  than  is  the  gene- 
ral habit,  to  the  principles  involved  in  drug-practice. 
Suppose  all  the  expectations  and  hope  held  out  by  the 

2 


26  INTEODUCTOKY. 

administrator  of  this  means  of  cure  to  be  completely 
fulfilled,  would  it  not  discourage  inquiry  in  regard  to 
physiological  relations,  and  really  offer  a  premium  to 
indulgence  and  the  consequent  physiological  crime? 
Does  not  the  assurance  of  delivery  from  danger  anni- 
hilate the  fear  of  it,  and  are  not  men  ready  to  rush  in- 
to danger  in  proportion  to  their  belief  in  speedy  and 
complete  delivery?  To  what  else  are  we  to  refer  the 
general  ignorance  and  misunderstanding  of  the  laws 
of  health,  but  the  indifference  to  such  knowledge, 
which  medicine,  indirectly,  to  be  sure,  bnt  powerfully, 
inculcates  ? 

Let  us  contrast  this  princij^le  with  its  opposite,  viz., 
that  there  is  no  scape-offering  for  physiological  sin,  but 
that  suffering  and  diminished  power  are  its  due,  direct, 
and  inevitable  consequences.  Must  not  this  stimulate 
to  such  inquiry  as  would  lead  to  exact  knowledge, 
rigid  care,  and  correct  practice?  Self-preservation 
and  self-interest,  which  it  is  impossible  to  despise, 
would  tend  directly  to  this  result. 

It  is  apparent  that  the  true  physician  has  a  higher 
duty  resting  upon  him  than  those  who  bear  that  name 
are  accustomed  to  acknowledge,  namely,  that  of  carry- 
ing instruction  to  the  popular  mind  in  regard  to  the 
natural  capabilities  and  requirement-s  of  the  body,  so  as 
to  enable  men  to  preserve  their  powers,  and  to  repel 
the  first  insidious  approaches  of  disease.  There  is 
scarcely  any  discreet  physician  or  well-informed  person 
who  will  not  admit  that  the  department  of  hygiene  that 
is  here  advocated  and  rendered  practical,  is  the  most 
powerful  of  agencies  in  securing  this  desirable  result. 
Upon  the  physician  rests  plainly  a  duty  in  this  matter, 
because  the  duty  confessedly  exists,  and  it  can  fall  to 
no  one  else.     Here  is  opened  a  broader  field  for  his 


INTEODUCTOKY.  27 

labor  than  he  now  enjoys,  and  one  compatible  with  the 
dictates  of  a  noble  and  generous  mind. 

7.  The  importance  of  the  special  hygienic  system  of 
movements^  for  the  recovering  invalid,  for  the  weakly, 
for  those  whose  position  requires  too  little  or  improper 
kinds  of  exercise,  for  youth  of  both  sexes,  and  for  pre- 
venting disease,  must  be  manifest  to  all.  But  that  the 
subject  is  invested  with  an  interest  which  is  strictly 
medical,  in  the  highest  sense  of  that  term,  will  not  be 
so  readily  admitted.  It  is  conceived  by  the  author,  that 
the  importance  of  movements  as  a  curative  resource  is 
hardly  second  to  that  of  any  other  heretofore  brought 
before  the  public. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  the  present  treatise  only  to 
supply  some  hints  toward  a  practice  based  on  the 
phenomena  of  motion  in  the  body.  And  in  order  to 
render  it  useful  for  the  purposes  above  indicated,  it  is 
restricted  to  Avhat  I  have  denominated  single  move- 
ments. This  limitation,  while  it  fits  the  treatise  for  the 
use  of  a  larger  number  of  individuals  in  the  commu- 
nity, renders  it,  at  the  same  time,  imperfect  as  a  medical 
guide^  and  confines  its  applications  to  a  limited  number 
of  diseased  conditions.  In  short,  the  w^ork  aims  to  do 
nothing  more  than  to  introduce  the  idea  of  the  remedial 
application  of  movements,  which,  to  be  complete,  must 
employ  also,  and  perhaps  chiefiy,  the  duplicated  move- 
m^ents^  of  which  there  is  an  account  here  included. 

Movements  have  incontrovertible  remedial  effects, 
and  may  therefore  be  considered  a  legitimate  remedial 
agent.  The  application  of  this  system  has  been 
known  and  practiced  to  a  limited  extent  in  all  ages ; 
and  in  modern  times  it  has  been  much  extended,  and 
has  received   the   appellation  of  the  Movement- Cure. 


28  INTRODUCTORY. 

This  practice  is  not  pretended  in  any  quarter  to  be  a 
universal  panacea,  nor  to  include  all  that  is  valuable 
in  the  present  domain  of  medical  art.  It  is  an  in- 
valuable contribution  to  a  system  of  practice  based  on 
physiology,  which,  to  be  complete,  will  embrace,  by 
separate  and  distinct  methods,  every  avenue  through 
which  the  health  of  the  body  is  influenced,  either  from 
external  or  internal  causes.  The  tendency  of  current 
medical  practice  is  to  narrow  down  medical  means  to 
the  use  of  drugs;  whereas  these  are  but  o?ie  of  the 
many  kinds  of  agents  that  affect  the  health  of  the 
body.  All  the  variations  and  perturbations  of  the 
health  are  a  true  record  of  the  effects  of  the  slighter 
variations  in  the  use  of  the  materials  and  of  the  forces 
that  are  adapted  by  nature  to  functional  employment, 
and  that,  acting  together  in  appropriate  adjustment, 
23roduce  that  condition  which  is  termed  health. 

An  enumeration  of  these  elements  available  to  the 
restoration  as  well  as  to  the  maintenance  of  the  health 
would  include  many  forces  and  agents  that  have  to  do 
mainly  with  man  as  an  animal^  such  as  heat,  cold, 
•food,  drink,  labor,  recreation,  rest,  and  all  the  inter-re- 
lations and  adjustments  of  these,  considered  both  in 
reference  to  their  effect  upon  the  vegetative  life,  and 
the  animal  functions  of  the  body. 

This  system  regards  man  as  a  spiritual  being — recog- 
nizes all  the  various  influences  that  operate  upon  his 
intellectual  and  moral  life  flowing  from  physical 
causes,  and  the  power  of  the  mind  over  the  exercise 
of  functional  acts  of  the  body,  of  every  kind.  The  fact 
that  man  is  subject  to  these  relations,  and  that  they 
directly  modif}^  and  control  his  health,  is  undoubted. 
How  this  control  is  to  be  exercised  as  a  remedial  means 
has  not  yet  been  shown ;    except,  perhaps,  in  such  a 


INTEODUCTORY.  29 

fragmentary  way  as  does  not  admit  of  any  organic 
construction.  The  practice  of  duplicated  movements^ 
wherein  the  mental  powers  of  "both  the  invalid  and 
friend  co-operate  to  the  production  of  certain  effects, 
afibrds  many  new  facts  and  interesting  illustrations  of 
the  control  of  the  mental  and  nervous  states  over  those 
functional  acts  of  the  body  that  constitute  the  health ; 
and  such  as  may  lead  to  higher  results  than  have  yet 
been  conceived — in  building  up,  indeed,  what  may  be 
called  a  system  of  moral  medicine. 

But  the  Movement- Cure,  as  a  specialty  of  medical 
practice,  depends  entirely  on  purely  physiological 
oneans  for  the  accomplishment  of  its  purposes.  It  may 
be  considered  as  a  means  of  enabling  the  natural  ten- 
dencies of  the  system  toward  health  to  act  more  power- 
fully and  effectually.  It  points  out  the  means  of  di- 
recting tlie  corporeal  energies  into  just  those  channels 
in  which  they  are  most  needed,  in  order  to  perfect  the 
balance  of  the  physiological  processes.  It  enables  the 
system  to  develop  and  maintain  its  forces  in  greater 
amount,  because  it  employs  them  naturally  and  w^ith-  • 
out  undue  waste.  And  because  the  Movement-Cure 
thus  limits  itself  to  a  realm  of  facts  concerning  which 
there  is  no  question,  it  has  a  right  to  expect  the  ap- 
proval of  physicians  of  all  the  different  schools,  even 
of  those  advocating  opposing  theories.  It  requires  as- 
sent only  to  the  plainest  and  most  obvious  facts  and  in- 
ferences of  physiology.  In  the  Movement-Cure,  all 
physicians  meet  on  common  ground  and  blend  their 
differences.  This  proves,  we  hold,  that  the  practice  is 
founded  in  common  sense^  as  well  as  upon  the  rigorous 
deductions  of  science  and  experience ;  and  that  the 
rapid  dissemination  of  its  principles  and  practice  may 
be  prophesied  with  a  degree  of  certainty. 


30  HISTORICAL   SKETCH   OF 


HISTORICAL    SKETCH  OF  THE  PRACTICE   OF  MOVE- 
MENTS. 

The  desire  of  men  to  become  more  complete, 
comely,  vigoroiis,  and  healthy — to  approach  as  nearly 
as  possible  to  the  ideal  man — has  existed  in  all  ages, 
and  has  impelled  them  to  make  special  efforts  to 
secure  these  ends.  Tlie  suggestion  of  the  necessary 
means  would  seem  to  arise  from  an  instinct  of  our 
nature ;  and  these  evidently  consist  in  simply  calling 
into  action  the  power  v:hose  improveinent  we  desire — or 
in  giving  direction  to  the  capabilities  of  which  we  are 
in  conscious  possession.  Such  a  process  is  based 
on  anatomy  and  physiology,  and  is  limited  by  these 
sciences  ;  and  it  deals  with  the  very  instruments  and 
laws  of  vitality. 

In  recent  times,  the  term  "  movements"  has  been 
employed  to  designate  the  processes  by  which  this 
control  of  the  bodily  powers  is  secured.  Theoretically, 
then,  movements  are  capable  of  being  reduced  to  an  art, 
hygienic  and  remedial,  as  perfect  as  the  principles  upon 
which  the  natural  operations  of  the  body  are  based  ; 
and  though,  as  a  training  or  healing  art,  it  may  always 
have  been  successfully  practiced,  yet  that  success  be- 
comes necessarily  more  perfect,  as  less  empirical,  when 
it  employs  the  facts  and  principles  developed  by  mod- 
ern research  in  physiology. 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  3cl 

In  glancing  at  tlieliistorj  oiinovements^  tlie  reader  will 
wonder  loliy  an  art  so  easily  practiced,  the  elements  of, 
and  the  demand  for,  which  exist  in  the  constitution  of 
every  one,  while  its  principles  are  so  fnndaniental  and 
leave  so  little  room  for  improvement,  should  not  in 
modern  times  have  come  more  generally  into  popular 
favor.  The  answer  to  this  inquiry  will  be  found  in  the 
fact  of  the  maze  of  obscurity  that  has  prevailed  in  the 
general  mind  in  regard  to  the  true  curative  value  of 
drugs.  But  while  all  possible  things  have  been  both 
asserted  and  denied  in  regard  to  drugs,  the  value  of 
movements  has  never  heen  denied  or  questioned^  but 
only  at  times  neglected^  in  the  general  interest  with 
which  the  popular  mind  has  invested  the  other  ques- 
tions. In  the  last  few  centuries,  chemistry  has  at  each 
of  the  successive  epochs  of  its  development,  furnished 
medicine  w^ith  the  means  of  toying  with  the  credulity, 
the  hopes  and  fears  of  the  suffering  public  ;  and  it 
requires  all  of  the  present  amount  of  knowledge,  and 
more  time  than  has  elapsed,  to  enable  the  scientific, 
supported  by  the  popular  mind,  to  turn  the  influence 
of  the  full-fledged  science  into  its  pi'oper  channels,  to 
consummate  a  revolution  that  may  be  delayed,  but 
must  eventually  be  realized. 

The  employment  of  movements  for  hygienic  and 
medical  purposes  is  by  no  means  a  new  thing,  but  is, 
on  the  contrary,  older  than  any  other  means  j^roposed 
for  the  same  purpose.  Movements  have  been  employ- 
ed in  every  age,  and  if  not  suggested  by  the  natural 
instincts  of  the  rude  mind,  their  imperfect  use  is  very 
soon  suggested  by  experience.  Among  Indian  and 
African  tribes,  various  manipulations,  flagellations,  etc., 
have  been  practiced,  generally  connected  with  super- 
stitious rites,  incantations,  prayers,  etc.,  to  which  more 


32  HISTORICAL    SKETCH   OF 

enlightened  people  attribute  tlie  least  portion  of  tlie 
benefit  that  is  obtained.  It  is  well  known  that  certain 
movements  produce  vertigo,  nausea,  palpitations  of  the 
heart,  and  various  other  effects  corresponding  to  actions 
that  are  brought  about  by  chemical  means.  And  so  a 
primitive  people,  even,  would  make  a  beginning  that 
would  soon  become  extended  with  their  extending 
experience,  till  checked  by  their  ignorance  of  the  gen- 
eral scientific  principles  underlying  what  they  rudely 
practice. 

Such  primitive  people,  who  know  nothing  of  the 
brain  wear,  the  confinement,  and  the  defective  exercise 
connected  with  the  in-door  and  sedentary  occupations 
of  civilized  society,  have  no  need  of  other  physical 
training  than  results  from  the  chase  and  the  dance^ 
to  which  they  are  always  devoted.  But  as  civilization  is 
developed,  which  always  implies  training,  the  physical 
powers  must  also  be  trained  to  maintain  the  general 
harmony,  and  if  not  by  accident,  then  by  design ;  or 
the  constitution  suff'ers  in  the  way  we  see  it  so  apt  to 
do  in  old  and  enfeebled  nations. 

Thus  it  happens  that  there  is  developed  from  causes 
naturally  and  inevitably  operating,  a  system  of  regu- 
lating the  health,  and  overcoming  diseases  by  the  em~ 
ployment  of  movements.  But  this  system  has,  with 
but  few  exceptions,  been  practiced  in  an  incomplete 
manner,  owing  to  the  imperfect  development  of  chem- 
ical and  physiological  science,  upon  wdiich  such  a  prac- 
tice is  necessarily  founded. 

Move:ments  among  the  Chinese.  —  The  traditional 
history  of  this  people  affords  us  many  instructive  exam- 
ples of  the  employment  of  various  exercises  -to  preserve 
and  restore  the  health.     This  history  informs  us  that  the 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  83 

iinmidity  of  tlie  atmosphere  and  the  stagnant  waters 
were  considered  a  prolific  sonrce  of  epidemic  and  en- 
demic diseases,  and  that  the  efficient  means  of  prevent- 
ing these  consisted  in  regular  exercises  of  the  body, 
by  a  kind  oi  gymnastic  dance.  These  movements  tend 
to  produce  action  from  the  center  to  the  circumfer- 
ence of  the  body,  or  centrifugal  —  an  action  very 
appropriate  for  the  renewal  of  the  functions  of  the 
liver,  and  to  give  tone  and  vigor  to  the  whole  economy. 
This  matter  was  considered  so  invportant  as  to  he  under 
governmental  regidation. 

The  Cliinese  writers  support  this  practice  with  the 
tradition  that  the  life  of  man  depends  on  a  union  of 
earth  and  heaven,  together  with  the  use  that  the  crea- 
ture makes  of  these.  A  subtile  material,  they  think, 
circulates  in  the  body  ;  if  then  the  body  is  not  in 
action,  the  material  accumulates ;  and,  according 
to  their  theory,  all  diseases  come  of  such  obstruc- 
tion. 

The  devotion  of  the  Chinese  to  bodily  exercises 
suggested  the  fundamental  principle,  which  in  China 
has  always  been  considered  the  basis  of  progress  and 
moral  development,  viz.,  that  of  self-development. 

It  appears  that  the  Chinese  have  long  practiced  an 
art  of  medical  movements,  which  they  denominate  the 
Cong  Fou.  The  meaning  of  this  term  is,  simply,  the 
art  of  exercising  the  hody.  and  its  application  to  the 
treatment  of  disease.  Says  P.  Amiot,  a  missionary, 
"  Yolnmes  might  be  written  of  the  traditions,  stories, 
and  extravagant  virtues  of  the  Cong  Fou^  which  are 
implicitly  believed ;  even  the  majesty  of  the  throne  not 
exempting  many  emperors  from  a  stupid  credulity. 
Notwithstanding  the  priestly  superstitions  connected 
with  it  (for  the  priests  persuade  the  people  that  it  is  a 

2*  ■ 


34  HISTOKICxU.    SKETCH    OF 

true  exercise  of  religion),  it  is  really  a  very  ancient  prac- 
tice of  medicine,  founded  on  principles,  and  potent  in 
many  diseases." 

From  the  statements  of  the  learned  missionary  and 
others  are  deduced  these  conclusions  : 

1st.  That  this  art  is  founded  on  a  genuine  experience 
and  original  scientific  principles,  and  may  be  freed  from 
the  superstitions  and  charlatanry  that  at  the  present  day 
surround  it — that  it  dates  back  to  Hoang-Fi,  2698  years 
before  the  Christian  Era. 

2d.  It  consists  of  three  essential  particulars,  to  wit : 

a.  Various  positions  of  the  body. 

h.  Rules  for  varying  these  attitudes. 

c.  During  these  exercises  and  attitudes,  a  manage- 
ment of  the  respiration  according  to  certain  rules  of 
inspiration  and  expiration. 

3d.  This  method  has  its  own  proper  technical  lan- 
guage. 

ttth.  It  does  really  effect  the  cure  and  relief  of  many 
diseases. 

5th.  The  Chinese  of  every  ranh  eagerly  resort  to  this 
remedy  when  every  other  means  of  cure  has  heen  tried 
in  vain. 

Thus  it  is  affirmed  that  the  Cong  Fou  has  really  all 
the  characters  and  pretensions  of  an  ancient  scientific 
mode  of  medical  practice. 

"  The  priests  (who  are  the  physicians)  enter  into  an 
extensive  detail  of  the  positions  of  the  body  in  all  their 
shades  of  variation.  These  are  so  numerous,  that  we 
do  not  fear  to  say  that  all  the  postures  and  attitudes 
of  comedians,  dancers,  tumblers,  and  artistic  figures 
are  but  a  small  portion  of  those  which  have  been  in- 
troduced into  this  practice.  The  different  modes  of 
stretching^  folding^  raising^  falling^  lending  and  ex- 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  36 

tending^  sejyarating  and  approaching^  the  arms  and 
legs,  in  the  standing,  sitting,  and  lying  positions,  form 
a  prodigious  variety." 

M.  Amiot  proceeds,  at  considerable  length,  to  ex- 
plain the  methods  and  principles  of  this  Chinese  sys- 
tem of  medical  movements,  and  the  diseases  and  symp- 
toms for  which  it  is  applicable ;  and  from  this  account 
the  following  is  extracted  : 

"  Tlie  Cong  Fou  consists  in  certain  positions  in 
which  the  body  is  placed  a  certain  length  of  time,  in 
which  the  patient  breathes  in  j^ecnliar  methods. 
These  methods  must  be  chosen  and  combined  accord- 
ing to  the  disease  that  is  treated. 

"The  morning  is  the  proper  time  for  the  treatment; 
after  the  night's  repose  tlie  circulation  is  more  equable, 
tlie  secretions  more  balanced  and  uniform.  Persons 
pletlioric  or  charged  with  humors  are  always  profited 
by  fasting  in  the  evening ;  and  this  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary in  certain  diseases. 

"In  practicing  the  movements,  the  body  is  either  com- 
pletely or  partially  clothed,  and  has  weights  upon  the 
head  and  shoulders,  according  to  the  complaint ;  and 
in  the  respiration,  the  mouth  should  be  half  full  of 
saliva  or  water.  ^ 

"The  physical  and  physiological  principles  concerned  ' 
seem  to  be  ftiese  : 

"  1.  Tlie  mechansim  of  the  body  being  entirely  hy- 
draulic, with  a  free  circulation  of  the  fluids,  health  con- 
sists only  with  the  proper  equipoise  of  these  fluids  in 
their  reciprocal  relations  ;  and  to  restore  health,  this 
equilibrum  must  be  established. 

"  2.  As  the  air  constantly  enters  into  the  blood  and 
vital  fluids  through  the  lungs,  tempers  and  purifies  it 
and  preserves  its  fluidity,  these  last  qualities  can  only 


36  HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF 

be  maintained  through  respiration,  and  of  course  are 
restored  by  the  same  instrumentality. 

"  From  these  two  principles  thej  draw  conclusions 
after  their  own  fashion,  which  we  will  give  for  what 
they  are  w^orth. 

"1.  As  the  circulation  of  the  fluids  of  the  body  has 
to  overcome  the  two  great  obstacles  of  weight  and  fric- 
tion, all  that  tends  to  diminish  these,  aids  to  establish 
the  circulation  which  is  disturbed. 

"  2.  As  the  motion  and  impetus  of  the  air  increases 
the  fluidity  of  licpiids,  and  thus  facilitates  their  move- 
ments, therefore  all  that  tends  to  increase  or  diminish 
the  force  of  the  air  in  the  body  must  increase  or  re- 
tard the  circulation. 

"These  principles  and  deductions  being  understood, 
the  disciples  of  the  Cong  Fou  enter  into  very  lengthy 
details  in  order  to  show  the  sympathetic  correspond- 
ence of  the  difierent  parts  of  the  human  body,  the 
action  and  reaction  of  the  great  organs  of  the  cir- 
culation, of  the  secretion,  and  of  the  digestion  of 
food. 

'^Theory. — ^The  Chinese  physicians  make  use  of 
reasoning  like  the  following,  after  the  principles  and 
consequences  above  expressed.  There  are  two  essen- 
tial parts  of  the  Cong  Fou — the  flrst  emb^ces  the  po- 
sitions and  attitudes  that  are  given  to  the  body,  the 
second  the  manner  in  which  the  respiration  is  accel- 
erated, retarded,  or  modified. 

*^  1.  If  we  regard  the  circulation  of  the  blood  and 
fluids  as  being  opposed  by  their  gravity  or  their  fric- 
tion, which  tends  to  retard  the  flow,  it  is  evident  that 
the  degree  in  which  the  body  is  straight  or  bent,  lying 
or  raised,  the  feet  and  hands  stretched  or  folded,  raised, 
lowered,  or  bent,  ought,  in  the  hydraulic  mechanism,  to 


THE    PKACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  37 

effect  a  physical  change,  either  to  retard  or  to  facilitate 
the  circulation. 

"  The  horizontal  position  being  that  which  diminishes 
the  weight  most,  is  therefore  most  favorable  to  the 
circulation;  while  the  erect  position,  on  the  contrary, 
augments  the  weight  to  its  utmost,  and  must,  neces- 
sarily, render  the  circulation  most  difficult ;  for  the  same 
reason,  the  position,  according  as  the  arms,  the  feet,  or 
the  head  are  raised,  inclined,  bent,  etc.,  ought  to  af- 
fect the  circulation  more  or  less. 

"  This  is  not  all ;  that  which  hinders  the  circulation 
in  one  part,  gives  more  force  in  the  direction  in  which 
the  obstacle  does  not  exist;  and  hence  the  fluids  are 
made  to  overcome  the  engorgements  that  obBtruct  its 
passage. 

"  Another  fact  is  this,  that  when  the  circulation  has 
been  hindered  in  a  part,  the  greater  is  the  force  and 
impetuosity  of  the  current  when  the  obstacle  is  re- 
moved. 

"  It  follows  that  the  different  postures  of  the  Cong 
Fou^  well  directed,  ought  to  produce  a  salutary  relief 
in  affections  that  arise  from  an  embarrassed,  retarded, 
or  interrupted  circulation.  Now  what  are  the  affec- 
tions that  have  other  causes  ?  Except  fractures,  bruises, 
etc.,  it  is  difficult  to  find  other  than  these  causes  to  de- 
range the  organization  of  the  human  body. 

"  2.  It  is  certain  that  the  heart  is  the  grand  power 
concerned  in  the  circulation,  and  the  force  it  exhibits 
in  producing  and  maintaining  it  is  one  of  the  wonders 
of  the  universe. 

"  It  is  also  certain  that  there  is  an  obvious  connec- 
tion, continually  existing,  between  tlie  movements  of 
the  heart,  in  filling  and  emptying  itself  of  blood,  and 
the  movements   of  dilatation   and  contraction  of  the 


38  HISTOPJCAL    SKETCH    OF 

lungs,  which  fill  and  empty  themselves  of  air  by  in- 
spiration  and  expiration.  Their  connection  is  so  inti- 
mate, that  the  beats  of  the  heart  increase  and  diminish 
directly  in  proportion  to  the  increasing  and  retarding  of 
respiration. 

"Xow,  if  more  air  is  inspired  than  is  expired,  or  the 
contrary,  its  volume  should  increase  or  diminish  the 
total  mass  of  the  fluids  of  the  body,  and  recruit  or  cur- 
tail more  or  less  the  blood  of  the  lungs ;  if  the  respira- 
tion is  hastened  or  retarded,  the  result  should  be  a 
quickening  or  retarding  of  the  heart's  action,  so  that 
both  the  mode  of  the  circulation  in  the  different  parts 
of  the  body  and  the  volume  of  the  fluids  of  the  body 
are  controlled  by  the  respiration,"  etc."^ 

It  would  appear  from  the  above  extract,  that  the 
Chinese  were  acquainted  at  an  early  day  with  the  cir- 
culation of  the  Uood^  and  tolerably  versed  in  the 
mechanism  of  the  body.  And  although,  in  the  light 
of  modern  science,  their  reasoning  in  medical  matters 
appears  to  a  degree  fallacious,  one  can  not  but  be  per- 
suaded that  their  practice  of  the  movements  must  have 
been  salutary  and  efficient;  and  that  this  primitive 
practice,  suggested  by  the  most  obvious  facts  pertaining 
to  the  constitution,  when  imj)roved  upon  and  modified 
by  modern  science,  would  be  infinitely  more  salutary 
and  efiicient.  The  eftect  of  increased  respiration  would 
now  be  explained  by  the  well-known  oxydizing  powei- 
of  the  air  upon  the  blood,  and  its  consequent  elimina- 
tory  eftect  upon  the  system  oppressed  with  incom- 
pletely oxydized  matters. 

The  patrons  and  priests  of  the  Cong  Fou^  let  it  be 
said  to  their  credit,  seem  to  have  had  in  mind  the 
higher  ends  of  existence — the  good  of  the  soul. 

*  CiXEsiOLOGiE  :  on.  Science  du  3fouvement.    Par  N.  Dally. 


THE    I'KACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  39 

Tliey  believed  the  true  mode  of  ministering  to  it  to 
be  primarily  through  the  bod3\  P.  Amiot  says  that 
the  Chinese  "regarded  the  Cong  Fou  as  a  true  exercise 
of  religion,  which,  by  curing  the  body  of  its  infirmities, 
liberates  the  soul  from  the  servitude  of  the  senses,  and 
gives  it  power  of  accomplishing  its  wishes  on  earth, 
and  of  freely  elevating  itself  to  the  pjerfection  and 
perpetuity  of  its  spiritual  nature  in  the  Tao^  the  realm 
of  the  great  creative  Power." 

Movements  in  India.^ — Intermingled  with  the  super- 
stitious religious  practices  of  the  ancient  Indians  there' 
were  also  many  bodily  exercises,  bearing  a  great  re- 
semblance to  those  of  the  Chinese.  The  most  promi- 
nent among  them  was  the  retention  of  the  air  in 
respiration.  They  insisted  that  air  produced  the  same 
effect  in  the  body  that  fire  produces  upon  metals  ex- 
posed to  its  infiuence,  namely,  to  imrify  it.  The  Greek 
physicians  entertained  similar  ideas,  and  had  rules  for 
the  application  of  a  similar  practice.  The  retention 
of  the  air,  said  they,  will  increase  the  heat  of  the  in- 
ternal parts,  dilate  the  capacity  of  the  chest,  strengthen 
the  organs  of  respiration,  clear  the  chest  of  its  impuri- 
ties, enlarge  the  pores,  attenuate  the  skin,  and  drive 
out  moisture  through  that  membrane. 

It  was  from  these  well-known  powers  of  this  move- 
ment, that  it  was  employed  to  purify  the  mouth,  throat, 
stomach,  chest,  intestines,  and  to  remedy  yawning, 
hiccough,  laryngitis,  cough,  asthma,  gastritis,  and  en- 
teritis ;  while  in  the  intervals  of  movements,  and  after 
each  series  of  exercises,  friction  w^as  employed  as  an 
auxiliary  means. 

A  Greek  historian  who  was  on  a  mission  to  India,  in 
the  third  century  before  our  era,  relates  that  "among 


40  HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF 

the  Brahmins  there  is  an  order  of  physicians  who  rely 
chiefly  upon  diet  and  regimen,  together  with  external 
processes,  having  great  distrust  of  any  more  powerful 
means.  For  this  reason  it  was  said  that  they  called 
charms  to  their  aid.  Probably  these  external  pro- 
cesses were  a  system  of  therapeutic  movements.  An 
order  of  Brahminites  exists  at  present  whose  chief 
medical  recourse  is  hygienic  shampooing. 

The  English  who  reside  in  India  frequently  give  ac- 
counts of  the  shampooing  and  friction,  which  they  find 
a  great  source  of  delight  as  well  as  of  health.  The 
person  receiving  the  operation  is  extended  on  a  seat, 
while  the  operator  manipulates  his  members,  as  he 
would  knead  dough  for  bread.  He  then  strikes  him 
lightly  with  the  side  of  the  hand,  applies  perfume  and 
friction,  and  terminates  by  cracking  the  joints  of  the 
fingers,  toes,  and  neck.  After  this  operation,  the  sub- 
ject experiences  a  sensation  of  ineffable  happiness  and 
energy.  It  is  said  that  the  Indian  ladies  seldom  pass 
a  day  without  being  thus  shampooed  by  their  slaves. 

In  India,  \\\q  best  qualified  practitioners  belong  to 
Brahminic  families,  with  whom  the  art  of  treating  dis- 
ease was  liereditary  ;  and  there  is  every  indication  that 
the  sacerdotal  orders,  who  were  faithful  observers  of 
primitive  traditions,  secretly  possessed  some  Yedic 
treatise  upon  the  art,  of  which  the  preceding  is  the 
substance  of  fragments  that  have  come  down  to  us. 

Thus  it  is  seen,  that  the  oldest  nations  of  the  world 
fully  believed  in  and  practiced  various  external  me- 
chanical operations  upon  the  body,  both  as  a  luxury, 
and  to  relieve  them  of  their,  chronic  ailments.  And 
whatever  superstition  of  a  religious  nature  was  con- 
nected with  these  operations,  by  these  or  other  and 
ruder  peo^^le,  no  one  is  jprepared  to  assert  that  they 


THE  PRACTICE  OF  MOVEMENTS.  41 

were  inefficacious.  All  that  was  required  was  a  larger 
amount  of  the  science  of  physiology  with  whicli  to 
direct  and  extend  the  application,  to  render  tliis  re- 
source legitimate  and  complete. 

MoVEMEIs^TS     AMONG    THE    GeEEIvS     AND     RoMANS. In 

the  remains  of  statuary  that  have  descended  to  us,  we 
have  ample  demonstration  of  the  a]3preciation  the 
ancient  Greeks  had  of  perfectly  developed  and  beautiful 
physical  forms.  These  representations  in  marble  are 
enduring  monuments  of  the  perfection  of  the  phys- 
ical education  of  that  people.  Even  without  these 
evidences,  we  feel  from  the  character  of  their  literature 
that  such  must  have  been  the  case ;  for  it  is  impossible 
to  connect  the  idea  of  physical  weakness  and  deformity 
with  such  sound  philosophical  and  poetical  genius  as 
they  possessed.  At  the  very  mention  of  Greek^  there 
arises  in  the  imagination  of  the  student  a  robust  and 
beautiful  human  form,  as  near  to  perfection  as  it  is 
possible  for  any  child  of  Adam  to  aj)proach. 

The  Gymnasium  was,  with  the  Greeks,  the  place  for 
both  physical  and  intellectual  culture.  The  training 
of  body  and  mind  went  hand  in  hand.  It  was  in  the 
gymnasium  that  persons  of  all  ages  daily  congregated; 
and  while  some  were  reciting  poetry  or  delivering  lec- 
tures on  philosophy,  others  were  performing,  or  criti- 
cising the  performance  of,  various  exercises  adapted  to 
develop  all  their  physical  parts  and  powers,  or  to  qual- 
ify them  especially  for  arms.  Probably  no  Greek  town 
of  any  importance  was  destitute  of  these  schools  of 
exercise. 

The  education  commenced  at  the  seventh  year,  and 
consisted  of  music,  grammar,  and  physical  training. 
Some  authors  assert  that  as  much  time  was  employed 


42  HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF 

in  the  culture  of  tlie  body,  as  in  that  of  tlie  mind.  In 
Sparta,  the  idea  of  pliysical  culture  overtopped  eveiy 
other,  and  the  excess  to  whicli  it  was  carried  excluded 
that  attention  to  letters  which  obtained  at  Athens  and 
the  other  Grecian  states. 

Even  the  women  were  subjected  to  treatment  simi- 
lar to  that  which  men  received.  For,  said  the  law- 
givers, "  female  slaves  are  good  enough  to  stay  at 
home  and  spin ;  but  who  can  expect  a  splendid  off- 
spring, the  appropriate  gift  of  a  free  Sj^artaii  woman 
to  her  country,  from  mothers  brought  up  in  such  occu- 
pations '?" 

The  Olympic  games  were  a  perversion  of  the  ob- 
jects of  exercise,  and  produced  efiects  in  opposition 
to  those  contemplated  by  rational  movements ;  for  they 
stimulated  to  excess  single  faculties  for  the  purpose 
of  winning  a  prize,  instead  of  producing  general  excel- 
lence and  power.  Xeither  true  liealth  nor  power  are 
possessed  by  athletes,  no  matter  Avhat  astonishing  feats 
tliey  may  be  able  to  perform. 

The  Ilomans  were  less  appreciative  in  regard  to 
movements  as  an  educational  or  as  a  curative  means. 
The  genius  of  that  people  was  eminently  warlike,  and 
they  slighted  everything  that  did  not  look  directly  to 
the  promotion  of  physical  force  for  loarlike  ^urjposes. 
No  soldiers  were  better  developed  by  educational  drill 
than  the  Eoman,  both  for  feats  of  arms  and  for  en- 
durance. 

The  Eomans  had  gymnasiums  also ;  but  these  were 
perverted,  especially  in  the  later  days  of  the  empire, 
to  exhibitions  of  the  most  brutal  and  degrading  soi-t, 
such  as  Duo-ilistic  shows,  and  encounters  with  wild  and 
ferocious  animals. 

To   the    preceding    accounts  we   may  add   the  fol- 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  43 

lowing  extract,  relating  to  ancient  "movements," 
mainly  derived  from  Oribasius,  a  Greek  physician  of 
the  fonrth  century. 

"  By  the  term  exercise  the  ancients  understood  phys- 
iological movements  pursued  according  to  determined 
rules.  Tiiey  prepared  for  exercise  by  special  frictions. 
They  divided  movements  according  to  their  effects, 
into  three  kinds : 

"  1st.  Movements  which  proceed  from  within,  having 
their  orighi  in  the  depths  of  the  body,  and  depending 
on  the  will  of  those  that  produce  them  ;  these  are  ac- 
tive movements. 

"  Of  these  there  are  several  kinds.  One  requires  the 
exertion  of  force,  as  iising  the  spade,  driving  four 
horses  at  once,  raising  a  weight  and  holding  it  at  arm's 
length,  walking  up  a  steep  ascent,  climbing  a  rope, 
clinching  the  fists  close,  stretching  the  arms,  and  main- 
taining them  in  this  position  for  a  long  time,  resisting 
the  efforts  of  one  trying  to  lower  the  extended  arms. 

"  There  was  also  used  in  the  jjalestrcc  (part  of  the 
gymnasium)  many  other  movements  that  required  the 
exertion  of  power,  but  all  were  directed  by  the  pedo- 
tribe^  or  director  of  movements,  a  23erson  as  different 
from  the  gymnast  as  a  cook  is  from  a  physician. 

'*  Other  movements  were  rapid,  but  neither  intense 
nor  violent;  as  the  mock  combat,  gesticulation,  the 
play  with  the  corycos  and  the  little  ball ;  running  in  a 
circle  that  constantly  diminished  till  a  point  was 
reached  ;  walking  upon  the  points  of  the  toes,  raising 
the  arms  and  causing  them  to  move  very  rapidly, 
alternately  forward  and  backward.  Other  rapid 
movements  not  requiring  exertion,  performed  in  the 
2xdestra^  consisted  in  rolling^  either  together  or 
alone. 


44  HISTORICAL    SKETCH   OF 

"  A  third  kind  are  violent  movements,  consisting  of 
sncli  exercises  as  nnite  force  with  rapidity  of  execu- 
tion. 

"  The  following  may  be  classed  as  violent :  nsing  the 
spade,  the  lance,  leaping  constantly  without  resting, 
throwing  heavy  projectiles,  or  working  rapidly  in 
heavy  armor. 

"  2d.  Movements  that  proceed  from  exterior  causes, 
or  ^;>«.55'«'y^.  Among  these,  in  general,  are  sailing,  the 
motion  of  horse  and  carriage  riding,  movement  in  beds 
susj)ended,  or  with  foot  supports  ;  in  the  cradle  or  their 
nurse's  arms,  for  infants. 

"  Friction  may  also  be  classed  among  exercises  that 
come  from  exterior  sources.  Pressures  and  pinchings 
also  belong  to  the  same  class.  Many  other  movements 
are  included  in  the  kneadings  that  the  ancients  em- 
ployed so  frequently. 

"  3d.  Mixed  moveonents^  or  those  which  proceed  partly 
from  exterior  and  partly  from  interior  sources.  Hiding 
is  given  as  an  example,  for  while  one  is  shaken  by  the 
vehicle,  he  must  also  maintain  his  posture  and  his 
form  erect  by  his  own  exertions. 

"  They  mention  also  other  kinds  of  movements,  such 
as  speaking,  hallooing,  breathing,  retention  of  breath, 
dancing,  slow  walking  with  stretching  the  legs,  upon 
the  feet,  toes,  or  heels,  up  or  down  an  artificial  hill,  in 
the  sand  or  soft  earth,  the  play  of  grace-hoops,  swim- 
ming, jumping,  etc.  All  these  are  of  the  active 
kind. 

"  ^Yrestling,  in  which  there  is  established  an  action 
and  reaction  between  two  persons,  appertains  to  mixed 
movements.  There  should  be  reckoned  in  this  class 
friction,  with  retention  of  the  breath  to  stretch  the 
muscles  of  the  chest,  and  to  relax  those  of  the  abdo- 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  45 

men,  or  conversely,  and  the  effect  of  the  applica- 
tion of  a  ligatnre,  which  causes  the  part  to  become  dis- 
tended, or  when  the  same  effect  is  produced  by  certain 
movements. 

"  It  is  evident  that  these  movements  are  of  a  mixed 
kind,  both  concentric  and  eccentric;  and  that  the 
ancients,  to  have  made  applications  so  ingenious  to 
each  particular  organ  of  the  body,  as  well  as  to  the 
entire  organism,  must  have  had  a  knowledge  of  the 
different  physiological  effects  of  movements. 

"  "We  are  reminded  every  day,  in  our  more  intelligent 
applications  of  these  principles,  of  our  indebtedness  to 
the  sagacity  and  patient  efforts  of  the  ancients. 

"  Each  of  these  kinds  and  species  of  movements,  we 
see,  had  its  distinct  rules  and  its  supposed  physiological 
effects.  These  effects  were  modified  according  to  posi- 
tion of  the  body,  upright  sitting,  lying,  or  as  bent 
in  different  ways,  forward,  backward,  or  to  either  side. 
TJiey  were  sometimes  slow,  sometimes  quick,  sometimes 
moderate,  but  ahoays  regular.  The  movements  being 
general  or  partial,  precise  in  their  quantity,  quality, 
duration,  rhythm,  etc.,  and  the  director  of  the  ancient 
exercises  being  a  skillful  physician,  knew  how  to 
adapt  them  to  the  age,  constitution,  or  disease  of  the 
individual." 

In  modern  times,  the  literature  pertaining  to  the 
science  of  movements  in  its  various  branches  has  been 
very  abundant.  But  most  of  it  has  either  related  to 
special  topics,  or  its  applicability  in  special  cases  and 
forms  of  disease  or  exigencies  of  the  system;  or  else 
it  has  been  of  too  general  and  philosophical  a  char- 
acter to  be  of  popular  use,  and  has  not  included  such 
practical  directions  as  are  demanded  for  successful 
general   application.      There   has   heretofore   been   so 


46  HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF 

great  an  intermixture  of  error  in  tlie  prevailing  physio- 
logical systems,  as  to  prevent  the  simple,  obvious,  and 
eminently  practical  truth  from  shining  clearly  out  and 
exerting  its  due  influence. 

The  philosophical  reader  will  readily  appreciate  the 
causes  that  have  prevented  so  manifestly  true  and  suc- 
cessful a  practice  as  the  movement  from  becoming  para- 
mount. Men  are  ever  inqniring.  As  the  reward  of 
these  struggles  of  the  growing  mind  of  man,  new 
truths  and  new  ways  leading  to  truth  ar6  constantly 
disclosed.  Each  of  these  naturally  fills  the  mind 
with  high  hopes  in  regard  to  the  ultimate  results  of 
present  knowledge  and  effort.  Inorganic  chemistry 
yielded  its  riches  to  the  modern  physician ;  and  as  its 
facts  preceded  those  of  vital  chemistry,  he  naturally 
made  a  misapplication  of  them ;  for  his  practice  is  an 
outgrowth  of,  and  is  limited  by,  his  knowledge.  Neither 
the  chemist  nor  the  metaphysician  could  form  a  correct 
statement  of  physiological  truth,  and  so  practice  must 
necessarily  remain  empirical  to  a  great  extent,  waiting 
for  the  new  light  that  shall  bring  out  those  elemental 
truths  that  are  instinctively  seized  upon  by  all  primi- 
tive people. 

The  current  medical  practice  has  for  its  foundation 
these  scattered,  incongruous,  and  shifting  facts;  but  so 
greatly  modified  is  it,  however,  by  the  additions  of 
more  modern  science,  that  now  it  seriously  threatens  to 
lead  us  back  at  last  to  the  first  principles  of  physiology 
as  the  only  reliable  basis  after  all. 

Tiie  system  of  Li7ig^  though  probably  invented  by 
him,  is  really  but  the  collecting  together,  on  a  philo- 
sophical plan,  of  the  fragments  that  had  long  existed. 
It  comprehended,  as  it  were,  by  an  instinctive  grasp, 
all  the  truth  that  had  been  previously  realized  at  vari- 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  47 

ous  times  and  places.  What  in  China,  Hindoostan, 
and  Greece  had  been  but  empiricism,  he  put  upon  the 
ground  on  which  his  successors  and  followers  may  hope 
to  build  a  system  of  philosophical  accuracy. 

Biography  of  Lixg."^ — The  present  state  of  the 
science  of  remedial  treatment  by  movements,  and  the 
development  of  this  doctrine,  is  intimately  connected 
with  the  life  of  Ling,  so  that  his  biography  is  necessa- 
rily a  part  of  its  history. 

Peter  Henry  Ling  was  born  on  the  15th  of  ^N'ovem- 
ber,  1766,  at  Smaland.  His  father,  who  was  a  curate, 
died  soon  after  his  son's  birth,  and  his  mother,  who 
married  again,  died  a  short  time  afterward.  Possessing 
no  remembrancer  of  his  father,  except  a  small  portrait, 
which  he  received  from  his  mother,  as  a  souvenir  of 
love  and  reverence,  the  growing  boy  passed  the  days 
of  his  childhood  under  the  too  severe  training  of  a 
capricious  tutor.  The  young  Ling  was  afterward  sent 
to  the  schools  of  Wexio  for  further  instruction.  Here 
he  soon  distinguished  himself  for  his  great  talents,  and 
his  energy  and  devotion  to  study. 

When  Ling  left  the  schools,  he  saw  life  open  before 
him  in  its  roughest  aspects ;  he  found  himself  exposed 
to  incessant  vicissitudes,  reduced  at  times  to  absolute 
poverty  and  want.  During  this  period  he  resided  for 
the  most  part  in  Upsala,  Stockholm,  Berlin,  and 
Copenhagen ;  but  it  is  not  known  in  what  manner  he 
was  emj^loyed.  All  we  know  is,  that  he  studied  at 
Upsala,  and  passed  his  theological  examinations  jit 
Smaland,  in  December,  1T9T:  afterward  he  was  tut(  r 
in  several  families ;  at  one  time  at  Stockholm,  at  au- 

*  Extracted  from  Rothstein. 


48  IIISTOKICAL    SKETCH    OF 

other  in  the  country.  Suddenly  he  left  Germany, 
and  went  to  Denmark.  In  1800  he  studied  in  Copen- 
hagen, and  the  following  year  took  part  in  the  naval 
battle  against  Nelson,  as  a  volunteer  in  a  Danish  ship. 
He  afterward  returned  to  Germany,  and  passed  on  to 
France  and  England,  whence  he  returned  to  Copen- 
hagen, with  a  perfect  knowledge  of  the  languages  of 
these  diiferent  countries. 

During  this  period  he  received  on  different  occa- 
sions military  appointments,  the  character  of  which  are 
unknown  to  us.  It  is  said  that  during  his  travels  he 
was  frequently  reduced  to  the  most  trying  circum- 
stances, even  suffering  the  pangs  of  hunger.  At  one 
time  he  was  glad  to  shelter  himself  in  a  miserable 
lodging  in  a  garret  at  Hamburgh  ;  he  was  even  forced 
to  wash,  with  his  own  liands,  his  only  shirt. 

These  privations,  hov/ever,  did  not  depress  him; 
although  without  means,  the  desire  of  continuing  his 
travels,  to  develop  and  improve  his  knowledge,  buoyed 
him  up,  and  enabled  him  to  surmount  all  difficulties. 
He  was  proud  of  his  ability  to  endure  privations,  and 
to  do  without  what  are  thought  by  most  to  be  indis- 
pensable necessaries. 

The  same  impulsive  energy  which  previously  in- 
duced him  to  take  part  in  a  sea-fight,  determined  him 
to  study  the  art  of  fencing  during  his  second  sojourn 
at  Stockholm.  Two  fencing-masters,  French  refugees, 
had  founded  there  at  this  time  a  fencing-school.  Ling 
was  there  every  day,  and  his  great  skill  in  this  art  soon 
became  notorious,  and  his  passion  for  it  grew  with  his 
skill.  He  was  now  only  at  the  commencement  of  that 
career  which  was  already  providentially  marked  out 
for  him,  and  which  from  deliberate  choice,  and  with 
characteristic  energy,  he  steadily  pursued.     His  reflec- 


THE    PKACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  49 

tions  upon  fencing,  and  liis  own  experience  (for  he  suf- 
ered  then  from  gout  in  his  arm),  taught  him  to  infer 
the  wholesome  effects  which  may  be  produced  on  the 
body,  as  well  as  the  mind,  by  movements  based  on 
rational  principles  ;  and  he  began  to  realize  that  fenc- 
ing, however  valuable  as  an  exercise,  could  not  accom- 
plish all  that  w^as  desirable. 

About  this  time  the  idea  struck  him  that  an  harmo- 
nious development  of  the  body,  of  its  powers  and  capa- 
bilities, by  suitable  systematized  exercises,  ought  to 
constitute  an  essential  ]3art  in  the  education  of  a  people. 

The  realization  of  this  idea  now  became  his  grand 
aim,  the  more  so  as  he  pictured  to  himself  the  bril- 
liant image  of  mankind  restored  to  health,  strength, 
and  beauty.  Ling  thought  not,  like  his  predecessors, 
of  merely  imitating  the  gymnastic  treatment  of  the 
ancients,  but  he  aimed  at  its  reformation  and  improve- 
ment. 

At  this  period  of  Ling's  life  begins  that  part  of  his 
history  which  for  us  possesses  the  deepest  interest. 
Quite  unknown,  but  attracting  the  attention  of  every 
one  by  his  appearance,  he  made  his  debut  at  Lund  in 
the  spring  of  1805.  Versed  in  several  modern  lan- 
guages, and  a  thorough  master  of  fencing,  he  began  to 
teach  them  both,  and  being  proud  of  all  that  con- 
cerned his  fatherland,  he  lectured  with  enthusiasm  on 
the  old  IS'orse  poetry,  history,  and  mythology. 

Li  the  same  year  he  was  appointed  professor  of  fenc- 
ing at  the  University,  and  began  at  once  to  re-fit  the 
fencing- saloon  connected  with  it,  and  prepare  it  for 
several  gymnastic  exercises,  which  were  commenced 
without  delay.  He  soon  excited  the  attention  not  only 
of  the  inhabitants  of  Lund,  but  of  the  other  towns  in 
the  kingdom. 

3 


50  HISTORICAL   SKETCH   OF 

Ling  wished  to  put  gymnastics  in  harmony  with  na- 
ture, and  began  in  1805  to  study  anatomy,  physiology, 
and  the  other  natural  sciences.  The  high  value  he  set 
on  these  studies,  and  the  enthusiasm  with  whicli  he 
pursued  them,  are  forcibly  expressed  in  his  own  words. 

"  Anatomy,  that  sacred  genesis,  which  shows  us  the 
masterpiece  of  the  Creator,  and  which  teaches  us  how 
little  and  how  great  man  is,  ought  to  form  the  con- 
stant study  of  the  gymnast.  But  we  ought  not  to  con- 
sider the  organs  of  the  body  as  the  lifeless  forms  of  a 
mechanical  mass,  but  as  the  living,  active  instruments 
of  the  soul." 

Ling  looked  on  anatomy  and  physiology  as  the  essen- 
tial and  necessary  basis  of  gymnastics.  But  according 
to  his  idea,  these  and  other  natural  sciences  were  not  at 
all  sufficient  for  the  gymnast,  whose  aim  is  the  eleva- 
tion of  man,  in  his  corporeal  and  mental  nature,  to  the 
ancient  heau-ideal.  He  must,  therefore,  know  what 
effects  movements  produce  upon  the  bodily  and  psycho- 
logical condition  of  man,  a  knowledge  which  can  be 
obtained  only  by  investigating  human  nature  as  a 
whole,  and  by  the  most  careful  and  untiring  analysis 
of  details. 

ISTot  only  to  himself,  but  to  others  also,  must  the 
gymnast  be  able  to  give  an  account  of  the  application 
of  his  art.  Ling  opened  a  new  field  for  physical  inves- 
tigation, hitherto  untried,  and  almost  unknown,  even 
to  the  most  learned  physicians  and  naturalists.  He 
conducted  his  researches  with  the  most  scrupulous 
exactness,  and  in  the  most  earnest  manner  frequently 
recommended  his  companions  to  do  the  same.  He  did 
not  acknowledge  a  new  movement  to  be  a  good  one 
until  he  was  able  to  render  an  exact  account  of  its 
effects.     His  intention  was  not  merely  to  make  gym- 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  61 

nasties  a  branch  of  education  for  healthy  persons,  but 
to  demonstrate  it  to  be  a  remedy  for  disease. 

Herein  we  find  the  exphanation  of  the  strong  pubhc 
interest  taken  in  Ling's  ideas.  Laymen  who  had  al- 
ways looked  upon  bodily  movements  as  a  deception, 
in  their  sickness,  anxious  for  the  re-establishment  of 
their  health,  were  easily  induced  to  seek  relief  for  their 
ailments  by  the  new  method,  and  were  not  disappointed. 

The  curative  movements  were  first  practiced  in  1813, 
while  Ling  remained  at  Stockholm  ;  but  before  this 
time  they  were  neither  disregarded  nor  treated  with 
neglect  at  Lund. 

During  his  stay  at  Stockholm,  a  change  fortunate  for 
Ling's  nsefulness  took  place,  which,  in  the  improve- 
ment of  his  circumstances,  extended  itself  rapidly.  At 
first  he  was  appointed  master  of  fencing  at  the  military 
academy  in  Carlberg,  near  the  Swedish  capital.  Soon 
afterward  he  became  the  director  of  the  Central  Insti- 
tution, founded  at  his  own  suggestion.  He  projected 
such  an  establishment  at  Lund,  and  addressed,  in  1812, 
the  Minister  of  Public  Instruction,  soliciting  the  sup- 
port of  the  Government.  He  received  the  following- 
answer : — "There  are  enough  of  jugglers  and  rope- 
dancers,  without  exacting  any  further  charge  from  the 
public  treasury."  This  did  not  at  all  diminish  his  zeal, 
for  after  his  arrival  at  Stockholm  he  had  the  happiness 
(in  consequence  of  the  propositions  he  personally  made, 
which  were  examined  by  a  royal  commission)  to  be 
appointed  by  a  royal  ordinance,  with  a  regular  salary 
of  500  rix-dollars,  as  the  founder  and  director  of  this 
Institution,  for  the  setting  out  and  preparation  of  which 
not  more  than  200  rix-dollars  were  voted. 

The  royal  ordinance,  issned  in  the  year  1814,  states 
that  the  statutes  proposed  by  Ling,  and  presented  to 


52  HISTOEICAL    SKETCH    OF 

the  commission,  were  coniirmed  and  legally  established. 
Active  and  indefatigable,  Ling  continued  his  attempts 
at  realizing  his  great  ideas  with  these  scanty  facilities, 
and  pursued  his  philanthropic  efforts  with  a  disinter- 
estedness and  self-denial  which  can  be  attributed  only 
to  his  enthusiasm  for  the  cause,  and  to  his  noble  patri- 
otism and  humanity,  l^ot  only  by  the  zeal  and  cir- 
cumspection with  Avhich  he  performed  his  duty  as 
director,  but  by  the  manner  in  which  he  taught  and 
practiced  his  art,  the  public  were  at  last  forced  to 
acknowledge  his  merits,  and  its  importance.  Although 
in  the  last  days  of  his  life  he  may  have  seen  his  task 
still  incomplete,  he  was  yet  able  to  enjoy  a  feeling  of 
satisfaction,  in  comparing  the  degree  of  perfection  his 
art  had  already  attained  with  the  state  in  which  he 
found  it  at  the  beginning  of  his  gymnastic  career. 

The  important  increase  of  public  support  which  was 
accorded  to  the  Institution  in  the  year  1834,  was  a 
mark  of  the  increasing  general  favor  conferred  on 
him  and  it  by  his  country.  His  sovereign  raised 
him  to  the  dignity  of  a  Professor,  and  Knight  of  the 
Order  of  the  IvTorth  Star.  He  thankfully  accepted 
both,  but  used  neither  the  title  of  the  iirst  nor  the  in- 
signia of  the  latter.  He  was  much  gratified  by  the 
proof  of  the  love  of  his  friends  and  pupils,  when  on  a 
festive  occasion  they  presented  him  with  a  silver 
medal.  He  had  the  deeper  gratification  of  seeing  at 
length  his  ideas  realized,  his  art  established  in  Sweden, 
made  use  of  in  every  grade  of  society,  and  incorporated, 
as  an  important  element,  in  the  education  of  the  people. 

Ling's  gymnastics  were  introduced  many  years  ago, 
not  only  into  all  the  military  academies  of  Sweden, 
but  into  all  town  schools,  colleges,  and  universities, 
even  into  the  orphan  institutions,  and  into  all  country 


THE    PRACTICE    OF   MOVEMENTS.  53 

schools.  In  the  rooms  of  the  Central  Establishment  at 
Stockholm,  persons  of  every  condition  and  age,  the 
healthy  as  well  as  the  sick,  executed,  or  were  sul3Jected 
to,  the  prescribed  movements.  The  numbei-  of  those 
who  adopted  their  use  increased  every  year,  and  among 
them  were  physicians  who,  in  the  beginning,  had  been 
the  most  opposed  to  Ling. 

In  the  Central  Institution  clever  teachers  are  edu- 
cated, and  no  one  obtains  a  diploma,  or  an  official 
license  to  act  as  a  practical  teacher,  without  having 
finished  the  course,  and  passed  an  examination  in  anat- 
omy, physiology,  and  the  bodily  movements. 

Ling  being  convinced  of  the  unity  of  the  organism, 
and  of  the  importance  of  the  mechanical  and  physical 
laws  to  be  observed  in  its  education  and  remedial  treat- 
ment, based  his  system  on  these  truths.     He  says : 

"  It  is  perhaps  not  readily  understood  that  a  move- 
ment, or  a  mechanical  action,  is  competent  to  affect 
interior  portions  of  the  organism.  It  is  necessary  first 
to  understand  that  the  human  system  is  a  unit^  com- 
plete and  indivisible.  It  can  not  exist  in  distinct  j)arts, 
for  then  it  would  not  be  one  organism,  but  several. 
All  that  we  find  in  the  body,  wdiether  inherent,  or  for- 
eign matter,  in  any  movement,  to  whatever  extent, 
engages  in  each  displacement  of  any  one  part,  and  this 
implies  a  corresponding  change  in  neighboring  parts, 
according  to  the  extent  of  the  primary  action. 

"Every  little  act  of  changiog  the  attitude,  or  the  re- 
lation of  the  members  of  the  body,  an  exterior  press- 
ure upon  a  nerve,  a  vein,  or  muscle,  nmst  necessarily 
produce  a  displacement  of  neighboring  parts,  and  pro- 
duce an  action  more  or  less  sensible  upon  organs,  in  tl  e 
proportion  of  their  distance  and  intensity,  resembling 
those  wave-circles  we  notice  on  the  surface  of  water. 


54  HISTOIilCAL    SKETCH   OF 

"Experience  shows  that  the  different  professions 
affect  differently  the  physical  and  moral  stamina  of 
those  engaged  in  them.  It  shows  ns  that  a  very  slight 
pressure  upon  a  nerve  irritates  it,  that  a  greater  press- 
ure produces  pain,  and  if  we  add  still  to  the  pressure, 
engorgement,  and  at  last  paralysis  is  produced.  It  is 
well  known  that  a  certain  position  is  more  convenient 
than  all  others  for  the  ease  of  the  body  and  the  tran- 
quillity of  sleep.  Do  not  persons  affected  with  inter- 
nal maladies  find  that  they  are  more  comfortable  in 
some  positions  than  in  others,  and  therefore  seek  those 
positions  ?" 

Ling  arrived  at  these  results  by  repeated  experi- 
ments and  by  direct  observation,  being  nearly  always 
himself  the  subject  of  his  trials.  Still  young,  and  af- 
fected with  a  grave  disease  of  the  lungs,  and  already 
given  up  by  physicians,  he  noticed  the  favorable  in- 
fluence that  the  movements  produced  upon  his  health. 
In  the  course  of  these  experiments  he  succeeded  in 
curing  himself  of  a  disease  that  had  been  deemed  in- 
curable. He  w^as  thus  enabled  to  corroborate  the  ob- 
servations he  had  made  upon  the  effect  of  movements 
of  the  body  in  general,  and  so  to  progress  in  the  estab- 
lishment of  his  system. 

Observation  and  experiment  soon  led  him  to  the 
following  law: 

"  Nutrition^  or  muscular  develoj)ment  of  any  jpart 
of  the  hody^  occurs  in  direct  relation  with  the  activ^ 
movements  to  which  the  jMrt  has  'been  sidjjectedP 

His   researches   and   persevering   studies    upon   the 
skeleton,  muscular  attachments,  etc.,  led  him  at  last  to 
a  great  law,  and  enabled  him  to  draw  the  correct  in-* 
ference  therefrom.     Hence  the  discovery  of  a  series  of  * 
movemen-s   capable   of  provoking  muscular  contrac- 


THE    PRACTICE   OF   M0\':E:\rENT8.  65 

tioBS  wherever  the  hygenic  or  therapeutic  needs  indi- 
cate them. 

He  gives  the  following  definition  of  movement: 

Every  exercise  of  ^ohich  the  direction  and  duration 
are  determined^  is  a  movement. 

Each  movement^  according  to  Ling,  is  an  idea  ex- 
pressed hy  the  hody. 

Ling  contended  that  mechanical  agencies  could  be 
employed  therapeutically  as  well  as  chemical  and  gal- 
vanic agencies,  as  it  is  an  established  fact  that  the 
"living  fiber  equally  reacts  from  mechanic  as  from 
chemical  or  galvanic  excitation." 

He  summed  up  his  experiments  on  the  motory  phe- 
nomena of  the  human  organization  in  this  formula: 
"To  render  any  movement  definite  and  exact,  a  point 
of  departure,  a  point  of  teoimination,  and  a  line 
through  which  the  body  or  ^wj  portion  of  it  must 
pass,  are  to  be  clearly  and  severally  determined  as 
well  as  the  velocity  and  rhythm  of  the  motory  act 
itself." 

The  following  are  the  general  laws  which  Ling  has 
laid  down  in  his  treatise  on  physical  development : 

1.  Every  just  attempt  to  develop  the  powers  of  the 
human  being — mental  or  corporeal — is  properly  educa- 
tion. 

2.  Every  movement  should  have  proper  relation  to 
the  organization  of  the  body;  whatever  transgresses 
the  laws  of  that  organism  is  irrational. 

3.  Tlie  sphere  of  the  activity  of  the  muscles  and  the 
laws  of  gravitation  determine  the  limits  of  a  movc-^ 
ment  of  the  body. 

4.  Every  movement,  however  simple  and  slight  it- 
may  appear  to  be,  acquires  its  character  from  the  na- 
ture of  the  wliole  organism,  and  each  part  of  the  body, 


56  HISTOKICAL    SKETCH    OF 

within  the  limits  of  its  own  function  and  office,  ought 
to  participate  in  that  movement. 

5.  To  arrive  at  a  healthful  development  of  the  bodj, 
it  is  necessary  to  begin  at  the  primitive  type  of  each 
movement ;  this  study  should  be  exact,  and  can  never 
be  considered  trifling  or  unimportant  by  any  one  who 
knows  that  every  movement  is  either  simple  or  com- 
posite. 

6.  In  physical  order,  as  in  moral  order,  simple  things 
are  the  most  difficult  to  apprehend,  thence  one  can  not 
too  zealously  study  simple  movements. 

T.  A  movement  is  nothing  worth  if  it  is  not  correct^ 
that  is,  if  it  is  not  in  conformity  with  the  laws  of  the 
organism. 

8.  The  body,  whose  diflferent  parts  are  not  in 
harmony,  is  not  in  harmonious  accord  with  the 
mind. 

9.  The  aim  of  movements  as  a  science  is  the  proper 
development  of  the  human  organism. 

10.  Correct  movements  are  such  as  are  founded  on 
the  character  and  temperament  of  the  individual  to  be 
developed  thereby. 

t/  11.  Tlie  organism  can  only  be  said  to  be  perfectly 
developed  when  its  several  parts  are  in  mutual  har- 
mony, corresponding  to  the  different  individual  pre- 
dispositions. 

1^12.  The  possible  development  of  the  human  body 
must  be  limited  by  the  faculties,  mental  and  bodily, 
belonging  to  the  individual. 

%/'  13.  A  faculty  may  be  blunted  by  want  of  exercise, 
but  can  never  be  utterly  annihilated. 

y  14.  An  incorrect  and  misapplied  movement  may 
pervert  the  development  of  such  a  faculty.  Conse- 
quently an  incorrect  movement  tends  rather  to  the  dis- 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  57 

advantage  than  to  the  gain  of  the  harmonious  devel- 
opment of  the  body. 

15.  All  one-sided  development  impedes  tlie  practice 
of  corporeal  exercise ;  general  and  harmonious  devel- 
opment, on  the  contmrj,  facilitates  it. 
•^10.  Stiffness  or  immobility,  in  any  part  of  the  or- 
ganism, is,  in  most  instances,  only  an  over-development, 
which  is  always  attended  by  corresponding  weakness 
in  other  parts. 

•^17.  The  over-development  of  one  part  may  be  di-     f'' 
minished,  and  the  weakness  of  other  parts  remedied, 
by  equally  distributed  movements. 

IS.  It  is  not  the  greater  or  lesser  power  of  any  part 
that  determines  the  strength  or  Aveakness  of  an  indi- 
vidual, so  much  as  the  proportion  and  harmony  of  the 
several  parts.  Congenital  and  accidental  disorders  are 
not  considered  here,  of  course. 

19.  A  real  and  healthful  power  consists  in  a  simul- 
taneous action  of  the  several  parts  (or  in  action  and  re- 
action). In  order  tliat  m.otion  and  power  may  be 
developed  to  their  highest  point,  they  must  co-oj^erate 
simultaneously  in  all  parts. 

20.  Perfect  health  and  physical  power  are  conse- 
quently correlative  terms ;  both  are  dependent  on  the 
harmony  of  the  several  parts. 

21.  In  corporeal  development,  commencing  with  the 
simplest,  you  may  gradually  advance  to  the  most  com- 
plicated and  powerful  movements;  and  this  without 
danger,  inasmuch  as  the  pupil  has  acquired  the  instinct- 
ive knowledge  of  what  he  is  or  is  not  capable. 

Some  of  Ling's  physiological  and  therapeutic  views 

are  contained  in  the  following  statements  : 

"The  vital   phenomena  may  be  arranged   in  three 

principal   or    fundamental    orders:     1st,    Dynamical 

3- 


58  HISTOKICAL    SKETCH   OF 

jpheiiomena^  manifestations  of  the  mind,  moral  and  in- 
tellectual powers.  2d,  Chemical  2)henomena^  assimi- 
lation, sanguification,  secretion,  nutrition,  etc.  3d, 
Mechanical  iihenomena^  voluntary  and  organic;  respi- 
ration, mastication,  deglutition,  circulation,  etc. 

"The  union  and  harmony  of  these  three  orders  or 
phenomena  characterize  a  perfect  organization,  and 
every  vital  act  is  accomplished  under  their  combined 
influence.  , 

"The  shares  these  jDhenomena  take  in  a  certain  vital 
act  give  it  its  peculiar  character.  If  any  serious  de- 
rangement occurs  in  any  of  the  phenomena,  the  result 
is  always  a  disturbance  of  the  vital  functions,  which 
we  call  disease. 

"The  state  of  the  health  depends,  accordingly,  on 
the  degree  of  equilibrium  and  harmony  existing  be- 
tween the  functions  of  those  tissues  or  organs  in  which 
these  three  orders  of  phenomena  occur. 

"  When  this  harmony  is  deranged,  in  order  to  re-es- 
tablish it,  we  should  endeavor  to  increase  the  vital  ac- 
tivity of  those  organs  whose  functions  have  a  relation 
to  that  order  of  phenomena  whose  manifestation  is  de- 
creased or  weakened." 

In  accordance  with  these  views,  he  includes  among 
therapeutic  means  three  different  kinds  of  influence 
on  the  human  organism.  1st,  Cheraical  agencies  /  2d, 
Physical  and  mechanical  agencies ;  3d,  Dynamical 
agencies.  And  he  observes  that  the  physician  has  ac- 
cordingly to  regulate,  not  only  the  food  and  medicine 
requisite  for  the  sick,  but  also  position  during  resting, 
and  the  manner  in  which  the  irritable  mind  is  to  be 
calmed.  Due  attention  to  these  matters  is  necessary 
to  constitute  a  rational  treatment  of  disease. 

Ling  was  a  man  of  unwearied  energy  and  unceasing 


THE  PRACTICE  OF  MOVEMENTS.  59 

activity.  He  had  but  few  lioiirs  to  spare  for  the  enjoy- 
ment of  domestic  life,  for  which  no  man  had  a  keener 
relish.  It  was  with  reluctance  that  he  wrote  on  the 
subject  of  his  art ;  he  preferred  to  practice  and  teach 
it.  He  was  a  poet  of  eminence,  of  whose  genius  his 
nation  may  well  be  proud.  His  poetical  writings  have 
been  collected  in  hve  volumes,  consisting  of  ejpic^ 
dramaticy  and  lyrical  pieces ;  the  latter  are  very  popu- 
lar at  this  day.  He  took  pleasure  in  dictating  verses 
to  his  young  friends ;  and  it  is  recorded  of  him  that  his 
flow  of  verse  was  so  rapid  that  they  often  could  not 
keep  up  with  him,  a  thing  which  not  seldom  provoked 
an  outbreak  of  impatience  from  the  poet.  During  his 
last  years  he  suffered  much  bodily  pain,  but  habitually 
walked  from  his  country  seat,  Annelund,  to  Stockholm, 
through  the  last  summer  of  his  life,  besides  performing 
his  fatiguing  jDrofessional  labors.  He  conversed  on  his 
death-bed  till  the  last  hour,  and  gave  instructions  re- 
garding the  science  to  which  he  had  so  nobly  devoted 
himself  through  a  long  life.  He  died  on  the  3d  of 
May,  1839. 

A  fine  cast  of  Ling's  head  may  be  seen  in  the  cabi- 
net of  Prof.  Rezius,  of  Stockholm,  the  celebrated 
Swedish  ethnologist.  It  is  remarkable  for  its  great 
length  and  height,  as  well  as  for  its  general  intellectual 
expression. 

The  Movement  System  in  Stockholm. — The  Swedish 
capital  contains  about  95,000  inhabitants,  and  it  has 
several  public  institutions  for  the  practice  of  move- 
ments. Having  resided  there  for  some  time  for  the 
purpose  of  studying  the  system  at  its  fountain-head,  I 
will  give  a  brief  account  of  the  most  prominent  of  these 
institutions  as  I  found  them. 


60  HISTOEICAL    SKETCH    OF 

The  Central  Gymnastic  Institute. — This  is  tlie  orig- 
inal establishment  founded  by  Ling  in  1813  under  the 
royal  patronage.  Professor  Branting,  the  present  di- 
rector, is  the  immediate  successor  of  Ling.  He  has 
lived  at  the  institution  as  patient,  pupil,  and  director 
for  forty-four  years.  He  is  a  man  of  extensive  med- 
ical reading,  a  j)i'ofound  anatomist  and  physiologist, 
conversing  easily  in  nearly  all  the  European  languages, 
and  of  a  bountiful  and  sympathetic  nature.  Ling's 
widow  also  resides  there,  and  two  or  three  of  his 
children  assist  at  different  responsible  posts  in  the 
institution. 

This  establishment  consist  of  several  buildings, 
adapted  to  the  different  purposes  in  view,  on  a  large 
plot  of  ground,  in  a  central  portion  of  the  city.  The 
locale,  originally  an  armory,  belongs  to  the  govern- 
ment, and  the  director  and  teachers  are  salaried  from 
the  same  source. 

The  especial  objects  contemplated  at  this  institution 
are  the  following: 

1.  The  training  of  boys  to  health  and  the  perfecting 
of  their  physical  powers. 

2.  The  instj-uction  of  teachers  of  the  schools, 
throughout  the  kingdom,  in  the  modes  of  physical  de- 
velopment by  movements. 

3.  The  instruction  of  youths  in  sword  and  bayonet 
exercise. 

4.  The  instruction  of  officers  and  teachers  in  practi- 
cal anatomy  and  in  physiology,  as  connected  with 
the  application  of  movements  for  the  purposes  of  their 
professions. 

5.  The  treatment  of  the  sick  by  tlie  exclusive  means 
of  movements. 

This  latter  department,  in  both  the  male  and  female 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVEMENTS.  61 

divisions,  is  under  Professor  Branting's  personal  super- 
vision. A  yearly  report  is  made  to  the  goveruinent, 
setting  forth  the  progress  of  the  institution  in  each  of 
its  departments.  The  total  number  of  persons  that 
avail  themselves  of  the  advantages  of  the  institution 
is  about  fifteen  hundred  each  year,  of  whom  about  350 
are  invalids.  The  number  of  patrons  is  constantly  vary- 
ing, but  is  much  greater  in  winter,  when  about  twenty 
teachers  are  required  for  all  the  different  departments. 

Dk.  H.  Satheebukg's  institution  enjoys  a  medical 
reputation  equal,  if  not  superior,  to  that  of  the  Cen- 
tral Institute ;  and  it  receives  more  patients,  its  purposes 
being  entirely  medical.  It  maintains  a  free  clinique 
for  a  limited  number  of  patients,  in  consideration  of 
which  it  receives  a  large  governmental  stipend. 
Orthopedic  surgery  is  the  branch  to  which  Dr.  Sather- 
burg  makes  application  of  the  movements^  and  with  ex- 
traordinary success.  This  institution  requires  about 
the  same  number  of  assistants  as  the  Central. 

There  are  generally  one  or  two  other  institutions  of 
the  same  kind,  but  on  a  smaller  scale,  in  Stockholm. 
There  is  scarcely  any  chronic  disease  known  that  is 
not  successfully  treated  at  these  institutions.  I  might 
mention  a  case  that  I  witnessed  of  blindness,  from 
amaurosis^  to  all  appearance  completely  restored. 
K'umbers  of  cases  of  deformity  are  constantly  under 
treatment,  w^hich  are  in  general  quite  restored  before 
leaving.  Pulmonary  catarrh,  chlorosis,  and  all  diseases 
of  weakness  ai'e  treated  with  eminent  success. 

LiSiitutions  of  a  similar  kind,  but  generally  without 
governmental  support,  are  scattered  throughout  north- 
ern Europe,  The  one  at  St.  Petersburg  is  on  a  magnifi- 
cent scale,  far  excelling  anything  else  of  the  kind, 
and  is  patronized  by  the  royal  family.     The  director 


62  IIISTOEICAL    SKETCH    OF 

receives  a  salary  of  10,000  roubles.  The  whole  num- 
ber of  institutions  in  Europe  based  on  Ling's  system  is 
about  thirty. 

To  these  historical  statements  we  may  append  the 
corroborative  testimony  of  several  distinguished  philos- 
ophers, physicians,  and  others,  of  both  ancient  and 
modern  times,  in  regard  to  the  utility  and  efficacy  of 
this  system. 

Dally. — "Physical  and  mechanical  agents  excite, 
augment,  or  diminish  in  organic  bodies,  as  in  inorganic 
bodies,  light,  heat,  electricity,  and  magnetism. 

"  The  intimate  relation  of  these  fluids,  still  too  slightly 
appreciated,  has  given  occasion  to  partial  and  incom- 
plete applications  of  mesmerism,  electro-vitalism,  elec- 
tro-therapeutics, and,  quite  recently,  to  odic-force  and 
tellurism. 

"  Artificial  movements,  deduced  from  a  knowledge 
of  physics  and  mechanics  on  the  one  hand,  and  physi- 
ology and  pathology  on  the  other,  are  certainly,  of  all 
agents,  the  most  rational  and  the  most  powerful  for 
controlling  by  their  action  in  the  interior  of  the  organs, 
in  the  gases,  the  fluids,  and  the  tissues,  the  development 
of  the  so-called  imponderable  fluids  essential  to  life. 

"  Movement  is  one  of  the  primordial  products  of  life 
and  the  regulator  of  all  vital  conditions.  Artificial 
movements  are  the  agents  most  specially  adapted  to 
excite  natural,  physiological,  vital,  organo-biological 
action,  by  which  the  human  machine  performs  its 
functions,  is  developed,  preserved,  and  repaired. 

"These  are  the  ordinary  bases  of  physical  education, 
of  hygiene  and  therapeutics — bases  at  once  traditional 
and  establislied  by  modern  experience  in  a  man- 
ner  the  most  thorough  and  positive,  and  which,  in 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    MOVE]yiENTS.  63 

tlieir  essentially  medical  point  of  view,  M.  Bonnet  dis- 
tinguislies  by  that  beautiful  and  legitimate  title, 
'  treatment  of  diseases  by  the  exercise  of  functions.'  " 

Hoffman. — "  We  can  not  perfect  the  art  of  healing 
till  we  learn  to  apply  mechanics  and  hydraulics  to 
medicine. 

"  Experience  furnishes  materials,  but  they  ought  to 
be  worked  up  according  to  the  rules  of  mechanical 
science,  and  the  only  way  to  introduce  exactitude  in 
medicine  is  not  to  admit  as  proved  that  which  does  not 
rest  upon  irrefutable  principles.  It  is  thus  medicine 
may  be  raised,  as  well  as  geometry,  to  the  rank  of  the 
exact  sciences,  and  it  is  not  less  susceptible  of  a  logi- 
cal or  geometrical  precision  than  any  branch  whatever 
of  the  mathematics." 

J.  J.  RorssEAu. — "  It  is  a  pitiable  error  to  suppose 
that  exercise  of  the  body  is  injurious  to  the  operations 
of  the  mind,  as  though  the  two  actions  were  not  in- 
tended to  go  together,  and  that  the  one  ought  not  to 
direct  the  other. 

"  Do  you  wish  to  cultivate  the  intelligence  of  your 
pupils,  cultivate  the  power  that  controls  it.  Exercise 
the  body  continually,  make  it  robust  and  healthy,  to 
make  a  wise  and  rational  individual." 

Pliny. — ''  The  mind  is  stimulated  by  movements  of 
the  body." 

Galen. — "  All  the  powers  of  the  soul  are  increased 
and  renewed  by  exercise. 

"  It  is  necessary  to  place  health  under  the  auspices 
of  labor. 

^*  The  greatest  danger  to  health  results  from  complete 
inactivity.  In  the  same  manner  the  greatest  benefit 
results  from  moderate  exercise." 

Speaking  of  his  own  manner  of  life,  and  which  he 


64:  HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF 

had  caused  to  be  adopted  also  "by  one  of  his  friends, 
he  thus  discourses  of  movements :  "  We  make  it  a 
duty  to  take  exercise  and  to  avoid  improper  food,  and 
in  this  manner  we  have  been  very  many  years,  even  to 
this  time,  exempt  from  diseases." 

Akistotle. — A  long  time  before  Galen,  Aristotle,  re- 
plying to  this  question,  ''Why  is  it  good  hygiene  to  di- 
minish the  quantity  of  food  and  increase^xercise?"  says, 
"  The  cause  of  disease  is  the  excess  of  excretions  which 
result  from  the  excess  of  nourishment,  or  from  the 
want  of  exercise." 

The  great  and  venerable  Hippocrates  remarks :  "  He 
who  eats  without  taking  exercise  can  not  be  well." 
And  adds,  "Perfect  health  results  from  a  just  and 
constant  equilibrium  between  alimentation  and  exer- 
cise." 

This  illustrious  author  also  says,  "  Those  who  do  not 
eat  to  satiety,  and  are  diligent  in  labor,  preserve  excel- 
lent health." 

Yegece  informs  us,  that  military  men  consider  that 
the  daily  exercises  contribute  more  than  medicines  to 
the  maintenance  of  health  in  the  soldiers. 

Of  the  good  Abbe  Saint  Pierre,  author  of  the  Projet 
de paix  perpetuelle^  member  of  the  Academie  Fvanoais^ 
and  the  inventor  of  a  kind  of  elastic  fauteuil  which  he 
names  Tremousoir  (movement  apparatus),  upon  which 
one  may  perform  hygienic  movements  similar  to 
those  of  equitation,  Maupertuis,  his  successor  in  the 
Academie,  relates  the  following  anecdote  :  "  A  geome- 
ter proposed,  on  one  occasion,  to  relieve  certain  organs 
where  the  blood  accumulated,  for  the  purpose  of 
causing  it  to  flow  into  other  organs,  to  make  use  of 
centrifugal  force,  wliich  he  proposed  to  secure  by  means 
of  a  whirling  machine." 


THE    PRACTICE    OF    ^rOYEMKNTS.  65 

It  was  a  very  rational  idea,  that  of  thus  exciting  in 
the  human  organization  the  centrifugal  and  centripetal 
fv)rces  for  the  purpose  of  modifying  at  will  that  organi- 
zation which  Ruysch,  in  his  enthusiasm  as  an  anato- 
mist, declared  to  be  only  a  tissue  of  vessels. 

Plato. — "A  good  education  is  that  which  assures  to 
the  body  all  the  beauty,  all  the  perfection,  of  which  it 
is  capable. 

"To  secure  this  beauty,  it  is  only  necessary  that  the 
body  should  be  developed,  with  perfect  symmetry, 
from  the  earliest  infancy. 

"The  first  stages  of  development  are  always  most 
controlling  and  most  enduring. 

"If  the  exercise  does  not  keep  pace  with  the  growth 
of  the  body,  it  becomes  subject  to  I  know  not  how 
many  infirmities." 

This  is  all  very  well ;  but,  to  obtain  this  result,  it  is 
necessary  to  know  precisely  the  means ;  it  is  necessary, 
in  the  first  place,  to  study  hygienic  movements,  as  re- 
lated to  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  body ; 
otherwise  all  is  uncertainty  and  ignorance,  and  the 
experimenter  is  blind  to  the  true  nature  of  the  means 
which  he  puts  in  practice,  as  of  the  result  which  he 
wishes  to  obtain. 

Bacon. — "The  human  organization,  so  delicate  and 
so  varied,  is  like  a  musical  instrument  of  complicated 
and  exquisite  workmanship,  and  easily  loses  its  har- 
mony. Thus  it  is  with  much  reason  that  the  poets 
unite  in  Apollo  the  arts  of  music  and  of  medicine,  per- 
ceiving that  the  genius  of  the  two  arts  is  almost  iden- 
tical, and  that  the  proper  ofiice  of  the  physician  con- 
sists in  tuning  and  touching  in  such  a  manner  the 
lyre  of  the  human  body  as  that  it  shall  give  forth  only 
sweet  and  harmonious  sounds." 


66  HISTORICAL    SKETCH    OF 

"While  discussing  the  means  of  prolonging  the  ordi- 
nary term  of  human  life,  he  tluis  writes : 

"The  living  man  wastes  continually,  and  continu- 
ally also  repairs  his-  loss.  But  this  reparative  power 
becomes  exhausted,  and  the  man  dies.  To  diminish 
the  activity  of  the  forces  which  weaken  and  destroy, 
to  maintain  the  powder  which  repairs,  to  soften  the  in- 
durated parts,  which  are  opposed  to  the  reparative 
powers,  this  is  to  prolong  human  life,  as  far  as  the 
organization  of  the  body  will  permit." 

As  to  the  different  kinds  of  exercises  which  con- 
tribute most  to  preserve  or  restore  health,  no  physician 
has  yet  been  sufficiently  specific.  Although  there  is 
scarcely  any  predisposition  to  any  disease  which  may 
not  be  corrected  by  certain  well-adapted  exercises,  it 
may  be  mentioned,  by  way  of  example,  that  bowling 
is  valuable  for  diseases  of  the  kidneys;  archery,  for 
those  of  the  lungs  ;  exercise  in  the  open  air,  whether 
on  foot  or  in  a  carriage,  for  a  weak  stomach,  et  cetera. 
"Everything  in  its  own  turn,''  to  the  end  of  the  long 
list  of  ills  to  which  our  flesh  is  heir.  A  random,  indis- 
criminate application  of  these  means  is  rather  hurtful 
than  beneficial.  Quackery  is  as  injurious  here  as  in 
any  other  department  of  practice. 

Geoegii. — "  The  education  of  the  mind  and  that  of 
the  body  are  alike  in  this,  that  they  both  demand  a 
special  method,  founded  upon  the  physiological  action 
of  their  respective  organs. 

"  Hence,  as  education,  moral  or  intellectual,  should 
have  for  its  object  the  exercise  of  those  faculties  whose 
action  is  deficient,  so  jphysical  education  should  con- 
stantly tend  to  produce  and  maintain  an  equilibrium 
between  the  functions  of  the  body,  and  to  have  for  its 
end  the  harmony  of  all  its  operations. 


\ 


THE   PEACTICE   OF   MOVEMENTS.  67 

"  Having,  then,  need  of  a  perfect  body,  let  us  try  to 
secure  that  blessing  by  keeping  up  the  equilibrium  of 
the  functions ;  let  us  multiply  in  ourselves  the  points 
of  intelligent  contact  with  the  whole  of  nature,  and 
we  shall  see  the  princely  powers  of  the  soul  displayed 
in  all  their  magnitude  and  dignity. 

"  The  actual  state  of  man  may  be  considered  as  the 
product  of  the  educational  discipline  to  which  the 
species  has  been  submitted,  from  the  most  remote 
period,  and  also  as  a  lamentable  proof  of  his  departure 
from  the  line  of  rectitude,  and  of  the  degree  of  it  thus 
far." 


68  PHILOSOPHY   OF   MOVEMENTS. 


THE  RELATIONS  OF  CHEMICAL  AN^D  MOLECULAR 
CHAN"GES  TO  THE  ORIGIN  OF  FORCE  IN  THE 
BODY. 

Importance  of  First  Principles. — It  is  needful  to 
study  the  nature,  origin,  and  relations  of  the  powers 
of  the  body  in  order  to  become  j)i'operly  qualified  to 
direct  them  healthward.  For  it  is .  evident  that  the 
kind  of  health  we  possess  must  be  determined  by  the 
kinds  of  actions  that  are  going  on  in  the  elementary 
constituents  of  our  physical  being ;  since  it  is  on  these 
actions  that  the  development  of  the  powers  of  the 
body  depends.  In  other  words,  bodily  health  is  refer- 
able to  conditions  back  of  those  symptoms,  or  good  or 
ill  feelings  which  we  superficially  regard  as  constitu- 
ting the  health ;  namely,  to  those  primary  motions  of 
elementary  matter  that  are  concerned  in  organic 
growth  and  physiological  manifestation;  the  sensorial 
indications  being  the  last  result  of  a  series  of  actions, 
of  which  health  and  happiness  constitute  the  result. 
Hence,  all  medical  control  of  the  health,  of  whatever 
name  or  origin,  essentially  consists  in  a  control  of  these 
elementary  actions,  inasmuch  as  the  causes  of  good  or 
ill  health,  as  we  have  seen,  reside  in  these.  Such  med- 
ical practice  as  does  not  recognize  the  changes  induced 
by  its  agency  on  these  primary  actions,  as  the  basis  and 
explanation  of  its  jDower,  is  empirical.  It  appeals 
chiefly  to  the   sensations,  which  are   ever  to  be   dis- 


THILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEME^'TS.  69 

trusted  in  the  invalid,  and  in  tlie  end  always  prove  un- 
Avorthy  of  reliance.  AVliile  the  invalid  is  made  com- 
fortable bj  means  of  a  drug,  he  is  to  be  satisfied  that 
its  effects  are  good,  and  is  disinclined  to  investigate 
further.  Medical  science  must  remain  untrustworthy, 
and  continue  incompetent  to  command  the  regard  of  the 
philosophic  mind,  so  long  as  it  overlooks  scientific  prin- 
ciples in  its  search  for  remedies,  and  is  not  ashamed  to 
ignore  the  first  truths  of  physiology,  or  pour  contempt 
upon  the  simplest  dictates  of  enlightened  reason. 

To  establish  and  maintain  two  great  forces  is  the 
main  object  of  all  the  operations  of  the  human  system. 
These  are  the  'mechanical  and  nervous  forces.  All  the 
corporeal  functions  and  actions,  of  whatever  kind,  are 
subservient  to  these  chief  purposes;  and  in  the  muscu- 
lar and  nervous  systems  it  provides  organs  or  instru- 
ments through  which  these  powers  are  manifested. 
The  one  set  of  organs  includes  the  great  mass  of  the 
flesh  of  the  body  covering  the  skeleton,  while  the  other 
set  is,  by  its  filaments,  extensively  and  minutely  dis- 
tributed to  the  muscles,  as  well  as  to  all  other  parts, 
besides  existing  in  distinct  local  masses,  in  the  head 
and  central  portions  of  the  body.  The  nervous  forces 
are  of  several  distinct  kinds  or  classes,  each  sustaining 
peculiar  relationships  to  the  organism,  but  all  asso- 
ciated in  one  grand  unit.  These  classes  are,  the  senso- 
rial and  intellectual,  relating  to  the  mind ;  the  reflex, 
connecting  the  mind  and  senses  with  the  muscles,  the 
medium  of  mechanical  power;  and  the  organic,  relat- 
ing to  the  various  agencies  concerned  in  the  processes 
of  growth. 

These  powerful  instruments  are  evidently  tlie  means 
intended  for  the  manifestation  of  the  individuality  and 
distinctive  character  of  the  man,  the  grade  and  quality 


70  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

of  liis  being.  It  is  throiigli  tliese  that  lie  impresses 
surround iiig  tilings,  acts  upon  tliem  in  a  tliousand 
ways,  modifies  tlieir  relations  to  assist  his  purposes, 
and  secures  through  their  use  the  objects  of  his  own  de- 
sires. It  is  through  the  use  of  these  agents,  also,  that 
he  fathoms  the  designs  of  nature  and  of  God,  discover- 
ing the  laws  that  appertain  to  surrounding  things  and 
to  his  own  spiritual  nature.  The  possession  of  these 
powers  fulfills  in  him  his  utmost  desires,  and  he  can 
covet  nothing  more  as  respects  the  quality  of  these 
powers.  They  are  capable  of  a  progressive  and  al- 
most limitless  expansion,  at  least  this  may  be  said  of 
those  belonging  to  the  nervous  system.  But  they  may 
act  inharmoniously,  feebly,  painfully,  or  antagonist- 
ically. 

The  latter  condition  constitutes  disease.  As  a  man's 
possibilities  of  power  in  this  mortal  state  can  not  be 
realized  without  instruments,  so  will  they  find  imper- 
fect expression  through  imperfect  instruments.  Hence 
we  must  go  to  the  source  of  these  manifestations,  if  we 
would  correct  or  improve  them  whenever  they  are  im- 
perfect or  defective. 

To  improve  these  capabilities,  and  to  train  them  to 
their  proper  uses,  is,  in  short,  to  put  an  individual  in 
possession  of  himself.  Ill  health  is  evidence  of  loss  of 
such  control ;  medical  efiPorts  are  merely  endeavors  to 
restore  this  control. 

In  order  to  acquire  balance  and  perfection  in  the 
powers  of  the  mind,  the  necessity  of  training  them  by 
due  exercise,  we  have  seen,  has  been  acknowledged  in 
society  in  all  its  grades,  from  the  most  rudimental  up 
to  the  most  civilized.  This  is  everywhere  the  burden 
of  the  precept,  and  is  taught  in  the  examples  of  the 
most  advanced  minds.     This  principle  is  the  basis  of 


THILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  71 

all  wise  education ;  it  is  that  wliicli  raises  men  from  the 
condition  of  the  savage,  who  knows  only  to  supply  his 
immediate  animal  wants  by  the  most  simple  and  direct 
means,  to  that  of  civilized  society,  with  its  manifold 
resources  for,  and  high  appreciation  of,  intellectual  en- 
joyments— to  that,  indeed,  of  philosophers,  and  ex- 
pounders of  the  most  important  truths  of  life  and 
nature. 

The  importance  of  this  training  by  exercises  is  also 
conceded  by  most  men — it  is,  indeed,  so  generally  ad- 
mitted as  to  make  any  argument  in  its  favor  apj^arently 
unnecessary  for  the  purpose  of  arousing  a  proper  sense 
of  its  value  as  a  means  of  cure.  The  obligation  to 
labor,  in  some  sphere  of  genial  activity,  w^as  kindly 
imposed  on  all  men  by  nature  at  the  beginning,  and  a 
sufficient  penalty  is  sure  to  be  visited  upon  all  who 
transgress  this  primal  law.  Men  in  all  states  of  so- 
ciety fully  understand  this  principle ;  but  they  recog- 
nize it  only  in  a  general  way,  and  scarcely  ever  in- 
quire as  to  the  laws  of  exercise,  its  bounds,  and  its 
special  applications. 

The  physical  exercise  imposed  by  the  necessity  of 
supplying  food  and  shelter,  and  of  compassing  the 
various  ends  of  ambition,  has  served  very  tolerably 
the  coincident  but  incidental  purpose  of  developing 
both  the  physical  and  moral  manhood  of  the  race. 
Yet  the  laws  respecting  the  effects  upon  the  instru- 
ments of  these  powers  themselves,  and  upon  the  con- 
nected and  dependent  functions  produced  by  the  dif- 
ferent modes  of  manifesting  the  bodily  powers,  are 
generally  too  imperfectly  understood  to  be  made  avail- 
able. 

These  Forces  a  Peoduct  of  YriAL  Action. — ^Though 


72  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

we  may  not  define  correctly  what  life  is^  yet  we  may 
understand  wdiat  it  does^  and  what  are  the  conditions 
of  its  highest  development.  The  powers  above  de- 
scribed are  the  last  products  of  a  series  of  operations 
referable  to  this  principle.  These  operations  are  con- 
ducted through  material  agencies,  are  chemical  in  a 
certain  phase  of  their  effects,  and  are  influenced  by 
the  chemical  nature  of  the  agents  that  take  part  in 
them.  The  development  of  life  and  of  the  forces 
here  considered  is  inseparably  connected  with  ele- 
mental changes  that  are  continuously  going  on  in  the 
system.  .  These  changes  are  kept  in  continuance  by 
constant  supplies  of  new  material,  which  enjoys  only  a 
temporary  residence  in  the  body,  being  excluded  from 
it  in  connection  with  the  evolution  of  the  above-named 
forces,  giving  place  to  fresh  material  of  a  similar  kind 
that  is  as  constantly  provided.  Vitality  is  an  endow- 
ment of  matter  of  the  most  transient  kind ;  it  is  little 
more  than  the  expression  of  the  changes  matter  under- 
goes while  in  the  body,  both  in  regard  to  forin  and 
chemical  composition.  Hence  it  is  apparent  that  what- 
ever influence  modifies  the  health,  whether  for  good 
or  for  ill,  efiects  this  result  by  modifying  in  some 
way  those  elementary  changes  whereby  vital  power  is 
evolved. 

The  vital  acts  through  which  animal  power  is  mani- 
fested may  be  included  under  the  general  term,  nutri- 
tion. The  term  nutrition  covers  the  total  process 
whereby  the  integrity  of  the  organism  is  preserved, 
during  its  interstitial  changes.  It  consists  of  many  dis- 
tinct actions,  whether  chemically  or  physiologically 
considered ;  but  these  are  resolvable  into  two  general 
classes,  which,  in  health,  are  nicely  balanced.  These 
acts  are  variously  named  construction  and  dest/ruction 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  73 

of    organic   forms ;    assimilation   and    disintegration ; 
composition  and  decomposition,  etc.,  etc. 

In  effecting  these  functional  acts  two  distinct 
classes  of  materials  are  employed  in  the  body,  both  of 
which  are  conveyed  to  the  scene  of  vital  activity  by 
the  blood.  These  are  food  and  oxygen ;  one  entering 
the  blood  through  the  stomach,  by  means  of  digestion, 
the  other  through  the  lungs,  by  respiration. 

The  general  office  of  these  materials  is  to  maintain 
the  actions  that  produce  the  two  classes  of  effects 
under  consideration,  the  food  to  build  up,  and  the 
oxygen  to  change,  by  its  chemical  power,  the  composi- 
tion of  organic  bodies,  and  to  reduce  them,  at  last,  to 
the  state  in  which  they  find  their  exit  from  the  body. 
\Ye  may  be  able  better  to  appreciate  the  extent  of 
these  operations  by  estimating  the  quantity  of  the 
materials  that  are  employed  in  conducting  them.  Ac- 
cording to  Draper,  the  water  taken  into  the  system  of 
a  man  weighing  140  pounds,  in  the  course  of  the 
twenty-four  hours  amounts  to  4.1  lbs. ;  the  dry  food, 
2.25  lbs. ;  the  oxygen,  2.19  lbs. ;  the  whole  amounting  to 
about  eight  and  a  half  pounds  of  material  every  day, 
furnished  the  system  to  sustain  its  powers.  A  propor- 
tionate amount,  we  discover,  is  discharged  from  the 
body  in  the  same  time,  there  being  no  increase  of  its 
weight.  But  in  the  mean  time  these  materials  have 
become  greatly  changed  in  consequence  of  chemical 
combinations  with  each  other.  About  a  pound  and 
a  half  of  water  has  been  produced  in  the  course  of 
these  combinations,  half  a  pound  of  carbon  has  been 
dismissed  through  the  lungs,  and  a  great  variety  of  or- 
ganic and  earthy  salts  have  been  concocted  in  the  sys- 
tem and  drained  off  by  the  kidneys.  To  convey  oxy- 
gen and  nutriment  to  the  changing  structures,  -about 

4 


74  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

twenty-live  pounds  of  blood  have  been  kept  in  unceas- 
ing circulation  through  all,  even  to  tlie  minutest 
channels  of  the  body ;  and  about  twenty-one  pounds 
of  solvent  juices  have  been  poured  into  the  digestive 
canal  to  effect  the  solution  of  the  food,  to  be  again  ab- 
sorbed into  the  blood. 

But  a  view  of  the  results  and  the  means  of  transforma- 
tion in  the  body  conveys  but  a  very  inadequate  concep- 
tion of  the  amount  and  extent  of  the  change  produced. 
For  the  final  eliminatory  product  is  generally  the  last 
result  of  a  series  of  changes  that  must  occur  in  regu- 
lar order.  So  the  food  and  oxygen  received  into  the 
system  enter  into  many  distinct  states  of  union,  dur- 
ing their  residence  in  the  system,  each  of  which  is 
necessary  to  the  advancement  of  the  vital  interests, 
while  it  forms  a  step  toward  their  final  dismissal  from 
the  body.  At  each  of  these  stages  of  jDrogress,  malign 
influences  will  cause  a  deviation  of  the  action,  as  wcLl 
as  of  the  product  of  action,  from  the  physiological 
standard;  the  healthful  process  will  be  arrested,  and 
other  actions  are  substituted,  which  defeat  the  great 
end  of  evolving  the  forces  mentioned ;  the  perfect  evo- 
lution of  which  it  is  the  aim  of  all  physiological  actions 
to  accomplish.  Disease  is  a  deviation  from  the  usual 
and  prescribed  processes  of  atomic  change. 

Since  the  chief  intention  of  the  processes  within  the 
body  is  either  to  build  up  or  to  demolish,  it  follows 
that  all  the  influences  brought  into  relation  with  the 
organism  must  tend  to  promote  one  or  the  other  of 
these  results.  Such  is  the  normal  intention  of  food  and 
oxygen,  both  of  which  are  received  into  the  system  in 
about  equal  quantities  by  weight.  The  product  of  the 
digestion  of  food  is  employed  in  the  organizing  pro- 
cesses, while  the  oxygen  aids  in  dissolving  the  organ- 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  T5 

ized  molecule  into  a  soluble  or  volatile  form,  whereby 
its  egress  from  the  system  is  determined.  According 
to  the  physiological  plan  of  the  system,  such  matters 
are  applied  to  these  specific  purposes,  and  thus  fulfill 
the  intentions  of  ]N^ature  in  respect  to  the  development 
of  the  forces  of  which  we  are  treating. 

When  the  influences  exerted  upon  the  physiological 
processes  are  such  as  to  promote  equally  and  properly 
these  actions  of  waste  and  renewal^  through  the  use  of 
the  legitimate  materials  prescribed  by  the  laws  of  or- 
ganization, health  is  the  necessary  consequence.  The 
theory  and  practice  of  the  principles  concerned  in  the 
maintenance  of  health  are  included  in  the  term  Hy- 
giene. 

By  Remedial  Hygiene  is  understood  the  intelligent 
application  of  certain  principles  and  agents  for  the 
restoration  of  lost  or  impaired  health.  The  employ- 
ment of  Movements  is  a  powerful  means  of  directing  or 
enforcing  nutrition.  Movements  are  a  device  for  aid- 
ing the  organism  in  its  elforrs  to  derive  sustenance  from 
suitable  materials,  and  for  assisting  the  exit  of  waste 
matters  ;  and  they  thus  constitute  a  special  application 
of  hygiene  ;  while  hygiene,  in  general,  embraces  the 
means  that  in  health  are  influential  to  control  the  waste 
and  renewal  of  the  body. 

All  substances  incapable  of  supporting  the  growth 
of  the  vital  parts,  if  not  absolutely  neutral  in  their  re- 
lations to  them,  will  modify  and  generally  accelerate 
the  wasting  processes  of  the  body.  Such,  indisputably, 
are  the  eff'ects  of  drugs.  When  the  living  molecule  is 
forced  into  unwilling  contact  with  a  drug  which  has 
been  introduced  into  the  system,  one  of  two  eff'ects 
must  ensue :  the  natural  affinity  of  the  molecule  for 
oxygen   is  increased,  or  else  it  is  impressed  by  the 


76  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

chemical  or  mechanical  power  of  the  foreign  and  un- 
friendly substance.  The  peculiar  symptoms  that  appear 
are  either  the  result  of  the  unusual  waste  and  of  the 
consequent  rapid  evolution  of  the  reserve  powers  of  the 
organ,  or  the  quality  of  the  intermediate  forms  of  wast- 
ing matter  is  made  to  differ  more  or  less  widely  from 
that  of  the  normal  and  usual  series  of  products  ;  thus 
rendering  the  ejection  of  these  matters  less  easy,  dis- 
tending, as  a  consequence,  the  capillaries  of  the  part, 
and  impressing  both  its  organic  and  sensitive  nerves  in 
a  peculiar  and  painful  manner.  The  cases  of  spon- 
taneous or  accidental  disease,  and  the  artificial  effects 
produced  by  drugs,  are  admitted  to  be  very  similar. 
Hence,  drugs  are  classed  accordingly  as  their  effects 
correspond  with  certain  pathological  conditions  ;  but 
they  may  be  considered  as  in  general  favoring  the 
chemical  changes  in  the  body,  sometimes  accelerating, 
sometimes  impeding  the  manifestation  of  power,  but 
never  promoting  any  conditions  calculated  to  induce 
the  production  of  that  power,  by  contributing  to  the 
j^rimary  organizing  processes.  But  this  organic  growth 
is  the  first  condition  for  the  manifestation  of  vital 
power,  and,  indeed,  one  without  which  such  power 
can  not  be  manifested  in  any  degree. 

To  the  securing  of  health,  then,  it  appears  to  be  in- 
dispensable that  the  interstitial  changes  taking  place  in 
the  body  shall  be  those  which  can  proceed  only  in  a 
normal  condition  of  the  organism.  To  effect  this  pur- 
pose, the  incentives  to  the  changes  must  be  physio- 
logical in  their  nature. 

Tlie  existence  of  the  profession  of  medicine  rests  upon 
the  general  belief  in  or  on  the  tacit  consent  of  the  world 
to  the  notion  that  the  operations  of  the  human  system 
can  be  favorably  excited  or  controlled  by  the  employ- 


PHILOSOPHY  OF  move:ments.  7v 

ment  of  various  agents  ;  and  accordingly  the  ingenuity 
of  man  has  always  been  severely  tasked  for  tlie  discov- 
ery of  such  agents  ;  but  to  this  day  the  toil  and  search 
have  been  unrewarded  l)y  any  result  universally  satis- 
factory. These  remedial  means  have  generally  been 
of  a  character  calculated  either  to  promote,  as  their 
primary  eflect,  the  disorganizing  02:)erations  of  the 
body,  or  else  to  produce  certain  chemical  effects  with- 
out necessarily  effecting  the  desired  elimination  of  the 
refuse  products,  carlonic  acid^  water,  and  urea ;  afford- 
ing also  no  assistance  to  the  organized  agencies. 

Better  results  must  be  attained  when  the  means  em- 
ployed shall  directly  evolve  the  proper  product,  which 
shall  be  at  once  liberated  from  the  system,  and  in  the 
same  act  shall  promote  in  the  highest  practicable  de- 
gree the  activity  of  the  organizing  or  reproducing 
forces.  "W^e  must  confine  our  researches,  in  pursuance 
of  this  purpose,  to  an  investigation  of  the  conditions  of 
perfect  health,  instead  of  vainly  searching  for  some  won- 
derful specific,  or  panacea,  or  divine  balsam  among  sub- 
stances whose  demonstrable  effect  on  vitalized  matter 
is  only  and  forever  to  deteriorate  and  destroy. 

DiFFEEENT  KiNDs  OF  MoTioN. — The  clicmical  changes, 
or  changes  of  quality  in  the  organic  tissues  of  the  body, 
always  imply  change  of  place  or  motion.  By  motion, 
all  vital  phenomena  are  accomplished.  But  this  mo- 
tion consists  of  many  kinds,  or  is  presented  to  us  in 
different  phases,  each  bearing  its  individual  relation, 
and  being  equally  indispensable  to  the  welfare  of  the 
vital  whole. ^ 

*  Beclard  gives  the  following  summary  of  the  natural  internal  movements  of  the 
body,  a  careful  perusal  of  which  will  be  advantageous  to  the  studious  reader : 

Cerebro~spinal  anis  in  the  region  of  the  neck:  movement  of  alternate  razsing' 
2inA  falling ;  a  kind  of  oscillation  of  the  encephalic  mass. 


7s  PHILOSOPHY    OF    M0VE:MEXT3. 

1.  The  first  variety  of  triese  motions  is  that  already 
described  as  being  conducted  among  the  elementary 
constituents  of  the  body,  and  involving  changes  in  the 
composition  of  organized  parts  ;  this  is  chemical  action. 
Here  motion  occurs  through  the  displacement  of  the 
ultimate  atoms,  and,  as  we  have  said,  it  \&  the  inevita- 
ble consequence  of  such  displacement. 

Chemical  action  proceeds  within  the  system  on  a 
scale  of  magnitude  of  which  the  sensible  products  af- 
ford us  but  an  imperfect  indication,  since  we  can  know 
only  the  last  of  a  series  of  actions  of  which  chemical 
power  is  the  first  cause.  Some  of  these  actions  are  but 
the  concomitants  of  vital  changes,  of  which  vitality 
only  supplies  the  conditions,  the  action  itself  being, 
meanwhile,  independent  of  vitality.  We  might  in- 
stance the  metamorphosis  of  tissues,  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  oxydation  of  hydro-carbons  on  the  other,  as 

Spinal  and  sympathetic  movement  of  the  nervous  fibers  from  the  circumference 
to  the  center,  and  from  the  center  to  the  circumference ;  movements  reflex  and 
sympathetic ;  movements  of  undulation  and  vibration,  of  quivering,  of  shuddering. 

Hespiration,  inspiration,  and  exjAration. 

Eelated  with  inspiration  :  inhaling,  expanding 

Eelated  with  expiration  :  voice,  speech,  singing,  crying,  whistling,  explosion 
of  breath  in  excretory  efforts,  yawning,  coughing,  laughing,  sneezing,  sighing,  sob- 
bing, hiccough. 

Fenstaltlc  movements  of  the  stomach,  commencins  at  the  large  curve,  and  Anti- 
peristaltic  a'  the  small.  The  revolution  is  completed  in  two  or  three  minutes. 
Concentric  movement  is  that  which  takes  place  in  the  circular  fibers  of  the  lesser 
end  of  this  organ. 

Small  Intestine. — Progressive  movement  of  the  alimentary  mass,  conducted  by 
the  loui?itudinal  and  circular  fibers  of  the  intestine.  The  contraction  is  local,  and 
moderate  in  force.  The  movements  of  the  large  intestines  resemble  those  of  the 
small,  but  are  slower. 

Organ  of  the  Circulation.  Heart:  m.oxevL\eni  of  systole  findi  of  diastole.  These 
movemen's  are  correlative,  and  resemble  those  of  a  forcing-pump,  the  contraction 
of  the  walls  of  the  heart  answering  to  the  operations  of  the  piston,  and  plugged  by 
its  valves. 

Movements  of  tension  and  distention;  of  torsion,  pulsation  ;  of  shock,  palpitation. 

Arteries  and  capillaries  :  eccentric  circulation. 

Veins :  concentric  circulation. 

Movements  of  electricity,  contraction,  compression,  tension,  distention,  resist- 
ance, remittence,  intermittence,  rubbing,  etc. 


PHILOSOPHY    OF   MOVEMENTS.  79 

interesting   examples   of  these  varieties   of    chcniical 
action. 

2.  Growth^  or  the  reproduction  of  the  wasting  parts 
of  the  body,  under  the  inspiration  of  vitality,  may  also 
be  regarded  as  a  peculiar  kind  of  action,  involving 
unceasing  motion.  In  this  action,  the  materials  of 
growth,  existing  in  a  soluble  state  in  the  blood,  are 
discharged  through  the  membranes  of  the  vessels,  and 
the  elementary  constituents  rearranged  in  a  new  form, 
generally  without  a  very  material  change  in  their  pro- 
portions. The  matter  in  this  instance  assumes,  under 
certain  mysterious  laws,  the  primary  organic  forms 
which,  by  repetition,  build  up  or  reproduce  the  various 
organs. 

3.  Muscular  action,  it  has  been  discovered,  results 
from  a  motion  of  contractility  peculiar  to  the  cells  con- 
stituting muscular  fibrillse.  These  motions  are  found  to 
be  merely  results  of  a  change  in  their  shape,  by  flat- 
tening of  the  little  cells  in  such  a  way  that  while  their 
length  is  diminished,  their  diameter  is  augmented. 

4.  The  above  motion,  so  inconsiderable  in  itself,  re- 
sults at  last  in  that  most  conspicuous  of  corporeal  mo- 
tions, namely,  that  of  a  change  of  place  effected  by  the 
whole  body  or  of  one  or  more  of  its  members.  When 
a  muscle  contracts,  we  knovv^  it  carries  the  whole  mass 
of  bones,  nerves,  vessels,  areolar  tissue,  fluids,  etc.,  of 
which  the  moving  part  is  composed,  along  with  it 
through  space,  besides  changing,  in  some  degree,  the 
relations  of  these  parts  to  each  other. 

5.  To  the  fluids  of  the  body  is  imparted  a  motion  by 
this  muscular  action.  This  motion  of  the  blood  is  in 
fact  required  as  a  means  of  inducing  this  very  muscular 
action.  And  the  circulation  of  the  blood  throuMiout 
the   system  is   supported  by  the  joint  action  of  the 


80  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOYEMEin'S. 

coiintless  and  constant   motions   taking   place  in  the 
substance  of  the  various  tissues. 

6.  By  means  of  the  force  communicated  by  the  mus- 
cular action  of  their  walls,  the  contents  of  the  canals 
of  the  body  are  caused  to  flow  in  regular  tides  through 
these  or£:ans  in  the  direction  of  the  outlets.  In  this 
way  those  matters  for  which  the  system  has  no  use  are 
ejected. 

7.  The  walls  of  the  chest  and  of  the  arterial  blood- 
vessels have  an  established  and  rythmical  motion  in 
health.  The  one  is  designed  to  refresh  the  blood,  and 
the  other  mainly  to  assist  the  circulation  of  this  fluid 
throughout  the  body. 

Recipkocitt  of  Actions. — 'Tlie  different  motions  of 
which  the  body  is  the  sphere,  constitute  that  connected 
series  of  activities  which  it  is  the  function  of  Physiol- 
ogy to  explain.  Their  action  is  wonderfully  compli- 
cated, and  they  all  have  a  part  to  play  in  the  develop- 
ment of  that  grand  mechanical  force^  the  countless 
muscles  and  nerves  with  which  our  bodies  are  supplied. 
An  impediment  to  the  fuMllment  of  any  one  of  these 
actions  necessarily  vitiates  them  all,  just  as  one  defect- 
ive link  weakens  the  whole  chain.  In  one  respect 
these  simultaneous  motions  resemble  the  successive 
elemental  actions  of  the  chemical  state,  before  alluded 
to.  All  interference  with  the  regular  vital  processes 
renders  imperfect  those  several  conditions  of  organic 
growth  upon  which  all  power  absolutely  depends. 

An  important  principle  is  now  to  be  noticed,  to  wit, 
that  the  expenditure  of  power  is  neces^niry  to  its  very 
evolution.  This  expenditure  is  the  phenomenon  con- 
templated in  the  entire  train  of  actions  above  alluded 
to,  and  without  this  there  can  be  no  mechanical  mo- 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  *      81 

tion,  no  molecular  motion,  no  organic  and  no  chemical 
action  ;  and  no  demand,  therefore,  made  npon  the  di- 
gestive organs,  or  npon  the  respiratory  function. 

The  reader  must  not  infer  from  this  statement  that 
all  function  ceases  with  the  cessation  of  voluntary  mo- 
tion, or  with  the  suspension  of  the  will.  Provision  is 
made  against  any  such  fatal  accident.  In  the  economy 
of  the  system  it  so  liap])ens  that  a  large  amount  of  its 
muscular  action  is  carried  on  involuntarily  for  the 
si^ecial  furtherance  of  its  organic  operations.  This  is 
particularly  true  of  all  the  rythmical  motions,  snch  as 
the  movements  of  the  chest,  diaphragm,  and  abdom- 
inal mnscles  in  respiration ;  of  the  heart  and  arteries  ; 
of  the  alimentary  tube,  etc. 

While,  then,  the  living  body  may  be  regarded  as  an 
admirablv  arrano'ed  theater  in  which  these  various 
motor  forces  have  their  full  and  harmonious  play,  mus- 
cular motion  must  be  considered  as  the  great  main- 
spring of  all  the  others.  It  certainly  sets  in  operation 
many  kinds  of  action  ;  many  seem  to  depend  on  it  as 
their  chief  stimulant,  and  others  appear  to  radiate  from 
it  as  from  a  central  force.  By  this  far-reaching  power 
of  its  own  it  controls  to  a  good  extent  all  the  motions 
of  the  alimentary  atoms,  and  disposes  of  them  to  the 
highest  advantage  of  the  whole  system. 

J^ature,  in  her  arrangements  for  the  welfare  of  her 
children,  saw  fit  to  select  motion  as  a  chief  means  for 
the  maintenance  of  the  physiological  harmonies  of  the 
body,  and  for  the  restoration  of  these  harmonies  and 
the  health  they  confer,  in  cases  in  which  the  latter  have 
been  lost  through  accident  or  imprudence.* 

*  Leehmann  corroborates  this  view  of  the  influence  of  motion  in  the  following 
passage :  '•  Albinus  took  no  superficial  view  of  the  organic  activity  in  nature, 
when  he  established  the  axiom,  that  the  essence  of  vital  force  consisted  in  motion. 

4.^ 


82  PHILOSOniY    OF    ilOYEMENTS. 

The  System  as  a  Reseryoik  of  Force. — ^The  system, 
in  health,  is  capable  of  siq^plying  force  at  a  certain 
rate^  determined  by  the  degree  of  perfection  in  whicli 
its  organic  processes  are  conducted.  These  processes 
are  always,  with  more  or  less  effect,  engaged  in  pro- 
ducing force.  J^ow,  if  this  force  be  expended  in  a 
single  channel,  the  production  will  probably  about 
equal  the  expenditure  ;  but  if  in  several  channels  at 
the  same  time,  the  expenditure  must  not  only  exceed 
the  production,  but  will  even  exhaust  the  reserved  sup- 
ply which  the  healthy  system  always  possesses.  This 
state  of  things  is  denoted  by  the  feeling  we  call  fa- 
tigue. 

In  the  invalid,  the  force  production  is  more  or  less 
limited.  This  is  a  necessary  result  of  disease.  Hence, 
such  exercises  as  involve  a  large  portion  of  the  system 
at  one  time  are  harmful,  because  they  are  sure  to  ex- 
haust the  reserve  fund  of  force,  which  is  not  readily 
restored  by  the  defective  organic  processes,  and  so  the 
disease  will  be  increased  in  our  very  efforts  perhaps  to 
quell  it.  But  if  the  exertion  be  confined  to  a  single 
instrument  or  organ,  or  to  a  single  set  of  muscles,  the 
expenditure  of  force  is  made  to  correspond  more  nearly 
with  its  production  ;  the  system  is  not  fatigued,  but  is 
refreshed,  because  the  movements  have  helped  to  sup- 


Even  if  this  expression  be  far  too  general  for  organic  action,  it  can  not  be  denied  that 
-we  assume  life  to  exist  wherever  we  perceive  a  constant  alternation  of  phenomena 
and  incessant  changes  induced  by  the  constant  motion  of  the  molecules  of  the  or- 
ganized body,  as  well  as  of  the  organs  themselves.     ***** 

"  Metamorphoses  are  continually  developed  in  the  material  substrata  of  the  body. 
Physical  forces  continue  to  act  upon  matter  after  it  has  attained  its  position  of  equi- 
librium, for  it  is  only  by  opposite  actions  that  equilibrium  exists.  ****** 
The  case  is  very  different  when  motion  occurs  in  oriianized  bodies,  for  here  we  find 
a  tendency  to  persistence;  everything  that  is  brought  into  the  line  of  the  direction 
of  these  concurrent  forces  is  impelled  to  a  similar  motion,  and  equilibrium  will  not 
be  produced,  for  equilibrium  is  rest,  and  in  rest  there  is  no  life,  and  in  equilibrium 
there  is  death."— Vol.  ii.,  pp.  210,  211. 


I'HILOSOPHY    OF    M')\EMENTS. 


83 


ply  the  true  and  proper  conditions  for  the  production 
or  augmentation  of  the  life-power. 


Desckiption  of  Muscle. — Tlie  mere  fact  of  muscle 
entering  so  largely  into  the  composition  of  tlie  system, 
would  indicate  to  any  mind  its  importance  in  the 
physical  economy.  This  tissue  constitutes  more  than 
half  of  the  weight  and  bulk  of  the  body.  It  has  but  a 
single  function,  and  that  is,  as  it  is  technically  termed, 
contraction^  or  the  approximation  of  the  extremities  ; 
for  experiments  show  that  the  bulk  is  unvarying.  By 
contracting,  and  in  proportion  to  the  vigor  of  the  con- 
traction, muscle  is  capable  of  moving  the  bones  and 
other  appendages  with  which  it  is  connected.  It  also 
Icrms  the  walls  of  the  hollow  organs,  and,  by  contract- 
ing, lessens  the  caliber  of  such  organs,  and  impels  their 
contents  onward.  The  muscles  are  crowded  with  blood- 
vessels, the  larger  trunks  of  which  pass  through,  and 
the  smaller  are  distributed  within  them  for  the  supply 
of  nutrient  matter.  They  are  connected  together  by 
an  areolar  structure,  consisting  of  elastic  filaments, 
forming  a  network  around  them,  which  serves  the 
double  purpose  of  at  once  binding  them  together  and 
^*^-  ^-  keeping  them  separate. 

^':iJ  Muscular  fiber,  showing  the  cells ;  a  aa,  the 
''  ±  waves  of  contraction,  showing  the  flattening 
of  the  cells ;  b  b  b,  similar  waves,  engaged  in 
still  stronger  contraction,  traveling  along  the 
fiber,  and  causing  it  to  be  thicker  at  the  con- 
tracting portions. 

Muscle  is  visibly  distin- 
guished from  other  structures 
by  its  red  color.  Masses  of 
muscle  are  divided  longitudi- 
nally into  parallel  fibers,  visi- 


84:  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

ble  to  the  naked  eje,  whicli  are  again  divided  into 
exceedingly  minute  iibrillse  ;  and  these  fibrillge  are 
crossed  by  transverse  stripes  wbicli  seem  to  divide  each 
of  them  into  microscopic  dimensions.  These  cubes  are 
the  ultimate  muscle-cells.  In  the  act  of  contraction 
these  cubes  are  flattened,  and  at  the  same  time  become 
proportion  ably  broader. 

The  contraction  of  a  muscle  is  effected  by  the  con- 
traction separately  of  the  fibers  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed. These  fibers  act  through  only  a  portion  of 
their  length  at  the  same  moment ;  the  contractions 
seeming  to  travel  from  one  portion  to  another  of  the 
fibrils,  each  portion  becoming  relaxed  as  the  action 
travels  beyond  it.  This  becomes  an  important  fact  in 
the  curative  application  of  movements,  as  we  shall  see. 

Muscular  contraction  never  takes  place  independ- 
ently of  an  exciting  cause  or  stimulus.  The  power 
efi*ecting  this  act  is  derived  from  the  nerves  distributed 
to  the  muscular  structure.  Tliese  nerves  for  the  volun- 
tary muscles  have  their  origin  in  the  spinal  axis,  and 
are  also  generally  connected  with  the  seat  of  the  will. 
So  that  impressions  received  from  without  the 
body  by  the  sensitive  nerves,  and  those  originating  in 
the  mind,  are  capable  of  directly  inducing  muscular 
action,  and  consequently  motion,  in  all  the  organs  that 
are  connected  with  them. 

M.  Beclaed  gives  thus,  with  much  clearness,  the 
chemical  phenomena  which  attend  muscular  contrac- 
tion: 

"  The  muscles  develop  a  certain  quantity  of  heat  at 
the  moment  of  contracting.  The  researches  of  MM. 
Bequerel  and  Beeschet,  and  those  more  recent  of  M. 
Helmholtz,  have  placed  the  fact  beyond  doubt,  that  the 
muscles  during  their  contraction,  as  aJso  during  their 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  85 

state  fifrej^ose,  absorb  oxygen  and  form  carbonic  acid.  > 
During  contraction,  the  absorption  of  oxygen  and  cx-> 
halation  of  carbonic  acid  is  doubled." 

MM.  Du  Bois-Eaymond,  Liebig,  Yalentine,  and 
Matteueci  have  demonstrated  satisfactorily  the  fact 
by  placing  the  members  of  an  animal  in  a  space  ex- 
posed to  a  known  gaseous  composition.  The  chemical 
phenomena  of  oxydation  are  then  manifested  in- the 
muscles,  and  these  phenomena  increase  during  contrac- 
tion.  M.  Helmholtz  caused  a  musclar  group  to  contract 
by  aid  of  a  powerful  induction-current  for  a  long  time, 
till  exhaustion  occurred ;  he  then  examined  the  chemi- 
cal constitution  of  the  muscular  fiber,  and  found  that 
the  soluble  materials  contained  in  the  muscle  (creatin, 
creatnine,  and  inosic  acid)  had  increased  in  proportion 
when  compared  with  other  muscles  that  had  been  in 
repose  of  the  same  animal.  Du  Bois-Raymond 
proved,  on  the  other  hand,  tliat  when  a  muscle  remains 
for  a  long  time  at  rest,  it  has  a  neutral  reaction,  and 
that  its  reaction  becomes  acid  after  repeated  contrac- 
tions. The  absorption  of  oxygen  increases  in  a  con-  ^ 
tracting  muscle,  and  the  action  has  the  effect  of  trans-  '\ 
forming  a  part  of  the  muscle  into  an  oxydized  product, 
and  this  oxydation  is  the  cause  of  the  elevation  of  tem-  ^ 
perature  observed. 

In  muscular  action,  generally,  the  products  of  com- 
bustion formed  in  the  muscles  pass  toward  the  blood, 
and  are  carried  off  by  the  excretory  passages ;  we  have 
also  seen  that,  in  exercise,  the  products  of  expiration 
and  the  products  of  urinary  secretion  are  increased. 

Physiological  Effects  of  Exercise. — It  will  be 
necessary  to  particularize  at  some  length  the  more  di- 
rect and  distinct  effects  of  muscular  contraction,  in  or- 


86  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOYEIMENTS. 

der  to  bring  out  more  clearly  to  the  mind  its  claims  to 
attention  as  an  im^Dortant  hygenic  and  remedial  agent. 

Effects  of  Musculae  Contkaction  ois"  the  Local 
Circulation. — Muscular  Contraction  affords  powerful 
aid  to  the  local  circulation  of  the  parts  in  which  it  takes 
place,  in  several  distinct  ways.  1st.  Materials  pass 
from  the  arterial  to  the  venous  side  of  the  circulation 
according  to  a  law  common  to  all  vital  tissues.  This 
occurs  at  a  rate  directly  proportionate  to  the  vital  ac- 
tivity. 2d.  The  effect  of  the  pressure  of  the  con- 
tracting muscle  upon  the  blood-vessels  that  penetrate 
it,  or  that  are  contiguous,  is  to  hasten  the  flow  of  the 
contents  of  these  vessels.  The  tendency  to  displace- 
ment of  these  contents  can  only  operate  in  the  direc- 
tion allowed  by  the  valves  of  the  veins  ;  that  is,  in  the 
heari-ward  direction.  At  the  moment  the  contraction 
ceases,  the  vessels  of  the  part  contain  less  blood  ;  but 
the  pressure  from  the  arterial  side  instantly  supplies 
the  part  more  abundantly,  so  as  to  distend  the  vessels. 
This  is  the  condition  favorable  for  the  effusion  of  the 
N\\dX  plasma  of  the  blood  for  the  nutrition  of  the  acting 
part ;  thus  providing  for  a  rej^etition  of  the  act.  3d. 
JSTot  only  the  blood,  but  the  intermuscular  juices  are 
renewed  by  the  act  of  muscular  contraction,  for  the  com- 
pression to  which  these  organs  have  been  subjected  com- 
pels all  the  fluids  to  change  place  like  the  contents  of  a 
wetted  sponge  ;  and  the  previously  mentioned  circum- 
stances give  direction  to  the  fluids  thus  set  in  motion. 

The  benefit  derived  from  these  effects  on  the  circu- 
lation is  by  no  means  confined  to  the  muscles.  All 
other  organs  connected  with  the  blood-vessels  that 
supply  the  muscles  participate  freely  in  the  same 
advantages  ;  and  it   would    seem  that  this  is  the  ap- 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  87 

pointed  way  in  wliicli  to  secure  the  nutritive  supply  in 
its  perfection  to  the  tissues  generally. 

The  mucous  membrane,  skin,  intervening  areolar 
structure,  nerves,  and.  other  anatomical  constituents  of 
the  body,  share  equally  in  the  advantages  thus  at- 
tained. It  would  seem  to  be  the  province  of  the  mus- 
cles, numerous  and  powerful  as  they  are,  not  only  to 
secure  their  own  health  by  the  exercise  of  their  func- 
tion, but  to  minister  to  the  good  of  all  other  structures ; 
for  all  depend  alike  for  their  nourishment  upon  a 
common  reservoir,  whose  distribution  could  not  be 
efficiently  maintained  without  the  assistance  so  largely 
rendered  by  the  muscles. 

Effect  on  Respiration. — Increased  respiration  oc- 
curs simultaneously  with  every  muscular  effort.  This 
follows  from  the  fact  that  arterial  hlood^  of  which  oxy- 
gen is  an  important  ingredient,  is  essential  in  every 
muscular  contraction;  for  in  each  contraction  oxygen 
is  required  probably,  as  a  second  result,  to  effect  the 
destruction  of  the  acting  muscular  molecule  ;  hence 
the  necessity  of  a  continual  supply  of  this  principle 
through  respiration.  It  will  be  noticed  that  an  in- 
creased inspiratory  effort  does  not  succeed,  but  imme- 
diately precedes  the  muscular  exertion,  and  is  simul- 
taneous with  the  suggestion  of  the  will,  which  it  seems 
to  render  more  vehement  and  energetic.  As  the  arm 
is  raised  to  strike,  the  breath  is  drawn  in ;  and  if  a 
strong  blow  is  contemplated,  the  glottis  is  for  a  mo- 
ment closed,  and  a  strong  pressure  is  exerted  upon  the 
contained  air  of  the  chest,  to  force,  as  it  were,  the  blood 
to  take  in  an  increased  quantity  of  the  power-liberating 
element.  This  involuntary  "  holding  the  breath"  is 
without  doubt  a  very  important  aid  to  the  respiratory 


88  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

act.  It  at  the  same  time  expands  the  chest,  and  aids, 
by  pressure  of  tlie  respired  air,  tlie  sohition  of  tlie 
oxygen. 

In  respiration  there  are  two  things  to  be  considered : 
tlie  mobility  of  the  walls  of  the  chest,  and  the  nervous 
arrangement  by  which  this  mobility  is  controlled. 
The  nerves  of  respiration  act  independently  of  the  con- 
sciousness in  their  ordinary  operation  ;  but  every  effort 
of  the  will  increases  their  action  by  the  stimulus  it 
affords  the  muscles  of  the  chest.  Whether  the  eifort 
of  the  will  be  directed  to  the  muscles  of  any  part  of 
the  body,  or  is  confined  to  mental  operations — in  each 
case  waste  is  produced,  and  the  employment  of  an 
amount  of  oxygen  is  implied  proportionate  to  the  mag- 
nitude of  the  exertion.  It  may  be  remarked  that  there 
are  other  circumstances  that  influence  respiration,  as 
diet ;  but  this  is  true  of  temperatare  especially,  and 
respiration  is  deep  just  in  proportion  to  the  rapidity 
with  which  the  body  loses  its  heat. 

But  respiration  is  entirely  a  raechanical  action.  It 
is  performed  by  the  muscles  of  the  chest  and  abdomen, 
and  the  degree  of  perfection  with  which  it  is  performed 
is  determined  by  the  condition  and  habits  of  the  organs 
performing  it.  If  these  muscles  are  badly  nourished 
and  imperfectly  used,  oxygen  can  be  supplied  to  tlie 
blood  to  support  the  bodily  need  only  in  limited  quan- 
tities. So  it  turns  out  that  the  amount  of  work  a  man 
can  do  is  not  so  much  dependent  on  his  muscle  as 
on  his  hreathing  cajMcity.  If  he  can  breathe  well  he 
can  generally  work  well ;  if  short-winded,  though  he 
may  have  the  muscles  of  an  Ajax,  he  will  be  left  be- 
hind to  a  certainty  in  the  race  of  life. 

Effect   on   the    Secretions. — Anything   that  pro- 


rillLOSOPIIY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  89 

motes  renewal  of  the  blood  of  the  capillaries,  promotes 
secretions  ;  for  whatever  be  the  nature  of  the  secreted 
jn-oduct,  or  its  origin,  it  is  derived  primarily  from  the 
blood  of  the  capillaries,  distributed  to  the  membrane 
whose  involutions  form  the  secreting  gland.  The  qual- 
ity of  the  secretion  will  greatly  depend,  of  course,  on 
that  of  the  blood  whence  it  is  derived,  which,  again,  is 
subject  to  variation  from  many  causes  under  the  con- 
trol of  motion  or  exercise. 

Effect  on  the  Excretions. — Muscular  action  power- 
fully urges  the  blood  into  the  skin  and  lungs,  the  two 
principal  excretory  organs,  whence  its  excretory  pro- 
ducts are  readily  eliminated.  The  same  action  results 
in  the  production  of  an  important  element  of  the  uri- 
nary excretion,  without  which  this  fluid  can  not  be  of 
normal  quality.  The  channels  for  the  egress  of  this 
principle  are  also  kept  free  and  open  by  exercise. 

It  is  now  well  understood  that  the  most  common 
cause  of  constipation  of  the  bowels  is  want  of  general 
muscular  tone,  and  especially  want  of  action  in  the  tube 
through  which  the  alvine  discharges  are  conveyed. 
The  expulsion  of  the  contents  of  the  bowels  is  only 
effected  by  muscular  action,  to  induce  which,  the  tube 
and  the  abdominal  wells  work  conjointly,  and  too 
frequently  tug  in  vain. 

Effect  on  Absoeption. — Kutritive  matters,  after 
being  reduced  to  a  fluid  state  by  digestion,  are  pre- 
pared to  pass  the  digestive  boundaries  into  the  blood. 
But  there  must  first  be  a  demand  in  the  tissues  for  the 
materials.  The  unceasing  wastes  caused  by  muscular 
action,  and  the  ex]3enditure  of  the  blood  constantly 
taking  place,  must  be  made  good  with  materials  from 


90  PHILOSOPHY    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

the  digestive  surface.  The  connection  between  muscu- 
lar action  and  absorption  is  direct. 

But  local  action  is  also  required  of  the  digestive 
membrane-  Hence  nature  causes  the  whole  alimentarj 
tube  to  take  on  a  sort  of  rythmical,  vermicular  motion. 
The  ordinary  avocations  of  life  accelerate  this  motion 
of  the  canal.  But  in  sedentery  occupations  the  causes 
of  motion  from  without  are  lessened,  and  the  health  is 
sure  to  suffer  as  a  consequence.  Absorption  from  the 
digestive  canal  is  incomplete,  and  the  digestive  organs 
become  clogged,  and  soon  diseased. 

Physiologists  have  compared  absorption  to  the  passage 
of  fluids  of  different  kinds  through  membranes,  known 
as  osmosis.  The  conditions  for  maintaining  this  physical 
phenomenon  are,  that  the  fluids  on  the  opposite  sides 
of  the  mer/ibrane  shall  he  of  different  Jdnds.  J^ow  the 
renewal  of  the  fluids  of  either  side  of  the  membrane  of 
the  alimentary  canal  by  motion  preserves  this  difference. 

Effect  on  the  Quality  of  the  Blood. — All  the  above 
enumerated  processes,  namely,  nutrition^  respiration^ 
secretion^  excretion^  absorption^  are  the  means  whereby 
the  blood  itself,  the  great  fountain  from  which  life  is 
supplied  to  the  whole  body,  is  maintained  in  its  purity 
and  fitness  for  its  several  purposes,  l^utrition  itself, 
so  far  as  the  blood  is  concerned,  is  an  excretory  act. 
The  very  matters  destined  to  supply  muscular  power 
and  bulk  can  not  be  retained  in  the  blood  without  in- 
jury to  its  quality  and  damage  to  the  health.  Tlie 
force-imparting  properties  of  the  blood  can  not  long  be 
maintained  therein  unless  it  gives  them  up  as  readily 
as  it  receives  them. 

Effect  on  the  Digestr^e  Pkocess. — Digestion  is  the 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  91 

means  whereby  food  is  furnished  to  the  system,  as 
respiration  is  the  means  for  supplying  oxygen.  It  is 
not  enough  that  good  food  be  swallowed.  Food  is  not 
only  inert,  but  positively  injurious,  miless  rendered 
fluid  and  made  to  proceed  in  the  series  of  changes  it  is 
appointed  to  undergo.  At  the  natural  temperature  of 
the  body,  food  must,  from  its  nature,  undergo  some 
change  ;  and  if  this  change  is  not  digestive^  it  will  be 
chemical^  with  the  formation  of  poisonous  products. 
Many  persons  are  habitually  poisoned  with  food  taken 
even  in  small  quantities,  when  the  conditions  for  its 
digestion  are  wanting  or  imperfect. 

Digestion  is  dependent  on  the  Uood^  its  quality  and 
distribution,  and  on  the  demand  arising  in  the  system 
for  the  digested  product.  If  the  demand  is  small,  and 
the  amount  of  food  taken  be  not  also  proportionably 
small,  the  function  is  injured,  and  repeated  injuries  in- 
flict permanent  disease.  Exercise,  in  proper  modes,  is 
capable  of  preventing  and  of  remedying  such  condi- 
tions, as  is  proved  by  the  almost  universally  good 
digestive  i^ower  of  the  habitual  laborer,  even  when 
placed  under  the  most  unfavorable  circumstances. 

Effect  on  the  Oeganiztng  Process. — All  mani- 
festations of  force,  muscular  or  nervous,  are  directly 
proportionate  to  the  vigor  of  their  instruments,  the 
muscles  and  nerves ;  and  it  is  no  exaggeration  of  the 
truth  to  say  that  we  may  consider  all  other  functions 
of  the  system  as  contributing  to  their  increase  and  sup- 
port. The  organization  or  growth  of  these  instruments 
is  evidently  a  most  essential  link  in  the  chain  of  actions 
between  the  digestion  of  food  aud  the  manifestation  of 
force.  Organization,  or  growth  of  organic  forn:!S,  is  to 
a  great  degree  a  vegetative  act,  and  takes  its  character 


92  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

very  mncli  from  the  cliaracter  of  the  nutriment  afford- 
ed and  the  manner  of  its  appropriations.  Atomic  ab- 
sorption is  necessarily  preliminary  to  the  process  of 
renovation  ;  the  destruction  of  the  organized  form  and 
the  elimiuation  of  the  effete  material  must  precede 
growth,  and  muscular  exertion  is  requisite  in  order  to 
insure  the  vitalization  of  the  material  elements  from 
which  natui-e  collects  what  she  needs  for  the  continu- 
ance of  her  renovating  processes. 

Movements  Stimulate  the  Vitalizing  Processes. — 
The  modes  in  which  movements,  by  their  mechanical 
and  chemical  effects,  contribute  to  the  corporeal  wel- 
fare, has  been  described,  but  the  last  result  is  of  a 
higher  order  than  any  included  in  these  effects.  This 
consists,  if  we  may  use  the  expression,  in  an  aug- 
mentation of  the  control  exercised  by  vitality  in  the 
system.  The  body  we  have  considered  as  the  theater 
of  two  opposing  actions,  the  organizing^  and  the  disor- 
ganizing^ and  chemical  actions.  In  the  healthy  body, 
those  influences  which  promote  the  former  prepon- 
derate, secured  as  they  are  by  voluntary  and  involun- 
tary movements  habitually  conducted,  while  the  inac- 
tive body  becomes  diseased,  for  the  simj)le  reason  that 
therein  actions  must  transpire  among  its  elementary 
particles  which  are  purely  chemical  in  their  nature, 
and  which  must  have  the  effect  to  deteriorate  the  or- 
ganizing vital  forces,  and  consequently  vitiate  the  gen- 
eral health  and  sap  the  strength  of  the  constitution. 
By  means  of  rational  movements,  vital  action  is  made 
to  predominate  over  all  opposing  or  simjDly  chemical 
actions,  and  health  follows  as  naturally  and  inevitably 
as  night  the  day. 

The  part   played   by  drug   chemicals  in   the  vital 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  93 

domain  may  be  easily  understood.  The  presence  of 
such  substances  is  never  uninfluential.  Tliey  increase 
to  a  certainty  the  amount  of  chemical  change  going  on 
in  the  system  ;  and  notwithstanding  the  impulse  to- 
ward health  that  is  oftentimes  thought  to  be  given,  and 
which  is  the  result  of  a  temporary  vital  reaction,  yet  it 
remains  true  that  the  real  tendency  of  the  system,  under 
their  sway,  is  necessarily  downward,  because  chemical, 
and  consequently  injurious,  changes  are  thereby  pro- 
moted. 

Co-ordination  of  Motions  by  the  ISTerves. — Every 
organ  and  member  of  the  body  performs  a  distinct 
office,  and  its  individuality  is  never  merged  in  that  of 
others.  But  it  is  also  true  that  all  the  diverse  parts  are 
connected  in  an  individual  whole  by  means  of  the 
nervous  system.  The  nerves,  we  know,  pervade  all 
vital  j^arts,  and  not  only  preside  over  the  peculiar  func- 
tion of  every  local  element  and  member,  but  also  cause 
each  to  act  with  reference  to,  and  harmoniously  with, 
all  other  organs,  and  with  the  whole  economy.  We 
are  well  aware,  through  our  sensations,  of  many  things 
that  are  going  forward  in  the  body  ;  for  the  conscious- 
ness and  intellectual  functions  are  influenced  through 
the  nerves.  The  great  majority  of  the  operations  of  the 
system  proceed  without  the  consciousness,  and  are  soon 
interrupted  by  it  when  it  is  brought  to  bear  on  them  ; 
but  there  is,  so  to  speak,  a  kind  of  organic  understand- 
ing maintained  between  the  functions  of  the  different 
parts  harmonizing  their  motions.  Some  of  the  mani- 
festations of  this  principle  are  termed  reflex  action.  A 
person  instinctively  draws  back  from  a  danger  that  he 
sces.^  kears^  and  feels.  The  stomach  a;]<l  bowels  also 
reject  food  which  it  would  be  harmful  to  tolerate ;  a 


94  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

limb  retracts  unconsciously  if  even  a  fly  alights  upon 
it,  and  tlie  eyelid  winks  if  a  mote  sails  by  it ;  the  pulse 
is  quickened  not  more  readily  from  the  effects  of  a 
drug  than  by  a  passing  thought  of  the  mind  or  emotion 
of  the  heart.  These  results  are  automatic^  that  is,  not 
connected  necessarily  with  the  consciousness  and  the 
will.  Hence,  on  the  same  occult  principle,  during  the 
natural  performance  of  every  organic  act,  there  occurs 
a  response  of  organ  to  organ,  of  part  to  part,  through- 
out the  system,  in  every  direction  along  the  nervous 
network.  One  sees  a  luscious  peach,  and  the  whole 
gustatory  apparatus  takes  on  a  gentle  excitement ;  the 
circulation  of  the  part  is  instantly  affected  and  the 
saliva  commences  to  flow. 

If  now  the  fruit  be  taken  into  the  mouth,  not  only  is 
an  abundance  of  saliva  poured  forth,  but  the  stomach 
also  enters  upon  a  state  of  preparation  ;  the  gastric  and 
other  fluids  are  secreted,  and  the  whole  system  expe- 
riences a  sense  of  satisfaction  and  enjoyment.  The 
explanation  of  all  this  is,  that  the  ultimate  organic 
actions  of  the  body  have  been  impressed  and  brought 
into  vigorous  and  harmonious  play  in  accordance  with 
natural  and  beautiful,  though  mysteiious  law. 

The  effect  of  muscular  contraction  upon  the  organs 
of  the  body,  through  the  nerves,  is  perfectly  analogous 
to  that  just  noted.  "Whenever  a  great  muscle  acts 
energetically,  the  nerve-filaments  distributed  therein  are 
powerfully  affected,  the  terminal  loops  or  extremities 
are  suddenly  approximated,  and  its  sensibility  is  in- 
creased. The  immediate  effect  of  the  flow  of  blood 
which  takes  place  from  other  parts  to  the  acting  part, 
even  the  heaving  of  the  chest  sometimes,  and  the 
change  of  expression  of  the  whole  man,  are  very  ap- 
parent.    This  consentaneousness  in  the  action  of  the 


PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS.  95 

whole  person  is  effected  by  the  nerves  ;  but  these 
visible  eflects,  great  and  striking  as  they  are,  are  a 
mere  representation  of  invisible,  internal  action  still 
more  important  and  wonderful.  These  actions  may  be 
made  to  supply  special  needs  of  the  organism,  and  then 
they  become  remedial.  We  are  unconscious  of  the 
intervening  or  connecting  changes  till  we  see  their  out- 
ward phenomena  produced. 

Another  important  influence  that  we  may  mention 
here,  is  that  exerted  upon  organic  motions  through  the 
medium  of  the  consciousness. 

When  one  notices  the  efl:ects  of  the  exertion  of  his 
muscles,  and  appreciates  the  consequences,  the  system 
becomes  infused  with  a  wholesome  energy,  the  con- 
sciousness  of  the  possession  of  power.  This  principle 
is  understood  by  comparing  the  influence  upon  the 
mind,  and  through  it  upon  the  organic  system  of  the 
successful  with  the  unsuccessful  eftbrt.  If  one  makes 
an  exertion  that  is  inadequate  to  overcome  the  resist- 
ance, discouragement  results,  and  a  general  depression 
of  all  the  organic  forces  is  the  consequence.  Such  is 
the  influence  of  mental  impressions  upon  the  nutrient 
processes.  A  few  unsuccessful  attempts  to  do  what 
ought  perhaps  never  to  have  been  attempted,  will 
sometimes  make  an  invalid  for  life  ;  for  the  system  is 
thus  deprived  of  the  stimulus  of  that  nervous  vim 
requisite  for  vigorous  and  healthful  organic  action. 
!Now  if  in  such  a  case  exercise  be  J9r^«c7"^&^rZ  so  as  to 
adapt  nicely  the  quality  and  quantity  to  the  condition 
of  the  invalid,  the  encouragement  thus  aflforded  to  the 
failing  forces  imparts  new  energy  to  the  w^hole  man, 
and  we  often  see  him  in  a  few  days  brought  up  out  of 
his  slough  of  despond  and  enjoying  the  sunshine  of 
hope  and  renovated  feeling. 


96  PHILOSOPHY    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

The  Foregoing  Effects. — What  are  ever  contem- 
plated as  tlie  ultimate  results  of  medical  prescription 
other  til  an  those  here  enumerated  ?  Not  that  perfect 
health  will  always  be  secured  by  attending  to  these 
particulars,  even  if  attended  to  in  the  best  manner  that 
a  j^atient's  opportunities,  amount  of  knowledge  and 
experience  and  constitutional  capacity  will  allow  ;  but 
we  do  say,  and  insist  strenuously,  that  the  mode  here 
indicated  of  securing  healthful  effects  is  direct  and  ra- 
tional^ and  more  efficacious  than  those  usually  em- 
ployed by  medical  practitioners  ;  and  that  it  is  in 
many  cases  attended  with  the  most  satisfactory  results. 
And  when  from  causes  already  intimated  imperfect  re- 
sults follow,  we  insist  that  it  is  less  the  fault  of  the 
means  than  of  the  mode  of  their  application. 


PKIXCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  97 


MOVEMENTS,   AND  THE  PRINCIPLES  GOVERNING 
THEIR  APPLICATION. 

Definition. — It  is  necessary  for  the  reader  to  bear  in 
mind  the  distinction  between  movements,  gymnastics, 
and  exercises,  as  these  words  are  here  employed.  By 
exe7'cises,  is  understood  all  volnntary  motions  of  the 
body  whatsoever,  without  any  reference  to  the  object 
or  objects  had  in  view.  Thus  labor  and  recreation, 
practiced  by  either  body  or  mind,  whether  general  or 
partial,  are  exercise.  The  word  gymnastics  is  used  ex- 
clusively to  indicate  the  means  of  developing  the  corpo- 
real frame,  whereby  it  is  fitted  for  the  business  of  life,  or 
for  any  special  purpose,  by  means  of  certain  exercises. 
Gymnastics  are  employed  by  the  well,  and  are  recog- 
nized universally  as  a  useful  means  of  developing  the- 
healthy  body  into  its  due  proportions,  which,  without 
exercise,  it  fails  to  acquire.  Gymnastics,  in  its  techni- 
cal meaning,  may  indicate  very  many  kinds  and  de- 
grees of  exercise,  and  it  is  only  necessary  that  they 
should  have  this  end  in  view  in  order  to  deserve  this 
title. 

The  term  exercises,  however,  does  not  include,  by  any 
means,  all  that  is  implied  by  movements.  Movements 
are  not  limited  to  muscular  action,  instigated  by  the 
wUl,  but  include  other  motions  also,  employed  accord- 
ing to  certain  rules,  for  certain  specific,  rational  pur- 
poses.     Movements,  in  short,  are  simply  motions  of 

5 


98  PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

specific  kinds,  having  sj^ecific  efiects,  practiced  for  spe- 
cific purposes,  and  intended  to  secure  definite  results. 
Movements  are  mechanical  agencies^  directed  either 
upon  the  whole  system,  or  a  part  of  it,  for  the  purpose 
of  inducing  determinate  effects  upon  its  vital  actions, 
and  generally  hamng  reference  to  its  pathological  state.'^ 
Hence,  the  kind  of  movements  proper  in  a  given 
case  are  determined  by  the  condition  of  the  system,  and 
will  vary  with  its  variations,  so  as  to  correspond  with 
its  special  as  well  as  general  needs,  at  the  particular 
time  when  they  are  employed.  Movements  admit  of 
extensive  variation  in  regard  to  Ttind,  degree,  and 
pla/ie. 

Different  Kinds  of  Movements,  Active  and  Pas- 
sive.— The  division  of  movements  into  active  ^tl^  pas- 
sive relates  to  the  sources  whence  the  moving  power  is 
derived.  The  motion  of  riding,  for  instance,  \^ passive, 
if  the  body  be  supported.  So  also  are  the  clappings, 
hiocMngs,  strolcinqs,  Tineadings,  pulling s,  shalcings,  vi- 
hratings,  etc.,  of  the  duplicated  movements,  because 
both  the  motion  and  the  will  that  gives  it  energy  are 
derived  from  another  person. 

*  Dally  gives  the  following  definition  of  movements : 

A  movement  is  a  product  of  life,  and  is  impressed  rcith  its  essence  ;  the  natural 
interior  invisible  action  ichich  unceasingly  creates  the  vital  forcex ;  tchich  at  the 
same  time  engenders  other  exterior  visible  vital  manifestations— in  a  icord,  it  is 
ihat  by  tchich  the  iinited  organic  individual  manifests  its  intelle'  trial  and  moral, 
physical  and  chemical  life,  whereby  life  is  developed,  maintained,  deteriorated, 
repaired s  or  resolved  into  its  eleinenis. 

If  we  carry  this  definition  into  the  domain  of  animal  mechanism,  we  shall  be 
obliged  to  modify  it  thus:  A  movement  is  the  most  direct  and  proper  means  for 
provoking  naturally,  or  in  harmony  icith  physiological  laves,  vital  or  biological 
motions,  by  virtue  of  which  last  the  human  machine,  in  all  its  mitltiform  organs 
and  functions,  is  developjed,  maintained,  and  repaired. 

This  philosophical  idea  of  movements  furnishes  the  grand  basis  of  true  physical 
education,  rational  hygiene,  and  scientific  therapeutics ;  the  at  first  despised  tradi- 
tional bafiis  that  the  progress  of  modern  science  more  and  more  confirms  as  the 
trae  one. 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  99 

Among  the  single  movements  there  arc  none  that  are 
vjholly  passive.  A\^hile  tlie  muscles  of  some  portion  of 
the  body  are  acting,  tliey  act  upon  other  structures, 
which,  in  relation  to  the  acting  muscles,  are  of  course 
passive.  But  tlie  antagonizing  muscles  are  also  acted 
upon — compressed  and  distended,  and  are  relatively 
passive.  The  condition  of  the  will  is  an  important  ele- 
ment in  determining  whether  the  movement  be  active 
or  passive. 

Whenever  the  contractile  power  of  a  muscle  is  en- 
gaged in  overcoming  resistance,  the  resulting  move- 
ment is  active,  whether  the  effort  be  successful  or  not. 

Single  and  Duplicated  Movements. — A  movement 
is  called  single  when  but  a  single  person  is  engaged  in 
its  execution ;  duplicated^  when  more  than  one  is  en- 
gaged. In  single  movements  the  weight  of  the  whole 
or  of  some  portion  of  the  body  is  overcome  by  muscu- 
lar action ;  as  when  in  a  standing  posture  the  feet  are 
extended,  or  a  leg  or  arm  is  raised.  The  movement  is 
also  single  if  the  resistance  of  antagonizing  muscles  is 
overcome,  as  in  twisting  a  limb  or  the  trunk ;  or  when 
a  burden  is  added  to  the  weight  of  the  body,  or  of  the 
extremity  or  part  moved.  The  movements  described 
in  tliis  treatise  are  of  the  variety  termed  Single  Move- 
ments. But  as  frequent  reference  is  made  to  the  du- 
plicated variety  of  movements,  it  is  necessary  to  de- 
scribe here  their  general  qualities  and  purposes. 

Duplicated  Movements  are  of  two  kinds.  In  one, 
the  movement  is  received  by  the  patient,  who  is  quite 
passive,  while  motion  of  some  particular  variety  is 
given  to  some  portion  of  the  body,  or  to  the  whole  of 
it,  generally  by  a  physician,  or  by  an  operator  under 
his  immediate  direction.    In  the  other  kind  the  patient 


100  I'JEtmCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

is  required  to  bring  into  action  some  particular  part 
designated  in  the  prescription ;  while  the  quality^ 
amount^  and  duration  of  the  action  is  entirely  con- 
trolled by  the  physician.  This  action  is,  of  course, 
varied  according  to  the  therapeutical  indications  of 
the  case,  partly  judged  of  by  the  physical  symptoms 
brought  to  light  by  the  ordinary  modes  of  diagnosis, 
partly  determined  by  the  cultivated  and  delicate  per- 
ception and  experience  of  the  operator.  The  operator, 
in  manipulating,  usually  affords  a  certain  kind  and  de- 
gree of  resistance^  which  aids  in  effecting  the  desired 
physiological  action  of  the  part  concerned  in  the  move- 
ment. Even  in  the  same  movement,  the  resistance 
should  be  carefully  varied  in  the  different  stages,  and 
with  all  the  nicety  of  manipulation  that  is  required  of 
the  musician  for  giving  expression  and  effect  in  an  in- 
strumental performance. 

The  range  and  variety  of  effects  capable  of  being  pro- 
duced by  the  duplicated  movements,  when  directed  by 
tact  and  intelligence,  are  very  great,  meeting  most  of 
the  indications  of  chronic  disease,  probably  quite  all 
that  present  themselves  in  ordinary  cases.  These 
effects  may  be  realized  either  in  interior  organs  or  the 
extremities,  and  may  be  made  general  or  local.  They 
may  be  confined  mainly  to  any  particular  anatomical 
division  or  physiological  function,  to  the  nerves,  the 
muscles,  or  may  influence  all  together.  They  are 
adapted  to  the  most  enfeebled  invalid  or  to  the  stout- 
est persons,  and  never  need  produce  effects  beyond  the 
requirements  of  the  invalid  or  the  intention  of  the 
physician. 

A  most  important  element  in  the  treatment  by  du- 
plicated movements  is  that  of  the  co-operation,  both  b}^ 
will  and  action,  of  the  patient  with  the  physicinn  or 


PKTNCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  101 

operator ;  by  which  the  superior  power  of  the  one  be- 
comes a  source  of  strength  to  the  other. "^ 

JS^o thing,  for  a  plain  reason,  so  encourages  a  person 
to  act,  as  the  conscionsness  of  abundant  ability ;  and 
this  is  fully  supplied  to  the  mind  by  the  auxiliary 
power  afforded.  So  that,  in  addition  to  the  control 
obtained  over  the  cbemical  and  vito-chemical  actions, 
we  secure  in  this  way  the  favorable  influence  of  the 
healthful  play  of  the  nerves,  whose  function  it  is  to 
control  organic  operations.  All  medical  systems  ac- 
knowledge the  immense  value  of  this  assistance  in  the 
treatment  of  invalids  ;  but  what  can  secure  it  in  so  high 
a  degree  as  an  intelligent  and  patient  application  of  the 
duj^licated  movements  ? 

But  the  employment  of  duplicated  movements,  it 
must  be  confessed,  is  attended  with  difiiculties  that  will 
prevent  their  general  use  as  a  medical  resource.  An 
ordinary  course  of  medical  instruction  does  not  confer 
the  necessary  qualifications  for  their  successful  applica- 
tion ;  the  tact  necessary  to  prescribe  and  apply  them 
properly  is  only  acquired  by  long  and  patient  practice, 
and  the  labor  is  excessively  severe. 

*  Some  of  the  German  practitioners  of  the  MoA-ement-Cure,  adopting  Eelchen- 
bach's  theory  of  the  cdic  force,  contend  that  an  influence  of  this  kind  is  concerned 
in  the  production  of  the  effects  of  this  treatment ;  the  nervous  energy  of  the  patient 
being  thereby  exalted,  and  the  system  consequently  enabled  to  overcome  disease. 
Dally  gives  a  fine  drawing  of  the  human  hand,  in  its  minute  anatomy,  arguing 
therefrom  that  it  is  an  instrument  eminently  adapted  to  perform  the  office,  or  a  part 
of  its  physiological  functions,  of  conveying  something  like  vital  electricity  to  anotWer 
person;  and  that  an  important  advantage  is  derived  by  the  invalid  from  such  a 
transference.  The  reader  will  perceive  the  similarity,  if  not  the  identity,  of  the 
ideas  underlying  these  statements  with  those  concerning  animal  magnetism,  with 
which  every  one  is  familiar.  But  it  is  not  necessary,  in  order  to  prove  or  explain 
the  hygienic  and  the  medical  effects  of  the  Movement-Cure,  to  resort  to  any  state- 
ments outside  of  its  own  well-demonstrated  facts,  and  the  easily  understood  laws 
of  physiology.  Especially  must  it  be  injurious  to  the  reputation  of  this  practice  to 
resort  to  any  theory  in  explanation  of  its  effects  that  involves  anything,  to  the  com- 
mon mind,  mysterious  or  equivocal ;  and  such  is  confessedly  the  character  of  the  the- 
ories alluded  to. 


102  PKmCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

Single  Movements^  on  the  other  hand,  being  com- 
paratively few  in  number  and  simple  in  character,  are 
much  more  readily  learned  and  practiced  ;  and  they 
are  found  very  efficacious  in  combating  the  lighter 
forms  of  disease  and  in  opposing  the  first  approaches 
of  graver  maladies. 

COXCENTKIC  AND   EcCENTKIC   MOVEMENTS. "When  the 

extremities  of  the  muscle  are  approximated,  the  mus- 
cular contraction  steadily  increasing,  the  movement  is 
said  to  be  concentvic.  When  the  muscle  is  stretched, 
its  contraction  steadily  decreasing^  the  movement  is 
said  to  be  eccentric.  Thus,  the  raising  of  a  weight,  as 
a  book,  by  the  hand,  requires  a  concentric  movement ; 
while  in  permitting  the  same  object  to  fall  gradually 
by  the  side,  an  eccentric  movement  is  effected.  In  both 
cases  the  same  muscles  have  been  employed  ;  but  often 
the  effect  upon  the  circulation,  and  especially  upon  the 
innervation  of  the  part,  is  entirely  different.  The  ad- 
vantages of  this  distention  are  however  only  imper- 
fectly available  in  the  single  movements,  because  both 
the  concentric  and  eccentric  are  necessarily  used  indis- 
criminately in  many  of  them.  In  practicing  dupli- 
cated movements,  it  is  easy  to  render  a  given  move- 
ment either  wholly  concentric  or  wholly  eccentric,  and 
thus  to  obtain  whatever  advantages  may  be  derivable 
from  this  distinction."^ 


*  Dr.  Neuman,  and  some  other  writers  on  the  Movement-Cure,  insist  on  the  great 
importance  in  practice  of  the  distinction  of  eccentric  and  concentric  movements. 
They  suppose  that  not  only  the  muscles,  but  also  all  vital  cells,  have  the  two  quali- 
ties of  contraction  and  relaxation,  as  inseparable  from  their  nature.  These  two 
qualities,  it  is  supposed,  just  balance  each  other  in  health,  but  in  disease  one  or  the 
other  of  ihem  preponderates.  In  other  words,  they  think  that  all  diseases  may  be 
classed  either  as  tliose  in  which  the  contractility  of  the  primary  cell  of  the  organic 
structures  prevails,  or  else  as  those  in  which  relaxation  prevails.  The  one  case, 
accordini:  to  this  theory,  is  to  be  treated  by  concentric  movements,  and  the  other 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 


103 


The  accompanying  cuts-  will  serve  to  illustrate  con- 
centric and  eccentric  movements.  Fig.  2  represents 
the  arm  bent  at  the  elbow.  To  accomplish  this,  it  is 
necessary  for  the  muscles  of  the  upper  arm,  toward 
which  the  forearm  is  drawn  in  the  action,  and  which 
are  attached  to  the  forearm  near  the  elbow,  to  con- 
tract, or  shorten  the  distance  between  the  extremities. 
This  mass  of  muscles  is  shown  at  a  h  in  the  cut.  This 
is  C07ic€)itric  action.  But  the  muscles  of  the  opposite 
side  of  the  arm  are,  meantime,  by  no  means  passive. 
If  they  were,  the  bending  would  be  accomplished  with 
a  sudden  jerk  ;  this  is  prevented  by  the  contraction  of 
tlie  opposing  muscles.  But  this  contraction  is  not  suf- 
ficient to  prevent  the  shortening  of  a  J,  and  the  conse- 
quent motion  of  the  forearm.     At  the  same  time  the 

Fig.  2. 


Bending  of  the  arm  at  the  elbow  showing  that  while  ihe  contracting  muscle,  a  6, 
shortens  Itself,  its  antagonist,  c  d,\s  drawn  out 


by  eccentric.  Oftentimes  the  symptoms  are  supposed  to  indicate  that  concen- 
tric movements  are  appropriate  to  one  organ  or  region  of  the  body,  while  the  eccen- 
tric are  required  for  the  other,  and  they  are  to  be  combined  accordingly  in  the 
prescription. 

*  From  "Theory  and  Practice  of  the  Movement-Cure."     By  C.  F.  Taylor 
M.D. 


104  PRINCIPLES    CONSIDEKED. 

muscular  mass,  c  d^  is  steadily  extended,  in  opposition 
to  its  efforts,  and  its  contraction  is  called  eccentric. 


stretching  of  the  arm  at  the  elbow,  showing  the  action  of  the  same  muscles  re 
versed. 

If,  while  the  muscle  cV  c'  is  contracting,  there  be  re- 
sistance applied  at  the  hand,  then  a'  V  will  not  contract 
during  the  movement,  for  its  opposing  force  is  already 
supplied  by  the  resistance  fi-om  without,  and  though 
drawn  out,  it  remains  relaxed  during  the  movement, 
having  neither  the  physiological  nor  mechanical  con- 
ditions requiring  an  influx  of  arterial  blood.  The 
whole  effect  of  the  movement  is  experienced  in  the 
contracting  part. 

Again,  \i  force  be  applied  to  the  hand,  and  a'  V  is 
drawn  out  by  means  of  that  force,  instead  of  c'  d'  act- 
ing, then  the  muscle  c'  cV  will  not  contract,  and  it  will 
possess  neither  the  physiological  nor  mechanical  con- 
ditions for  propelling  forward  the  venous  blood,  but 
will  remain  entirely  inactive.  The  only  result  of  the 
movement  is  the  contraction  of  a'  V  with  the  resulting 
influx  of  arterial  blood.  Furthermore,  if  the  move- 
ment be  made  with  resistance  both  ways,  from  1  to  2 
and  from  2  to  1,  the  contraction  would  be  first  concen- 
tric in  c'  d\  then  also  in  a'  h',  without  any  eccentric 
action.     But  if  force  be  used  to  move  ilio,  limb  in  the 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  105 

directions  specified,  while  the  muscles  oppose  the  force 
which  overcomes  them,  then  both  actions  are  eccentric^ 
and  there  are  no  concentric  actions.  The  understandin<r 
of  these  principles  is  of  the  first  importance  in  the  ap- 
plication of  movements  for  the  removal  of  disease. 

In  fig.  3  it  is  plain  that  the  action  of  the  muscles 
cT  c'  overcomes  that  of  a'  V ;  hence  the  action  of  the 
former  is  concentric^  while  that  of  the  latter  is  eccentric. 
In  either  case  both  sets  of  muscle  act,  but  with  differ- 
ent effects. 

The  difference  in  the  physiological  effects  of  these 
two  modes  of  muscular  contraction  is  thus  explained  : 

The  pressure  resulting  from  the  contraction  of  ci!  V 
forces  the  contained  blood  into  the  venous  capillaries, 
while  at  the  same  instant  the  drawing  out  of  the  mus- 
cles c'  d'  extends  the  arteries,  relieves  them  of  pressure, 
and  admits  more  arterial  blood  into  the  capillaries 
than  before.  In  both  cases  the  conditions  are  supplied 
for  a  new  contraction  ;  in  the  one  case,  by  excluding 
waste  matter,  and  in  the  other,  by  bringing  arterial 
blood  to  the  acting  organ,  while  by  the  conjoint  action 
the  blood  is  hastened  in  its  progress  through  the  part. 

General  and  Localized  Movements. — One  of  the 
most  potent  causes  of  disease  is  the  habitual  employ- 
ment of  the  powers  of  the  system  in  a  23artial  or  inhar- 
monious manner.  A  person  who  constantly  uses  his 
brain  to  the  neglect  of  his  whole  body ;  his  senses, 
rather  than  his  muscles ;  his  hands  and  arms  in  prefer- 
ence to  his  legs  ;  or  his  legs,  and  forgets  his  abdom- 
inal muscles,  has  no  right  to  anticipate  the  enjoyment 
of  continued  good  health.  It  is  apparent  that  in  these 
cases  nutrition  progresses  inordinately  in  the  acting 
parts,   while  other  and  as  important   portions  of  the 

5* 


106  PRINCIPLES    C0X3IDEKED. 

frame  are  suflering  for  the  want  of  it.  The  effect  after 
a  time — and  in  individuals  of  feeble  constitutions  that 
period  is  soon  reached — is  a  total  prostration  of  the 
general  physical  energies. 

These  instances  (and  they  are,  alas  !  too  numerous 
in  all  communities)  illustrate  a  principle  too  apt  to  be 
ignored  by  individuals,  and  neglected  by  physicians, 
to  wit,  that  even  a  moderate  use  of  a  part,  while  other 
parts  are  in  a  state  of  quiescence,  not  only  stimulates 
the  nutrient  actions  therein,  but  also  causes  the  general 
current  of  the  circulation  to  set  in  toward  them  to  an 
abnormal  extent.  In  other  words,  an  undue  and  contin- 
ued use  of  an  organ  induces  a  tendency  to  congestion 
of  its  tissues.  It  also  generally  heightens  its  nervous 
sensibility,  frequently  carrying  it  to  the  point  of  irri- 
tahility  /  for  evidently  if  an  organ  be  set  vigorously  at 
work,  while  all  other  parts  are  at  rest,  it  is  made  to  ex- 
press the  whole  available  vital  force  of  the  system. 
Any  organ  may  be  compelled  to  do  this,  and  they  may 
all  be  so  compelled  in  succession  by  sufficient  stimula- 
tion. If  the  organs  of  the  body  be  employed  in  union 
or  in  proper  succession,  the  current  of  the  circulation 
thus  actively  set  in  motion  in  them,  instead  of  pro- 
ducing congestion  and  irritation,  only  affords  the  proper 
conditions  for  the  high  degree  of  nutrition  necessary 
for  their  healthful  functional  activity.  It  is  only  by 
too  long  continued  use,  preventing  at  the  same  time 
the  healthful  employment  of  other  parts,  that  the  most 
vascular  and  delicate  organs  come  to  be  injured. 

The  state  of  congestion,  and  the  opposite  one  oishrunh 
capillaries,  coexist  in  different  parts  of  the  same  body 
in  nearly  all  cases  of  chronic  disease.  The  capillaries 
of  some  portions,  generally  situated  centrally,  are  dis- 
tended and  are  too  weak  to  push  forward  their  con- 


PKIXCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  lOT 

tents,  and  the  stagnant  blood  soon  becomes  deteriorated 
ill  quality  and  incapable  of  affording  nntrition ;  while 
at  the  same  time  other  capillaries,  generally  those  be- 
longing to  the  skin  and  extremities,  do  not  receive 
enough  of  blood  to  answer  the  general  nutrient  pur- 
poses of  those  parts.  The  rate  of  the  circulation  is 
unequal,  for  the  blood  is  arrested  in  the  congested  or- 
gan, whatever  may  be  the  state  of  the  pulse.  The  last 
cause  of  the  trouble  may  be  a  poor  quality  of  blood ; 
but  back  of  this  there  are  causes  connected  with  the 
blood-making  operations  of  the  body,  previously  de- 
scribed, which  the  movements  are  competent  to  correct. 
The  removal  of  congestion  is  one  of  the  important 
objects  of  partial  movements.  The  principles  con- 
cerned in  this  practice  are  easily  understood.  A  con- 
gested organ  is  one  in  which  the  capillaries  have  lost 
their  contractility,  and  are  therefore  distended  with 
blood,  with  a  tendency  to  effusion  of  its  serum,  to  re- 
lieve the  oppressed  walls.  Microscopists  inform  us 
that  gelatinous  corpuscles  are  also  present,  which  must 
afford  further  impediment  to  the  onward  flow.  Most 
of  the  local,  passive,  duplicated  movements  assist  very 
materially  in  our  efforts  to  remove  this  condition.  But 
permanent  effects  are  secured  by  rousing  vital  action  in, 
and  consequently  drawing  the  congested  fluid  to,  con- 
tiguous organs,  and  even  organs  remote  from  the  seat 
of  disease,  but  needing  the  supply.  Thus  the  affected 
part  is  emptied  and  relieved,  and  consequently  soon 
acquires  a  healthy  tone  again  in  its  capillary  circula- 
tion ;  while  at  the  same  time  the  other  organs  that  were 
suffering  from  deficient  nutrition  are  supplied  in  a 
healthful  manner.  If  tolerable  tact  be  employed  in 
the  selection  and  arrangement  of  the  movements  in 
the  prescription,  no  more  efficient  means  than  thoge 


108  PUmCIPLES    COXSIDERF.D. 

here  considered  are  to  be  found  within  the  limits  of 
the  remedial  art  for  relieving  congestion,  the  constant 
concomitant  of  all  chronic  disease. 

A  similar  principle  is  concerned  in  the  treatment  of 
cases  of  disordered  innervation.  If  a  single  organ  be 
the  chief  medium  of  nervous  action,  or  even  if  it  be 
the  seat  of  great  pain,  other  organs  are  proportionably 
wanting  in  sensibility.  Kervous  power  is  dependent  on 
the  same  general  conditions  of  nutritive  supply  or  mus- 
cular power,  and  the  nervous  equilibrium  is  restored  by 
agencies  that  harmonize  the  general  nutrient  actions 
of  the  body.  Erom  these  statements,  the  broad,  prac- 
tical inference  may  be  deduced,  that  congestion  and 
morbid  innervation  may  he  removed  from  any  locality 
hy  emjyloying^  in  other  jportions  of  the  system^  the  ma- 
terials and  actions  that  are  concerned  in  producing 
them. 

The  attempts  to  accomplish  these  objects  by  ordi- 
nary medical  means  are  less  successful  than  by  move- 
ments, because  the  control  of  the  circulation  thus  ob- 
tained is  less  direct  and  perfect. 

It  is  evident  that  these  principles  furnish  important, 
and,  indeed,  invaluable  suggestions  for  the  manage- 
ment of  the  sick.  It  is  a  process  of  reversing  those 
secret  and  subtile  operations  of  the  system  whereby 
diseases  are  originally  produced.  And  these  principles 
are  capable  of  the  most  easy,  satisfactory,  and  beautiful 
demonstration  in  every-day  practice. 

The  curative  employment  of  movements  is  by  no 
means  confined  to  their  local  application.  Those  in- 
volving the  whole  body  are  often  used  to  excellent 
advantage.  Such  movements  urge  the  blood  into  the 
superficial  capillaries,  and  increase  thereby  the  pe- 
ripheral circulation.     But  they  need  to  be  employed 


PRmCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  109 

with  miicli  discretion,  in  order  to  avoid  fatigue  and  tlie 
consequent  defeat  of  the  very  purposes  for  which  they 
are  applied. 

Influence  of  Movements  in  Regulating  the  Fokcks 
OF  THE  Body. — It  is  ah-eady  understood  that,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  view  of  physiology  and  pathology  taken 
in  this  w^ork,  the  omtscles  and  the  nerves  are  regarded 
as  the  two  great  channels  through  which  the  available 
powers  of  the  system  are  made  to  work. 

In  health,  the  muscles  and  nerves  exercise  co-ordinate 
functions.  The  muscles,  we  know^,  act  only  in  response 
to  nervous  stimuli ;  but  this  involves  both  mental  and 
sensorial  action,  for  the  cause  or  origin  of  the  impulses 
imparted  to  the  muscles  resides  in  the  intellect  and 
sensorium.  The  voluntary  muscles  ordinarily  obey 
only  the  mandates  of  the  will  and  of  the  feelings.  The 
muscles  should  be  the  obedient  servants  of  these 
higher  powers.  Indeed,  it  is  the  wdiole  aim  and  end 
of  our  corporeal  nature  to  minister  to  the  higher  and 
spiritual ;  and  when  it  fails  to  do  this,  nature  fails  to 
accomj)lish  what  she  undertook  in  the  creation  of 
man. 

The  laws  of  nature  can  not  be  broken  wdtli  impunity. 
Every  attempt  to  w^ork  the  intellect  independently  of 
the  forces  allied  to  it,  must  end  in  a  miserable  and  dis- 
graceful defeat.  But  wdien  these  are  harnessed  to- 
gether and  made  to  draw  in  concord,  there  is  nothing 
wnthin  the  limits  of  the  possible  that  we  do  not  see  men 
accomplishing  and  enjoying. 

Kow  in  disease,  arising  from  whatever  cause,  there 
is  a  disturbance  in  the  operation  of  these  two  classes  of 
powers.  Muscular  power  is  partially  or  wdiolly  sus- 
pended, while  the  sensorial  powers  are  generally  in- 


110  PKtNCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

creased,  irequentlj  to  the  production  of  pain.  Kone 
will  dispute  this,  and  most  will  be  ready  to  admit  the 
truth  of  the  following  proposition,  to  wit,  that  if  the 
proper  relations  hetween  these  two  sets  of  powers  he  ha- 
hitually  disregarded^  disease  in  some  form  must  he  the 
inevitahle  consequence.  An  appeal  to  common  obser- 
vation would  abundantly  confirm  these  statements. 

Every  one  knows  how  the  chronic  invalid  is  tor- 
mented with  sensations,  and  often  with  such  as  seem 
to  bear  but  very  slight  relation  to  his  apparent  disease. 
The  imagination  in  these  cases  is  stimulated  to  ex- 
cess ;  the  consciousness  is  subjugated,  and  the  strong- 
est volition  of  such  an  invalid  is  incapable  of  resisting 
the  power  of  feelings  and  fancies  that  accumulate  with 
the  advancement  of  the  malady  and  threaten  at  times 
utterly  to  overwhelm  their  victim. 

It  is  an  indisputable  fact  that  much  of  the  disease  of 
our  modern  civilization  has  its  origin  in  this  partial 
functional  action,  which  in  turn  produces  partial  de- 
velopment, and  which  is  another  name  for  deformity. 
The  nervous  system  is,  in  multitudes  of  cases  in  civil- 
ized life,  compelled  to  act  constantly  with  a  force 
greatly  disproportioned  to  the  muscular — and  to  a  de- 
gree frequently  that  renders  the  healthful  nutrition  of 
their  organs  an  utter  imj)ossibility.  Every  physician's 
practice  affords  him  numerous  and  lamentable  illus- 
trations of  this  sad  truth. 

If  the  constitution  is  defective  from  hereditary 
causes,  the  proclivity  to  disease  of  this  kind  is  propor- 
tionally stronger,  and  the  necessity  for  intelligent  train- 
ing of  the  system  to  a  condition  above  the  liability  to 
this  subjugation  to  the  nerve-power  becomes  all  the 
more  imperative.  For  if  this  nervous  habit  be  pro- 
longed, and  the  muscles  continue  for  any  length  of 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  Ill 

time  to  be  deprived  of  their  nutrition,  the  general  nu- 
trient actions  throughout  the  body  are  enfeebled,  and 
general  impairment  of  the  strength  results. 

Abuse  of  the  nervous  system  usually  operates,  as  we 
have  hinted,  through  two  channels,  the  mental  and  the 
sensorial.  Examj^les  of  the  latter  class  are  much  more 
numerous  than  those  of  the  former ;  indeed,  it  may  be 
doubted  if  those  of  the  first  often  occur  uncomplicated 
with  the  second.  The  sensorial  faculties,  besides  being 
purveyors  to  the  mind,  are  appointed  also  to  minister 
to  the  material  welfare  and  gratification  of  the  body. 
But  whenever  the  nerves  belono^ino;  to  this  class  are  in- 
ordinately  stimulated — that  is,  when  stimulated  with- 
out reference  to  nutritive  ends — they  become  over- 
strained, the  nutrition  of  the  parts  is  perverted,  their 
powers  debilitated,  and  their  action  becomes  uncon- 
trollable. 

Civilized  life  furnishes  abundant  and  ingenious  de- 
vices in  the  habits  of  eating,  of  drinking,  and  of  living 
generally,  eminently  calculated  to  contribute  to  this 
end.  For  this  are  used  spirits,  tobacco,  condiments, 
and  confections,  and  the  domestic  beverages  which  are 
said  to  cheer  but  not  inebriate ;  and  the  arts  of  cook- 
ery furnish  too  often  the  means  of  corrupting  the  taste, 
while  they  poison  the  food. 

The  habit,  so  rife  with  us,  of  permitting  the  emo- 
tional nature  to  bear  undue  sway,  operates  in  a  similar 
and  hardly  less  injurious  way,  and  is  therefore  equally 
reprehensible.  The  excitements  of  extensive  or  preca- 
rious business  or  of  domestic  infelicities  are  well  known 
to  produce  tlie  efi'ects  here  pointed  out ;  and  not  unfre- 
quently  tlie  disproportionate  degree  with  which  the 
feelings  become' engaged  in  questions  of  politics  and 
of  religion   bring  the   same   unhappy  results   to   the 


112  PRINCIPLES    COXSIDEEED. 

health.  In  these  cases,  bad,  hygiene  and  habits  sow 
broadcast  the  seeds  which  other  influences  and  circnm- 
stances  afterward  arouse  into  disastrous  and  fatal  ac- 
tivity. 

In  all  cases  of  this  kind,  arising  from  whatever  cause, 
the  use  of  movements  furnishes  a  directs  safe^  powerful^ 
ViTidi  philosophical  means  of  restoring  these  interrupted 
harmonies,  and  of  correcting  the  ill  health  that  is 
dependent  thereon  ;  provided,  of  course,  that  the  influ- 
ence of  the  causes  leading  to  stich  results,  and  which 
have  been  here  pointed  out,  are  withdrawn. 

Relations  of  the  Action  of  the  Will  and  of  the 
Muscles  in  Moveivients. — Much  error  prevails  on  this 
subject.  Most  persons  seem  to  think  that  the  degree 
of  fatigue  one  experiences  indicates  the  amount  of  exer- 
cise taken,  but  it  really  only  shows  the  amount  of  exer- 
tion put  forth,  and  which  depends  on  the  will.  The 
degree  of  fatigue  and  the  amount  of  exercise  do  not 
necessarily  bear  a  direct  relation  to  each  other  ;  but 
the  degree  of  fatigue  indicates  the  greater  or  less  ti7ne 
in  which  a  movement  was  being  performed.  As  evi- 
dence that  fatigue  is  inseparably  connected  with  the 
exercise  of  the  will,  it  is  only  necessary  to  refer  to 
numerous  physiological  operations  that  proceed  without 
our  attention  and  without  fatigue,  some  of  which,  in- 
deed, are  capable  of  being  brought  by  an  eflort  into 
relation  to  the  will,  and  thereby  immediately  become 
fatiguing.  The  heart's  action,  though  powerful  and  in- 
cessant, is  unaccompanied  by  any  sense  of  fatigue.  The 
internal  organs  generally,  as  the  stomach  and  intestinal 
canal,  are  in  constant  motion,  but  never  grow  weary. 
In  itself,  the  motion  of  riding  by  rail-cars  or  carriages 
is  not  fatiguing.     Many  of  the  ordinary  avocations  of 


PKINCIPLKS    CONSIDEKKI).  1\6 

life  are  habitual,  and  are  performed  autoiiiatically,  and 
Avithout  fatigue.  In  all  these  niovenients  the  volitions 
are  in  abeyance,  and  the  actions  ai-e  carried  forward 
under  the  control  of  the  involuntary  or  cerehro-spinal 
system  of  nerves. 

The  function  of  resjpiration  affords  an  excellent  illus- 
tration of  the  relations  of  the  will  and  the  involuntary 
nerves  in  movements.  In  ordinary  respiration  there  is 
no  fatigue,  because  it  proceeds  without  consciousness, 
that  is,  it'  is  involuntary.  But  we  may  control  this 
function  by  the  will,  and  its  performance  is  imme- 
diately followed  by  exhaustion.  The  reader  w^ill  infer 
from  this  the  impropriety,  and  in  some  cases  the  nn- 
qualilied  harmfulness,  of  employing  instruments  de- 
vised to  modify  respiration.  These  contrivances  direct 
the  attention  to  the  respiratory  act,  and  thereby  em- 
barrass its  performance,  rendering  it  no  longer  invol- 
untary. 

A  careful  analysis  of  these  facts  leads  us  readily  to 
the  principle,  that  fatigue  is  in  proportion  to  the 
amount  of  mental  and  nervous,  rather  than  to  the 
amount  of  muscular  action  employed. 

Into  active  movements,  the  two  kinds  of  action,  mus- 
cular and  nervous,  enter  in  diiferent  proportions.  And 
this  proportion  seems  to  be  determined  chiefly  by  the 
time  occupied  in  executing  the  movement,  the  quich 
movement  requiring  within  a  given  period  the  greatest 
expenditure  of  nervous  power.  The  principle  here  is 
analogous  to  that  in  mechanics,  wnth  which  cA^ery 
school-boy  is  acquainted,  viz.,  that  velocity  is  obtained 
at  the  expense  of  power. 

But  if  a  movement  be  prolonged,  the  amount  of  mus- 
cular exercise  is  greater  in  proportion  to  the  time  occu- 
pied.    This  principle  is  made  evident  by  the  physiology 


114  PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

of  muscular  contraction,  explained  in  the  second  chap- 
ter, where  it  is  shown  that  the  longer  the  action  of  the 
muscle  is  continued,  the  greater  the  number  of  its  ulti- 
mate elements  that  participate  in  the  action. 

The  principle  in  movements  relative  to  time  may  be 
stated  thus : 

Rapid  movements  necessitate  most  iiervous  action  ; 
slow  and  sustained  movements,  the  most  muscular 
action.  If  the  principle  be  stated  with  reference  to  the 
limit  of  the  capabilities  of  these  powers,  it  might  be  said 
that  the  one  exhausts  the  most  nervous,  and  the  other 
the  most  muscular  power.  If  with  reference  to  the 
eflects  on  nutrition,  the  statement  would  be,  the  one 
stimulates  to  the  most  nervous,  and  the  other  to  the 
most  muscular  action  and  development.  These  state- 
ments will,  of  course,  apply  only  within  certain  limits 
in  the  healthy  state,  but  which  in  daily  life  are  being 
constantly  exceeded  in  respect  to  the  nervous  func- 
tion particularly ;  so  that  the  proper  relation  of  these 
two  powers  is  destroyed,  and  the  whole  system  becomes 
disordered. 

This  principle  is  well  illustrated  in  common  experi- 
ence. If  a  person  runs  a  few  rods  briskly,  he  will  pant 
with  fatigue  ;  while  if  he  loalh  the  same  distance,  he  is 
refreshed  and  invigorated,  although  it  is  a  demon- 
strated fact  that  the  aggregate  amount  of  mechanical 
resistance  that  he  has  overcome  is  greater  in  the  latter 
case  than  in  the  former.  In  the  first  instance  the  object 
was  accomplished  by  means  of  a  greater  eifort  than  in 
the  second  ;  but  in  the  second,  a  larger  number  of 
muscle-cells  had  taken  part  in  the  contraction  than  in 
the  first.  In  the  one  case,  also,  a  larger  amount  of 
blood  was  conveyed  to  the  nerve-centers  to  sustain  the 
action ;  while  in  the  other  case,  the  muscles  have  re- 


PRINCIPLES    COXSIDEKED.  115 

ceived  the  larger  quantity  to  replenish  the  waste  occa- 
sioned by  their  action. 

This  principle  meets  also  Avitli  abundant  confirma- 
tion in  all  departments  oi  pathologij.  The  paralytic 
walks  with  great  difficulty,  because  though  the  mus- 
cles are  really  uuafl:ected,  the  loill  is  transmitted  to  them 
imperfectly  and  only  by  great  effort  on  account  of  the 
vitiated  state  of  the  nerve-conductors. 

The  eti:ect  of  poisons  wdiose  influence  is  exerted  upon 
the  nerves,  presents  a  pathological  state  corroborative 
of  this  principle.  Strychnine  produces  violent  muscu- 
lar contortion,  exhibiting  evidence  of  the  excited  and 
rapid  action  and  finally  the  exhaustion  of  the  nerve- 
centers  ;  while  spirits  and  most  other  stimulants  pro- 
duce their  deceptive  effect  by  evolving  rapidly  at  first 
the  nerve-power  by  exciting  in  the  nerve-centers  an 
action  which  the  deluded  victim  attempts  to  maintain 
by  repeating  tlie  doses.  ]^o  lasting  power  is  really 
gained  in  any  of  these  ways,  because  the  action  is 
essentially  of  the  destructive^  and  not  of  the  construc- 
tive kind. 

The  Movement-Cure  makes  direct  a])plication  of  the 
general  principles  here  set  forth  ;  hence  its  value  as  a 
therapeutic  means.  It  employs  slow  movements  in 
preference  to  the  more  rapid,  because  chronic  invalids 
need  to  have  their  nervous  powers  husbanded,  and 
their  general  muscular  and  nutritive  powers  increased. 
Such  invalids  have  suftered  enougli  already  from  un- 
natural and  irregular  nervous  activity.  The  muscles 
of  such  patients  not  only  fail  to  execute  the  promi)iings 
of  the  will,  but  also  to  control  in  a  proper  manner  those 
vegetative  actions  of  the  system  that  so  directly  depend 
upon  a  full  supply  of  nervous  energy  in  the  muscular 
system. 


116  PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

The  true  principles  concerned  in  the  therapeutic  ap- 
plication of  movements  being  plain,  we  only  need  to 
be  carefnl  that  onr  practice  in  making  remedial  appli- 
cation of  these  principles  be  made  thoronghly  to  corre- 
spond with  them.  E'ot  only  the  application  of  the  move- 
ments, bnt  the  general  habits  of  the  body  (which,  too, 
are  of  the  nature  of  movements),  must  be  made  to  ac- 
cord with  the  same  principles.  The  tendency  to  spas- 
modic haste,  especially,  that  characterizes  the  invalid, 
must  be  broken  up ;  otherwise  this  of  itself  will  be 
likely  to  perpetuate  the  troubles  under  which  he  labors, 
in  spite  of  any  remedial  means  he  may  have  been  led 
to  institute. 

Movements  as  a  Specific  Medical  Agency. — The 
single  movements  only  apjDroximate  the  duplicated 
movements  in  importance  as  a  therapeutic  means. 
These  latter  answer  all  the  distinct  purposes  indicated 
in  chronic  disease.  Their  effects  may  be  local  as  well 
as  general,  and  in  this  respect  they  quite  equal  those 
of  drugs,  difficult  as  some  may  find  it  to  believe  this. 
The  primary  impression  made  by  a  drug  is  essentially 
pathological ;  while  that  of  a  movement  is  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  desired  physiological  action,  and  conse- 
quently and  surely  toward  health.  Movements  are  also 
superior  to  drugs  in  the  extent  to  which  tlie  physiolog- 
ical actions  may  be  influenced  by  them,  especially  in  the 
control  obtained  by  their  application  over  the  circula- 
tion of  the  blood,  and  the  directness  with  which  respira- 
tion and  nutrition  are  influenced ;  which  last  results  are 
scarcely  exjDected  even  as  the  indirect  efi'ect  of  drugs. 

The  grand  difference  between  movements  and  drugs 
exists  in  all  their  relations  to  the  system.  The  one 
changes  physiological  action  to  pathological,  the  other 


PRIXCIPLES    COXSIDERED.  117 

carries  j^atliological  action  toward  physiological.  The 
drug  accomplishes  specific  objects  by  pervading  the 
whole  organism,  including  every  structure  within  it, 
and  leaving  thereon  its  morbid  impression.  It  has  no 
power  to  encourage  or  stlrmiliite,  primarily/,  the  great 
life-forces  of  the  system. 

Movements,  on  the  contrary,  secure  or  restore  unity 
and  a  just  balance  to  the  various  functions,  and  from 
disorder  and  discord  tend  to  bring  out  that  blissful 
order  and  harmony  -svhich  it  was  doubtless  the  inten- 
tion of  the  all-wise  and  good  Creator  should  character- 
ize the  physical  nature  of  his  favored  children. 

Movements  as  Reliable  Means  of  Securing  the 
Object  of  Nutritive  Medication. — Much  is  said  at  the 
present  day  in  regard  to  supplying,  directly  to  the 
blood,  its  deficient  saline  ingredients.  Certain  forms 
of  disease  are  assumed  certainly  to  indicate  this  want  in 
the  blood,  and  these  diseases  are  supposed  to  be  cured 
by  treatment  of  this  sort.  Of  the  faulty  quality  of  the 
blood  in  cases  of  defective  nutrition  there  can  be  no 
doubt ;  but  it  is  far  from  being  a  settled  point  that  its 
normal  quality  can  be  restored  to  it  in  this  way.  It  so 
liappens  that  our  ordinary  food  furnishes  an  abundance 
of  organizable  nutritive  matters.  The  trouble  is  not  in 
the  lack  of  the  material.  The  power  to  make  use  of  it 
is  what  is  w^anted  chiefly ;  and  this  can  never  be  im- 
parted by  ever  so  free  an  administration  of  saline, 
earthy,  or  ferruginous  preparations.  It  is  insisted  that 
the  structures  require  these  materials;  but  the  first 
question  to  be  settled  is  :  Are  these  stmctures  in  a  state 
of  preparation  and  fitness  to  receive  and  appropriate 
such  supplies  f  It  is  contrary  to  all  we  know  of  physi- 
ological law  to  conclude  that  nutritive  actions,  or  in- 


118  PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

deed  any  action,  should  proceed  in  the  absence  of  the 
conditions  necessary  for  the  supply  of  oxygen. 

The  truth  is  tliat  the  supply  of  the  materials  above 
mentioned  is  supererogatory.  If  we  examine  by  chem- 
ical tests  any  proper  and  wholesome  foods,  we  shall  lind 
the  saline  and  earthy  matters  needed  in  the  system  to 
be  present  in  quantities  positively  above  the  demands 
of  the  system.  These  matters  are  constituents  of  all 
common  food,  and  whether  they  become  appropriated 
or  are  cast  off  depends  entirely  upon  the  needs  of  the 
organism  and  its  appropriating  ability.  This  need  ex- 
ists in  direct  and  uniform  ratio  to  the  waste  ;  and 
though  the  blood  and  tissues  be  ever  so  deficient  in  re- 
gard to  the  substances  in  question,  they  can  never  be- 
come richer  in  them  in  the  absence  of  the  imperative 
and  effectual  demand  created  by  action.  Movem-ents^ 
it  has  been  found,  are  the  true  and  reliable  means  for 
bringing  nutritive  materials  in  general,  and  the  saline 
elements  of  the  blood  in  particular,  from  the  cavity  of 
the  stomach  into  the  inner  chambers  of  the  system, 
where  they  are  wanted. 

But  the  mode  of  administering  these  materials  in 
vogue  with  our  medical  friends  of  the  present  day  is 
much  less  satisfactory  than  the  more  ancient  and  natu- 
ral method.  The  saline  elements  of  food  are  in  the 
state  of  preparation  effected  by  the  organs  of  the  plant 
expressly  for  nutritive  purposes.  As  here  found,  they 
bear  an  analogy  to  organic  materials,  if,  indeed,  they 
are  not  essentially  such.  The  iron,  lime,  phosphorous, 
etc.,  are  not  in  the  food  as  crude  substances,  but  are 
incorporated  with  other  elements  or  matters  in  oi-ganic 
combination,  and  are  thus  fitted  to  accompauy  them  in 
their  errand  and  mission  of  good  to  every  needy  tissue 
of  the  frame. 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  119 

Movements  as  Related  to  ^N^erve  Stimulants. — But 
few  j)ersons  fully  understand  the  impropriety,  in  a  phy- 
siological point  of  view,  of  subjecting  their  nerves  to 
the  habitual  influence  of  sedatives  and  stimulants  for 
the  purpose  of  quieting  troublesome  sensations,  or  of 
allaying  unpleasant  brain-action.  The  principles  and 
facts  above  stated  must  demonstrate  the  inutility,  to 
say  the  least,  of  such  habits.  These  agents  conduce  to 
the  act  of  what  is  technically  termed  retrograde  raeta- 
morphosis  in  the  body,  in  an  improper  manner.  They 
debase  the  system,  and  render  its  actions  habitually 
vicious,  and  ultimately  overthrow  the  mental  powers. 
They  interfere  with  the  method  nature  has  appointed 
for  the  due  production  of  morphological  changes  in  the 
system. 

There  is  no  doubt  of  the  existence  of  a  real  need, 
though  artiiicially  induced,  the  consciousness  of  which 
impels  its  subject  to  resort  to  these  injurious  methods  of 
relief.  But  they  do  this  in  ignorance  of  a  simpler  and 
far  more  trustworthy  recourse.  A  careful  study  of  the 
principles  involved  in  the  Movement-Cure  suggests 
a  ready  way  of  securing  quietude  to  the  nerves  by  the 
simplest  of  means;  for  experience  has  taught  us  that 
when  irritability  or  pain  exists,  the  nerves  are  only  de- 
manding to  be  rescued  from  the  eflPects  of  a  bad  circu- 
lation and  an  irregular  distribution  of  nervous  power. 
It  has  already  been  shown  that  the  movements  fnrnish 
a  far  more  reliable  means  for  attaining  these  ends  than 
can  be  mustered  in  all  the  drug  shops  or  chemical 
laboratories  on  the  planet.  We  believe — and  every  day 
see  what  we  believe — that  the  vexed  brain  may  be  re- 
lieved by  drawing  off  its  surcharged  vessels ;  that  the 
stomach  and  blood  need  not  be  fired  by  a  stimulant  in 
order  to  warm  the  skin  and  excite  action  in  the  extrem- 


120  PRINCIPLES    CONSIDEEED. 

ities.  We  have  learned  that  distressful  sensations  gen- 
erally only  indicate  that  dead  matter  needs  to  be  ejected 
from  the  system  ;  that  pain,  even  severe  pain,  is  quieted 
by  employing,  in  contiguous  and  even  in  remote  por- 
tions of  the  body,  the  actions  that  supply  the  perverted 
nerve-power.  Destroy  thus,  by  the  continuous  and 
thorough  use  of  suitable  movements,  the  hankering 
(which  is  seated  in  the  irritable  nerve-fiber)  for  innutri- 
tions and  inflaming  stimulants,  and  soon  the  destructive 
habit  will  die  out,  and  the  sufferer  be  relieved  from  a 
despotism  w^orse  than  that  which  merely  puts  chains 
upon  the  body,  and  has  no  more  that  it  can  do. 

Movements  as  Related  to  Pathology. — Pathology 
wears  a  greatly  changed  aspect  from  the  point  of  view 
furnished  by  the  Movement-Cure.  Disease  is  no  longer 
hidden  to  us  among  inscrutable  causes,  nor  its  cure 
among  unintelligible  operations  or  more  mysterious 
mixtures.  Pain  need  now  no  longer  be  confounded 
wdth  disease,  nor  the  cure  deemed  completed  w^hen  the 
consciousness  has  become  oblivious  to  suffering. 

On  the  contrary,  disease  is  proved,  beyond  dispute, 
to  depend  on  disturbed  physiological  action,  and  it  only 
waits  for  correct  and  equable  physiological  action  to  be 
restored,  in  order  that  disease  shall  disappear.  The 
special  conditions  upon  which  the  symptoms  of  disease 
are  based  are  easily  and  speedily  removable  wdien  they 
exist  in  moderate  degree,  and  often  when  they  exist  to 
a  degree  quite  beyond  the  reach  of  ordinary  medical 
art,  providing,  only,  that  we  are  master  of  the  instru- 
mentalities within  our  reach. 

Several  of  these  removable  causes  or  conditions  usu- 
ally co-exist  in  the  same  case,  but  with  different  de- 
grees of  intensity  or  development.     In  every  effort  to 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  121 

remove  tlieni,  the  Movemeut-Cure  seeks  to  recover  the 
impaired  liarmony  of  the  system ;  never,  like  drugs, 
develo[)s  symptoms  of  its  own  worse  than  the  disease  ; 
but,  by  bringing  all  the  forces  of  the  organism  into  due 
co-relation,  assists  the  system-  to  glide,  naturally,  into 
a  state  of  health,  with  all  its  available  forces  unim- 
paired, and  ready  to  fulfill  the  behests  of  the  will. 

Those  invisible,  vito-chemical  actions  are  capable, 
we  see,  of  producing  results  that  may  agree  or  not  with 
the  standard  of  health.  The  nature  of  the  product  is 
of  but  little  consequence  compared  with  the  productive 
causes.  Morbid  materials  can  never  exist  without  mis- 
chievous antecedents.  We  are  not  accomplishing  much 
when  we  apply  antidotes  to  effects,  while  the  causes  are 
busily  at  work  out  of  sight  and  out  of  reach. 

The  inter-relations  of  physiological  and  pathological 
agencies  are  so  involved,  that  to  look  for  the  first  of 
morbid  causes  is  like  seeking  the  end  of  a  circle,  or  a 
needle  in  a  hay-stack.  But  to  the  practical  inquirer 
the  few  essential  phenomena  that  most  demand  his  at- 
tention are  readily  recognized ;  such  as  defective  res- 
jpiration^  congestion  or  nial-cir dilation ,  imperfect  nu- 
tritio)!^  morMd  innervation.  These  are  the  conditions 
that  chiefly  interest  us,  and  to  obtain  the  control  over 
which  it  is  the  aim  of  all  our  practice  and  endeavor. 

Province  of  Movements. — Whether  movements  are 
hygienic  or  remedial  in  their  effects,  depends  on  the 
character  of  the  case  for  which  they  are  used.  They 
are  hvo;ienic  when  their  influences  are  such  as  to  main- 
tain  the  already  existing  healthy  relations  of  the  pbysi- 
ological  man — when  they  give  healthy  scope  to  all 
vital  powers  in  spite  of  the  deteriorating  tendencies  of 
sedentary  or  intellectual  occupations  ;  or  of  such  habits 

6 


122  PEINCIPLES    CONSIDERED. 

of  labor  as  employ  some  portions  of  the  body  too  much 
and  other  portions  too  little.  Movements  thus  applied 
may  be  called  the  natural  means  of  counteracting  the 
evil  tendencies  of  an  artificial  mode  of  life,  whose  name 
is  legion. 

Movements  become  medical  when  their  effects  are 
to  improve  imperfect  physiological  relations,  or  break 
up  pathological  states  habitually  existing ;  as,  for  in- 
stance, when  they  permanently  increase  the  circulation 
and  nutrition  of  a  part  previously  defective,  increase 
the  respiration,  diminish  morbid  innervation,  restrain 
morbid  discharges,  or  incite  any  defective  function  to  a 
healthful  and  satisfactory  play. 

Morale  of  Move:ments. — Invalids  are  gaining  in- 
struction all  the  time  through  their  experience  in  the 
daily  use  of  movements  in  regard  to  the  causes  of  their 
troubles,  and  thus  are  often  enabled  to  rise  superior  to 
the  depressing  influences  of  the  disease.  As  a  thorough 
system  of  movements  involves  a  general  hygienic  treat- 
ment, the  invalid  no  longer  pursues  the  preposterous 
plan  of  employing  a  remedy  for  difiiculties  that  he  is 
continually  reproducing  in  himself.  Yicious  practices 
cease  to  be  seductive  when  he  is  alive  to  their  proba- 
ble effects.  His  faith  in  the  wonderful  and  reputed 
powers  of  medicine,  which  forever  offers  its  premium 
to  vice  and  folly,  collapses,  and  he,  by  so  doing,  re- 
solves to  try,  at  least,  to  do  right. 

But  the  influence  of  this  sentiment  does  not  stop 
here.  The  physiological  and  the  spiritual  are  co-ordi- 
nate departments  of  our  being,  sustain  relations  of 
mutual  ministry,  and  conspire  to  mutual  elevation  of 
function.  But  the  physiological  system  is  anterior  in 
development,  though  temporary  in  function  ;  and  its 


PRINCIPLES    CONSIDERED.  123 

obvious  office  and  essential  purpose  is  that  of  instructor 
of  the  spiritual  nature  in  fundamental  truths. 

The  same  law  of  development  resulting  from  the  ex- 
perience of  good  and  evil,  pleasure  and  pain,  disobedi- 
ence and  penalty,  is  common  to  both  departments,  but 
being  first  apprehended  on  the  physiological  plane, 
meets  with  a  ready  transfer  to  the  spiritual.  In  the 
body  these  laws  are  of  tempo]*ary  application,  but  ap- 
plied to  the  higher  life,  become  fundamental  and  per- 
manent. Generations  of  men  cast  away  the  weary 
experiences  of  life  as  of  no  profit,  because  it  has  not 
yet  taught  their  meaning;  —  even  in  a  physiological 
sense  it  has  not  been  comprehended. 


124         MOVE^EENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMNASTICS. 


MOVEMENTS   COMPARED   WITH  GYMNASTICS. 

One  evil  has  grown  out  of  the  recent  interest  that 
the  Movement-Cure  has  awakened,  and  this  is  the 
adoption  bj  invalids  of  those  ill-considered  and  hetero- 
geneous exercises  embraced  under  the  general  name  of 
Gymnastics.  The  very  great  danger  to  the  weakly 
and  the  invalid  from  the  mistake  of  confounding  the 
two  things,  renders  it  a  duty  to  explain  the  difference 
in  their  effects. 

The  man  who,  feeling  himself  sick,  should  rush  into 
the  first  drug-shop  in  his  way  and  there  seize  and  swal- 
low whatever  he  might  lay  hands  on,  would  be  con- 
sidered a  madman,  whose  life  would  most  likely  pay 
the  forfeit  of  his  want  of  consideration.  If  a  physi- 
cian, who  ought  to  know  that  drugs  are  potent  sub- 
stances, should  recommend  this  procedure  to  his  patient, 
he  would  be  designated  by  some  not  very  mild  term. 
And  yet  essentially  the  same  thing  is  practiced  with 
reference  to  exercises.  Like  dosing,  exercising,  it  is 
assumed,  is  useful  for  the  sick  in  a  general  way,  and  so 
the  sick  are  advised  to  "  take  exercise,"  without  desig- 
nating what  when.,  where,  or  how.  Upon  this  loose  prin- 
ciple ten  thousand  doctors  are  daily  prescribing  and 
many  more  invalids  practicing,  until  aggravating  their 
old  complaints,  or  contracting  new,  the  latter  become 
disgusted  with  both  advice  and  adviser,  and,  fancying 


MOVEMENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMNASTICS.  125 

there  can  be  no  lielp  for  them,  give  np  to  hypochon- 
dria, with  all  its  woes.  All  this  comes  from  not  con- 
sidering that  exercise  is  a  most  potent  means  of  affect- 
ing the  hody^  whether  for  good  or  for  ill,  and  that  it 
necessarily  has  laws^  and  must  be  practiced  in  obe- 
dience thereto,  or  it  will  be  quite  as  likely  to  do  harm 
as  good. 

The  very  fact  that  a  person  needs  exercise  distinct 
from  his  usual  avocations,  whatever  these  may  be,  im- 
plies— as  one  will  see  if  a  moment's  thought  be  given 
the  subject — that  he  needs  it  of  a  particular  kind  or 
quality,  in  particular  amount,  or  aftecting  particular 
portions  of  the  body.  If  one  receives  it  in  such  parts 
and  of  such  form  as  will  serve  to  dissipate  the  con- 
gestion of  over-worked  or  diseased  organs,  and  vivify 
and  set  in  normal  action  the  parts  that  are  suft'ering 
from  inaction,  he  is  refreshed,  strengthened,  and  rein- 
stated in  health  and  power.  Otherwise,  or  if  the  exer- 
cise be  indiscriminately  employed,  he  has  no  ground 
for  assurance  that  undesirable  effects  will  not  be  pro- 
duced, that  the  congestion,  the  anemia,  the  want  of 
power,  or  whatever  the  trouble  may  be,  may  not  be 
aggravated  by  the  same  agency  that,  scientifically  em- 
ployed, would  have  produced  the  happiest  results. 
Such  a  person,  indeed,  has  reason  to  become  discour- 
aged, and  can  hardly  be  blamed  for  arriving  at  the 
conclusion,  after  such  an  experience,  that  exercise  is  not 
the  thing  he  requires. 

The  distinction  between  Gymnastics  and  Movements 
is  so  plain  that  it  must  be  readily  appreciated  if  a  little 
consideration  be  bestowed  upon  the  subject.  While 
the  one  results  mainly  in  the  expenditure  of  power, 
both  nervous  and  muscular,  indiscriminately,  without 
reference  to  the  particular  conditions  of  the  system, 


126  MOVEMENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GTISLNASTICS. 

either  in  its  original  conformation,  its  idiosyncrasies, 
its  diseases,  or  its  temporary  states,  the  other  not  only 
takes  all  these  into  full  consideration,  but  also  by  the 
aid  of  a  severe,  thorough,  and  systematic  analysis  of 
all  the  modifications  of  motion  applied  to  the  body  or 
produced  by  it  in  all  its  varied  conditions,  is  able  to 
adapt  itself  nicely  to  the  needs  of  the  individual  case. 
While  Gymnastics  may  be  practiced  by  any  one  who 
is  accomplished  enough  to  turn  a  somerset,  Movements 
require  the  discipline  furnished  by  the  schools,  by 
which  only  can  be  acquired  that  knowledge  of  the  na- 
ture of  diseases,  the  nicety  of  tact  and  quickness  of 
perception  which  are  essential  to  insure  a  nice  adapta- 
tion of  the  means  to  the  ends  contemplated.  Move- 
ments further  require  for  their  greatest  success  certain 
mental  and  moral  qualities  in  the  practitioner  calcu- 
lated to  gain  and  keep  the  confidence  of  the  patient. 
This  is  a  great  point,  as  might  be  supposed,  a  priori. 

In  comparing  the  efifects  of  Gymnastics  w^ith  the 
Movements^  a  German  writer  makes  the  following  sen- 
sible remarks : 

"  It  is  not  denied  that  gymnastics  may  serve  to  de- 
velop the  parts  that  execute  the  movements — muscle, 
tendon,  ligament,  and  bone  ;  but  in  doing  this  they 
will  give  a  heavy  and  too  concentrated  a  form,  espe- 
cially to  the  superior  portions  of  the  body.  If  we  ex- 
amine a  gymnast,  we  find  the  upper  portion  of  the 
body  much  more  largely  developed  than  the  lower, 
because  it  is  the  general  fault  of  gymnastics  that  the 
great  proportion  of  the  exercise  consists  in  overcoming 
either  the  weight  of  the  body  or  that  of  some  other 
object  by  the  arms^  while  the  legs  only  sustain  the 
weight  of  the  trunk,  as  on  ordinary  occasions.  This 
effect,  of  course,  is   detrimental  to  the   system  as  a 


MOVE^fENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMNASTICS.  127 

whole.  The  subject  of  any  special  excessive  develop- 
ment, instead  of  being  benefited  thereby,  is  absolutely 
incapacitated  by  it  for  the  performance  of  life's  ordi- 
nary duties  to  some  extent. 

Gymnastics,  also,  in  case  of  the  existence  of  a  pre- 
disposition to  it,  are  liable  to  fasten  upon  themselves  a 
dangerous  disease.  It  is  well  known  that  by  these 
violent  exercises  the  veins  are  rendered  full  and  turgid. 
This  condition  is  always  followed  by  a  general  relaxa- 
tion of  the  body  and  mind,  a  disposition  to  somno- 
lence, and  one  can  conceive  that  if  this  state  is  fre- 
quently reproduced,  very  injurious  physical  and  moral 
effects  will  ensue.  If  it  can  be  demonstrated  that 
gymnastic  exercises  produce  a  predominance  of  venous 
blood  in  the  body,  it  follows,  of  course,  that  it  is  by 
this  means  seriously  vitiated  in  all  its  parts,  and  we 
have  no  need  of  other  facts  to  assure  us  that  the  veins, 
of  which  the  walls  are  naturally  soft  and  easily  dis- 
tended, may  be  readily  broken  down  under  the  press- 
ure of  the  accelerated  blood,  and  that  there  will  be  a 
resultant  tendency  to  hemorrhage. 

The  circidatory  system  is  necessarily  oftentimes 
much  disordered  by  gymnastic  exercises  performed 
without  rule  or  measure.  Gymnastics,  we  know,  can 
only  excite  the  functions  through  the  medium  of  the 
circulation.  The  irregular  flow  thus  induced  is  not 
advantageous,  but  quite  the  contrary,  to  the  diseased 
or  enfeebled  parts.  The  common  gymnast  labors  in 
vain  to  relieve  tendencies  to  pulmonary  disease.  For 
this  class  of  cases  all  violent  exercises  are  injurious, 
and  for  an  obvious  reason ;  the  passage  of  blood  as 
well  as  air  is  impeded  in  the  lungs ;  the  exercises  of 
tlie  rack  and  bars  force  the  blood  violently  into  these 
delicate  or  diseased  structures,  causing  sometimes  a 


128  MOVEMENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMXASTICS. 

rupture,  and  frequently  congestion  therein.  And 
where  disease  already  exists,  an  aggravation  of  it  must 
ensue,  and  the  poor  invalid,  by  his  rashness,  is  sud- 
denly put  beyond  a  chance  of  cure. 

It  will  also  be  noticed  that  every  violent  effort  at 
inspiration  not  only  calls  air  into  the  lungs,  but  exer- 
cises an  equal  power  over  the  return  flow  of  venous 
blood.  The  effect,  then,  of  these  repeated  violent  move- 
ments of  the  walls  of  the  chest  produced  by  gymnastic 
feats,  is  accumulation  of  the  blood,  or  congestion,  in  one 
of  the  most  delicate  and  fragile  portions  of  the  organ- 
ism, from  which  not  seldom  the  most  serious  results 
have  been  known  to  follow. 

Whatever  of  profit  may  be  gotten  from  these  exer- 
cises, it  is  to  be  feared,  is  more  than  balanced  by  the 
loss  of  nervous  energy  experienced.  The  invalid  feels 
this,  and  is  soon  inclined  to  desist.  Those  compara- 
tively well,  however,  are  not  apt  to  notice  this  declen- 
sion of  nervous  force  till  a  serious  inroad  has  been  made 
upon  their  constitution. 

In  striking  contrast  to  this  are  the  effects  of  wisely 
conducted  movements.  By  these  exercises,  the  nervous 
power  is  conserved  to  the  greatest  possible  degree  com- 
patible with  its  continuous  development.  The  willing 
power  is  husbanded  and  re-enforced,  the  superior  force 
of  the  operator  energizing  the  relaxed  system  of  the 
patient. 

These  serious  objections  that  we  have  raised  against 
gymnastics  equally  apply  to  calisthenics.  This  kind 
of  exercise  chiefly  tasks  the  nerves,  especially  the  cere- 
bro-spinal  axis,  upon  which  all  motive  power  depends. 
In  the  practice  of  this  class  of  exercises,  not  even  the 
whole  weight  of  the  members  is  to  be  overcome ;  but 
all  available  power  is  expended  in  the  production  of 


MOVEMENTS    COMPARED   WITH    GYMNASTICS.  129 

celerity  in  the  motions,  an  efiort  tliat  greatly  draws 
upon  the  nerves.  Ko  wonder  that  feeble  ladies,  who 
are  directed  to  use  this  kind  of  exercises  (for  the  gym- 
nasium is  virtually  closed  to  ladies),  experiment  with  re- 
luctance, and  soon  give  over,  conscious  of  their  injurious 
eflect  on  their  already  morbidly  active  nervous  systems. 
It  must  be  manifest,  by  this  time,  to  the  reader,  we 
think,  that  there  exists  an  important  difference  between 
well-ordered  and  directed  exercise,  pursued  in  accord- 
ance with  true  physiological  principles,  and  that  sort 
which  practically  ignores  all  these  principles. 

The  Muscles  a  Medium  of  Language,  and  of  the 
Manifestation  of  Charactee. — The  muscles  have  other 
functions  besides  officiating  as  agents  of  the  will  in  the 
manifestation  of  mechanical  power.  They  also  give  ex- 
pression to  the  thoughts  and  emotions  of  the  soul ;  na- 
ture employs  them  in  conducting  intercourse  between 
man  and  man  as  their  visible  sign,  "Without  this  means 
we  can  hardly  conceive  it  possible  that  society  could 
exist,  except  in  the  most  rudimental  and  savage  way. 
It  is  through  this  agency  that  not  only  our  transient 
moods,  but  our  very  characters,  are  represented  to 
others.  Not  only  by  the  changes  that  are  being  inces- 
santly wrought  in  the  lineaments  of  the  face,  but  in  the 
constantly  shifting  attitudes  of  the  person  involuntarily 
assumed,  are  we  forever  publishing  to  the  world  our 
ever-changing  mental  and  emotional  states. 

These  statements  are  amply  supported  by  the  expe- 
rience of  every  living  being.  We  all  do  involuntarily 
form  judgments  as  to  the  characters  of  the  persons  we 
meet,  without  receiving  any  other  knowledge  in  regard 
to  them  than  that  derived  from  this  source,  and  these 
judgments  are  proverbially  more   correct  than  those 

6* 


130  MOVEMENTS    COMPAKED    WITH   GYMNASTICS. 

which  we  subsequently  acquire  as  the  result  of  an  anal- 
ysis of  their  words  and  deeds.  Deeds  often  lie,  we 
know ;  and  language  is  as  often  used,  perhaps,  to  con- 
ceal as  to  express  thought.  We  are  often  as  much  con- 
vinced or  moved  by  the  glance  of  the  eye,  or  gesture, 
or  general  bearing  of  a  public  speaker,  as  by  anything 
he  says,  as  may  be  proved  by  allowing  another  per- 
son to  speak  or  read  the  discourse  that  charmed  us  on 
its  first  delivery.  "We  all  well  enough  understand  the 
power  of  what  is  sometimes  termed  silent  eloquence  in 
that  expression  of  emotion  of  fear,  ibr  example,  or  an- 
ger, revenge,  jealousy,  confidence,  which  is  efifected  in 
utter  silence,  and  chiefly  by  muscular  play  of  feature. 
Indeed,  the  strongest  emotions,  we  well  know,  are  much 
more  powerfully  rendered  by  facial  expressions  than  by 
the  employment  of  the  most  vehement  phraseology. 
Who  can  not  call  up  in  imagination  or  from  memory 
these  representations  of  fear,  disgust,  grief,  joy,  etc? 

The  accomplished  actor,  by  combinations  of  attitudes, 
look,  and  gesture,  is  enabled  to  enhance  a  thousand-fold 
the  efi'ect  of  the  dramatist's  effusions ;  for  by  his  artistic 
disj^lays  lie  reaches  the  mind  and  heart  through  ave- 
nues that  tongue  or  pen  can  never  travel.  One  is  often 
more  strongly  impressed  by  what  he  knows  to  be  fic- 
tion, when  it  is  empowered  in  this  way,  than  by  abso- 
lute truth  conveyed  by  pen  or  tongue  alone.  But  the 
feeling  conveyed  must  really  exists  if  it  only  he  for  the 
time^  else  it  can  not  find  expression  in  the  natural  lan- 
guage which  it  is  the  oflSce  of  the  muscles  to  furnish. 
The  feeling  thus  expressed  can  not  be  simulated ;  it 
must  proceed  from  interior  sources.  The  merit  of  a 
public  speaker  consists  mostly  in  his  power  to  experi- 
ence, for  the  occasion,  the  amount  of  intensity  of 
thought  and  feeling  requisite  for  the  production  of  the 


MOVEMENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMNASTICS.  131 

efiects  lie  desires.  The  demagogue,  the  patriot,  and 
the  preacher  alike  wield  these  powerful  instruments. 
A  gesture,  a  turn  of  the  head,  a  lifting  of  the  finger,  a 
grand  wave  of  the  arm,  has  doubtless  many  a  time 
given  that  power  to  a  sentence  or  a  sentiment  that  has 
decided  some  great  question,  perhaps  determined  the 
fate  of  a  nation  or  a  soul. 

It  is  because  of  this  universal  reco2:nition  of  a  Ian- 
guage  in  the  muscular  motions  and  positions  of  the  hu- 
man figure,  that  the  power  exists  of  giving  permanency 
to  these  expressions  of  ideas  in  marble  and  on  canvas, 
for  the  arts  of  sciilpture  and  painting  are  nothing  more 
than  the  art  of  representing  by  perspective,  color,  and 
form  these  natural  signs,  so  that  the  idea,  emotion,  or 
event  which  forms  the  subject  of  the  work  is  instantly 
and  forcibly  impressed  upon  the  beholder's  mind.  All 
muscular  action  is  dependent  on  the  stimulus  of  the 
nerves.  Destroy  the  nerves,  and  muscular  power  per- 
ishes immediately.  This  stimulus  is  received  directly 
or  indirectly  from  the  will^  and  by  will  we  simply  mean 
mental  action. 

These  eifects  are  similar  to  those  we  witness  in  the 
cerebro-spinal  system.  Here,  every  sensation,  though 
not  manifested  in  the  consciousness,  is  represented  by 
the  action  of  that  portion  of  the  muscular  system  that 
is  associated  with  the  sensitive  nerve.  So  also  any  emo- 
tion pervading  the  mind  is  a  source  of  a  distinct  ner- 
vous perception  that  is  immediately  reflected  upon  ap- 
propriate muscles.  Certain  mental  states  uniformly  ex- 
press themselves  through  certain  nerves,  and  these,  in 
their  turn,  being  connected  with  appropriate  muscles, 
a  corresponding  outward  expression  is  effected.  The 
manner  and  degree  of  contraction  are  the  measure  of 
the  thought  or  emotion  which  is  represented  by  it. 


132  MOVEMENTS    COMPAEED   WITH   GYMNASTICS. 

These  principles  will  be  admitted  as  eminently  true, 
so  far  as  regards  the  muscular  apparatus  connected 
with  the  face.  The  face,  indeed,  has  several  muscles 
for  which  there  is  no  other  known  use  but  that  of  giv- 
ing visible  expression  to  thought. 

These  muscles  form — to  borrow  a  phrase  from  poetry 
— the  dial-plate  of  the  soul,  on  which  all  may  read  its 
lessons  as  in  a  glass.  There  are  faces,  to  be  sure,  that 
are  only  masks^  but  these  are  the  exceptions. 

But  muscular  expression  is  by  no  means  confined  to 
the  countenance.  All  the  muscles  of  the  body  are 
subservient  in  various  degrees  to  the  same  purpose, 
and  the  variety  of  their  play  gives  significance  to  the 
attitudes  and  gestures,  countless  and  ever  changing, 
that  contribute  so  much  to  the  eflfect  of  conversation, 
public  speaking,  and  to  the  charm  of  the  stage. 

Thus  far  the  principles  I  have  advanced  are  those 
commonly  understood  and  accepted.  But  it  must  be 
borne  in  mind  that  the  difierent  parts  and  forces  of  the 
body  exert  a  reciprocal  action  and  influence  upon  each 
other.  JSTow  we  say,  if  mode  of  mind  give  character 
to  muscular  expression,  what,  arguing  from  analogy, 
so  likely  as  that  a  careful  attention  to  the  healthful 
and  symmetrical  development  of  this  wonderful  and 
delicate  system  of  muscles,  so  intimately  associated 
with  the  mind,  should  confer  a  reflex  advantage  upon 
the  mind  itself,  especially  when  we  consider  that  the 
body,  with  all  its  amazing  appliances,  was  made  to 
answer  the  ends  and  contribute  to  the  comfort  and 
welfare  of  the  spiritual  resident.  The  dependence  of 
the  mind  upon  the  body  it  is  not  necessary  that  we 
should  prove  as  a  general  proposition.  All  must  con- 
cede that.  Mens  sana  in  corpore  sano^  is  the  law.  A 
vigorous  manhood  can  not  be  reached  save  by  a  prac- 


MOYEMENTS    COMPARED    WITH    GYMNASTICS.  133 

tical  obedience  to  the  law  that  recognizes  this  mutual 
dependence  of  the  material  and  the  immaterial  ele- 
ments of  our  natnre.  It  is  said  that  a  person  can  not 
assume  for  an  instant  the  exterior  look  and  action  of 
one  in  fear  without  experiencing  the  emotion.  This  is 
but  one  fact  of  a  thousand  pointing  to  the  same  princi- 
ple. One  perfectly  acquainted  with  the  physiology 
of  the  frame  and  its  relations  to  the  soul  might,  we 
think,  almost  be  able  to  infer  the  character  of  a  man's 
politics,  morality,  or  religion  from  his  physical  habits 
and  manifestations. 

If  this  be  so,  may  it  not  behoove  us  to  look  a  little 
more  closely  than  we  are  apt  to  do  to  the  physical 
condition  and  habits  of  those  who  assume  to  be  our 
spiritual  guides  ?  May  we  not  reasonably  inquire 
whether  this  dogma,  that  creed,  or  the  other  platform 
may  not  possibly  result  from  defective  reasoning,  itself 
the  result  of  vicious  digestion  or  a  languid  circulation 
— whether  the  surj^rising  conversion  of  men  to  particu- 
lar forms  of  faith  may  not  have  something  directly  or 
indirectly  to  do  with  the  quality  of  their  nerve-power, 
or  the  condition  of  their  livers  or  mucous  membranes  ? 


134  DIKECTIONS    FOK   PKESCEIBING 


DIRECTIONS    FOR    PRESCRIBING    AND    APPLYING 
MOVEMENTS. 

Movements,  whether  single  or  duplicated,  become 
remedially  valuable  only  when  prescribed  with  due 
reference  to  the  condition  of  the  system.  The  pre- 
scription must  be  based  on  several  principles  of  physi- 
ology, absolute  in  their  nature  and  direct  in  their 
application.  If  these  are  not  strictly  regarded,  a  given 
movement  becomes  of  no  account,  but  descends  to  the 
level  of  the  ordinary  purposeless  actions  of  the  body, 
perhaps  harmful ;  or  at  best,  contributing  in  but  a 
general  and  ud  satisfactory  way  to  the  well-being  of 
the  system. 

It  should  be  further  stated,  that  the  efficiency  of 
movements,  when  well  prescribed^  depends  measurably 
upon  the  tact  and  energy  of  the  operator  if  they  be  of 
the  duplicated  kind  ;  and  upon  the  intelligence^  pa- 
tience^ and  strength  of  the  patient,  if  single. 

This  treatment  regards  the  system  as  subject  to  a 
continual  though  invisible  growth,  and  to  further  and 
perfect  this  process  is  its  especial  aim  and  business. 
And  as  the  pulling-down  and  repairing  operations  of 
tlie  system  in  health  are  gradually  and  unconsciously 
conducted,  so  the  effects  of  judicious  treatment  are 
gradually  and  imperceptibly  produced.  The  patient, 
indeed,  ought  to  arrive  at  a  knowledge  of  the  effects 
of  treatment  only  by  experiencing  an  abatement  of  his 


AND    APPLYING    MOVEMENTS.  135 

pains  and  a  restoration  of  strength  and  vivacity.  Those 
who  expect  effects  such  as  follow  from  the  administra- 
tion of  drngs,  will  be  disappointed,  although  it  may  he 
stated  that  many  of  these  effects  may  be  produced  in- 
directly through  the  agency  of  movements,  but  they 
are  not  regarded'  as  legitimate  or  desirable. 

Time  Coxsideeed. — If  for  hygienic  purposes,  to  coun- 
teract the  effects  of  sedentary  habits,  of  undue  mental 
application,  or  the  practice  of  some  kind  of  labor  that 
involves  the  use  of  a  part  of  the  body  only,  move- 
ments may  be  taken  at  any  time  when  this  necessity  is 
felt.  In  cases  of  positive  disease,  it  is  considered  de- 
sirable that  they  be  taken  in  the  early  part  of  the  day, 
when  the  system  is  more  plastic,  and  when,  owing  to 
the  night's  rest,  there  is  most  power  in  store  within  it: 
hence,  either  before  breakfast,  or  a  short  time  after  it, 
the  system  at  this  time,  owing  to  the  repose  of  the 
night,  being  in  condition  most  favorable  for  the  recep- 
tion of  curative  impressions. 

In  general,  a  prescription  of  movements  should  be 
practiced  no  more  than  once  in  the  day  ;  and  in  dupli- 
cated movements,  however  moderately  used,  we  must 
guard  against  the  occurrence  of  crises^  headaches, 
febrile  symptoms,  etc.,  which  frequently  occur  after  a 
short  term  of  treatment.  Immediately  on  the  occur- 
rence of  crises,  we  must  change  the  prescription  or 
leave  off  treatment  altogether,  for  the  effects  in  such 
cases  are  similar  to  those  brought  about  by  the  abuse 
of  hydropathy  or  of  drugs. 

An  auxiliary  prescription  may  sometimes  be  made 
for  another  time  in  the  day,  repeating  perhaps  some 
portion  of  the  primary  one,  but  only  under  the  di- 
rection of  a  competent  physician. 


136  DIRECTIONS    FOR    TRESCRIBING- 

Manner. — Every  movement  lias  two  important  ele- 
ments, mschanical  and  a  mental,  or  mental  and  moral, 
neither  of  which  may  properly  be  neglected  for  the 
other.  The  correct  posture  must  first  be  taken,  care- 
fully adjusting  every  member.  The  part  to  be  moved 
should  then  be  made  to  pass  through  the  prescribed  line 
until  it  reaches  the  indicated  limit,  which  is  usually 
the  limit  of  the  contractile  capacity  of  the  chief  mus- 
cles employed ;  and  this  last  position  should  then  be 
retained  for  a  few  moments,  unless  the  nature  of  the 
movement  renders  it  impossible.  Generally,  the  part  is 
returned  to  its  first  position  with  comparatively  little 
muscular  efi'ort. 

In  the  mean  time,  the  mind  or  will  is  intent  on  the 
mechanical  execution  of  the  movement,  and  the  nerves, 
its  faithful  servants,  are  busy  conveying  the  needful 
stimuli  to  the  part,  without  which  we  are  aware  the 
execution  of  the  movement,  if  it  be  a  voluntary  one,  is 
impossible.  The  mind  is  thus  engaged  in  sustaining 
the  vital  operations  of  the  moving  part.  Both  the  ex- 
ternal display  of  mechanical  force,  and  the  internal 
vito-chemical  changes  upon  w^hich  it  depends,  are  the 
results  of  mental  action.  If  the  movement  be  dupli- 
cated, the  mental  force  of  the  operator  is  exclusively 
employed,  while  that  of  the  patient  is  economized.  If 
the  movement  be  inaccurate  or  faltering  ;  in  other 
words,  if  to  a  lack  of  precision  in  the  prescription  there 
be  added  a  want  of  intelligent  determination  and  force 
in  the  oj)erator,  little,  if  anything,  is  eflected. 

Rhythm. — ^This  is  a  highly  important  element  of  our 
system,  and  one  that  is  far  too  generally  overlooked. 
For  the  general  purposes  contemplated  by  movements, 
whether  hygienic  or  curative,  they  should  be  performed 


AND    APPLYING   MOVEMENTS.  137 

slowly,  much  more  slowly  than  are  the  habitual  mo- 
tions of  the  body.  Thus  the  acting  part  occupies  the 
attention  for  a  considerable  time,  and  the  amount  of 
control  gained  over  the  changes  of  the  part  is  conse- 
quently and  proportionably  great,  while  the  energy  of 
will  and  the  expenditure  of  nerve-power  that  is  re- 
quired is  small.  The  absolute  time  occupied  in  a 
movement  should  vary  with  the  size,  and  especially 
with  the  length,  of  the  acting  muscle  or  muscles, 
the  short  muscles  doing  their  work  in  briefer  time. 
The  part  should  retain  its  extreme  position  for  a  short 
period. 

Exertion. — In  duplicated  movements  the  assistant  is 
responsible  for  the  amount  of  exertion  employed  by 
the  patient,  for  it  is  quite  under  his  control.  The  effect 
may  be  perfectly  graduated  to  suit  his  judgment,  as 
notes  of  music  respond  to  the  touch  of  the  master- 
player  ;  indeed,  a  nicely  executed  movement  has  some- 
thing of  the  swell  and  harmonious  flow  of  a  musical 
strain. 

The  single  movements,  however,  do  not  admit  of  this 
precise  control.  The  resistance  is  supplied  by  the 
w^eight  of  the  part  which  is  varied  as  the  positions 
vary,  but  can  be  increased  only  to  a  limited  extent. 
Tlie  amount  of  exertion  possible  in  any  position  is  de- 
pendent upon  the  degree  of  mobility  of  the  part  con- 
cerned. 

[NrMBER. — Tlie  number  of  movements  to  be  taken  at 
once  should  be  sufficient  to  engage  all  parts  of  the  sys- 
tem (there  are  some  exceptions  to  this  rule,  as  in  cases 
of  paralysis  and  surgical  diseases),  but  not  enough  to 
occasion  fatigue,  or  only  such  moderate  fatigue  as  is 


138  DIRECTIONS    FOR   PKESCRrBING- 

quickly  recovered  from.      The  number  generally  re- 
quired in  a  prescription  ranges  from  ten  to  twelve. 

Oedek. — ^Tliis  is  a  very  important  matter  in  dupli- 
cated movements;  so  much  so  tliat  by  a  re-arrange- 
ment of  tlie  order  quite  new  effects  may  often  be  pro- 
duced on  the  invalid.  The  arrangement  should  be 
such  that  the  movements  shall  support  each  other,  and 
all  work  together  to  the  production  of  the  effect.  By 
a  vicious  arrangement  they  interfere  with  and  neutral- 
ize each  other.  A  proper  arrangement  is  also  import- 
ant in  the  single  movements.  Too  many  in  succession 
applied  to  the  same  organ,  if  enfeebled,  would  be  likely 
to  produce  congestion,  the  usual  effect  of  excessive  ex- 
ercise ;  if  the  part  is  diseased,  it  would  be  apt  to  in- 
crease and  extend  the  disease.  All  the  requirements 
of  the  system,  in  any  given  case,  should  be  considered 
in  the  prescription,  and  the  order  of  their  importance. 
Professor  Branting  proposes  that  the  following  order  be 
generally  observed,  modifications,  of  course,  being 
made  to  meet  the  needs  of  particular  cases. 

1.  A  respiratory  movement. 

2.  A  movement  of  the  lower  extremities. 

3.  Of  the  upper  extremities. 

4.  Of  the  abdomen. 

5.  Of  the  lower  extremities — terminating  with 

6.  A  respiratory  movement. 

The  formula,  we  repeat,  is  to  be  varied  according  to 
the  particular  circumstances  of  each  case,  the  part 
affected,  the  temperament,  etc.  Whatever  the  order, 
the  movements  should  always  harmonize  with  each 
other ;  for  it  is  only  from  the  harmonious  union  of  their 
separate  actions  that  the  best  results  can  proceed. 


AND    APPLYING    MOVEMENTS.  139 

Relation  to  Diseased  Parts. — Every  formula  of 
movements  for  persons  that  have  local  weakness  or  dis- 
ease, will  contain  both  general  and,  sjKcial  elements — 
the  latter  having  particular  reference  to  the  disease. 
But,  in  general,  active  movements  must  iiot  he  ajyplied 
to  organs  affected  with  actual  disease.  The  diseased 
part  must  be  approached  gradually,  beginning  at  some 
remote  part  of  the  body,  arousing  it  to  vital  activ- 
ity, and  augmenting  its  capacity  to  receive  blood.  In 
this  way  the  congestion  accompanying  the  disease  is 
gradually  removed,  and  the  vital  and  nutrient  power 
of  the  system  increased  and  established,  until  finally 
the  diseased  part  is  so  relieved  that  it  becomes  capable 
of  receiving  advantageously  the  direct  eifects  of  move- 
ment. 

The  passive  kind  of  duplicated  movements  are,  how- 
ever, an  exception  to  the  above  rule.  The  direct 
eftect  of  many  of  the  passive  movements,  such  as  mhra- 
tions,  etc.,  is  to  move  the  blood  of  the  congested  capil- 
laries toward  the  veins.  The  adherent  corpuscles  are 
thus  dislodged,  and  the  current  arrested  by  them  is 
allowed  again  to  flow  onward.  Such  movements,  in 
this  way,  greatly  assist  in  the  removal  of  congestion, 
and  may,  with  care,  be  applied  to  the  diseased  mem- 
bers or  organs. 

It  is  needless  to  say  that  the  general  habits  of  exer- 
cise should  be  compelled  to  accord  with  the  tenor  of 
the  movement  prescription.  For  instance,  as  in  pro- 
portion to  the  organic  disturbance  there  is  always  an  in- 
crease of  nervous  excitability,  and  a  decrease  of  phys- 
ical power,  the  habitual  exercises  of  the  patient  should 
be  so  ordered  as  to  assist  in  repressing  the  excitability 
and  to  invigorate  the  general  nutrition  of  the  body. 
All  violent  and  continued  exercises,  such  as  exhaust  the 


140  DIRECTIONS    FOE    PRESCRIBING 

powers  and  induce  lasting  fatigue,  sliould  be  avoided. 
Those  that  are  partly  passive,  such  as  riding  on  horse- 
back or  in  a  carriage,  sailing,  traveling,  etc.,  are  highly 
appropriate,  and  may  be  taken  most  advantageously  in 
connection  with  the  course  prescribed. 

Regions  of  the  Body. — In  their  application  to  the 
body,  movements  necessarily  have  special  relations  to 
its  individual  parts,  which  I  have  familiarly  termed 
regions.  By  this  term  no  definite  portion  of  its  mass, 
having  distinct  boundaries,  is  intended.  The  term  is 
very  general  indeed,  and  a  portion  of  the  body  thus 
designated  generally  includes  a  portion  or  the  whole 
of  several  anatomical  divisions.  By  thus  simplifying 
our  terminology,  a  knowledge  of  anatomy  on  the  part 
of  the  person  making  application  of  movements  to 
himself,  is  dispensed  with ;  and  to  such  the  intelligent 
and  successful  use  of  single  movements  is  rendered 
practicable. 

A  region  generally  consists  of  one  or  more  joints, 
with  the  bones,  ligaments,  muscles,  vessels,  nerves, 
areolar  tissues,  and  w^hatever  other  elements  may  be 
included  in  the  range  of  the  muscles,  having  their 
points  of  origin  or  insertion  within  the  locality  thus 
designated.  Each  joint  is  considered  as  not  only  a  cen- 
ter of  motion  of  the  sound  members,  but  as  involving 
in  its  motions  those  invisible  physiological  or  nutritive 
actions  indissolubly  connected  with  the  health  of  the 
part.  K  the  impulse  to  motion  proceeds  from  external 
sources,  then  the  region  simply  indicates  the  structures 
thus  acted  upon. 

We  are  to  understand,  then,  that  any  portion  of  the 
body,  however  complex  in  its  structure  and  functions, 
which  may  be  moved  en  masse  and  separately  from 


AND    APPLYING    MOVEMENTS.  141 

the  rest  of  the  framework,  constitutes,  in  the  sense  here 
indicated,  a  i^egion.  The  whole  of  an  extremity,  for 
example,  or  \\\q  whole  of  the  trunk,  or  even  a  part  of 
either,  may,  if  included  in  a  movement,  be  thus  de- 
nominated. 

The  reader  who  is  philosophically  inclined  will  re- 
mark this  diflerence  between  the  Movement  system 
and  the  Drug  system,  in  their  practical  application. 
In  the  latter,  he  will  observe,  the  remedy  is  primarily 
applied  to  the  stomach  and  alimentary  canal,  which  it 
attacks  in  full  force,  while  that  portion  of  it  which  is 
received  into  the  circulation  subsequently  spends  its 
power  among  the  vital  structures,  generally  and  indis- 
criminately, wherever  the  blood  circulates,  in  the  well 
quite  as  much  as  in  the  diseased  portions. 

In  the  application  of  movements,  however,  the  parts 
demanding  succor  are  pointed  out  in  the  prescription, 
and  such  portions  as  do  not  require  the  applications 
are  scrupulously  avoided.  The  practical  results  of  this 
difference  are  apparent.  In  the  one  case  there  is  an 
unavoidable  waste  of  the  forces  of  the  system,  while  in 
the  other  only  the  conditions  for  developing  power  and 
restoring  health  are  restored.  Another  object  fulfilled 
by  the  division  of  the  body  into  regions  is,  that  the 
purposes  of  the  movement  are  rendered  distinct.  This 
advantage  is  in  striking  contrast  with  the  purposeless 
and  loose  method  employed  in  gymnastics. 


142  TERMINOLOGY   OF   POSITIONS. 


TERMINOLOGY    OF    POSITIONS. 

Importance  of  System. — When  the  facts  relating  to 
any  branch  of  knowledge  become  classified  accordmg 
to  their  mutual  relations  and  importance,  they  come  to 
constitute  a  science.  Any  science,  to  be  generally  use- 
ful, must  be  capable  of  being  readily  communicated. 
Otherwise  it  is  limited  in  its  influence,  however  exten- 
sive its  applicability,  or  however  great  the  need  exist- 
ing for  its  difi'usion.  In  order  to  convey  any  new  truth 
or  system  of  truth  to  the  mind  of  the  learner,  particular 
forms  of  expression  become  necessary ;  and  these  ac- 
quire a  special  and  philosophic  value  almost  as  great 
as  the  subject  itself  of  which  they  treat.  This  use  of 
language  of  philosophic  accuracy  is  of  the  highest  im- 
]3ortance  for  the  assistance  it  affords  the  student  in  his 
investigations,  and  in  giving  method  to  liis  style  of 
thinking  witii  reference  to  it ;  so  that  discovery  and 
classification  proceed  naturally  and  properly  together ; 
and  new  truths  easily  take  their  proper  place  in  the  or- 
derly and  symmetrical  construction  of  the  system.  A 
terminology^  indeed,  becomes  an  absolutely  necessary 
instrument  in  the  progress  of  a  science  or  art  of  any 
kind. 

JSTo  approach  was  made  to  a  method  of  designating 
and  classifying  the  positions  and  movements  of  the 
body  for  the  purposes  contemplated  in  the  Movement- 
Cure,  till  the  time  of  Ling.     In  fact,  the  truths  of  phys- 


TERMINOLOGY    OF    POSITIONS.  143 

iology  had  first  to  be  so  far  developed  as  to  clear  away 
some  of  tlie  rubbish  of  the  old  medical  science  (so 
called)  before  such  a  thing  could  be  even  attempted 
with  any  chance  of  success.  At  the  present  time  the 
need  of  this  aid  is  deeply  felt  by  the  student,  and  the 
writer  has  thought  that  an  attempt  on  his  part  to  rep- 
resent some  of  the  facts  of  the  Movement-Cure  by 
means  of  a  terminology,  albeit  a  crude  and  imperfect 
one,  would  be  a  labor  not  altogether  useless. 

The  reader  will  understand,  at  the  outset,  that  the 
writer  does  not  consider  the  terminology  of  the  posi- 
tions, as  here  j^resented,  completely  satisfactory  and 
final.  Thought  and  labor  will  do  their  w^ork,  and  per- 
fect, by  slow  degrees,  what  is  here  but  a  rough  sketch 
of,  or,  it  may  be,  even  but  a  hint  at,  the  truth. 

Though  the  necessity  may  be  felt  of  conforming  to 
the  order  of  nature  in  regard  to  when  her  storehouses 
shall  be  opened  to  us,  yet  a  regret  can  not  but  be  ex- 
pressed that  some  method  has  not  been  known  of  re- 
cording, for  our  advantage,  w^ith  the  precision  neces- 
sary for  practical  purposes,  the  observations,  facts,  and 
experiences  of  all  previous  time  in  relation  to  this  sub- 
ject. But  no  such  method  has  ever  been  employed,  if 
known,  in  ancient  or  in  modern  times,  until  now. 

The  reader  needs  no  argument  to  make  him  realize 
the  importance  of  using  some  method  of  this  kind.  In 
no  other  way,  he  must  see,  can  knowledge  upon  such  a 
subject  be  disseminated ;  and  a  practice,  if  such  a  one 
were  possible,  not  thus  reduced  to  appropriate  terms, 
would  die  with  its  possessor.  And  for  duplicated 
movements,  in  aid  of  the  terminology,  it  will  be  seen 
that  it  is  also  necessary,  or  at  least  a  matter  of  the  great- 
est convenience,  to  be  able  to  employ  signs  instead  of 
written  words  for  the  purpose  of  expressing,  at  a  glance 


144  TERMINOLOGY    OF   POSITIONS. 

of  the  eye,  to  the  minds  of  the  physician  and  his  assist- 
ant, the  precise  thing  indicated. 

Positions  and  Movements. — A  movement,  by  a  sim- 
ple analysis,  is  resolved  into  positions  ;  as,  the  commenc- 
ing^ the  terminating^  and  the  intermediate.  Each  of 
these  is  important,  as  exercising  its  share  of  effect  in 
determining  the  nature  and  effect  of  the  movement. 
The  movement,  in  its  execution,  consists  in  the  assump- 
tion, by  the  member,  of  all  positions,  successively,  as  it 
j)asses  through  the  intermediate  space  between  the 
commencing  and  terminating  positions.     Says  Ling  : 

"To  render  any  movement  definite  and  exact,  a 
point  of  departure,  a  point  of  termination,  and  the  line 
through  which  the  body  or  any  of  its  parts  must  pass, 
are  to  be  clearly  and  severally  determined,  as  well  as 
the  ryhthm  of  the  action  itself." 

But  the  change  of  place^  or  motion^  of  the  member, 
though  it  is  all  that  is  visible  to  the  eye,  is  by  no  means 
all  that  is  implied  by  a  movement.  The  muscular  con- 
traction and  relaxation,  wdth  the  effects  of  these  actions 
in  the  substance  of  the  tissues,  and  which  occur  out  of 
sight,  are  what  is  chiefly  implied  by  movements.  A 
movement,  properly  considered,  is  a  mechanico-organic 
effdct,  the  result  of  the  contractile  power  of  the  mus- 
cle, or  muscles,  and  may  be  effected  while  the  member 
is  resting  as  wxll  as  when  it  is  in  motion.  The  charac- 
ter of  a  movement,  in  this  sense,  is  determined  by  the 
resistance  which  the  muscular  contraction  tries  to  over- 
come, which  may  consist  of  gravity^  the  opposing  force 
of  antagonizing  muscles,  or  that  which  is  exerted  by 
another  person.  This  last  may  be  exactly  graduated  to 
the  amount  of  effect  it  is  desirable  to  secure. 

In  applying  a  movement,  the  commencing  and  ter- 


TERMmOLOGY    OF   POSITIONS.  145 

iniiiating  positions  must  first  be  determined  in  the 
mind  of  the  operator ;  and  without  intention^  on  his 
part,  no  proper  movement  can  take  place.  Sometimes 
the  terminating  position  coincides  with  the  commencing 
position,  and  no  visible  change  of  place  occurs.  Such 
a  movement  is  called  holding^  and  consists  simply  in 
maintaining,  for  a  certain  time,  one  position. 

Co:mmexcixg  Positions. — Tliese  relate,  first,  to  the 
trunk;  secondly,  to  the  dipper  extTemities ;  thirdly,  to 
the  lower  extremities;  fourthly,  to  the  head.  In  de- 
scribing positions,  the  head  is  generally  neglected,  as 
it  is  assumed  to  be  erect.  They  are  divided  into  prin- 
cipcd  and  derivative^  or  5i^5-positions. 

PRINCIPAL  POSITIONS  OF  THE  TKUNK. 

These  are  five,  viz.,  standing^  hieeling^  sitting^  ^y^'^9'i 
hanging.  Tlie  names  of  these  principal  positions  are 
sufiiciently  descriptive  of  their  character,  and  it  is  un- 
necessary to  refer  to  illustrations. 

Each  of  these  positions  admits  of  several  variations. 

I.— STANDING  POSITIONS. 

1.  Standing,  or  Erect-Standing. — In  this  import- 
ant position  the  body  is  straight  and  perpendicular,  the 
arms  hanging  from  the  shoulders,  the  legs  parallel,  the 
heels  in  contact,  the  toes  about  twelve  inches  asunder. 

The  derivative  positions  are — 

2.  Fall-Standing. — ^The  whole  body  inclines  at  an 
angle  greater  or  less  from  the  perpendicular ;  all  of  the 
members,  in  the  mean  time,  retaining  their  natural 
relative  positions.  The  body  in  this  position  must  be 
supported  at  some  point  by  a  firm  object.  An  illustra- 
tion of  fall-standing  may  be  seen  in  fig.  19.     A  slight 

T 


146  TERMINOLOGY   OF   POSITIONS. 

deviation  forward  is  called  inclining;  backward,  re- 
clining. 

The  body  may  greatly  deviate  from  the  perpendicu- 
lar, and  the  position  is  then  called  low  fall-standing ;  or 
but  slightly,  and  then  it  is  high  fall-standing. 

It  may  deviate  in  any  direction ;  ?i^  forward,  right 
or  left  sidewise,  or  hackward;  and  at  various  points  in 
these  directions.  The  position  is  described  with  suffi- 
cient accuracy  by  designating  the  two  cardinal  posi- 
tions between  which  the  body  falls,  2<&  forward-side- 
wise,  right  or  left,  and  hachward-sidewise,  right  or  left. 

3.  Bent-Standing. — ^This  indicates  that  the  trunk  is 
bent  in  its  middle  portion.  Deep-bent,  means  bent  to 
the  utmost  extent.  The  hending  may  be  either  for- 
ward, sidewise,  or  backward,  to  any  degree. 

II.-KNEELING  POSITIONS. 

1.  Kneeling,  or  Erect-Kneeling. — ^The  trunk  rests 
on  the  knees  instead  of  on  the  feet.  A  soft  cushion 
must  be  placed  under  the  knees. 

2.  Fall-Kneeling. — The  trunk  may  assume  the  fall- 
ing position  while  kneeling,  corresponding  with  this 
form  of  the  standing  position. 

III.— sitting  positions. 
The  derivatives  of  this  position  relate  to  the  disposi- 
tion of  the  legs  as  well  as  of  the  trunk. 

1.  Sitting. — The  trunk  rests  upon  the  seat,  the  legs 
at  right  angles  both  at  the  hips  and  knees,  the  feet 
resting  upon  the  floor. 

2.  Short-Sitting. — ^The  seat  rests  upon  the  edge  of 
the  chair,  occupying  as  little  of  it  as  possible,  to  main- 
tain its  posture. 

3.  Long-Sitting. — ^The  legs   are   extended  horizon- 


TERMINOLOGY    OF   POSITIONS.  147 

tally  in  the  same  plane  with  the  seat,  while  the  trunk  is 
erect.     See  fig.  10. 

4.  Lie-Sitting,  or  Half-Lying. — In  this  position  the 
trunk  reclines,  and  is  supported  by  cushions  or  by  a 
movable  seat  constructed  for  this  purpose. 

5.  Fall-Sitting. — The  trunk  deviates  from  the  per- 
pendicular at  a  certain  angle,  greater  or  less;  thus  it 
may  be  falling^  inclining^  or  deep-falling. 

Fall-sitting  may  also  h^  forward.,  sidewise,  hackward., 
or  at  any  intermediate  point. 

6.  Stride-Sitting. — ^This  indicates  that  the  legs  are 
placed  at  right  angles  apai't,  and  also  that  the  feet  are 
widely  separated,  so  as  to  afford  as  broad  a  base  as 
possible. 

lY.-LYING  positions. 

In  this  position  the  whole  body  is  horizontal.  This 
position  is  to  be  varied  by  changing  the  points  of 
support. 

1.  Forward-Lying. — In  this  position  the  face  is 
down,  the  body  extended  on  a  cushion,  its  anterior  sur- 
face in  contact  therewith. 

2.  Backward-Lying.  —  Lying  extended  upon  the 
back. 

3.  Sidewise-Lying. — Lying  upon  the  right  or  left 
side. 

4.  Trunk-Lying. — In  this  position  the  trunk  only  is 
supported,  while  the  legs  project  beyond  the  support- 
ing surface,  and  are  sustained  by  the  force  of  the 
muscles.     The  derivatives  are — 

{(I)  Trunlc-forward-lying  ; 

(h)  Trunk-hackward-lying  ;  and — 

(<?)  TrunTc-sidewise-lying. 

5.  Leg-Lyeng.  —  In  this  position  the  legs  only  rest 
upon  a  suitable  couch  or  seat,  while  the  trunk  projects, 


148  TEEMINOLOGY    OF    POSITIONS. 

sustained  only  by  the  action  of  tlie  mnscles.  It  admits 
of  the  same  variations  as  trunk-lying. 

In  leg-lying  it  is  always  necessary  to  employ  some 
device,  as  the  weight  of  another  person,  or  some  suit- 
able fixture,  to  counterbalance  the  superior  weight  of 
the  trunk. 

This  position  admits  of  the  same  modifications  as  the 
preceding. 

6.  Head-and-Heels-Lyixg.  —  In  this  position  the 
head  and  heels  are  supported  by  a  cushioned  stool, 
while  the  body  is  extended  horizontally  between  them, 
back  down,  sustained  by  the  muscles.  Fig.  q  repre- 
sents the  position. 

7.  Elbows-and-Toes-Lying. — In  this  position  the  body 
is  sustained  only  by  the  elbows  and  toes.     See  fig.  q- 

8.  Sidewise-Lying. — This  also  admits  of  several  va- 
rieties, ?i?>  plain,  elbow,  and /b(9^,  right,  left,  etc. 

9.  Balance-Lying. — In  this  position,  the  support  of 
the  body  is  under  the  center  of  the  trunk.  It  may 
be  hackward,  forward,  or  sidewise. 

v.— HANGING. 

In  this  position  the  body  is  perpendicular,  as  in 
standing,  but  the  weight  is  sustained  by  the  hands,  in- 
stead of  the  feet,  by  grasping  a  transverse  pole,  or 
something  of  the  sort,  overhead. 

Swim-Hanging  is  when  the  body  is  made  to  deviate 
from  the  perpendicular  position,  through  the  instru- 
mentality of  another  person. 

POSITIONS    OF    THE    AEMS   AND    LEGS. 
In  each  of  the  above  postures  of  the  body,  the  arms 
and  legs  may  assume  all  the  various  positions  that  are 
consistent  with  the  anatomical  arrangement  of  the  parts 


TEKMINOLOGY   OF   POSITIONS.  149 

concerned.  These  variations  of  position  are  dependent 
upon  the  nature  of  the  joints  which  connect  these  ex- 
tremities with  the  trunk. 

These  joints  are  of  the  hall-and-socket  kind,  wliich 
permit  the  greatest  degree  of  freedom  of  motion.  The 
arms  are  caj^able  of  describing  an  entire  circle,  of 
which  the  shoulder  is  the  center.  The  mobility  of  the 
leg  is  considerably  less,  its  motion  in  an  upward  direc- 
tion being  prevented  by  ligaments  and  osseous  projec- 
tions at  the  ujDper  edge  of  the  acetabulum. 

The  other  two  joints  of  the  limbs — viz.,  the  elbow 
and  knee  joints,  act  on  the  hinge  principle,  permitting 
motion  of  those  23ortions  of  the  extremities  beyond  the 
joint  only  in  one  direction. 

In  studying  the  positions  of  the  extremities  we  must 
keep  distinctly  in  mind  not  only  the  difference  of  these 
two  kinds  of  joints,  but  also  the  fact  that  the  position 
resulting  from  the  flexure  of  the  one  joint  is  to  be  re- 
garded as  entirely  distinct  and  different  from  that  re- 
sulting fi-om  a  flexure  of  the  other.  Thus,  for  example, 
the  upper  arm  is  capable  of  bending  at  the  shoulder, 
in  many  directions,  and  it  makes  no  diflerence  in  regard 
to  that  motion  whether  the  elbow  joint  is  bent  at  the 
time  or  not.  If  we  keep  this  simple  fact  in  view,  it 
will  greatly  simplify  our  study  of  the  positions  of  the 
arms  and  legs. 

The  arms  and  legs,  whether  bent  at  the  elbow  and 
knee  joints  or  not,  may  be  considered  as  forming  th6 
rarJii  of  a  multitude  of  circles,  of  which  the  shoulder 
and  hip  joints  form  the  centers,  so  that  the  hands  and 
the  feet,  when  the  limbs  to  which  they  belong  move 
freely,  describe  arcs  of  circles,  not  only  parallel  with 
the  antero-posterior  diameter  of  the  body,  but  also  at 
every  conceivable  angle  with  this  diameter. 


150  TERMINOLOGY    OF   POSITIONS. 

Of  course,  it  is  impossible  to  invent  a  nomenclature 
that  shall  define  with  accuracy,  through  tliis  great 
range  of  possibility,  all  the  positions  the  members  may 
assume  ;  but  for  the  ends  demanded  in  the  practice  of 
movements,  both  as  a  hygienic  and  as  a  remedial  art,  a 
description  sufficiently  accurate  to  fulfill  all  purposes  of 
practical  utility,  becomes  quite  easy. 

"We  reduce  the  description  of  the  positions  of  these 
members  to  the  utmost  simplicity,  bringing  them 
down  to  a  few  cardinal  points  easily  remembered. 
Tlius,  we  may  refer  all  the  positions  of  the  arms  to 
Xh-Q  perpe7idicular,  the  anterio-jposteTior,  and  the  trans- 
verse diameters  of  the  body.  Every  direction  in  which 
the  arm  can  be  extended  will  either  correspond  with 
these  planes,  or  be  related  to  them  more  or  less  nearly, 
so  that  they  may  be  described  or  designated  accord- 
ingly. 

Arm  Positions  Seen  in  a  Front  View  of  the  Body. 
— These  positions  of  the  arms  will  be  understood  by 
reference  to  the  following  diagram. 

In  this  diagram,  the  positions  of  the  arms  are  repre- 
sented in  the  plane  of  the  transverse  diameter  of  the 
body.  The  left  side  of  the  diagram  represents  the  chief 
positions  of  the  arms  in  that  plane.  A  is  the  shoulder 
joint,  representing  the  center  of  the  circle  of  which  the 
arm  is  the  radius.  The  names  of  these  positions  are  as 
follows : 

Stretch,  or  iijpioard-stretcTi,  A  a. 

Side-stretch,  or  yard,  A  c. 

High-side-stretch,  or  high-^ard,  A  h. 

Low-side-stretch,  or  low-yard,  A  d. 

Downward-stretch,  or  natural  position,  A  e. 

The  right  side  of  the  diagram  represents  the  same 


TERMINOLOGY    OF    POSFTIONS. 


161 


FRONT  VIEW,    SHOWING   TIIK   ARM   POSITIONS. 

positions,  but  with  the  elhow-hent  at  a  right  angle,  the 
shoulder  being  at  A. 

Each  of  these  positions  might  receive  the  same  name 
as  the  corresponding  ones  of  the  opposite  side,  with 
the  addition  of  the  term  elbow-bent^  to  denote  the  varia- 
tion of  the  forearm  from  a  straight  line  with  the  upper 
arm.  Thus,  A  Z  o  is  stretch  elbow-bent  /  Ami  is  high 
side-stretch  elbow-bent ;  and  so  of  all  the  other  posi- 
tions with  the  elbow  bent,  corresponding  with  the  posi- 
tions on  the  opposite  of  the  diagram,  in  which  the 
elbow  is  straight. 

But  as  this  would  be  a  rather  cumbrous  mode  of 
expression,  and  as  it  is  easier  to  remember  shorter  spe- 


152  TERMINOLOGY   OF   POSITIONS. 

cific  names  for  these  positions,  the  following  terms  are 
used  for  convenience  : 

Curve^  A  I  0,  indicates  tliat  the  arm  is  placed  in  close 
contact  Avith  the  head,  both  the  elbow  and  wrist  joints 
being  bent  so  as  to  bring  the  member  in  close  contact 
with  the  head.  This  is  otherwise  expressed  as  stretch, 
elbow,  and  wrist-lent  rest. 

Shelter,  A  m  I,  is  equivalent  to  high  side-stretch,  or 
yard,  elbow-beii  t  rest. 

Heave,  A  n  h,  is  the  same  as  yard  elljow-bent. 

Angle,  A  ij,  is  low-yard  elbow  upward-bent. 

Wing,  A  i  h,iQ  low-yard  elbow  downward-bent  rest. 

Cover,  A  gf,  is  doion-stretch  elbow-bent  rest. 

The  above  comprises  all  the  arm  positions  that  it  is 
necessary  to  describe  in  the  transverse  plane  of  tlie 
body.  It  is  obvious  that  the  same  kinds  and  the  same 
number  of  positions,  with  slight  variations,  may  be  had 
in  any  other  plane  as  in  tliis,  and  they  admit  of  an 
analogous  mode  of  description. 

Ajrm  Positions  Seen  in  a  Side  Yiew  of  the  Body. 
— ^The  accompanying  diagram  represents  the  positions 
of  the  arms  in  the  plane  corresponding  with  the  antero- 
posterior diameter  of  the  body.  It  will  be  seen  at  once 
that  the  shoulder  being  the  center,  the  arm  may  de- 
scribe the  greater  part  of  the  circle  of  which  it  is  the 
radius,  a  small  arc  posteriorly  being  excepted. 

It  will  also  be  seen  that  when  the  arm  is  extended 
perpendicularly,  either  up  or  down,  it  is  in  exactly  the 
position  it  occupies  on  the  plane  of  the  previous  dia- 
gram, which  plane,  it  will  be  noticed,  cuts  the  one 
represented  in  this  diagram  at  right  angles.  The  posi- 
tions of  the  arms  shown  in  this  view  are  as  follows,  viz. : 

Stretch,  arm  upward. 


TERMINOLOGY   OF   POSITIONS. 

Fig.  5. 


163 


\ 


SIDE  VIEW   OF  ARM   POSITIONS. 


Rack^  A  b^  or  forioay'd-stretch. 

High-rack^  A  «,  or  high-forward-stretGh. 

Low-rack^  A  c,  or  low-forward-stretch. 

Backward-stretchy  A  d. 

The  chief  variation  of  the  positions  in  this  plane,  pro- 
duced by  bending  the  elbow  joint,  \s>  flighty  A  cf. 

The  positions  intermediate  to  those  represented  in 
the  above  diagram,  which  represent  the  positions  seen 
in  the  front  and  side  views  of  the  body,  are  named 
from  these.  Thus  the  position  between  rack  and 
yard^  is  forward-side-stretch  /  the  position  between 
this  and  stretch,  in  the  same  plane,  is  high-forward 
side-stretchy  etc.,  etc.  The  only  one  of  the  interme- 
diate positions  that  has  received  a  name  is  lowforwar^ 

7* 


154 


TERMINOLOGY    OF   POSITIONS. 


sidewise-stretch^   which  is   termed,  briefly,  speah  po- 
sition. 

Beside  the  extensive  rotary  motion  technically  termed 
tending^  of  which  the  shoulder  joint  is  capable,  it  may 
also  be  considerably  twisted  to  the  right  or  left,  in 
nearly  every  position  of  the  upper  arm  that  has  been 
above  described.  Hence  the  term  twisty  or  right-twisty 
or  left-twisty  prefixed  to  the  names  of  these  several 
positions. 

LEG  POSITIONS. 

The  leg  positions  are  produced  by  the  bending  of  the 
hip  and  knee  joints,  except  in  standing,  lying,  etc., 
when  the  lower  extremities  are  parallel  with  the  trunk. 
The  mobility  of  the  hip  joint  is  not  quite  so  great  as 
that  of  the  shoulder  joint,  since  it  is  limited  in  its  mo- 
tion upward,  but  in  general  it  may  be  said  that  the 
positions  of  the  legs  may  be  made  to  correspond  with 
those  of  the  arms. 

The  general  appellation  given  to  any  deviation  of  the 
leg  from  the  perpendicular  produced  by  bending  the 

Fig.  6. 


tek:minology  of  positions.  155 

hip  joint,  is  (one  less  graceful  than  expressive,  perhaps) 
kiclc. 

Forward-Mck^  the  leg  carried  forward  and  raised  to 
an  angle  of  about  fortj-iive  degrees. 

lligh-forward-kich  is  between  forward-kick  and  the 
horizontal. 

Loic-forward-hick  is  between  forward-kick  and  the 
perpendicular. 

Sidewise-Jcicl',  the  leg  extended  sidewise. 

BachiDcird-'kick^  the  leg  extended  backward. 

There  are  also  intermediate  positions,  as — 

Forioard-sidewise-kick,  high  and  low. 

Baclcward-sidewise^  high  and  low. 

LOWER  LEG  POSITIONS. 

These  positions  are  designated  by  the  term  hnee-hent 
prefixed  to  tlie  names  of  positions  resulting  from  flexure 
of  the  thigh  joint. 

A  number  of  the  positions  of  the  legs,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  arms,  are  better  expressed  by  distinct  terms,  as 
follows : 

1.  Stride. — In  this  position  the  legs  are  set  apart,  on 
each  side  of  the  perpendicular,  distant  about  two  or  two 
and  a  half  feet ;  whether  sitting,  standing,  or  lying. 

2.  Walk. — One  leg  is  placed  before  the  other,  the 
trunk  perpendicularly  between  them,  as  in  ordinary 
walking. 

3.  Step-Standixg. — One  foot  rests  upon  a  stej)  or 
stool,  eight  to  twelve  inches  high ;  the  knee  and  thigh 
johits  are  bent,  to  permit  the  foot  to  be  thus  raised, 
and  the  leg  may  be  extended  either  forward  or  side- 
wise. 

4.  Foot-Suppokt-Standixg  indicates  a  similar  posi- 
tion.    When  this  term  is  used,  the  position  of  the  leg 


156  TERMINOLOGY   OF   POSITIONS. 

must  also  be  designated ;  a  matter  often  neglected  in 
step-standing.  Thus,  forward-kick^  foot-supfort^  half- 
standing^  indicate  that  while  the  body  rests  upon  one 
leg,  the  other  is  raised  in  forward-kick  position,  and 
that  the  foot  rests  upon  some  object  that  elevates  it 
from  the  floor. 

5.  Squat-Position. — This  is  when  both  thigh  and 
knee  are  bent  at  right  angles. 

6.  Leg- Angle  is  a  term  indicating  the  bending  of 
both  thigh  and  knee,  without  precision  as  to  degree. 

In  describing  positions,  the  word  half  denotes  that 
but  one  side  is  concerned,  whether  in  reference  to  the 
arms  or  legs. 


PART     II. 

EXAMPLES   OF    SIXGLE    MOVEMENTS. 


EEGIOI^    OF    THE    FEET. 

Kemaeks  on  Movements  of  the  Feet. — A  large 
number  of  small  bones  enter  into  the  composition  of 
tlie  feet,  and  are  firmly  bound  together  by  ligaments 
and  tendons.  Some  of  the  muscles  of  this  region  are 
confined  to  the  feet,  while  others  extend  beyond  them 
and  are  attached  to  the  bones  of  the  leg,  nearly  as  high 
as  the  knee.  Motion  of  the  feet  is  produced  by  the  ac- 
tion of  these  muscles,  the  chief  bulk  of  which  are  situat- 
ed in  the  lower  leg,  which  member  is,  in  consequence, 
afi'ected  by  most  of  the  movements  of  the  feet,  so  that 
these  muscles  are  properly  included  in  this  region. 
The  feet  are  so  constructed  as  to  be  very  elastic,  and  at 
the  same  time  very  compact  and  strong,  and  little 
liable  to  injury  from  accidents  to  which  they  may  be 
subjected. 

The  strength  of  the  muscles  and  tendons  of  the  feet  is 
necessarily  subjected  to  much  more  constant  and  severe 
trials  than  that  of  almost  any  other  portion  of  the  body. 
This  results  from  their  location,  which  obliges  them  not 
only  to  sustain  the  weight  of  the  entire  superior  portion 
of  the  body,  but  also  any  additional  weight  that  the 


158  KEGIOX    OF    THE    FEET. 

person  may  cany.  It  is  j^lain,  too,  that  whatever  power 
the  muscles  of  the  superior  portions  of  the  body  may 
exert,  must  necessarily  be  continued  to  the  ground  or 
floor  upon  which  the  feet  rest ;  because,  through  them, 
the  feet  not  only  sustain  the  body,  but  must  sustain,  as 
well,  the  effects  of  all  the  forces  brought  to  bear  upon 
it.  Thus  we  brace  ourselves  with  the  feet  in  perform- 
ing any  action  by  means  of  the  upper  extremities — as 
in  lifting  a  weight,  pushing,  pulling,  etc. 

To  maintain  the  ordinary  perpendicular  position  of 
the  body  upon  the  narrow  base  furnished  it,  it  requires 
a  stronger  action  of  the  muscles  of  the  lower  exti^emi- 
ties  than  of  those  of  any  other  part  of  the  body.  In 
inferior  animals  the  weight  is  shared  by  four  legs,  which 
gives  a  base  so  broad  as  to  render  any  such  concentra- 
tion of  muscular  power  unnecessary. 

This  arrangement  in  the  human  framework  may 
seem,  at  first  sight,  to  be  unwise,  but  a  little  reflection 
will  show  that  it  is  a  very  wise  and  gracious  provision 
of  nature.  "We  find,  indeed,  throughout  nature,  a  law 
of  compensation  and  balance,  and  in  the  present  in- 
stance we  see  it  most  beautifully  illustrated.  At  the 
superior  extremity  of  the  body  is  the  head,  containing 
those  intellectual  organs  which,  j;«r  excellence^  distin- 
guish man  from  the  unthinking  beasts.  The  functions 
of  this  part  of  the  body  require  much  nutrition,  for 
which  it  draws  largely  upon  the  common  reservoir. 
ITow,  to  maintain  an  equilibrium  of  the  circulation, 
it  is  needful  that  the  mferior  extremity  of  the  body 
should  be  subjected  fo  such  habitual  and  vigorous 
action  as  to  make  an  equally  great  counter  demand 
upon  the  circulation.  This  is  secured  by  the  arrange- 
ment that  we  have  just  noticed,  in  which  the  lower  ex- 
tremities may  be  considered  as  the  grand  functional 


REGION    OF    THE    FEET.  159 

counterpoise  of  tlie  braiu.  If  tliis  view  be  correct,  it; 
seems  plain  enough  tbat  when  the  health  suffers  from 
excessive  cerebral  action,  the  true  remedy  will  consist 
in  instituting  strong  action  of  the  lower  part  of  the 
body,  especially  at  the  feet,  which  must  conduce  to  an 
equilibrium  of  the  circulation  by  creating  a  counter 
tlow  in  the  direction  of  these  members.  And,  in  fact, 
in  proportion  as  the  demand  for  nutrition  in  those  re- 
gions is  responded  to,  will  the  cerebral  symptoms  abate. 
This  principle  is  popularly  understood  and  practiced 
upon  in  the  application  of  irritants  to  the  feet — every 
old  nurse  understands  it;  it  holds  equally  true  when  the 
eflect  is  realized  by  the  natural  method  of  exercise.  In 
the  technical  language  of  the  doctors,  the  eflect  here 
spoken  of  is  termed  derivcLtive. 

Thus  we  see  that  movements  of  the  lower  extremities 
supply  a  ready  and  eflicient  means  of  counteracting  the 
efi'ects  of  excessive  stimulation  in  the  superior  portions 
of  the  body,  consequent  on  the  mental  labor  and  anxie- 
ties inseparable  from  cultivated  and  busy  life.  They 
are  also  an  eflicient  auxiliary  means  in  the  treatment 
of  many  cases  of  chronic  disease. 

We  may  remark  here,  that  the  feet  sustain  precisely 
the  same  relation  to  temperature  as  to  motion.  That  is, 
by  contact  with  the  earth,  which  is  cooler  and  damper 
than  the  air,  they  part  more  rapidly  with  their  heat 
than  do  other  portions  of  the  body.  And  to  supply 
this  loss  it  is  necessary  to  urge  forward  the  heat-making 
process  in  the  feet  in  proportion  to  the  necessity  thus 
produced,  and  thereby  to  cause  the  blood  to  flow  into 
the  extremities  in  suitable  measure. 

We  will  now  enter  upon  a  description  of  particulai- 
movements,  charging  the  reader  to  bear  in  mind  that 
he  must  not  depend  upon  them  for  any  curative  or  re- 


160 


REGION    OF   THE   FEET. 


ciiperative  effects  unless  he  is  willing  to  practice  them 
in  conformity  to  the  directions  and  principles  laid 
down.  To  accomplish  any  good,  they  must  be  per- 
formed very  slowly  and  with  the  utmost  precision. 

EXAMPLES  OF  MOVEMENTS  OF  THE  KEGION  OF  THE  FEET. 


1.— STANDING,  FEET-EXTENDING. 

Position. — To  execute  this  movement,  one  should 
stand  in  the  erect  posture,  with  one  hand  extended  so 
as  to  preserve  the  balance  of  the  body  by  touching  a 
wall,  chair,  or  other  object. 

Action. — 1.  The  feet    should  stretch    at  the   ankle 
joint  in  such  a  way  as  to  slowly  raise  the  whole  body, 
which  they  support,  as  high  as  possible,  bringing  it  at 
Fig.  7.  length  into  the  tip-toe  position,  in 

which  it  must  be  sustained  for  a 
few  moments.  2.  Relaxation  of 
the  stretched  muscles  should  be  al- 
lowed slowly  to  take  place,  till  the 
heel  reaches  the  floor,  and  the  feet 
and  trunk  have  recovered  their 
original  position.  The  cut  shows 
the  position  after  the  extension  is 
completed — in  other  words,  the  ter- 
minating position  of  the  movement. 
This  action  should  be  repeated  from 
six  to  ten  times,  slowly,  as  at  first, 
with  a  slight  interval  between.  If 
a  more  strenuous  exercise  of  the 
muscles  is  desired,  the  movement  may  be  performed 
with  one  foot  only,  the  knee  of  the  opposite  leg  being 
slightly  bent,  to  clear  the  floor.  After  performing  it 
wi^h   one  foot,   change  to  the  other,   and  repeat  the 


REGION    OF    THE    FEET. 


161 


movement  in  the  same  manner  as  it  was  performed  at 
first. 

Effect. — In  this  movement  the  muscles  of  the  bot- 
toms of  the  feet,  also  those  of  the  posterior  parts  of  tlie 
legs  below  the  knee,  are  brought  into  powerful  action. 
By  this  process  they  are  streiigthened,  that  is,  their  nu- 
trition is  increased,  owing  to  the  blood  being  attracted 
to  the  parts  that  have  acted  moay  from  other  organs. 
Hence  the  term  derivative  applied  to  such  actions. 


Fig.  8. 


2.-T0E-SUPP0ET,  IIALF-STANDING,  HEEL-PEESSING. 

Position. — One  knee  is  bent,  the  foot  lifted,  its  upper 
surface  resting  upon  a  cushioned  seat  or  chair,  while 
the  weight  of  the  body  falls  upon  the 
other  leg,  standing  in  the  erect  position; 
the  hand  on  the  side  of  the  raised  foot 
is  placed  upon  it,  requiring  the  body  to 
be  slightly  turned  that  Tvay. 

Action. — 1.  The  hand  placed  upon 
the  heel  of  the  foot  strongly  j^i'essed 
upon  it,  stretching  the  muscles  and  forc- 
ing the  upper  surface  of  the  foot  into  a 
line  Avith  the  leg,  where  it  remains  a 
short  time.  2.  The  ankle  bends,  rais- 
ing the  heel  against  the  pressure  of  the 
hand,  till  the  foot  is  at  right  angles 
with  the  leg.  The  dotted  lines  of  the 
cut  show  the  terminating  position.  This  action  is  to  be 
repeated  six  or  eight  times  with  each  foot. 

Effect. — This  movement  renders  the  ankle  joint  sup- 
ple, warms  the  feet,  and  is  powerfully  derivative.  The 
muscles  of  the  top  of  the  foot  and  of  the  sides  of  the 
lower  leg  are  chiefly  affected. 


162 


REGION    OF    THE    FEKT. 


3.— WING-WALK,  TOE  WALL-STANDING,  FOOT-BENDING. 

Position. — The  hauds   sliould   be   placed  uj^on  the 
Fig.  9.  hips,  one  foot  advanced  a  yard  or 

so  beyond  the  other,  in  walJdng 
position,  but  with  the  ankle  of 
the  forward  leg  a  good  deal  bent, 
and  the  toe  against  the  wall,  with 
the  heel  as  near  the  wall  as  pos- 
sible. 

Action. — 1.  The  knee  of  the 
forward  leg  should  bend,  causing 
the  instep  to  form  a  more  acute 
angle  with  the  leg;  this  position 
to  be  maintained  for  a  short  time. 
2.  The  bent  knee  should  now  be 
extended,  and  the  ankle  and  foot 
made  to  resume  their  former  position.  The  cut  shows 
the  posture,  the  dotted  outline  indicating  the  position 
at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  the  movement.  This 
should  be  repeated  five  or  six  times  with  each  foot. 

Effect. — The  calf  of  the  leg  is  very  strongly  acted 
upon,  as  well  as  the  sole  of  the  foot,  producing  a  deriv- 
ative effect,  and  rendering  the  ankle  supple,  and  the 
calf  strong,  elastic,  and  voluminous. 

In  each  of  the  preceding  movements  the  weight  of 
the  body  is  the  chief  resistance  that  the  acting  muscles 
are  compelled  to  overcome. 

4— long-sitting,  feet  sidewise-bending. 

Position. — Sitting  in  an  easy  posture  in  a  chair,  the 
hands  placed  upon  the  hips,  and  legs  extended  horizon- 
tally across,  and  supported  by  another  chair  that  is 
placed  immediately  in  front  of  the  one  occupied  by  the 
body.     The  feet  should  extend  quite  beyond  the  chair 


REGION    OF   THE   FEET. 


163 


supporting  the  legs,  and  should  Fig.  lo. 

remain  quite  free. 

Action. — 1.  The  feet  should 
be  turned  to  one  side  slowly,  as 
far  as  they  will  go,  being  kept 
in  the  mean  time  in  close  con- 
tact ;  they  should  so  remain  for 
a  short  period.  2.  They  should 
then  be  turned  in  the  opposite 
direction,  in  the  same  manner. 
This  action  should  be  repeated 
ten  or  twelve  times.  The  cut  shows  the  position ;  the 
dotted  outline  indicates  the  extent  of  the  motion. 

Effect. — ^This  motion  is  produced  chiefly  by  the 
muscles  of  the  lower  leg,  and  it  strengthens  these  parts, 
and  is  derivative.  If  the  ankle  be  weak,  so  that  it  is 
inclined  to  bend  too  easily  in  one  direction,  the  move- 
ment should  be  directed  to  that  side.  Slight  deformi- 
ties of  the  ankle  may  be  corrected  by  persevering  in 
this  discipline  of  the  faulty  -pig.  ii. 

muscles. 


5.— LONG-SITTING,  FEET-ROTA- 
TION. 

Position. — This  is  the 
same  as  in  the  preceding 
movement. 

Action. — The  toes  of  both 
feet  are  made  to  describe 
as  broad  a  circle  as  j)os- 
sible,  by  slowly  ■^^■  forming  revolutions  from  right  to 
left,  ten  or  a  dozen  times,  and  then  reversing  the  action. 
The  motion  may  be  changed  in  this  way  three  or  four 
times.    Tlie  dotted  outlines  indicate  the  circle  on  which 


16^  REGION    OF   THE   FEET. 

the  toes  revolve,  which,  it  will  be  seen,  represents  the 
base  of  a  cone,  of  which  the  heels  are  the  apex.  The 
two  feet  are  to  be  kept  close  together  diirhig  the  exe- 
cution of  the  movement,  and  the  legs  and  body  must 
maintain  a  uniform  position. 

Effect. — In  this  movement  all  the  muscles  of  the 
feet  and  lower  leg  are  put  in  vigorous  action,  and  all 
the  motion  of  which  the  ankle  joint  is  capable  is  eliected 
at  each  revolution.  The  movement  is  strongly  deriva- 
tive, and  especially  useful  to  the  joint  when  in  a  weak 
state. 

6— FOOT-PERCUSSION. 

Position. — Sitting  in  a  chair  with  one  of  the  lower 
^^^^'  legs  supported  by  the  thigh  of 

the  other,  near  the  knee,  the 
foot  projecting  a  little  beyond 
it,  while  the  other  foot  rests 
firmly  upon  the  floor. 

Action. — The  hand  of  the 
side  next  to  the  raised  foot 
holds  a  ruler  or  stick  fifteen 
inches  long  and  half  an  inch 
thick,  by  which  a  rapid  suc- 
cession of  light  blows,  amount- 
ing to  thirty  or  forty,  are  dealt  upon  the  sole  of  the 
uplifted  foot.  The  sole  of  the  foot  thus  treated  should 
be  protected  by  a  shoe  or  slipper.  The  cut  shows  the 
position,  and  suggests  the  mode  of  the  action.  Both 
feet  are  to  be  acted  upon  in  this  way  alternately.  This 
is  what  is  called  a  passive  movement,  because  the  effect 
derived  is  not  produced  by  inducing  muscular  contrac- 
tion of  the  part. 

Effect. — ^The  benefit  derived  chiefly  belongs  to  the 


REGION    OP^    THE    FEET.  165 

capillaries  and  nerves  of  the  parL  In  the  capiHaries 
the  clogged  vessels  have  their  blood  renewed  thereby, 
while  the  arceries,  through  the  increased  action  of  the 
nerves  supplying  them,  are  made  to  contract  more  vig- 
orously. If  there  is  congestion  of  the  capillaries,  as  in 
chilhlains^  it  is  quickly  scattered,  and  the  normal  con- 
dition restored.  The  movement  is  derivative,  and 
warms  tlie  feet.  Tlie  cure  of  chilblains  by  this  method 
is  speedy  and  permanent. 

7— rOOT-EOTATION  (PASSIVE). 

Position. — The  same  as  shown  in  the  preceding  cut, 
except  that  the  hand,  instead  of  holding  a  stick,  grasps 
the  toe  of  the  foot. 

Action. — ^The  toe  of  the  foot  thus  grasped  is  made  by 
means  of  the  action  of  the  hand  thus  grasping  it  to 
describe  as  broad  a  circle  as  the  ankle  joint  will  allow, 
the  foot  itself  remaining  in  the  mean  time  quite  passive, 
that  is,  offering  no  resistance  by  means  of  its  muscles. 
The  motion  is  wholly  effected  by  means  of  the  hand 
thus  applied  to  it.  The  foot  should  make  about  six 
revolutions  in  one  direction,  and  then  as  many  in  the 
opposite.  This  change  •  should  be  repeated  five  or  six 
times.     The  movement  should  be  applied  to  both  feet. 

Effect. — ^The  foot  may  be  turned  farther  in  each 
direction  in  this  manner  than  by  its  own  muscles,  and 
the  movement  is  made  with  less  effort  and  with  more 
grateful  effect ;  otherwise  the  general  effects  flowing 
from  it  are  similar  to  those  of  the  preceding  move- 
ments. 

8 -support  half-standing,  leg-swinging. 

Position. — Standing  wdth  one  foot  resting  upon  a 
stool,  one  hand  is  extended  and  touchincr  a  wall,  and 


166 


REGION    OF    THE    FEET. 


Fig- 13.  supported  bj  it,  one  leg 

free. 

Action. — The  free  leg  j 
is  caused  to  sioing  by  ^ 
bending  at  the  hip 
joint,  in  a  plane  par- 
allel with  the  antero- 
posterior diameter  of 
,  the  body,  the  foot  de- 
/  scribing  an  arc  of  a  cir- 
cle, to  be  repeated  fif- 
teen or  twenty  times  on 
each  side. 

Effect.  —  This  mo- 
tion assists  the  flow  of 
the  arterial  blood  to- 
ward the  feet,  while  it 
retards  the  venons  flow  in  the  contrary  direction,  and 
thereby  causes  the  blood  to  accumulate  in  the  lower 
extremities.  It  warms  the  feet,  and  induces  a  pleasant 
sensation  in  the  limbs. 

All  the  above  movements  tend,  if  repeated  at  regu- 
lar intervals,  and  in  a  proper  manner,  to  increase  the 
healthful  flow  of  arterial  fluid  toward  and  into  the 
lower  leg  and  feet,  while  at  the  same  time  the  venous 
blood  is  abundantly  removed.  They  augment  the  bulk 
and  energy  of  the  parts  thus  brought  into  special 
action,  warm  the  extremities,  derive  from  the  head 
and  superior  organs,  and  so  bring  great  relief  to  a 
system  suffering  from  oppression,  congestion,  or  fatigue 
in  its  superior  portions. 


REGION   OF   THE   LEGS.  167 


d^Hpter  "glut. 

REGIOIT     OF    THE    LEGS. 

Kemakks  on  Movements  of  the  Legs. — The  legs 
are  endowed  with  very  large  masses  of  muscle,  and  it 
is  necessary  to  employ  them  freely  in  movements,  in 
order  to  secure  the  objects  contemplated  in  our  pre- 
scriptions for  diseases.  They  are  used  as  means  of 
modifying  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  by  the  aux- 
iliary power  thus  derived,  of  securing  the  more  special 
and  desired  effects  of  movements  for  other  regions  of 
the  body.  When  a  derivative  effect  is  desired  from 
movements  of  the  region  of  the  feet,  it  is  best  se- 
cured by  employing  the  auxiliary  influence  of  move- 
ments of  this  region  ;  for  the  effect  of  these  is  strongly 
derivative  also,  and  the  whole  result  then  produced  is 
greater  on  account  of  the  larger  mass  of  muscle  belong- 
ing to  this  region.  It  will  be  borne  in  mind  that  every 
part  of  the  body  is  charged  with  the  duty  of  perfecting 
the  circulation  of  the  blood  in  itself,  and  also  of  aid- 
ing its  passage  in  the  blood-vessels  both  to  and  from 
other  parts  more  remote,  for  which  it  necessarily 
furnishes  a  channel. 

Walking. — ^This  most  common  and  most  useful  spe- 
cies of  exercise  is  performed  chiefly,  though  not  entirely, 
by  the  muscles  of  the  legs,  and  the  act  of  walking  con- 
stitutes a  movement  that  deserves  attention,  as  it  enters 
not  only  as  an  element  into  many  of  the  Movement- 
Cure  prescriptions,  but  is  very  generally  prescribed 
by  physicians  of  every  class  and  creed.     We  will  briefly 


168  REGION    OF   THE    LEGS. 

consider  the  S2:)ecial  purposes  it  is  sui^posed  to  answer, 
and  its  mechanism.  Walker  gives  the  following  an- 
alysis of  the  actions  concerned  in  walking  : 

"  For  the  purpose  of  walking,  we  first  bear  upon  one 
leg  the  weight  of  the  body,  which  presses  equally  upon 
both.  The  ^other  leg  is  then  raised,  and  the  foot  quits 
the  ground  by  rising  from  the  heel  to  the  j)oint.  For 
this  purpose,  the  leg  must  be  bent  upon  the  thigii,  and 
the  thigh  upon  the  pelvis  ;  the  foot  is  then  carried 
straight  forward  at  a  sufiicient  height  to  clear  the 
ground  without  grazing  it.  To  render  it  possible,  how- 
ever, to  move  the  foot,  the  haunch,  which  rested  with  its 
weight  upon  the  thigh,  must  turn  forward  and  outward. 
As  soon  as  by  this  movement  this  foot  has  passed  the 
other,  it  must  be  extended  on  the  leg,  and  the  leg  upon 
the  thigh,  and  in  this  manner,  by  the  lengthening  of  the 
whole  member,  and  without  being  drawn  back,  it  reach- 
es the  ground  at  a  distance  in  advance  of  the  other  foot, 
wliichis  more  or  less  considerable  according  to  the  length 
of  the  step,  and  it  is  placed  so  gently  on  the  ground  as  not 
to  jerk  or  shake  the  body  in  the  slightest  degree.  As 
soon  as  the  foot  which  has  been  placed  on  the  ground 
becomes  firm,  the  weight  of  the  body  is  transferred  to 
the  limb  on  that  side,  and  the  other  foot,  by  a  similar 
series  of  actions,  is  brought  forward  in  its  turn.  In  all 
walking,  tlie  most  imj)ortant  circumstance  is,  that  the 
body  incline  forward,  and  that  the  movement  of  the 
leg  and  thigh  spring  from  the  haunch,  and  be  free  and 
natural.  Viewed  in  this  way,  the  feet  have  been  well 
compared  to  the  spokes  of  a  wheel,  the  weight  of  the 
body  falling  upon  them  alternately." 

The  exercise  of  walking  is  extremely  gentle,  and  it 
becomes  fatiguing  only  by  being  unduly  prolonged. 
The  leg  is  raised,  not  by  a  direct  lifting^  but  by  cans- 


REGION    OF    THE    LEGS.  169 

ing  the  limb  to  deviate  from  a  straight  Hue  by  simply 
bending  the  thigh  and  knee  joints.  This  action  short- 
ens the  distance  between  the  hip  and  foot,  and  thus 
the  foot  is  elevated  from  the  ground.  The  act  requires 
comparatively  little  muscular  power.  Then  the  leg  is 
brought  forward,  not  by  projecting  it  by  means  of 
sheer  muscular  force,  but  by  an  easy  swinging  motion, 
like  that  of  a  pendulum  ;  its  own  momentum  is  made  to 
assist  the  action.  The  progress  of  the  trunk,  in  the  for- 
ward direction,  renders  the  swinging  of  the  leg  neces- 
sary and  easy. 

In  walking,  all  the  muscles  of  the  legs  and  feet  are 
moderately  exercised,  as  also  those  of  the  back  and 
shoulders.  By  these  latter  the  body  is  kept  upright, 
while  the  arms  gently  swing  with  a  motion  opposite 
that  of  the  legs,  so  as  to  preserve  the  center  of  gravity 
over  the  changing  base.  If  the  pace  be  quickened,  the 
muscles  of  the  feet  and  legs  enter  upon  a  more  vigor- 
ous action,  whereby  the  body  is  projected  more  rapidly 
forward  at  the  same  time.  This  great  expenditure  of 
muscular  power  calls  for  a  more  rapid  and  profound 
respiration,  and  the  respiratory  muscles  respond  ener- 
getically to  the  demand,  the  chest  dilates,  and  air  passes 
into  the  farthest  cells  of  the  lungs. 

In  consequence  of  these  actions,  a  surj^lus  amount  of 
heat  is  developed  ;  more  water,  carbonic  acid,  and  urea 
are  produced,  and  these  soon  show  themselves  at  the 
different  oitlets ;  perspiration  appears  uj^on  the  surface 
of  the  whole  skin,  and  there  are  more  frequent  calls  for 
urination,  while  the  volume  of  vapor  discharged  by  the 
lungs  is  greatly  augmented. 

Walking  is  doubtless  superior  to  any  other  single 
exercise  that  a  person  can  take,  yet  it  fails  to  answer 
all  the  ends  of  exercise.     As  there  are  many  other  ex- 

8 


170 


REGION    OE    THE    LEGS. 


ercises  involved  in  many  kinds  of  loork  better  adapted 
to  preserve  the  health  and  power  of  all  the  organs  of 
the  well  man,  so  there  are  others  better  adapted  to  cer- 
tain morbid  conditions.  Though  these  should  be  em- 
ployed in  connection  with  a  suitable  amount  of  this 
exercise,  walking,  alone,  fails  to  bring  the  abdominal 
organs  into  sufficient  activity.  On  the  contrary,  these 
organs  are  simply  carried,  and  are,  until  the  respiration 
becomes  accelerated,  nearly  as  inactive  as  in  sitting. 
Hence  weakly  persons,  especially  females,  complain  of 
a  dragging  sensation  in  walking,  in  this  condition  of 
the  system ;  and  without  some  other  movement  to  in- 
vigorate the  enfeebled  parts,  walking  may  be  consid- 
ered not  only  useless,  but  even  injurious  to  the  health. 
In  these  cases,  certain  movements  of  the  trunk  and 
abdomen  are  absolutely  required  to  render  walking 
proper  and  useful. 


EXAMPLES    OF    MOVEMENTS    OF    THE    LEGS. 
9— WING-STEIDE-STANDING,  CUET8EYING. 


Fig.  14. 


PosiTiox. — The  hands  are  fixed 
upon  the  hips,  in  the  standing  pos- 
ture, with  the  back  in  contact  with 
a  smooth  wall,  the  heels  two  or  two 
and  a  half  feet  apart,  and  five  or  six 
inches  from  the  wall,  against  which 
the  trunk  is  slightly  supported,  the 
toes  turned  outward. 

Action. — 1.  Tlie  feet  stretch  (as 
in  IS^o.  1).  2.  The  knees  bend  for- 
;ward  and  outward,  while  the  trunk 
''  sinks  quite  down.  3.  The  knees 
stretch,  raising  the  body  to  its  up- 
most height.     4.  The  heels  sink  and 


REGION    OF    THE    LEGS. 


lYl 


rest  again  upon  the  floor.  At  each  stage  the  move- 
ment should  be  performed  very  slowly,  observing  a 
few  moments'  pause  between  its  distinct  portions.  The 
cut  shows  the  position  at  the  stage  of  the  movement 
when  the  body  begins  to  descend,  also  by  the  dotted 
outlines,  the  position  at  the  extreme  limit  of  motion. 
The  movement  may  be  repeated  four  or  five  times. 

Effect. — The  action  is  felt  at  the  bottoms  of  the  feet, 
in  the  calves  of  the  legs,  and,  after  the  knees  bend, 
strongly  in  the  muscles  of  the  legs.  The  effect  in- 
creases in  proportion  as  the  knees  deviate  from  the 
perpendicular  by  the  bending  of  the  knee  joints.  The 
muscles  of  the  perineum,  and  even  of  the  rectum,  in 
the  extreme  position,  are  strongly  affected. 

10— HALF-STANDING,  CUETSEYING. 

Position. — One   hand   is  Fig. is. 

placed  upon  the  hips,  the  other 
rests  on  some  object  to  steady 
the  body  ;  the  trunk  erect,  one 
leg  straight,  and  the  foot  rest- 
ing on  the  floor,  the  other  leg 
bent  at  the  knee  at  right  angles. 

Action. — 1.  The  foot  on  the 
floor  is  bent  so  that  the  weight 
rests  upon  the  toes.  2.  The 
knee  slowly  bends,  and  the 
trunk  sinks  as  low  as  the  leg  is 
able  to  support  it.  3.  It  is 
again  stretched  till  the  trunk 
rises  to  its  erect  position,  when,  4,  the  heel  sinks  to  the 
floor.  The  cut  shows  the  position,  and  the  dotted  out- 
line the  extreme  position.  This  action  should  be  re- 
peated three  or  four  times  with  each  leg. 


172  EEGIOX    OF   THE   LEGS. 

Effect. — This  is  similar  to  that  of  movement  No.  8  ; 
but  as  the  whole  weiglit  of  the  body  is  supported  by  one 
leg,  the  movement  is  thereby  made  mucb  more  positive.       j 

11 —BALANCE-STANDING,  CURTSEYING. 

Fig.  16.  PosiTiON.-One   hand   is   placed   in 

contact  with  some  firm  object  to 
steady  the  body;  the  other  is  placed 
upon  the  side  ;  the  trunk  erect, 
and  its  weight  is  borne  by  one  foot 
resting  upon  a  stool  about  eight- 
een inches  bigh,  while  the  other  is 
free. 

Action. — 1.  The  knee  slowly  bends, 
and  the  trunk  witli  the  suspended  leg 
falls,  but  it  does  not  touch  the  floor. 
2.  The  bent  knee  is  slowly  extended 
till  tlie  body  is  in  the  first  position. 
The  cut  shows  the  position  after  the 
Repeat  the  action  five  or  six  times  with 


knee  is  bent, 
each  side. 
Effect. - 


Fig.  IT. 


•This    move- 


ment is  only  a  modification    >"'■'•.. 
of  the  previous  one,  and  the    J />;,- 
effect  is  much  the  same.  ff:;'  ■ 

12.-WING-KNEELING,    KNEE- 

STEETCHING.  \: 

Position. — The  hands 
are  placed  upon  the  hips, 
trunk,  or  kneeling  position, 
with  a  cushion  under  the  knees,  and  the  heels  prevent- 
ed from  rising  by  being  forced  down  by  some  firm 
object,  as  the  frame  of  a  sofa. 


REGION    OF    THE   LEGS. 


173 


Action. — ^1.  The  trunk  inclines  gently  and  slowly 
forward,  without  bending  at  the  hips  or  in  the  back, 
the  knee  only  being  slightly  straightened  or  stretched. 
2.  It  rises  upward  and  backward  till  it  regains  its  erect 
position.  The  cut  shows  the  commencing,  and  the 
dotted  outline  the  extreme  position  of  the  movement. 
This  movement  should  be  repeated  live  or  six  times. 

Effect. — This  movement  powerfully  affects  the  mus- 
cles and  fascia  of  the  thigh,  its  influence  extending  to 
the  hips  and  back,  also  to  the  calves  of  the  legs.  It  is 
derivative,  and  counteracts  the  ill  effects  of  too  much 
exercise  of  the  muscles  of  the  anterior  portion  of  the 
thigh. 

13— HALF-STANDING,  ALTERNATE  LEG-TWISTING. 

Position. — ^The  hands  being  fixed  upon  the  hips,  the 
trunk  rests  upon  one  foot,  while  ^^^-  ^^• 

the  other  foot  is  placed  upon  a 
slight  elevation,  about  two  feet 
distant,  in  a  direction  diagonal  to 
the  front  of  the  body. 

Action. — By  a  slight  effort  of 
the  body  and  of  the  leg  upon 
which  it  rests,  the  trunk  turns 
horizontally  upon  the  axis  of  the 
leg,  right  and  left,  alternately. 
Care  should  be  used  not  to  twist 
too  strongly,  so  as  to  over-tax  the 
knee  joint.  The  cut  shows  the 
commencing  position.  The  twisting  should  be  per- 
formed five  or  six  times  each  way  upon  each  leg. 

Effect. — ^The  amount  of  contraction  of  the  muscles 
of  the  leg  in  this  movement  is  comparatively  small ; 
all  the  muscles,  however,  together  with  all  the  other 


174 


REGION    OF    THE    LEGS. 


structures  of  the  part,  are  strongly  affected  by  it.  The 
muscles,  nerves,  areolar  structures,  vessels,  etc.,  are 
subjected  to  an  unusual  agitation,  that  induces  peculiar 
sensations  and  marked  effects. 


14— WING-WALK,   FORWARD-FALL-STANDING,  KNEE-BENDING 

Position. — The  hands  being  fixed  upon  the  hips,  one 
Pig.  19,  foot  is  placed  about  two  and  a 

half  feet  before  the  other  in 
walking  position  ;  the  posterior 
foot  is  at  right  angles  with  the 
anterior. 

Action. — 1.  The  heel  of  the 
forward  foot  rises  at  the  same 
time  that  the  knee  slowly  bends ; 
and  since  this  action  shortens 
the  forward  leg,  the  body  is  in- 
clined forward,  throwing  its 
weight  upon  it.  2.  The  bent 
knee  slowly  extends,  the  leg  becoming  straight,  until 
tlie  heel  reaches  the  floor,  and  the  trunk  is  raised  to 
the  commencing  position.  The  cut  shows  the  move- 
ment in  one  stage  of  it.  This  action  may  be  repeated 
five  or  six  times  W'ith  each  leg. 

Effect.— This  movement  very  strongly  affects  all 
the  muscles  of  the  legs,  and  it  proves  derivative  in 
cases  of  cold  feet  or  rush  of  blood  to  the  head. 


15.-LEG-ANGLE  HALF-STANDING,   LEG-CLAPPING. 

Position. — The  knee  and  thigh  of  one  leg  are  bent 
so  as  to  raise  the  foot,  which  is  placed  on  a  chair  or 
stool,  while  the  trunk  rests  upon  the  other  leg  in  the 
erect  or  gently  inclining  posture. 


JJEGION    OF   THE    LEGS. 


175 


Action . — Eotli  liaudd,  with  the 
pahns  open  and  fingers  outstretched, 
are  employed  to  clap^  from  the  hip  to 
the  ankle,  the  whole  of  the  leg  thus 
brought  within  their  reach.  The  clap- 
ping  consists  of  rapid  ])ut  light  strokes 
of  the  palms  of  the  hands.  Each  leg 
may  be  thus  clapped  throughout  its 
length  five  or  six  times.  The  cla^Dping 
is  a  passive  movement   for  the  legs, 


Fig.  20. 


although    the    arms    are 


active,    of 


l^^« 


course,  in  applying  it. 

Effect. — ^This  action  imparts  a  high 
degree  of  nervous  sensibility  to  the  legs  thus  operated 
upon,  and  greatly  increases  the  vascularity  and  warmth 
of  the  skin.  It  is  derivative  for  the  superior  organs, 
and  also  for  the  interior  vessels  of  the  parts  subjected 
to  the  action.  This  operation  will  also  be  found  an  ex- 
cellent means  of  warming  cold  hands  and  of  increasing 
the  circulation  in  the  arms. 


REGION  OF  THE  HIPS. 

Remarks  on  the  Region  of  the  Hips. — This  region 
includes  the  pelvis,  its  contents,  and  its  connections. 
In  debility  from  any  cause,  this  region  frequently  pre- 
sents some  severe  symptoms,  and  is  often  afflicted  with 
grave  disease,  such  as  constipation^  prolapsus  of  the 
womh  and  rectum^  uterine  congestion^  ovaritis^  amenor- 
rhea, leucorrhea^  diseases  of  the  prostate,  bladder,  and 
sexual  organs. 

The  movements  applicable  to  this  region  are  nume- 
rous  and  important,  affording  us  the  means  of  con- 
trollinoj  the  circulation  and  nutrition  of  these  parts, 


176 


REGION    OF    THE    LEGS. 


and  if  well  selected  and  a]3plied  in  proper  connection 
with  others  that  may  be  indicated,  such  movements 
prove  an  invaluable  means  for  maintaining  or  destroy- 
ing the  health. 

The  utility  of  these  movements  will  be  realized 
when  it  is  noticed  that  after  childhood  the  class  of  per- 
sons afflicted  with  the  diseases  referred  to,  seldom 
make  use  of  much  variety  in  their  exercises,  but  are 
in  the  habit  of  carrying  themselves  stiffly  about,  em- 
ploying as  few  muscles  as  possible.  Most  of  the  fol- 
lowing movements  necessarily  aii'ect  the  thigh,  back, 
and  abdomen,  because  the  muscles  acting  have  their 
attachments  at  one  extremity  in  one  or  the  other  of 
these  regions.  Many  of  them  aifect  the  legs  equally 
with  the  pelvis. 


16.— WING-STEIDE,  SHOET-SITTING,  LEG  OUTWAED-STEETCHING. 

^^s-21.  Position. — The  hands  are 

iixed  on  the  hips,  the  body 
erect,  in  the  sitting  posture, 
upon  the  edge  of  a  chair  or 
stool,  with  the  thighs  sepa- 
rated ii'  right  angles,  feet 
resting  on  the  floor. 

Action. — 1.  The  foot  of 
one  side  is  raised  a  few  inches 
from  the  floor.  2.  The  knee 
is  slowly  stretched,  till  the 
legs.  2>!V%  quite  straight,  and 
in  a  horizontal  position,  and  poiilting  forward-si dewise. 
3.  The  knee  bends  and  returns  to  its  first  position. 
This  movement  may  be  repeated  five  or  six  times  with 
each  limb.  The  cut  shows  the  position,  and  the  dotted 
line  indicates  the  extreme  position  of  the  movement. 


REGION   OF   THE   LEGS. 


177 


Effect. — Tliis  movement  requires  strong  action  of 
the  internal  muscles  of  the  pelvis,  and  of  the  muscles 
of  the  abdomen  and  upper  portion  of  the  leg,  and 
causes  the  blood  to  circulate  toward  the  feet.  It 
strengthens  the  pelvis,  and  is  derivative  in  congestion 


Fig.  22. 


of  its  organs. 


17.— LEG-ANGLE  HALF-STANDING,  KNEE-STRETCHING. 

Position. — With  one  hand  extended,  and  grasping 
some  firm  object,  and  the  other  upon  the  liip,  the  body 
stands  erect  upon  one 
foot — namely,  that  on 
the  supported  side ;  the 
other  leg  is  bent  at  both 
knee  and  liip,  the  thigh 
being  horizontal. 

Action. — 1.  The  knee 
is  slowly  stretched  until 
the   leo;   is   strai2:ht.     2.  '."v  y'' 
The  knee  bends,  and  the     ''^^'' 
leg  assumes  the  first  po- 
sition.    This  action  may 
be  repeated  three  or  four 
times    with    each    side. 
The  cut  shows  the  position,  and  the  dotted  line  indi- 
cates the  terminating  position. 

Effect. — ^The  action  in  the  movement  is  like  that  of 
the  preceding,  though  somewhat  more  energetic,  and 
more  difficult  to  perform,  and  it  produces  similar 
effects. 


18.— WING-EECLINE,  SUPPOET-SITTING,  KNEES-EAISING. 

Position. — ^The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  hips,  the 
trunk  sustained  in  a  chair,  in  reclining  posture,  or  on 

8* 


178 


REGION    OF    THE   LEGS. 


a  coucli  with  the  shoulders 
a  good  deal  elevated;  the 
feet  resting  upon  the  floor, 
and  the  knee; 


Fig.  28. 


bent  at  right 


angles. 


Action. — 1.  The  knees 
are  slowly  raised  as  high  as 
possible,  the  lower  leg  re- 
maining in  the  same  rela- 
tive position.  2.  The  legs 
slowly  return  to  the  first 
position.  This  action  may  be  repeated  five  or  six  times. 
The  cut  shows  the  first  position,  and  the  dotted  outlines 
the  direction  and  the  extent  of  the  movement. 

Effect. — In  this  action  the  lower  abdominal  muscles 
and  the  internal  pelvic  muscles  are  sirongly  aflected. 
The  movement  strengthens  the  part,  and  removes  in- 
ternal congestion  of  the  pelvic  organs. 


19— HALF-STANDING,  LEG  FORWAED-KAISING. 

Fig.  24  Position. — The  body  is 

steadied  by  extending  one 
hand  for  this  purpose, 
while  the  other  is  placed 
upon  the  hip,  the  body  in 
standing  position,  resting 
its  weight  upon  one  leg. 

Action. — 1.  The  leg  of 
the  side  opposite  the  sup- 
port is   slowly  raised  for- 
.,'N.  ward  till  it  nearly  reaches 
}J  the     horizontal     position. 
-''     2.  It  then   slowly  returns 
to  its  first  position.     This 


REGION    OF    THE    LEGS.  179 

action  may  be  repeated  four  or  five  times  with  each 
leg.  The  dotted  line  of  the  cut  indicates  the  direction 
and  the  extent  of  the  movement. 

Effect. — This  is  similar  to  that  of  the  j^receding 
movement. 

20.— HALF-STANDING,  LEG  BACKWAKD-EAISING. 

Position. — This  is  precisely  like  that  in  movement 
ISTo.  19,  to  which  the  reader  is  referred. 

Action. — 1 .  The  leg  is  extended  slowly  backward, 
and  raised  as  high  as  possible.  2.  It  returns  slowly  to 
its  first  position.  The  cut  (fig.  24)  shows  this  move- 
ment, the  dotted  outline  extending  backward  indicat- 
ing the  limit  of  the  backward  motion. 

Effect. — In  this  movement  the  muscles  of  the  seat, 
the  lower  portion  of  the  back,  and  those  of  the  pelvis 
are  strongly  affected.  It  is  useful  to  strengthen  these 
parts,  and  to  remove  internal  weakness  and  congestion. 
The  action  of  the  muscles  in  the  direction  in  which  the 
leg  moves  is  concentric^  while  that  of  the  anterior  and 
internal  muscles  is  eccentric. 

21.— HALF-STANDING,  LEG  SIDEWISE-EAISING. 

Position. — For  this  the  reader  is  also  referred  to 
movement  ISTo.  19,  fig.  24. 

Action. — 1.  The  leg  is  separated  from  the  standing 
one,  and  slowly  raised  sidewise  as  far  as  possible. 
2.  It  then  falls  slowly  to  its  first  position.  The  plane 
in  which  the  leg  moves  is  represented  by  the  perpeur 
dicular  dotted  line. 

Effect. — Similar  to  that  of  the  preceding,  except 
that  the  muscles  of  the  thigh  and  hip  on  the  side 
moved,  are  brought  into  strong  action. 


180 


REGION   OF   THE   LEGS. 


Each  of  the  above  four  movements  acts  upon  the 
muscles  of  the  thigh  and  leg  in  a  very  jDowerful  man- 
ner, especially  if  the  extremity  be  maintained  for  a 
few  moments  at  the  extreme  limit  of  the  movement ; 
and  since  not  only  the  muscles  of  the  hips  and  thighs, 
but  also  those  of  the  leg  enter  into  these  actions,  they 
are  all  strongly  derivative  in  their  effects. 


Fig.  25. 


22.— FOEWAED-FALL,  HEAD-SUPPOET-STANDING,  LEG-EAISING. 

Position. — The  head  rests  upon  the  folded  arms 
placed  upon  some  object  of  convenient  height,  as  a 
table  or  mantle-piece ;  the  feet  resting  on  the  floor,  so 
far  back  from  the  perpendicular  as  to  cause  the  body 
(which  is  in  a  nearly  straight  line)  to  form  an  angle 
with  the  floor  of  about  forty-flve  degrees. 

Action. — 1.  The  leg  is  slowly  raised  as  high  as  pos- 
sible, where  it  remains  for  a  few  moments.  2.  It  then 
slowly  returns  to  its  first  position.     Tlie  dotted  outline 

of  the  accompany- 
ing cut  indicates 
the  direction  and 
extent  of  the  move- 
ment. This  action 
may  be  repeated 
v)^  four  or  five  times 
with  each  leg. 

Effect. — Tlie 
muscles  of  the 
thigh,  leg,  seat,  pe- 
rineum, and  back 
are  strongly  affected,  and  also  those  of  the  anterior  sur- 
face of  the  body.  This  movement  is  especially  valu- 
able for  sedentary  people  whose  legs  have  become 
weak  from  disuse. 


REGION    OF    THE    LF.GS. 


181 


23— HALF-9TAKDING,  LEG-KOTATION. 

Position. — One  hand  extended  steadies  the  body  hy 
leaning    against   a   wall   or  ^  Fig.  26. 

some  firm  object;  the  other 
hand  being  fixed  upon  the 
hip.  Body  erect,  and  rest- 
ing upon  the  leg  nearest  the 
supporting  hand. 

Action. — The  free  leg  is 
made  to  rotate  so  that  the 
foot  shall  describe  the  broad- 
est possible  circle,  of  which  "I 
the  inner  edge  is  near  the 
supporting  foot.  This  mo- 
tion is  produced  by  the  al- 
ternate gentle  action  of  the 
muscles  attached  to  the  hips. 
The  rotation  may  be  performed  six  or  eight  times  in 
one  direction,  wdien  it  is  reversed,  and  performed  in 
the  opposite  direction.  In  the  cut,  the  dotted  outline 
indicates  the  action. 

Effect. — This  movement  gently  aftects  all  the  mus- 
cles of  the  thigh,  and  by  the  centrifugal  effect  that  re- 
sults from  the  motion  in  a  circle,  restrains  the  return 
of  the  venous  circulation  for  a  moment,  whereby  the 
circulation  of  the  leg  is  subsequently  quickened,  and 
the  leg  warmed. 


24.-WING-SITTING,   DOUBLE    LEG-TWISTING. 

Position. — The  hands  are  upon  the  hips,  the  trunk  sus- 
tained by  a  chair,  or  lying  uj)on  a  couch  with  the  shoul- 
ders raised  high  ;  the  legs  are  extended  across  another 
chair,  the  feet  projecting  freely,  and  placed  so  far  apart 
that  the  toes  will  barelv  touch  in  the  movement. 


182 


REGION   OF   THE   LEGS. 


^^s- 2^-  AcTioN.-l.  The  legs  slow- 

ly rotate,  tlie  toes  turning 
outwa7xl^  the  rotation  being 
effected  at  the  upper  ex- 
tremity of  the  thigh.  2. 
They  then  rotate  inward^ 
till  the  toes  touch  in  a  near- 
ly horizontal  position.  This 
action  is  repeated  five  or 
six  times,  each  time  in  both 
directions.  In  the  cut,  the 
dotted  curved  line  indicates 
the  direction  of  the  movement.  Care  should  be  taken 
that  the  limbs  turn  on  their  own  axis,  without  bending 
at  the  knees,  stretching  at  the  ankles,  or  in  any  other 
way  deviating  from  the  first  position  of  the  legs. 

Effect. — This  movement  is  chiefly  effected  by  small 
muscles  about  the  head  of  the  thigh  bone,  some  of 
which  are  intimately  related  to  the  cavity  of  the  pelvis, 
though  many  others  assist  in  the  movement.  It  circu- 
lates the  blood  in  the  legs,  strengthens  the  hips,  and 
removes  congestion  of  the  organs  contained  in  the  pel- 
vic cavity. 


25.-LEGS-ANGLE,  LIE-SITTING,  KNEES-STEETCHING. 

Position. — The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  hips,  the 
trunk  reclining  on  a  couch  with  the  shoulders  raised, 
the  legs  bent  both  at  the  thigh  and  knee  joints  so  that 
the  feet  may  rest  upon  the  couch  near  the  seat,  tlie  legs 
being  in  angle  position. 

Action. — 1.  The  knees  are  slowly  stretched,  the  feet 
being  raised  and  the  lower  legs  being  brought  into  a 
line  with  the  tliighs,  the  thigh  in  the  mean  time  re- 
maining at  an  angle  of  about  forty-five  degrees  with 


REGION    OF   THE    LEGS. 


183 


the  body,  wliicli  position  is  maintained  for  a  few  mo- 
ments. 2.  The  knees  slowly  bend,  bringing  the  feet 
back  to  their  original  position,  resting  on  the  couch. 
This  action  may  be  repeated  six  or  eight  times. 

Effect. — If  the  extreme  position  of  the  legs  be  main- 
tained, the  action  at  the  lower  portion  of  the  abdomen 
and  in  the  pelvis  is  powerful,  and  in  character  concen- 
tric.    The  anterior  part  of  the  leg  is  also  affected. 


r 


26 —SHELTER  TRUNK-BACKWAED-LYING,  LEGS-EAISING. 

Position. — The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  crown  of 
the  head,  the  trunk  lying  backward  npon  a  couch,  the 
legs,  from  the  hips,  projecting  beyond  the  edge,  their 
weight    causing  Fig.  28. 

them  to  descend  ^r^ 

considerably  be- 
low its  level. 

AcTioN.-l.The 
legs  are  slowly 
raised  till  .'hey 
are  in  a  posi- 
tion approach- 
ing right  angles 
with  the  trunk, 
and    are    held  '^ 

there  for  a  few  moments.  2.  They  are  permitted  slowly 
to  fall  back  to  their  original  position.  This  action 
may  be  repeated  five  or  six  times.  The  dotted  out- 
line in  the  cut  shows  the  position  reached  at  the  limit 
of  motion. 

Effect. — This  movement  acts  upon  the  abdominal 
coverings  and  the  muscles  of  tlie  pelvis,  presses  upward 
the  pelvic  and  abdominal  contents,  and  affects  eccen- 
trically the  muscles  of  th.e  chine  and  hips. 


184 


KEGION    OF    THE    LEGS. 


27.- KICK  BACKWAED-LYING,  LEGS-SEPAEATION. 

Position. — The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  hips,  the 
head  slightly  elevated,  the  trunk  lying  on  the  back, 
and  the  legs  raised  nearly  to  the  position  shown  in 
fig.  31. 

Action. — 1.  The  legs  are  allowed  slowly  to  separate, 
as  far  as  possible,  being  carried  apart  laterally  by  their 
own  weight.  2.  Are  slowly  brought  together  again. 
This  action  may  be  repeated  five  or  six  times. 

Effect. — The  insides  of  the  legs,  the  perineum,  the 
pelvis,  and  the  lower  portion  of  the  abdomen  are  af- 
fected by  this  movement. 

28.— sidewise-lying,  leg-eaising. 
Position. — The  body  lies  upon  one  side  in  a  horizon- 
tal and  straight  position,  the  head  being  pillowed  upon 

Fig.  29. 


the  under  arm,  while  tlie  hand  of  the  other  is  placed 
upon  the  hip. 

Action. — 1.  The  leg  slowly  rises  in  the  perpendic- 
ular plane  of  the  body  as  far  as  it  may,  where  it  remains 
for  a  few  moments.  '2.  It  then  slowly  falls  back  to  its 
first  position.  This  action  may  be  repeated  six  or 
eight  times  with  each  side.     The  dotted  outline  of  the 


KEGION    OF   THE    LEGS. 


185 


cut  indicates  the  point  to  wliicli  tlie  leg  rises,  and  the 
direction  of  the  movement. 

Effect. — The  sides,  the  outsides  of  the  legs  and  hips, 
and  the  perineum,  are  brought  into  action  in  this 
movement. 


29— backwaed-lying,  legs-eotation. 

Position.—  ^'^-  ^^' 

The      com- 
mencing posi- 
tion is  exactly 
like    that    of  ; 
ilso.  28.  1 

Action. — 1.  '^:; 
The  legs  are  • 
carried  to  one  side  by  bending  at  the  hips.  2.  The  feet 
•are  then  made  to  revolve  in  as  wide  a  circle  as  possible 
while  the  legs  are  kept  in  contact.  3.  The  direction 
of  the  rotation  is  then  reversed.  This  change  is  re- 
peated three  or  four  times.  The  dotted  outline  of  the 
cut  shows  the  circle  traversed  by  the  feet. 

Effect. — This  movement  acts  upon  all  the  muscles 
of  the  thighs  and  hips,  the  lower  portion  of  the  abdo- 
men and  back  in  turn,  also  the  rectum,  uterus,  blad- 
der and  lower  portion  of  the  spinal  cord. 


30— WING  LEG-ANGLE  HALF-LYING,  ENEE-STRETCHING. 

Position. — Tlie  arras  are  in  wing  position,  trunk 
lying  with  the  shoulders  much  elevated,  the  legs  bent 
at  both  thigh  and  knee  joints  at  riglit  angles,  the  feet 
resting  on  the  same  horizontal  level  with  the  body. 

Action. — 1.  The  knees  slowly  stretch,  without  chang- 
ing the  position  of  the  thighs,  until  the  legs  are  straiglit, 


186 


EEGION    OF   THE   LEGS. 


^'S-  81.  the  feet  being  elevat- 

ed. 2-  Tlie  knees 
slowly  bend,  and  the 
feet  take  the  position 
from  which  they 
started,  i.  e.^  the  com- 
mencing position. 
This  action  may  be 
repeated  five  or  six 
times.  The  dotted  outline  of  the  cut  shows  the  posi- 
tion at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  the  movement. 

Effect. — ^This  movement  brings  into  action  all  the 
anterior  muscles  of  the  leg,  as  well  as  those  of  the 
low^er  abdominal  and  pelvic  regions,  and  afi'ects  the  in- 
ternal organs  of  these  parts.     It  also  warms  the  feet. 


31— THIGH-EOTATION. 

Position. — The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  hips,  the 

trunk  is  lying  back- 
ward, with  the  shoul- 
ders and  head  elevat- 
ed, the  thighs  bent 
strongly  upon  the  ab- 
domen ;  the  knees  also 
are  bent  to  their  acut- 
est  angle. 

Action. — The  knees  are  caused  to  revolve  five  or 
six  times  in  a  circle  as  broad  as  possible,  the  inner  part 
of  which  is  close  to  the  body.  The  direction  of  the 
motion  should  change  four  or  five  times,  as  in  I^o.  31. 
Effect. — This  movement  excites  the  rectum,  lower 
intestines,  and  abdominal  contents  generally,  and  also 
strengthens  the  muscles  about  the  hij)s,  and  all  the 


KEGION    OF    TIIK    LEGS. 


187 


organs  depending  for  their  innervation  on  the  lower 
part  of  the  spinal  cord. 


32. -CHINE  KNOCKING. 

Position. — One  hand  is  extended  so  as  to  brace  and 
steady  the  body  by  its  contact  with  ^ig.  88. 

some  firm  object;  the  trunk  leans 
forward,  the  body  in  the  standing 
position. 

Action. — The  free  arm  and  hand, 
strongly  clenched,  is  nsed  to  deal  a 
number  (twenty  or  thirty)  of  smart 
blows  upon  the  lower  portion  of  the 
chine. 

Effect. — This  movement  makes  a 
vibratory  impression  upon  the  sacral 
bone,  its  contained  nerves  —  the 
lower  portion  of  the  spinal  cord  and 
branches.  The  eftect  is  also  communicated  to  all  the 
pelvic  organs,  as  the  rectum,  uterus,  bladder,  etc.,  both 
directly,  and  as  a  result  of  the  excitement  produced 
in  the  part  of  the  spinal  cord  supplying  the  affected 
region  with  nerves.  The  movement  is  highly  useful  in 
many  cases,  but  should  be  omitted  in  others.  The 
question  of  its  appropriateness  may  generally  be  de- 
cided by  the  sensations  ^^I'oduced.  If  it  is  intended  to 
stimulate  the  action  of  tlie  rectum,  the  knocking  should 
be  applied  to  the  lov/er  extremity  of  the  sacral  bone. 


188  EEGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 


EEGIOX  OF  THE  TEUi^K. 

The  trunk  of  the  body  consists  of  external  walls, 
witli  the  inchided  space,  which  is  filled  with  the  organs 
of  digestion  and  respiration,  and  their  appendages. 
This  space  is  divided  by  the  diapliragm  into  two  parts 
or  chambers  ;  the  one  below  the  diaphragm  containing 
the  apparatus  for  the  digestion  of  food  and  the  prepara- 
tion of  nutritive  material,  that  above  it  being  devoted 
to  the  aeration  and  circulation  of  the  blood. 

In  the  light  afforded  by  the  Movement-Cure,  there 
is  seen  to  be  an  intimate  connection  between  these  two 
sets  of  functions,  whether  physiologically  or  patho- 
logically considered.  The  therapeutical  indications 
also  relate  to  hoth  sets  of  oi'gans  and  their  functions — 
even  though  the  symjjtoms  of  which  the  invalid  chiefly 
complain  relate  more  especially  to  one  or  the  other. 
There  can  be  no  good  digestion  with  imperfect  respira- 
tion, and  no  efficient  respiration  while  the  blood  is 
overwhelmed  with  the  crude  materials  derived  from 
imperfect  digestion.  The  location  of  these  organs  very 
much  favor  their  associative  treatment.  These  organs 
are  the  media  through  which  the  materials  destined 
for  vital  service  are  brought  into  those  peculiarly  inti- 
mate relations  with  each  other  that  are  required. 

By  digestion,  food  is  reduced  to  a  fluid  state  ;  it  then 
passes  the  digestive  boundaries  into  the  blood.  The 
circulation  carries  the  materials  in  this  condition  to  the 


KEGIOX  OF  THE  TRUNK.  189 

lungs,  where  thej  become  associated  with  the  oxygen 
of  respiration,  and  the  products  of  this  association  are 
tlien  applied  to  all  the  nutritive  purposes  of  the  body  ; 
oxygen  or  the  blood-plasma  being  yielded  up  to  the 
tissues  according  to  the  various  vital  requirements. 

It  has  been  already  shown  that  the  quality  of  the 
vital  manifestations  depends  uj^on  the  manner  in  which 
these  preparatory  processes  are  performed.  The  modes 
of  attempting  to  control  these  processes  are  as  numerous 
as  the  devices  of  medicine ;  for  it  is  to  gain  this  con- 
trol that  the  remedial  art  is  exercised  everywhere.  But 
to  accomplish  this  grand  object  successfully,  we  must 
make  use  of  the  appliances  furnished  us  in  the  Move- 
ment-Cure. 

Movements  of  the  Digestive  Organs. — It  has  al- 
ready been  shown,  pp.  88,  90,  how  necessary  are  move- 
ments to  further  the  diiferent  stages  of  the  digestive 
processes ;  to  set  the  blood  in  healthful  motion ;  to  rouse 
to  activity  the  secretory  functions,  etc.,  etc.  But  their 
applicability  in  disease  would  seem,  at  first  view,  not  to 
be  demonstrated  by  these  facts.  That  they  are  so,  how- 
ever, one  is  convinced  from  attending  to  the  essential 
nature  of  many  pathological  conditions,  as  revealed  to 
us  by  the  Movement-Cure,  and  by  a  consideration  of 
the  advantages  that  these  organs  are  constantly  receiv- 
ing from  those  natural  and  constant  movements  to 
which  they  are  subjected  while  in  a  state  of  health. 

1.  In  the  alimentary  canal  we  have  a  tube  more  than 
twenty-live  feet  in  length,  variously  convoluted  and 
folded  upon  itself,  but  the  greatest  portion  of  which  is 
quite  free  to  move  when  acted  upon  by  causes  external 
to  itself.  It  is  fixed  to  the  abdominal  wall  by  few  and 
movable  attachments,  so  that  it  readily  yields  in  all  its 


190  REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK:. 

parts  to  the  least  mechanical  force  exerted  upon  it. 
The  tendency  of  the  several  portions  of  the  canal  to 
glide  upon  each  other  is  highly  favored  by  the  exceed- 
ingly smooth  and  polished  surface  they  present,  and  by 
the  fine,  glairy  secretions  with  which  they  are  lubri- 
cated. These  surfaces  glide  and  play  upon  each  other 
witli  every  change  of  posture,  and  with  the  muscular 
exertion  put  forth  in  nearly  every  part  of  the  body. 
These  mechanical  displacements,  caused  by  impressions 
received  from  external  sources,  afford  to  the  intestines 
the  stimulus  necessary  to  induce  their  own  worm-like 
motion,  which  is  effected  by  means  of  the  circular  mus- 
cular fibers  that  enter  into  the  structure  of  tlie  tube 
itself.  It  is  by  this  motion  that  the  contents  of  the 
canal  are  carried  forward  and  the  condition  supplied 
for  absorption  of  the  fluid  portions  and  for  the  passage 
of  the  portal  blood  in  the  direction  of  the  liver. 

It  is  a  curious  and  most  interesting  fact,  that  children 
and  young  animals,  whose  desire  for  motion  is  inherent 
in  their  constitutions,  are  inclined  chiefly  to  those  kinds 
of  exercise,  and  to  assume  those  positions,  that  necessa- 
rily affect  the  abdominal  contents  in  the  way  above 
described.  It  is  in  such  exercises  as  climbing^  rolling^ 
crawling^  jumping^  and  inlaying  generally,  that  these 
contents  are  most  disturbed  ;  but  we  never  hear  that 
these  movements,  though  often  violent,  are  attended 
with  harmful  consequences.  On  the  contrary,  we  are 
convinced  that  these  are  the  very  means  that  nature 
prescribes  to  secure  healthful  development  and  jDower 
in  these  most  essential  parts  of  the  body. 

2.  And,  asif  to  insure  these  healthful  effects,  nature 
Jias  ordained  that  by  respiration^  as  an  efiicient  and 
constant  means,  these  motions  shall  be  secured  to  the 
alimentary  canal.     The   abdominal    contents   may  be 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 


191 


considered  as  located  between  two  great  muscular  or- 
gans, the  diaphragm  and  the  abdominal  ^.  ^^ 
walls.  These  muscles  act  conjointly  ^f;?2- 
ultancously^  and  upon  all  the  included 
parts,  causing  them  to  play  incessantly 
upon  each  other,  and  subjecting  them  to 
a  constant  and  gentle  pressure. 

Diagram  illustrating  the  moA^ements  of  the  abdominal  walls 
and  contents  under  the  influence  of  respiration  ;  a,  position  / 
after  expiration  ;  6,  position  after  inspiration.    The  diaphragm  ' 
is  shown  to  be  much  more  concave  after  expiration. 

The  accompanying  diagram  shows  how 
the  diaphragm  and  walls  of  the  abdomen 
are  moved  and  acted  upon  by  the  included 
organs  at  each  respiration.  And  as  these 
respiratory  acts  are  at  the  rate  of  about 
eighteen  per  minute,  we  see  these  or- 
gans must  undergo  a  pretty  thorough 
churning. 

Any  cause  operating  to  deteriorate  the  health,  dimin- 
ishes the  amount  of  this  motion,  for  the  simple  reason 
that  the  respiration,  in  chronic  disease  of  every  kind,  is 
less  vigorous  than  in  health.  In  disease,  also,  these 
natural  movements  are  not  only  less  in  extent,  but 
faulty  in  kind  ;  for  we  frequently  find  that,  to  afford 
play  to  the  lungs,  some  other  part  of  the  walls  of  the 
body  take  on  motion  that  compensates  for  the  lack  of 
it  in  the  parts  originally  intended  for  the  performance 
of  that  function.  In  this  way  the  advantage  of  the 
respiratory  movements  to  the  abdominal  contents  is 
partially  lost.  The  common  causes  operating  to  pro- 
duce these  injurious  results  are  too  long  continuance 
of  the  fixed  positions  of  standing  or  sitting,  at  work  or 
study.  The  prevalent  style  of  dress ^  too,  by  limiting 
the  movements  of  the  chest  and  abdomen,  and  com- 


192  EEGIOX    OF    THE    TETINK. 

pressing  and  weakening  the  muscles,  has  much  to  do 
in  the  production  of  these  disastrous  consequences. 

3.  One  prime  effect  of  exercise  is  the  increase  of  the 
substance  and  the  contractility  of  the  abdominal  mus- 
cular coverings.  The  walls  of  the  abdomen  become,  in 
the  absence  of  proper  exercise,  weak,  flabby,  and  un- 
naturally distended.  When  this  occurs,  the  abdominal 
contents  necessarily  obey  the  laws  of  gravity,  become 
dislocated,  and  their  function  consequently  impeded. 
"Well-directed  movements  restore  the  power  of  these 
walls  ;  the  sinking  organs  a.re  reinstated  in  their  orig- 
inal position,  and  their  function  is  recovered. 

-i.  The  action  of  these  muscles  necessarily  calls  blood 
into  them  to  supply  their  nutrient  wants.  The  advan- 
tage of  this  does  not  stop  with  the  maintaining  of  the 
powers  of  these  muscles.  An  equal  benefit  is  derived 
in  the  scattering  of  the  visceral  congestion,  which  will 
necessarily  occur  when  the  blood  is  not  employed  in 
external  parts.  Congestion  of  the  mucous  surfaces,  or 
of  some  portion  of  the  contained  glandular  apparatus, 
is  quite  sure  to  accompany  the  weaknesses  above  men- 
tioned. 

The  reader  will  now  be  able  to  understand  the  mor- 
bid conditions  that  coexist  in  nearly  all  forms  of  dys- 
pepsia, constipation,  bronchial,  laryngeal,  and  liver 
affections,  that  so  extensively  prevail  in  the  community. 
There  is  insufficiency  of  respiration,  and  consequently 
of  the  natural  movements  of  the  digestive  organs  ;  these 
functions  are  hence  impeded,  and  the  well-known  symp- 
toms are  manifested  that  are  so  freely  doctored  instead 
of  the  diseases  themselves.  And  the  reader  will  also  read- 
ily infer  that,  in  order  to  correct  all  the  above-mentioned 
difficulties,  it  is  only  necessary  to  employ  movements 
with  due  reference  to  the  exact  pathology  of  the  case, 


REGIOX  OF  THE  TRUNK.  193 

and  with  a  rational  understanding  of  the  limits  of  their 
ability  to  correct  physiological  aberrations.  Other- 
wise employed,  movements  are  quite  as  competent,  and 
as  likely,  in  fact,  to  do  injury  as  good.  In  congestion 
of  the  liver,  for  instance,  it  is  highly  improper  to  em- 
ploy such  movements  as  would  tend  to  promote  that 
condition  in  a  healthy  person.  Ignorance  will  not 
shield  one  from  the  consequences  resulting  from  such 
foolish  practice.  That  an  aggravation  of  disease  fre- 
quently follows  the  use  of  heterogeneous  exercises,  is 
only  a  proof  of  their  power  to  do  good  when  properly 
directed.  The  beginner  can  not  observe  too  much 
caution  in  prescribing  for  himself. 


Movements  of  the  Respiratoet  Organs. — The 
function  of  aerating  the  blood  would  seem  to  be  more 
important  than  any  other  of  the  system.  Every  func- 
tion may  suffer  a  temporary  suspense  except  this,  and 
those  intimately  connected  with  it,  as  the  action  of  the 
heart ;  but  life  shortly  ceases  when  respiration  is  from 
any  cause  too  long  suspended.  When,  also,  respiration 
becomes  defective  or  inefficient,  whether  from  exter- 
nal or  internal  causes,  all  the  other  functions  speedily 
fail.  This  fact  shows  the  direct  dependence  of  all  other 
functions  upon  this.  All  changes  in  the  system,  wheth- 
er for  the  purpose  of  evolving  sensorial,  intellectual,  or 
muscular  power,  require  in  the  blood  the  presence 
of  oxygen  obtained  from  the  air  of  respiration.  It  is 
by  means  of  oxygen  that  the  compounds  into  which  the 
w^asting  organs  are  resolved,  are  reduced  to  the  still 
simpler  and  less  noxious  forms  in  which  they  are  dis- 
missed from  the  body.  It  is  the  abundant,  supply  of 
this  element,  secured  by  wholesome  avocations,  or,  in 
the  absence  of  labor,  by  special  exercises,  that  secures 

9 


194  REGION  OF  THE  TKLXK. 

to  the  system  that  elasticity  and  vigorous  tone,  which 
is  health.  Withdraw  this  element,  by  contracting  the 
respiratory  capacity,  and  important  vital  changes  are 
interrupted,  and  the  forces  of  the  system  begin  at  once 
to  fail — the  bow  has  lost  its  spring,  the  eye  ceases  to 
sparkle,  the  rose  fades  on  the  cheek,  and  that  form  that 
once  no  trouble  could  bend,  now  bows  under  grasshop- 
per burdens. 

The  need  of  a  supply  of  oxygen  to  the  system  is  gen- 
eral ;  all  parts  are  equally  liable  to  suffer  without  it. 
Hence  all  the  organs  and  tissues,  including  the  nerves 
and  muscles,  unite  in  a  common  effort  to  secure  it,  and 
to  perfect  the  respiratory  process.  That  such  is  the  case 
is  proved  by  many  symptoms  in  acute  disease.  In  these 
cases  the  efficiency  of  the  respiratory  process  is  first  di- 
minished by  a  deterioration  of  the  quality  of  the  blood, 
whose  attraction  for  oxygen  is  thereby  lessened.*  The 
whole  system  is  then  aroused,  and  the  respiratory  and  cir- 
culatory actions  excited  to  a  high  degree  in  the  effor^t  to 
attain  inore  air  by  means  of  which  to  reduce  its  nox- 
ious principles  to  the  more  neutral  and  bland  state  of 
carbonic  acid^  water ^  and  urea^  which  are  the  ultimate 
products  of  the  oxydation  attending  these  vital  opera- 
tions. 

There  are  two  principal  circumstances  that  control 
the  amount  of  oxygen  received  into  the  system.  One 
%  the  affinity  of  the  blood  and  tissues  for  this  element, 
,  jiich,  there  is  reason  to  believe,  varies  with  the  health, 
habits,  diet,  etc.  The  other  is,  the  capacity  of  the  chest 
in  cubic  measure,  and  the  degree  of  the  mobility  of  its 
walls.     In  complete  health  there  is,  of  course,  a  com- 


*  There  is  no  disease  characterized  by  an  increase  of  the  products  of  respiration. 


f 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK.  195 

plete  harmony  between  the  chemical  and  the  mechan- 
ical conditions  of  supply  and  the  general  needs  of  the 
system  for  oxygen.  But  it  is  also  necessary  that  in 
health  there  should  be  a  large  funded  capacity,  be- 
yond the  ordinary  needs  of  supply,  to  meet  the  emer- 
gencies into  which  the  system  may  be  thrown  ;  for 
instance,  the  extra  breathing  made  necessary  during 
temporary  forced  labor  or  excessive  cold.  The  powers 
of  the  system  soon  succumb  under  hardships,  if  this  re- 
serve capacity  for  respiration  is  limited  or  deficient,  as 
in  pulmonary  aiiections. 

That  the  walls  of  the  chest  are  very  mobile  and  well 
adapted  to  contain  and  to  charge  different  quantities 
of  air  according  to  circumstances,  is  apparent  from  an- 
atomical considerations.  This  cavity  is  bounded  below 
by  a  thin  muscle,  the  diaphragm,  which  is  convex  up- 
ward during  respiration,  but  which  by  contracting  is 
flattened,  leaving  much  space  above  it  to  be  filled  by 
the  air  which  simultaneously  rushes  in  to  supply  the 
vacuum  thus  produced. 

The  sides  of  the  chest  are  formed  by  the  ribs,  and 
their  tendonous  and  muscular  attachments.  The  ribs 
extend  downward  and  forward  from  the  spinal  column, 
are  connected  with  the  sternum  in  front  by  long  elas- 
tic cartilages,  except  the  two  lower  ones  of  each  side, 
whose  anterior  extremities  are  entirely  free.  Simul- 
taneously with  the  contraction  of  the  diaj)hragm,  the 
external  muscles  of  respiration  also  contract.  This 
action  elevates  the  forward  extremities  of  the  ribs, 
causing  them  to  include  a  larger  space  ;  and  it  also 
turns  them  slightly  outward,  thus  contributing  to  the 
same  result.  The  extent  of  this  eflect  is  precisely  in 
proportion  to  the  degree  of  the  muscular  action.  The 
diagram,  fig.  34,  page  191,  illustrates  the  motions  of 


196  REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 

the  inferior  and  lateral  walls  of  the  chest.  It  may 
not  only  be  inferred  that  the  amount  of  air  revivi- 
fied in  respiration  depends  on  the  amount  of  the  mo- 
tion of  the  walls  of  the  chest,  but  also  that  the  amount 
of  air  habitually  resident  in  the  lungs  depends  on  the 
tone  of  these  muscular  walls. 

Habitual  immobility  of  the  walls  of  the  chest  is  a 
characteristic  of  all  chronic  diseases.  The  capacity  of 
the  chest  has  become  restricted,  the  power  of  the  mus- 
cles lessened,  most  likely  from  habitual  disuse  ;  for  in 
these  cases  the  occupations  and  habits  of  life  have  not 
enforced  that  abundant  exercise  that  the  requirements 
of  the  system  demand.  In  most  cases,  the  evil  is  not 
lack  of  exercise  in  general,  but  lack  of  the  particular 
kinds  that  are  calculated  to  serve  the  wants  of  the  par- 
ticular function  in  question.  The  kinds  of  exercise 
that  the  weakly  and  sedentary  are  most  inclined  to  en- 
gage in  do  not,  it  is  admitted,  sufiiciently  affect  the 
respiratory  apparatus.  Just  here,  often,  is  the  true 
disease,  while  the  invalid  is  suffering  from  symptoms 
that  have  not  yet  suggested  to  him  their  origin. 

The  important  part  played  by  respiration  in  the  ani- 
mal economy  is  not  doubted,  but  we  fail  to  recognize 
the  practical  inference  deducible  from  this  considera- 
tion bearing  upon  the  restoration  of  the  invalid.  We 
also  fail  to  consider  that  one  is  running  in  the  direc- 
tion of  disease  whenever  the  efficiency  of  this  function 
is  from  any  cause  abated.  When  these  facts  are  well 
considered,  and  not  till  then,  will  the  importance  of 
special  means  adapted  to  counteract  the  effects  above 
indicated  be  appreciated. 

All  exertion  of  the  voluntary  powers,  we  have  said, 
causes  an  increase  of  respiration.  Profound  thought 
or  study,  all  may  have  noticed,  demands  frequent  and 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK.  197 

profound  inspiratory  eflbrts ;  while  preliminary  to  any 
very  strong  muscular  efforts  there  is  invariably  an  in- 
voluntary pi-e23aration  made  by  a  deep  inspiration. 
The  inspired  air,  at  such  times,  is  frequently  held^  and 
subjected  to  all  the  jjressure  that  the  chest  can  exert 
upon  it,  apparently  to  accelerate  and  increase  the  so- 
lution of  the  oxygen  brought  in  this  way  into  contact 
with  the  blood.  Thus  we  see  that  exercise  not  only 
increases  the  expansibility  of  the  chest,  but  probably, 
after  the  manner  here  noticed,  deprives  the  respired  air 
of  a  larger  proportion  of  its  oxygen. 

Great  caution,  let  it  be  remarked  here,  is  indispen- 
sable in  prescribing  movements  designed  to  enlarge 
the  chest,  for  great  injury  is  easily  done  in  this  di- 
rection. Persons  of  feeble  habits  we  would  caution 
earnestly  against  indiscriminate,  random  movements. 
Let  it  be  understood,  and  always  borne  in  mind,  that 
movements  of  this  region  tend  more  decidedly  than 
those  of  any  other  to  produce  congestion  ;  while  the 
production  of  this  condition  ought  specially  to  be 
avoided,  and  the  movements  should  be  so  prescribed 
as  to  overcome  it  if  it  already  exists. 

It  is  to  be  borne  in  mind,  too,  that  the  same  act  that 
causes  the  chest  to  become  filled  with  air,  assists  also 
the  flow  of  venous  blood  to  the  same  locality.  Hence, 
movements  of  this  region  should  always  be  given  in 
such  connection  and  order  as  to  counteract,  or  render 
impossible,  these  pernicious  eflects.  By  inattention  to 
this  caution,  not  only  may  congestion  be  produced, 
and  alarming  disease  promoted,  but  even  serious  hem- 
orrhages may  occur  that  may  threaten  life,  especially 
if  there  be  previous  disease  of  the  pulmonary  organs. 
These  accidents  need  never  occur  in  the  most  delicate 
or  in  the  worst  cases  of  disease,  but  the  capacity  and 


198 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


power  of  tlie  cliest  may  be  greatly  but  surely  improved 
in  nearly  all  of  them. 


33— STRETCH-STEIDE  SHOET-SITTING,   TRUNK  FOEWAED-SIDEWISE 
FALLING. 

^^^-  ^^-  Position. — The  arms  are 

brought  up  nearly  in  con- 
tact with  the  ears,  and  par- 
allel to  each  other ;  the 
trunk  erect,  supported 
upon  the  edge  of  a  chair 
or  other  convenient  seat ; 
the  thighs  at  right  angles 
apart  ;  feet  so  extended 
*--/>-:::,  upon  the  floor  as  to  form 
■ -^C^^  a  large  base. 
Action. — 1. 
falls  slowly, 
forward,  that  is,  in  a  line 
directly  over  one  thigh,  bringing  the  breast  in  close 
contact  with  the  knee.  2.  It  then  slowly  resumes  the 
lirst  23osition.  This  action  may  be  repeated  five  or  six 
times  on  each  side.  In  the  cut,  the  dotted  outline  indi- 
cates the  direction  and  the  extent  of  the  falling. 

If  it  is  deemed  advisable  that  less  effort  be  expended 
in  this  movement,  the  arms  may  be  put  in  wing  j30si- 
tioii  instead  of  stretch ;  when  considerable  effort  is  de- 
manded, the  stretch  position  may  be  used.  In  this 
case  the  hands  should  grasp  some  weighty  object,  as  a 
pair  of  dumb-bells,  and  the  movement  be  performed 
as  before. 

Effect. — Tliis  movement  affects  the  region  of  the 
loins,  and  if  weights  are  used,  also  the  back  and  arms. 


The  trunk 
diagonally 


REGION    OF   THE    TRUNK. 


199 


34. 


STEETCH-STRIDE    SUORT-SITTING,    TRUNK    BACKWARD-SIDE- 
WISE-FALLING 

Fig.  36. 


Position. — This  is  pre- 
cisely like  that  repre- 
sented in  Ko.  33,  ex- 
cept that  it  may  be  nec- 
essary to  secure  the  feet 
by  placing  them  under 
some  firm  object,  or  they 
may  be  held  to  the  floor 
by  another  person,  as 
may  be  most  convenient. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk 
to  be  twisted  a  little  to- 
ward the  knee  of  one 
side.  2.  It  must  now  be 
allowed  to  fall  slowly 
backward  till  it  reaches  a  position  approximating  the 
horizontal,  where  it  remains  for  a  few  moments.  3. 
Then  rises  slowly  again  to  the  commencing  position. 
This  action  may  be  repeated  three  or  four  times  with 
each  side.  In  the  cut,  the  dotted  outline  indicates  the 
direction  and  the  extent  of  the  movement. 

Effect. — This  movement  calls  po  werfully  into  action 
the  muscles  of  the  abdomen  upon  either  side,  and 
strengthens  them  as  well  as  the  fasciae  of  the  groin  and 
leg,  especially  in  the  region  liable  to  rupture.  It  also 
presses  the  bowels,  and  is  derivative  in  respect  to  the 
visceral  organs. 

35— stretch-sitting,  trunk  backward-falling. 

Position. — This  is  the  same  as  in  ^o.  34,  including 
the  support  necessary  for  the  feet. 

Action.  —  1.  The  trunk  falls  directly  but  slowly 
backward  till  it  reaches  a  position  nearly  horizontal. 


200 


REGION   OF    THE   TRUNK. 


^?-: 


Fig-  3T.  2.  It  then  rises  slow- 

ly till  it  regains  the 
commencing  posi- 
tion. This  action 
may  be  repeated  four 
or  five  times.  In  the 
cut,  the  dotted  out- 
line indicates  the  di- 
rection and  extent 
of  the  movement. 

Effect. — This  is  a 
very  useful  move- 
ment to  increase  the 
nutrition  of  the  ab- 
dominal coverings,  especially  the  lower  portion  of  the 
walls  of  the  abdomen.  It  also  produces* strong  deriva- 
ative  effects,  and  consequently  tends  to  remove  visceral 
congestion,  and  to  restore  the  contained  organs  to  their 
natural  situation  in  the  abdominal  cavity.  If  the  arms 
be  in  wing  position,  the  movement  will  be  easier ;  if 
weights  be  held,  it  will  be  more  positive  in  its  effects. 


36— half-steetch,  half-wixg,  steide  shoet-sitting,  teunk 
sidewise-bexdixg. 

Position. — One  hand  is  placed  upon  the  hij)S ;  the 
arm  of  the  other  is  stretched  perpendicularly  upward  ; 
trunk  erect,  sitting ;  thighs  at  right  angles;  feet  extend- 
ed and  braced  against  the  floor. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk  gently  bends  in  the  lumbar 
region  in  the  direction  of  the  hip,  on  which  the  hand 
is  fixed,  while  the  stretched  arm  retains  the  position 
relative  to  the  head,  in  which  the  movement  commenced. 
The  trunk  falls  as  far  as  it  can  without  raisins:  the  seat 
at  the  opposite  side.     2.  It  then  slowly  rises  to  its  orig- 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


201 


inal  position.     This  action  may  be  ^^^'  ^^^ 

repeated  three  or  four  times  upon 
each  side.  The  perpendicular  dot- 
ted line  and  the  arrow  indicate  in 
the  cut  the  direction  of  the  move- 
ment. The  extent  of  the  move- 
ment will  increase  after  a  little 
practice.  If  the  action  needs  to 
be  stronger,  a  weight  may  be  held 
in  the  upright  hand.  The  action 
may  be  repeated  four  or  five  times 
with  each  side. 

Effect. — ^This  movement  strong- 
ly affects  the  side  of  the  body,  and 
the  effect  is  extended  to  the  liver,  spleen,  and  other 
visceral  organs. 


37.-HALF-STRETCH,    HALF-WING    STRIDE-SITTING,    TRUNK- 
TWISTING. 


Position. — Tliis  is  the  same  as 
in  ]^o.  36. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk  remains 
perpendicular,  neither  bending 
nor  swaying  in  any  direction,  but 
twists  on  its  own  axis,  while  the 
seat  remains  immovable  on  the 
chair  or  stool.  In  twisting^  the 
side  of  the  raised  arm  moves  for- 
ward, while  the  opposite  side 
moves  to  an  equal  extent  back- 
ward, performing  the  twisting  to 
the  extent  of  about  a  quarter  of 
a  circle,  there    remaining   for   a 

9* 


Fig.  39. 


202 


REGION    OF   THE   TRUNK. 


few  moments.  2.  The  trunk  then  moves  on  its  axis  in 
the  opposite  direction  ;  or,  in  simpler  phrase,  it  un- 
ttoists,  bringing  the  anterior  part  of  the  body  forward  to 
the  commencing  position.  This  action  may  be  repeat- 
ed four  or  five  times  with  each  side. 

Effect. — Although  in  twisting  movements  the  limit 
of  the  power  of  motion  is  soon  reached,  on  account  of 
the  confined  condition  of  the  muscles,  yet  this  class  of 
movements  are  potent,  especially  in  their  efi'ect  on  the 
circulation,  since  nearly  all  the  muscles  of  the  part  are 
put  in  action — some  concentrically,  others  eccentric- 
ally. The  muscles  are  thus  nearly  all  rendered  very 
tense,  producing  much  pressure  upon  the  blood-vessels 
and  nerves,  followed  by  increased  flow  of  blood  into, 
and  nutrition  of,  the  parts  subjected  to  this  action. 
Twisting  also  tends  to  contract  the  diameter  of  the 
cavity  of  the  trunk,  and  hence  produces  slight  press- 
ure upon  the  contained  organs.  This  class  of  move- 
ments are  derivative. 


38— shelter  steide-sitting,  change-twisting. 


Pig.  40. 


Position. — ^The  hands  are  locked 
upon  the  top  of  the  head  ;  in  all 
other  respects  the  position  is  iden- 
tical with  that  in  the  last  four  ex- 
amples. 

Action. — ^The  trunk  turns  on  its 
axis  with  moderate  rapidity  as  far 
as  it  will  turn,  and  then  in  the  op- 
posite direction  for  the  same  dis- 
tance. This  action  may  properly  be 
repeated  fifteen  or  twenty  times  suc- 
cessively.    The  cut  shows  the  posi- 


REGION    OF   THE    TRUNK. 


203 


tioD,  which  is  not  varied,  except  by  the  twist  motion 
during  the  movement. 

Effect. — This  movement,  for  the  great  majority  of 
the  parts  affected,  is  nearly  passive^  only  a  few  mus- 
cles, comparatively,  being  employed  to  give  the  mo- 
tion, while  all  the  organs  contained  in  the  cavity  of 
the  body  are  agreeably  stimulated  by  the  agitation  im- 
parted to  them.  The  movement  is  tranquilizing  for 
the  nerves,  and  equalizing  in  its  effect  on  the  circula- 
tion, while  certain  muscles  in  different  portions  of  the 
body  are  performing  active  service. 

39 .— yaed-sitting,  swaying. 
Position.— The  ^^g- Al- 

arms are  extended 
horizontally  until 
they  are  both  in  the 
same  line  ;  trunk 
sitting,  legs  stride, 
and  feet  well  braced. 

Action. — The 
trunk  turns  on  its 
axis,  as  in  No.  38  ; 
but  on  account  of 
the  position  of  the 
arms,  much  more  deliberately.  It  iirst  turns  as  far  as 
it  can  to  the  right,  and  then  in  the  same  way  to  the 
left,  allowing  the  extended  arms  to  acquire  consider- 
able momentum,  and,  by  the  consequent  reaction,  in- 
creasing the  effect  of  the  movement  upon  the  loins. 
This  twisting  may  be  repeated  ten  or  fifteen  times 
each  way. 

Effect. — The  muscles  of  the  top  of  the  shoulders, 
and  nearly  all  those  of  the  arms,  and  those  of  the  sides, 


204 


REGION   OF   THE   TRUNK. 


are  strongly  affected.  The  centrifugal  effect  upon  the 
circulation  of  the  blood  in  the  arms  is  to  detain  and 
then  quicken  the  circulation,  and  warm  the  hands. 
The  movement  acts  derivatively  for  the  chest. 


40— STEETCH  BTKIDE-KNEELES'G,  TKUNK  BACKWARD-BENDING. 

Fig.  42.  Position.' — The  arms  are  stretched 

upward  parallel  with  each  other, 
and  with  the  head ;  the  trunk  erect, 
kneeling,  with  the  knees  placed  far 
apart  in  the  stride  position ;  the 
knees  must  be  sustained  by  a  cush- 
ion. 

Action. — 1.  Tlie  trunk  bends 
slowly  backward  as  far  as  its  flexi- 
bility will  allow,  so  as  to  assume  a 
reclining  posture,  where  it  remains 
for  a  few  moments.  2.  It  then  re- 
turns slowly  to  its  commencing  po- 
sition ;  the  knees  and  hips  remain- 
ing fixed  in  the  mean  time.  In  the  cut,  the  dotted 
outline  indicates  the  direction  and  extent  of  the  move- 
ment. 

Effect. — This  movement  puts  the  skin  and  fasciae 
and  muscles  of  the  anterior  portion  of  the  body  and  legs 
strongly  upon  the  stretch ;  it  is  felt  in  the  groin,  the 
walls  of  the  abdomen,  and  chest;  elevates  the  ribs, -dia- 
phragm, and  visceral  contents,  and  expands  the  chest. 
The  action  is  chiefly  produced  by  the  muscles  of  the 
back,  which  it  strengthens. 

Eemark. — This  and  many  other  back-bending  move- 
ments frequently  occasion  keen  sensations  in  the  back, 
especially  at  the  beginning  of  their  employment.  This 
is  not  because  the  muscles  of  that  region  are  strained 


REGION    OF    THE    TKUNK.  205 

unduly  by  the  movement ;  for,  the  weiglit  of  the  body 
assisting  the  movement  from  the  time  it  first  deviates 
from  the  perpendicular,  the  muscular  action  is  compara- 
tively slight.  The  sensation  is,  no  doubt,  produced  by 
the  pinching  of  the  vertebral  cartilages  caused  by  the 
unusual  position.  The  sensation  gradually  wears  away 
as  the  cartilages  become  more  elastic,  and  as  the  parts 
adapt  themselves  to  the  new  requirements  imposed 
upon  them.  If  movements  of  this  class  j)roduce  an  un- 
pleasant tenderness,  they  must  be  desisted  from  for  a 
short  time,  after  which  they  may  be  resumed. 

Yakiations  of  No.  40. — 1.  The  arms  may  be  in 
shelter  position  instead  of  stretch.  In  this  case  the 
action  is  not  so  forcible,  and  it  is,  therefore,  better 
adapted  to  those  who  are  quite  feeble. 

2.  The  arms  to  be  extended  exactly  as  in  ISTo.  39, 
but  may  grasp  a  couple  of  weights,  as  a  p>air  of  dumb- 
bells. The  effect  in  this  case  becomes  much  greater, 
since  the  added  weight  acts  through  the  leverage  of  the 
arms  and  body,  very  much  more  powerfully  upon  the 
whole  anterior  surface  of  the  body. 

3.  While  the  arms  are  in  either  of  the  above  posi- 
tions, the  legs  may  be  placed  in  walking  position,  that 
is,  with  one  knee  presented  forward  of  the  body,  and 
the  other  behind  it,  and  as  far  apart  as  convenient.  In 
this  case,  after  the  action  has  been  repeated  three  or 
four  times,  the  position  of  the  legs  may  be  reversed,  by 
placing  forward  the  leg  which  was  behind,  and  putting 
behind  that  which  was  forward.  The  action  is  now 
felt  much  more  powerfully  in  the  groin,  and  the  move- 
ment is  especially  useful  to  strengthen  the  muscles  and 
fasciae  about  the  hernial  region. 


206 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


41.-HALF-STEETCH,    HALF- WING   RECLINED   STRIDE  KNEELINQ, 
TRUNK-TWISTING. 

Position. — One  arm  is  extended  upward,  w^liile  the 
hand  of  the  other  is  placed  npon  the  hip ;  the  trunk 
erect,  in  the  kneeling  position,  with  the  legs  w-idely 
apart. 

Action. — The  side  of  the  extended  arm  moves  for- 
ward while  the  opjDosite  side  moves  backward,  twisting 
the  bod}'  upon  its  axis.  '  This  action  is  to  be  repeated 
four  or  five  times  with  each  side.  The  reader  is  refer- 
red to  No.  37  for  an  explanation  of  this  movement ;  it 
is  to  be  remembered  that  in  this  movement  the  posi- 
tion is  that  of  kneeling,  with  the  body  a  little  bent 
backward. 

Effect. — ^This  movement  is  felt  at  the  sides,  and  in 
the  arm  which  is  in  stretch  position  ;  also  across  the 
abdomen,  at  its  lower  portion,  pressing  somewhat  the 
contents  of  the  abdominal  cavity,  and  strengthening 
these  regions  as  well  as  acting  derivatively. 

42 —HALF-STRETCH,   HALF-WING,   WALK-KNEELING,   TRUNK- 
TWISTING. 

Position. — One  arm  is  stretched,  the 
hand  of  the  other  being  upon  the  hips ; 
the  trunk  erect ;  the  knee  on  the  same 
side  with  the  stretched  arm  is  placed  as 
far  back  as  is  possible ;  the  opposite 
knee  placed  as  far  forward. 

Action. — The  side  on  which  is  the 
stretched  arm  moves  forward,  while  the 
opposite  side  moves  backward,  twisting 
the  body  on  its  axis,  as  far  as  practica- 
ble. After  this  motion  has  been  repeat- 
ed four  or  five  times,  the  knees  change 
their  respective  positions,  the  back  one 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 


207 


being  placed  forward,  and  the  forward  one  back,  and 
the  motion  is  repeated  as  before.  The  cut  shows  the 
position  after  the  body  has  twisted. 

Effect. — This  movement  acts  strongly  upon  the  ab- 
dominal muscles  and  fasciae,  and  especially  those  of  the 
groin,  and  increases  the  power  and  resistance  of  those 
parts. 

43.— AKMS- ANGLE  RECLINED  KNEELING,  ARMS  STRETCHING. 

Position. — The  arms  are  in  an-  Fig.  44. 

gle  ])ositlon^  that  is,  the  elbow  is  cfh) 

bent  while  the  upper  arm  is  near 
the  side  parallel  with  the  body ; 
the  trunk  kneeling,  knees  wide 
apart,  but  leaning  back  from  the 
perpendicular. 

Action. — 1.  The  arms  are  slow- 
ly stretched  till  they  become  par- 
allel with  each  other,  and  in  a 
line  with  the  body,  where  they  re- 
main for  a  short  time.  2.  They 
are  then  allowed  slowly  to  return  to  the  commencing 
position.  This  may  be  repeated  six  or  eight  times.  In 
the  cut,  the  dotted  outline  shows  the  position  after  the 
first  part  of  the  movement,  that  is,  the  extreme  position. 
Care  should  be  taken  that  the  arms  be  not  stretched 
perpendicularly,  but  exactly  in  the  line  of  the  reclining 
trunk. 

Effect. — The  parts  afi'ected  by  this  movement  are 
the  arms,  the  tops  of  the  shoulders,  the  region  beneath 
the  shoulder  blades,  the  sides  of  the  chest,  the  dia- 
phragm, and  the  abdominal  muscles,  as  well  as  the 
visceral  organs,  which  are  raised  by  it  and  moderately 
compressed. 


208 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


Yariations  of  Iso.  43. — 1.  The  hands  may  grasp 
some  heavy  objects,  as  a  pair  of  dumb-bells,  which  in- 
creases the  effect  upon  all  of  the  parts  enumerated. 

2.  The  legs  may  be  in  walking  position.  In  this  case 
the  effect  upon  the  abdomen,  especially  upon  the  groin, 
is  materially  increased. 


44— KACK-EECLINED  STPwIDE-KNEELING,  APwMS  BACKWAED- 
STEIKING. 


Fig.  45. 


Position. — The  arms  are  in 
rack  position,  that  is,  extend- 
ed horizontally  forward ;  the 
trunk  slightly  reclining,  and 
kneeling ;  knees  apart  or 
stride. 

Action.  —  The  arms  are 
thrown  horizontally  back- 
ward as  far  as  the  anatomy 
of  the  parts  will  allow.  This 
action  is  repeated  eight  or 
ten  times. 
Effect. — There  are  but  few  muscles  brought  into 
active  play  in  this  movement,  and  these  are  situated 
back  of  the  shoulder.  By  this  movement  the  muscles 
of  the  breast  are  acted  upon,  the  ribs  elevated,  and  the 
blood  thrown  into  the  hands,  increasing  their  Avarmth. 
This  movement  may  be  practiced  slowly ;  if  more 
quickly,  an  increased  eff'ect  is  produced  upon  the  ante- 
rior muscles. 


45.-WING  steide-kneeling,  einging. 

Position. — The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  hips,  the 
trunk  is  perpendicular,  and  kneeling ;  legs  in  stride  po- 
sition. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk  bends  above  the  hips  to  one 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 


209 


side,  as  far  as  it  can.     2.  It  then  rc-  ^*^-  ^• 

tnrns  and  passes  beyond  tlie  perpen- 
dicular for  the  same  distance  on  the 
opposite  side ;  the  motion  being 
someAvhat  rapid,  so  that  the  mo- 
mentum acquired  will  be  felt  upon 
the  convex  side.  This  action  maj 
be  repeated  ten  or  twelve  times. 
The  cut  indicates  the  position  and 
the  direction  of  the  movement,  but 
not  its  extent,  which  will  vary  great- 
ly with  the  powers  of  the  patient  and  the  amount  of 
practice. 

Effect. — This  movement  acts  upon  the  muscles  of 
either  side,  and  also  upon  the  liver,  spleen,  and  other 
organs  situated  in  the  region  affected  by  the  motion,  as 
the  abdominal  walls  and  viscera. 

Variation. — 1.  The  arms  may  be  in  stretch  position. 
The  motion  then  is  much  more  slowly  performed,  and 
the  effect  much  greater,  at  the  same  time  more  gentle. 

2.  The  arms  may  be  in  stretch  position,  and  the 
hands  grasping  a  pair  of  weights.  This  variation  adds 
greatly  to  the  effect,  making  the  movement  a  gentle 
and  very  effective  one. 


46— YARD  STRIDE-KNEELING,  SWAYING. 

Position. — The  arms  are  extended  in  a  line,  palms  of 
the  hands  downward  ;  the  trunk  is  erect  and  kneeling  ; 
the  legs  apart,  or  in  stride  position. 

Action. — The  trunk  turns  on  its  axis  as  far  as  the 
muscles  will  allow,  from  right  to  left,  and  then  from 
left  to  right,  and  so  continues  to  repeat  the  action  of 
twisting,  without  bending  the  body,  the  arms  being 
maintained  in  the  same  straight  line.     This  may  be  re- 


210 


REGIOX    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


peated  eight  or  ten  times.  This  movement  affects  the 
coverings  of  the  abdomen,  and  the  muscles  of  the  back 
generally.  It  also  warms  the  hands,  and  is  derivative 
for  the  chest. 


h-::nc 


47— STEIDE-SITTING,  ARMS  SIDEWISE-EAISING. 

^^•^^-  Position.— The 

arms   hang    in  their 

natural   position   bj 

,     the  side,  trunk  erect, 

\  sitting,  legs  in  stride 

J  position. 

'  /  Action.  —  1 .  The 
/  arms  slowly  rise  side- 
wise,  in  the  same 
perpendicular  plane 
with  the  trunk,  the 
back  of  the  hands 
uppermost,  carefully 
avoiding  all  irregu- 
lar actions,  till  the  backs  of  the  hands  meet  perpen- 
dicularly above  the  head,  where  they  remain  for  a 
short  time.  2.  They  then  return  slowly  to  the  first 
position  by  the  side.  This  action  may  be  repeated  six 
or  eight  times.  In  the  cut,  the  dotted  outlines  show 
the  commencing  position,  also  the  horizontal  interme- 
diate position,  and  the  circle  described  by  the  points  of 
the  fingers  in  making  the  movement. 

Effect. — In  this  movement  the  muscles  of  the  top  of 
the  shoulder,  and  all  of  the  muscles  of  the  side  of  the 
chest,  are  brought  into  action,  the  former  concentrically, 
the  latter  eccentrically  ;  the  ribs  are  raised  and  everted, 
the  diameter  of  the  chest  increased ;  the  diaphragm  is 
also  affected. 


REGION    OF   THE   TRUNK. 


211 


48 -8TKETCH  HALF-WALK,  HALF-KNEELING,  TEUNK    BACKWARD 
BENDING. 

Position.— The  ^'^•''• 

arms  are  in  upward 
stretch  position,  the 
trunk  erect;  one  leg 
kneeling,  w^hile  the 
other  is  extended  for- 
ward, wdth  the  sole 
of  the  foot  upon  the 
floor. 

Action.  —  1.  The 
trunk  bends  slowly 
backward,  so  as  to 
carry  the  arms,  which 
must  be  kept  parallel 
with  the  liead,  and  in  the  axis  of  the  trunk,  as  far  back- 
ward as  possible.  2.  It  slowly  resumes  the  commencing 
position.  This  action  may  be  repeated  three  or  four 
times,  when  the  position  of  the  legs  should  be  reversed, 
and  the  action  again  repeated.  The  cut  shows  the 
commencing  position,  and  the  dotted  outliue  the  posi- 
tion at  the  end  of  the  first  part  of  the  movement. 

Effect. — The  lower  portion  of  the  abdomen,  the 
groin,  and  the  wdiole  anterior  surface  of  the  body  are 
affected  by  this  movement ;  the  parts  acted  on  are 
strengthened,  and  those  beneath  experience  a  deriva- 
tive influence  in  consequence  of  the  action. 


49— HALF-WING   HALF-CUEVE  (WEIGHT   HELD)  STEP-EECLINED- 
STANDING,    TEUNK  SIDEWISE  BENDING. 

Position.— One  hand  rests  upon  the  hips ;  the  foot 
of  the  same  side  is  elevated  upon  a  step  or  stair;  the 
other  hand  holds  a  weight,  the  forearm  resting  upon 


212 


REGION    OF   THE    TRUNK. 


the  head ;  the  weight  of  the  body, 
which  is  erect,  is  sustained  princi23allj 
by  the  leg  that  stands  erect  upon  tlie 
floor. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk  slowly  bends 
at  the  waist  in  the  direction  of  the  ele- 
vated foot,  being  assisted  by  the  position 
of  the  weight  in  the  hand.  2.  It  rises 
slowly  to  the  commencing  position. 
This  action  may  be  repeated  four  or  six 
times,  with  each  side  of  the  body.  The 
dotted  outline  in  the  cut  shows  the  di- 
rection of  the  motion. 

Effect. — This  movement  allows  the 
muscles  of  the  bent  side  to  remain  near- 
ly passive,  the  bending  being  mostly  produced  by  the 
weight ;  while  the  muscles  of  the  convex  side  of  the 
bended  body  are  felt  strongly  upon  the  stretch,  or  in 
eccentric  action.  The  movement  aflTects  the  walls  of 
the  body  upon  each  side,  also  the  contiguous  internal 


50.-HALF-WIXG,   HALF-6TEETCH,  STEP-STANDING,  TKUNK    SIDE- 
WISE-BENDIXG. 

Position. — In  this  movement  no  weight  is  held,  and 
the  arm  is  in  upvjard-stretch  position.  In  all  other  re- 
spects, the  position  is  precisely  like  that  in  IS^o.  49. 

Action. — ^The  trunk  bends  as  in  49,  but  it  is  brought 
into  the  curve  of  the  terminating  position  by  the  action 
of  the  muscles  of  the  side.  The  movement  is  repeated 
four  or  five  times  upon  each  side. 

Effect. — The  eti'ects  of  the  movement  difler  but  lit- 
tle from  those  of  49  ;  the  muscles  in  the  present  posi- 
tion, however,  acting  more  concentrically. 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


213 


51— HALF-STEETCH,  HALF-WING,  HALF-KICK  RECLINED  STANDING, 
TRUNK  SIDE  WISE  BENDING. 


Position. — One  arm  in  wing 
position ;  the  leg  of  the  same 
side  extended  forward  in  kick 
position,  and  maintained  in 
place  by  means  of  a  stool ;  the 
arm  of  the  opposite  side  in 
stretch  position  ;  the  trunk  re- 
clined,   and    resting   with   its 


Fig.  50. 


weight  upon  the  leg  on  the  side 
of  the  stretched  arm. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk  slow- 
ly bends  in  the  direction  oppo- 
site the  stretched  arm.  2.  It 
returns  to  the  first  position. 

The  commencing  position  is 
shown  in  the  cut. 

Effect. — This  movement  differs  from  JS^o.  50,  in 
causing  much  more  strain  upon  the  groin  and  iliac  re- 
gion of  the  stretched  side. 

Modification  of  51. — Both  arms  may  be  in  stretch 
position,  as  described  in  No.  54,  instead  of  only  one. 
The  twisting  will  then  be  performed  in  the  same  direc- 
tion as  before,  and  the  movement  in  every  respect  like 
the  one  here  described.  In  this  case  the  movement 
aftects  the  trunk  and  elevates  the  ribs  more  than  in 
the  first  described. 


52— HALF-STRETCH   RECLINED   KICK-STANDING,   TRUN^ 
TWISTING. 

Position. — The  230sition  is  exactly  like  that  in  I^o. 
51,  and  is  seen  in  the  cut. 

Action.  —  1.  The   trunk   twists   upon    its  axis,  the 


214  REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 

gtretched  side  moving  forward,  and  the  opposite  side 
backward.  2.  It  returns  to  the  commencing  position. 
This  action  is  repeated  four  or  five  times  with  each 
side. 

Effect. — This  movement  affects  nearly  all  the  mus- 
cles of  the  trunk. 

53.— SHELTEE  LONG-SITTING,  TRUNK  rOEWARD  BENDING. 

Position. — The  hands 
are  placed  upon  the 
head  in  shelter  position ; 
the  trunk  in  sitting  pos- 
ture ;  the  legs  extended 
horizontally,  and  sup- 
ported by  a  cushion. 
3    Action. — 1.  The  trunk 


bends  slowly  forward  as  far  as  possible.  2.  It  returns 
slowly  to  the  primary  position.  This  action  may  be 
repeated  five  or  six  times.  The  cut  shows  the  first  po- 
sition, and  also,  by  the  dotted  outline,  the  direction  of 
the  movement. 

Effect. — This  movement  elevates  the  ribs,  causes 
the  abdominal  muscles  powerfully  to  contract,  elevates 
the  abdominal  contents,  and  affects  eccentrically  the 
muscles  of  the  back  and  seat. 

54.-AEMS  ANGLE,  HALF  KICK  (FOOT    SUPPOETED)  EECLINED- 
STANDING,  AEMS  STEETCHING. 

Position. — The  arms  are  bent  at  the  elbows,  while 
the  upper  arm  is  by  the  side  of  the  body  ;  the  trunk 
reclines  ;  one  leg  placed  two  feet  forward,  in  liick  po- 
sition, with  the  foot  supported  by  a  stool ;  the  weight 
of  the  body  rests  mainly  upon  the  other  leg. 

Action. — ^The   arms  slowly  rise,  stretching  the  el- 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


215 


bow,  and  keeping  the 
extending  arms  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  transverse 
plane  of  the  body  till  they 
become  straight  and  par- 
allel with  each  other,  with 
the  head  somewhat  thrown 
back  ;  this  position  is  re- 
tained for  a  few  moments. 
2.  The  arms  then  slowly 
resume  the  first  position. 
This  action  may  be  re- 
peated three  or  four  times, 
when  the  position  of  the 
legs  should  be  reversed, 

and  the  action  again  repeated.  The  dotted  outlines  of 
the  arms  in  the  cut  show  their  commencing  position, 
and  the  stretched  arms,  the  limit  of  the  upward  mo- 
tion. 

Effect. — In  this  movement  the  whole  of  the  ante- 
rior surface  of  the  body  and  the  tops  of  the  shoulders 
are  strongly  acted  upon ;  also  the  parts  beneath  the 
shoulder-blades  and  the  muscles  connected  w^th  the 
ribs  generally.  It  develops  the  muscles  of  these  re- 
gions, is  derivative  for  the  chest,  and  is  valuable  as  a 
means  of  assisting  in  its  expansion. 

Yarieties. — 1.  A  pair  of  dumb-bells  may  be  held  by 
the  hands,  and  the  movement  practiced  in  all  other  re- 
spects as  before.  This  modification  of  the  movement 
greatly  increases  its  eflect. 

2.  The  movement  may  commence  in  the  stretch  po- 
sition, instead  of  the  angle.  The  efi'ect  in  this  case 
will  be  the  same  in  all  essential  particulars. 


216 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


55— YAED  EECLIXED  HALF-KICK  STANDING,  SWAYING. 

Position. — ^The  arms  are  in  yard  position  ;  in  every 
other  particular  the  position  is  like  that  of  No.  54. 

Action. — The  trunk  twists  in  the  lumbar  region  as 
far  around  as  it  can,  Avhile  the  arms  remain  in  the  same 
relative  position,  but  sway  in  a  circle  of  which  the 
hands  describe  the  arc,  and  the  j^lane  of  which  is 
necessarily  inclined  to  the  horizontal  in  consequence 
of  the  reclined  position  of  the  trunk.  The  motion 
is  alternate,  and  may  be  repeated  fifteen  or  twenty 
times,  in  the  mean  time  changing  the  position  of 
the  legs. 

i  FFECT. — This  movement  acts  strongly  upon  the  ab- 
dominal walls,  especially  at  the  sides,  and  also  uj^on  the 
liver,  spleen,  and  other  visceral  organs. 


56— HALF-STEETCH,  HALF-WIXG,  WALK,   TEUNK    SIDEWISE   BENT, 
STANDING,  TEUNK  TWISTING. 
Fig.  53.  -73  r\  •        ' 

r^osiTiON. — One  arm  is  m 
stretch,  the  other  in  wing,  posi- 
tion; the  legs  in  walk  position, 
with  a  long  distance  between  the 
feet ;  the  leg  of  the  wing  side 
being  forward,  and  the  trunk 
bent  toward  the  same  side.  Tlie 
commencing  position  here  de- 
scribed is  identical  with  the  ter- 
minating position  of  JS'o.  52. 

Action. — 1.  Tlie  trunk  slowdy 
twists  upon  its  axis,  the  side  on 
which  is  the  stretched  arm,  as  in 
previous  instances,  moving  forward,  and  the  opposite 
backward.  2.  It  returns  to  the  primary  position.  The 
cut  shows  the  position  after  the  twisting. 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 


217 


This  action  may  be  repeated  four  or  five  times  with 
each  side. 

Effect. — This  movement  puts  into  powerful  eccen- 
tric action  the  muscles  of  the  sides  ;  it  is  derivative  in 
cases  of  central  congestion,  and  strengthens  the  chest 
and  abdomen. 


*  57— YAKD  walk-standing,  TRUNK  BACKWARD  BENDING. 

Position. — The   arms   ere  Fig.  54. 

extended  horizontally  on  ei- 
ther side,  the  trunk  erect; 
one  foot  is  placed  before,  and 
the  other  behind,  the  center 
of  the  body,  the  two  being 
two  and  a  half  feet  apart. 

Action.  —  1.  The  trunk 
bends  backward  as  far  as  it 
can,  where  it  remains  a  mo- 
ment. 2.  It  then  returns  to 
the  commencing  position. 
This  action  may  be  repeated 
three  or  four  times,  and  then 
the  legs  should  exchange  places,  and  the  action  be  re- 
peated again. 

Effect. — This  movement  expands  the  chest,  warms 
the  hands,  and  strengthens  the  back. 

58— UPWARD-SIDEWISE   STRETCH  DOORWAY-STANDING,  WALKING. 

Position. — This  is  taken  in  a  doorway,  the  arms 
being  extended  upward  and  outward,  and  the  palms 
of  the  hands  pressed  against  the  casement ;  the  trunk 
erect,  the  feet  just  behind  the  middle  portion  of  the 
threshold. 

Action. — 1.  One  leg  is  raised  as  if  to  walk,  but  some- 
10 


218 


REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 


Fig.  65. 


what  higher 


than  is  common  in  that 
action.  2.  At  the  same  instant  the 
body  is  projected  forward ;  but  the 
arms  being  arrested  by  the  resisting 
object  against  which  the  hands  are 
placed,  the  center  of  the  trunk  is  very 
much  curved  forward.  3.  The  raised 
leg  returns  to  its  place  beside  the  other 
on  the  floor,  and  at  the  same  time  the 
trunk  straightens,  resuming  the  com- 
mencing position.  The  other  leg  is  next 
raised  and  put  forward  in  the  attempt 
to  walk,  but  its  progress  is  arrested, 
and  the  trunk  bends  forward ;  the 
whole  body  afterward  returning  to  the 
commencing  position,  as  before.  This 
action  may  be  repeated  with  each  leg 
ten  or  twelve  times.  The  cut  repre- 
sents the  movement  at  the  point  when  the  raised  leg 
and  the  projecting  trunk  are  falling  back  into  the  com- 
mencing position. 

Effect. — This  movement  acts  powerfully  in  expand- 
ing the  chest,  and  tends  to  develop  all  the  muscles  of 
the  front  portion  of  the  body.  It  is  easily  taken  (after 
being  once  learned),  and  requires  but  little  exertion 
compared  with  the  amount  of  effect  produced.  In  this 
respect  it  very  much  resembles  a  true  duplicated  move- 
ment. 

59— SHELTER,   SIDEWISE-BENT  STRIDE-STANDING,   TRUNK    ROTA- 
TION. 

Position. — Tlie  hands  are  locked  upon  the  top  of  the 
head,  the  trunk  is  bent  far  to  one  side,  the  legs  in  stride 
and  the  body  in  standing  position. 

Action. — ^The  trunk  is  made  to  rotate,  carrying  the 


REGION    OF   THE    TRUNK. 


219 


head  around  a  circle  of  consider-  ^'g-  ^^' 

able  extent.  The  axis  of  motion 
is  jnst  above  the  hips.  This  ro- 
tary motion  may  be  performed 
three  or  four  times  each  way, 
when  the  trunk  should  bend  to 
the  opposite  side  to  the  same  ex- 
tent, and  repeat  the  motion  as 
many  times  more.  In  the  cut,  the 
dotted  lines  indicate  the  perpen- 
dicular, also  the  circle  in  which 
the  head  revolves. 

Effect.  —  This     movement 
strengthens  the  parts  about  the  loins,  and  expands  the 
chest. 

Modification. — This  movement  may  be  taken  in  the 
sittiiig  position.  In  this  case,  the  body  being  more 
firmly  supported,  the  extent  of  the  movement,  that  is, 
the  diameter  of  the  circle  described  by  the  head,  may 
be  greater  than  while  standing,  and  this  will,  of  course, 
cause  greater  action  of  the  sides.  This  movement 
afiects  the  liver  and  spleen. 


60 -HEAD-AND-HEELS  LYING,  HOLDING. 

Position.— The  ^^s-^^- 

trunk  lies  in  a  hori- 
zontal position,  with 
the  hands  clasped 
upon  the  head,  the 
legs  parallel,  the 
head  and  the  heels  only  resting  on  supports,  as  two 
chairs,  while  the  remaining  portion  of  the  body  is  quite 
free. 


220  REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 

Action. — The  body  remains  in  this  position  for  a 
longer  or  shorter  time,  according  to  the  strength. 

Effect. — The  muscles  of  the  back  are  put  into  power- 
ful action  in  this  movement.  Hence  it  is  derivative  in 
respect  to  the  spinal  cord,  while  it  increases  the  de- 
velopment and  power  of  the  muscles  of  the  back. 

Modification. — The  supports  may  be  placed  nearer 
each  other,  as  at  the  shoulders  and  lower  legs.  The 
movement  thereby  becomes  less  powerful,  and  the 
holding  may  continue  longer. 

6i.-ELB0WS-AND-T0ES  LYING,  HOLDING. 

Fig.  53. 


Position. — The  arms  are  in  rack  elboiD-hent  position, 
the  trunk  horizontal,  face  downward ;  the  elbows  and 
toes  only  resting  on  a  mattress. 

Action. — The  trunk  is  held  in  this  position  for  a  few 
moments,  more  or  less,  according  to  the  strength  of  the 
experimenter. 

Effect. — This  movement  produces  a  muscular  ten- 
sion and  contraction  of  the  whole  forward  part  of  the 
body,  the  eifect  of  which  is  especially  felt  at  the  lower 
portion  of  the  abdomen.  It  presses  the  abdominal 
contents  toward  the  diaphragm,  and  often  instantly 
relieves  prolajysus  of  any  of  the  pelvic  organs,  as 
that  of  the  womb,  vagina,  or  rectum,  restoring  the 
parts  to  their  natural  condition   and   relation.      This 


EEGION  OF  THE  TRUNK.  221 

movement  is  invaluable  in  tliis  class  of  cases.  Indeed, 
all  other  medical  applications  designed  to  meet  the 
ends  here  indicated,  bear  no  comparison  in  value  with 
this  simple  movement.  Bj  repetition  the  weak  parts 
are  strengthened,  and  a  radical  cure  is  effected. 

M0DIFICA.T10N. — While  in  the  position  above  de- 
scribed, the  hips  may  rise  slowly  upward,  and  after  a 
moment,  slowly  fall  to  the  level  of  the  elbows  and  toes. 
This  movement  may  be  repeated  six  or  eight  times. 
This  mode  of  taking  the  movement  is  often  more 
agreeable,  as  well  as  somewhat  more  positive,  and  pro- 
duces similar  effects. 

62.-elb0w-and-leg  sidewise-lying,  hips  raising-. 

Position.—  ^'s-^o. 

One  arm  lies 
upon  the  trunk, 
while  the  elbow 
of  the  other  rests 
upon  a  mattress. 
The  trunk  is  ex- 
tended horizontally,  the  lower  leg  lying  with  its  side 
upon  the  mattress,  the  other  resting  upon  it. 

Action. — 1.  The  hips  are  raised  slowly  upward,  and 
remain  for  a  few  moments  lifted.  2.  They  return  to 
their  first  position.  This  action  may  be  repeated  four 
or  five  times  with  each  side.  The  dotted  outline  in  the 
cut  shows  the  point  to  which  the  hips  rise. 

Effect. — This  movement  is  strongly  felt  at  the  side 
of  th-e  hi])  which  is  under  at  the  time,  and  acts  through- 
out the  whole  extent  of  the  side  of  the  'body.  It  also 
affects  the  back. 


222  REGION    OF    THE    TRUNK. 

63- SHELTER  BACK-LYING,  HEAD  AND  LEGS  RAISING. 

F^g-fio-  Position.  — The 

trunk  lies  horizon- 
tally upon  the  back, 
supported  by  a  mat- 
tress ;     the     hands 

'/// W'TTF     "^\\T  clasped   upon    the 

U^yUJ^    \^  head;    legs   paral- 

lel. 
Action. — 1.  Both  the  feet  and  head  are  raised  from  the 
horizontal  line  at  the  same  time,  so  as  to  cause  the 
body  to  assume  a  curved  shape,  and  remain  for  a  short 
period.  2.  They  return  to  the  commencing  position. 
This  action  may  be  repeated  five  or  six  times. 

Effect. — Tliis  movement  is  a  very  powerful  one  for 
the  abdominal  muscles,  affecting  the  visceral  organs 
derivatively.  It  also  increases  the  force  of  the  general 
circulation,  and  urges  the  blood  into  the  capillaries  of 
the  system  at  large. 

Modification. — Only  the  back  may  be  supported, 
instead  of  the  whole  length  of  the  body.  The  effect  is 
similar.  The  cut  above  represents  the  movement  as 
being  taken  in  this  way  ;  the  dotted  outline  indicating 
the  extent  of  the  movement. 

64.-BACK  LYING,  HOLDING. 

Position. — The  arms  remain  in  contact  with  the  body 
at  the  sides  ;  the  trunk  rests  with  the  back  supported 
by  a  single  chair ;  while  both  the  legs  and  the  head 
and  shoulders  are  suffered  to  obey  the  law  of  gravita- 
tion, and  fall  below  the  horizontal  position. 

Action. — ^The  body  is  allowed  to  remain  for  a  short 
period  in  this  position. 

Effect. — ^This  is  chiefly  felt  in  the  forward  part  of 


REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK.  223 

the  body,  which  in  this  position  is  stretched^  or  receives 
eccentric  action.  The  curved  position  causes  consid- 
erable pressure  upon  the  abdominal  contents. 

65.-WING-STEIDE  LEG-ANGLE  STANDING,  TEUNK  VIBEATION. 

Position. — The  hands  are  placed  upon  the  hips  ;  the 
knees  and  thighs  are  bent  to  the  greatest  possible  ex- 
tent ;  the  feet  rest  on  the  floor  about  two  feet  apart ; 
the  trunk  maintained  in  a  position  as  nearly  erect  as 
the  position  of  the  legs  will  allow. 

Action. — The  body  is  slightly  raised  by  the  exertion 
of  all  the  muscles  of  the  legs,  on  w^hich  its  weight  rests, 
and  is  directly  permitted  to  return  with  the  force  of  its 
weight  to  the  same  position.  It  should  rise  only  a  few 
inches,  and  repeat  the  action  a  dozen  times  or  more  as 
fast  as  possible. 

Effect. — This  is  felt  in  the  perineum,  and  is  propa- 
gated to  the  rectum,  exciting  its  contractility  to  a 
noticeable,  and  sometimes  to  a  remarkable  degree.  If 
the  posture  is  maintained  with  difficulty,  the  back  may 
be  supported  by  a  smooth  wall.  This  movement  en- 
courages an  evacuation  of  the  bowels  in  cases  of  con- 
stipation. 

66— OPEEATIONS  UPON  THE  DIGESTIVE  OEGANS.* 

A  great  variety  of  motions  may  be  given  to  one's 
own  digestive  organs  suited  to  different  constitutions, 
conditions  of  disease,  develoj^ment  of  the  region, 
strength  of  the  person,  etc.  A  few  forms  are  selected 
for  the  reader's  attention,  which,  if  not  entirely  appli- 

*  In  the  inferior  animals,  the  position  of  whose  bodies  is  such  that  the  trunk  is 
horizontal,  the  digestive  organs  are  subjected  to  considerable  molion  at  every  step 
taken ;  and  this  motion  is  greatly  augmented  with  the  increase  of  the  pace.  The 
upriglit  posture  of  man  in  a  degree  precludes  this  motion  that  is  inevitable  for  the 
brute.  This  fact,  however,  renders  it  necessary  that  he  should  employ  his  reason 
and  intelligence  in  order  to  secure  a  relief  he  is  so  liable  to  need. 


224  REGION  OF  THE  TRUNK. 

cable  for  a  given  case,  may  at  least  prove  suggestive  of 
some  other  that  may  act  more  to  the  purpose. 

Position. — Lying  u23on  a  couch,  with  the  shoulders 
raised  and  the  legs  in  an  easy  position. 

Varieties  of  Achon. — 1.  Kneading. — The  two  fists, 
strongly  clenched,  may  be  pressed  upon  the  abdomen 
so  firmly  as  to  cause  the  subjacent  parts  to  yield  be- 
fore the  pressure.  This  action  is  to  be  repeated  for  sev- 
eral minutes  over  the  whole  region  of  the  abdomen. 
The  movement  excites  the  muscular  contractility  of 
the  tube,  and  promotes  fecal  discharges. 

2.  Shaking. — The  liands  are  applied  to  each  side  of 
the  abdomen,  and  alternate  pressure  given  to  it,  pro- 
ducing a  somewhat  rapid  oscillating  movement  of  all 
the  abdominal  contents  included  between  the  two 
hands.  This  movement  promotes  venous  absorption, 
and  removes  congestion. 

3.  Stroking. — Each  hand  is  applied  to  the  region  of 
the  groin,  the  tips  of  the  fingers  nearly  meeting ;  then 
each  hand  is  to  be  drawn  slowly,  wdth  much  pressure, 
upward  and  outward.  The  movement  has  an  efl'ect 
similar  to  that  of  the  first. 

4.  Circular  Stroking. — ^The  pressure  of  the  hands  is 
made  to  follow  the  course  of  the  colon,  beginning  low 
upon  the  right  side  of  the  abdomen,  passing  around  be- 
neath the  stomach,  and  terminating  on  the  side  oppo- 
site.    This  movement  also  promotes  fecal  discharges. 

5.  Point  Pressure. — This  may  be  performed  under 
the  short  ribs  ;  the  ends  of  the  fingers  are  applied  from 
below,  and  strong  pressure  made  with  a  tremulous  mo- 
tion. The  movement  excites  muscular  and  nervous 
action  in  the  organs  reached,  and  in  certain  cases  re- 
lieves pain. 

6.  Clapping. — The   extended   hands  are   made   to 


REGION    OF   THE   TRirNK.  225 

strike  any  portion  of  tlie  frontal  region  of  tlie  body. 
The  blows  should  be  given  with  each  hand  alternately, 
and  at  such  a  rate  of  rapidity  and  force  as  to  produce 
no  unpleasant  sensations.  If  there  be  a  point  where 
pain  is  felt,  the  motion,  at  each  successive  application, 
should  for  a  period  be  given  to  surrounding  parts,  ap- 
proaching the  tender  point  gradually  until  the  j)ain 
disappears. 

The  doubled  fist  may  be  used  instead  of  the  flat 
hand,  when  it  can  be  borne.  This  movement  promotes 
absorption,  and  removes  congestion. 

Yakiety  of  Positiox. — All  the  above  movements 
may  be  applied  in  the  standing  position,  with  the 
trunk  a  little  bent  forward,  or  stooping. 

Effects. — The  above  motions  are  but  imperfect  imi- 
tations of  a  few  of  the  duplicated  movements  that  may 
be  applied  to  the  part ;  their  efifects,  however,  are  often 
highly  salutary. 

It  is  not  necessary  in  practice  to  procure  each  of 
these  eifectsin  a  distinct  form,  because  in  every  patho- 
logical state  there  is  a  general  similarity  of  condition 
to  that  of  other  such  states ;  and  it  is  pathological 
states,  more  especially,  that  these  movements  meet. 
Indeed,  the  eflects  above  described  merge  into  each 
other  as  do  the  applications  themselves.  With  con- 
gestion of  the  mucous  membrane,  there  may  be  dry- 
ness and  costiveness  ;  or  there  may  be  an  attempt  at 
relief  by  serous  effusion  or  diarrhea  ;  but  either  of 
these  is  relieved  by  overcoming  the  primary  cause. 
In  either  case  the  surcharged  capillaries  need  to  have 
their  contents  impelled  along  their  course.  In  either 
case,  too,  the  subjacent  muscle  needs  more  nutrition 
and  power  ;  in  both  the  circulation  needs  to  be  equal- 
ized, and  nutritive  absorption  promoted.     These  results, 

10* 


226  REGION    OF    THE    TEUNK. 

the  motions  above  described,  and  others  analogous, 
tend  in  an  eminent  degree  to  secure. 

67— AGITATION  or   THE  ABDOMEN  AND  DIAPHRAGM. 

Position. — Wing  stride  sitting. 

Action. — ^This  movement  consists  in  contracting  the 
abdominal  coverings  and  diaphragm  by  strong  efforts 
exerted  in  rapid  succession,  thus  producing  an  oscil- 
latory motion  of  the  entire  abdominal  contents.  This 
may  be  continued  for  several  minutes. 

Effect. — This  movement  promotes  the  contractile 
power  of  all  the  muscular  tissues  participating  in  it, 
and  the  functional  action  of  all  the  organs  affected 
by  it. 


IlEGION    OF   THE   ARMS.  227 


EEGION    OF    THE    ARMS. 

Kemaeks  on  this  Region. — The  region  of  the  arms 
is  intimately  connected  with  that  of  the  chest.  This 
connection  is  not  only  suggested  bj  its  contiguity  to 
the  chest,  but  indicated  by  the  anatomical  conforma- 
tion and  relations  of  the  parts.  The  arms  are  con- 
nected with  the  chest  by  large  and  strong  muscles 
spreading  themselves  over  a  good  portion  of  its  surface. 
The  blood-vessels  and  nerves  of  the  chest  also  extend 
along  the  arms.  The  gymnast  who  uses  his  arms  vig- 
orously and  habitually,  never  fails  to  secure  an  ample 
development  of  the  chest.  We  see  this  fact  further 
illustrated  in  the  use  we  make  of  the  arms  in  certain 
duplicated  moveraents  for  the  purpose  of  overcoming 
various  deformities  and  even  grave  diseases  of  the  tho- 
racic region. 

Several  movements  have  already  been  described  in 
which  very  potent  effects  are  incidentally  experienced 
in  the  arms  and  hands.  Indeed,  movements  of  the 
chest  and  arms  are  so  connected  that  no  absolute  and 
precise  distinction  can  be  drawn  between  those  of  the 
two  regions,  the  one  being  necessarily  affected  by  the 
operations  designed  to  influence  the  other.  Power 
may  be  exerted  by  the  arms  in  every  direction,  in  each 
of  which  there  will  result  a  distinct  effect  appertaining 
to  both  the  arms  and  the  chest. 

But  it  is  often  highly  proper  to  employ  such  move- 


228  REGION    OF    THE    ARMS. 

ments  as  cliieily  affect  the  arms.  The  cases  in  which 
one  arm  is  much  stronger  than  the  other  are  ahnost 
universal,  indicating  how  general  is  the  reprehensible 
habit  of  making  partial  use  of  these  important  mem- 
bers. So,  too,  an  arm  becomes  useless  from  nervous 
shocks,  especially  in  children,  and  its  growth  partly 
ceases.  It  then  continues  powerless,  because  the  parent 
or  phvsician  does  not  employ  the  means  in  his  hands  to 
direct  the  nutritive  actions  into  the  channels  in  which 
they  are  now  so  especially  needed.  These  results  are 
only  more  conspicuous  in  the  arms,  the  princi]3le  being 
equally  true  in  its  application  throughout  the  body. 

In  all  cases  of  great  feebleness,  the  treatment  must 
at  first  be  of  a  kind  that  husbands*  the  strength,  while 
it  is  necessary,  at  the  same  time,  to  direct  the  energies 
and  the  nutrition  of  the  system  outwardly.  The  blood 
of  central  congestion  needs  to  be  removed  to  external 
members  deficient  in  it.  The  use  of  arm  movements, 
forcible  in  proportion  to  the  general  strength,  is  the 
proper  mode  of  commencing  the  treatment  of  these 
cases.  By  this  means  the  pressure  in  the  large  cen- 
tral vessels  is  relieved,  and  thereby  a  most  important 
advantage  is  gained  in  the  treatment  of  the  disease. 
The  novice  Avill  pay  a  costly  forfeit  if  he  neglects  this 
essential  portion  of  the  treatment,  even  in  cases  proper 
for  its  application,  especially  as  diseases  situated  in  the 
superior  cavity  of  the  trunk  are  the  most  difficult  and 
dangerous  of  all  under  any  kind  of  treatment.  By 
using  these  precautions,  however,  the  treatment  be- 
comes quickly  and  certainly  beneficial. 

The  reader  will  notice  that  in  the  examples  given  of 
movements  of  the  lower  extremities,  advantage  is  taken 
of  the  weight  of  the  body  or  of  some  portion  of  it,  which 
weight  is  made  to  act  upon  the  regions  to  which  the 


REGION    OF   THE   AKM8.  220 

movement  is  principally  directed.  In  this  way  effects 
are-  produced  that  somewhat  resemble  those  of  the  da- 
plicated  movements.  So,  also,  as  we  approach  the  up- 
per  portion  of  tlie  body,  advantage  derived  from  this 
source  may  be  obtained  by  taking  such  positions  as 
throw  a  portion  of  the  weight  of  the  body  upon  the 
arms. 

68.-STEETCH  BACKWAED-LYING,   WEIGHT-HOLDING. 

Position. — The  arms  are  stretched^  the  trunk  extend- 
ed upon  the  back,  with  the  crown  of  the  head  pro- 
Fig.  61. 


jecting  a  little  beyond  the  edge  of  the  couch ;  weights 
are  held  in  the  hands. 

Action. — The  weights  are  held  for  a  length  of  time 
proportioned  to  the  strength,  the  action  consisting  in  a 
holding.      The  cut  shows  the  position. 

Effect. — ^The  weights  not  only  task  the  muscles  of 
the  under  sides  of  the  arms,  but  the  arms  serve  as  lev- 
ers, by  the  action  of  which  the  ribs  are  raised  and  the 
chest  enlarged.  There  is  little  voluntary  effort  in  this 
movement,  but  much  valuable  effect  is  produced.  It 
is  particularly  advantageous  for  strong  persons,  but 
useful  also  for  the  weak,  if  not  carried  too  far. 

Yaeiety  I.  —  1.  The  arms  may  be  slowly  raised, 
maintaining  their  parallel  relation  to  each  other  until 


230 


REGION   OF   THE   ARMS. 


the  J  reach  the  perpendicular,  when,  2,  they  are  allowed 
gradually  to  fall  back  again.  This  may  be  repeated 
six  or  eight  times.  This  mode  of  performing  the  move- 
ment is  somewhat  easier  than  the  first,  and  is  attended 
with  similar  effects. 

II.  The  arms  may  describe  an  arc  of  a  horizontal 
circle  on  each  side,  repeating  the  motion  three  or  four 
times.  This  mode  of  employing  the  movement  calls 
other  muscles  into  play,  which  it  is  sometimes  desir- 
able to  develoD. 


RACK   GRASP,  FORWARD  FALL-STANDING,  ARMS    ANGLING. 

Position. — ^The  arms  are 
extended  forward,  grasp- 
ing with  the  hands  some 
convenient  object,  as  the 
edge  of  a  mantel  or  top  of 
a  bedstead ;  the  body  is  in 
forward-fall-standing  posi- 
tion, forming  an  angle  of 
about  fortv-five  de2:rees. 

Action. — 1.  The  elbows 
slowly  bend  outward, 
while  the  body  falls  for- 
ward, till  the  head  is 
brought  into  the  immediate  vicinity  of  the  object  of 
support.  2.  The  elbows  now  slowly  stretchy  bringing 
the  trunk  again  into  the  commencing  position.  This 
action  may  be  repeated  four  or  five  times.  The  dotted 
outline  in  the  cut  indicates  the  extent  of  the  move- 
ment, * 

Effect. — In  this  movement  not  only  the  arms  are 
affected,  but  the  chest  is  expanded,  and  the  anterior 
muscles  of  the  abdomen  are  acted  upon. 


REGION    OF    THE    ARMS. 


231 


Yakiety. — Some  means  of  support,  about  half  as 
high  as  that  represented  in  the  above  cut,  may  be  em- 
ployed. 

In  this  case  the  strain  is  greater  upon  the  arms  and 
hands,  and  the  influence  upon  the  anterior  muscles 
of  the  abdomen  is  increased  so  as  to  elevate  the  ribs 
and  visceral  organs. 

70.-STRETCH'GRASP  STANDING,  HIP  EOTATION. 

Position. — The  arms  are  stretch-  ^'^^-  ^^• 

ed^  and  a  transverse  pole,  eight  or 
ten  inches  below  the  point  of  ut- 
most reach,  is  grasped  by  them  di- 
rectly over  the  feet — these,  as  well 
as  the  hands,  being  placed  close  to- 
gether. 

Action. — The  hips  bend  to  one 
side,  and  then  revolve  in  a  circle  of 
which  the  diameter  is  as  extensive 
as  the  position  of  the  body  will  al- 
low. The  revolutions  are  performed 
eight  or  ten  times  in  each  direction. 
The  cut  shows  the  position,  and  the 
dotted  outline  the  circle,  in  which 
the  hips  revolve. 

Effect. — Tlie  hands  and  arms  sustain  nearly  the 
whole  weight  of  the  body,  and  the  motion  aflTords 
action  alternately  to  nearly  all  the  muscles  of  the 
arms.  The  same  effect  is  also  experienced  in  nearly 
equal  degree  by  tlie  shoulders  and  chest,  the  ribs  being 
elevated.  The  size  of  the  chest  and  the  action  of  the 
respiratory  muscles  are  increased.  The  strong  tension 
of  the  arms  also  produces  a  derivative  effect  upon  the 
chest,  and  the  hands  are  warmed.     There  is  but  little 


232 


REGION    OF   THE   ARMS. 


exertion  of  the  will  expended  in  tins  movement,  and 
consequently  there  is  but  little  fatigue. 

71.— HALF-STKETCH  GEA8P  STANDING,  AEM  TWISTING. 

Fig.  64.  Position. — One  arm  is  stretched  up- 

ward, and  the  hand  grasps  a  transverse 
pole  placed  at  about  the  height  it  can 
conveniently  reach,  while  the  body  is 
standing  erect. 

Action. — 1.  The  trunk  turns  quite 
round,  without  moving  from  its  stand- 
ing-point, which,  as  the  grasp  of  the 
hand  is  maintained,  causes  the  arm  to 
be  twisted.  2.  It  then  turns  in  the  op- 
posite direction,  not  stopj^ing  till  the 
arm  is  untwisted  and  twisted  again  in  the 
opposite  direction.  This  action  may  be 
repeated  four  or  five  times  with  each  arm. 
Effect. — This  movement  causes  all 
the  muscles  of  the  arm  to  act  strongly 
and  eccentrically,  it  affects  all  the  blood-vessels,  small 
and  large,  is  strongly  derivative,  and  warms  the  hands. 

72.-YAED  STPwIDE-SITTING, 
AEMS   TWISTING. 

Position. — The 
arms  are  extended  at 
either  side  in  the  same 
straight  line,  body  in 
a  sitting  position. 

Action. — The  arms 
are  twisted  upon  tlioir 
own  lono;itudinal  axi^■, 
first  forward,  then 
backward,     alternate- 


REGION    OF   THE    ARMS. 


233 


Ij ;  the  same  position  being  maintained.  Tliey  may 
be  twisted  eigbt  or  ten  times  each  way.  The  position 
is  shown  in  the  cnt. 

Effect. — This  movement  engages  all  the  muscles 
of  the  arms  in  both  concentric  and  eccentric  action. 
It  is  highly  stimulant  to  the  circulation,  w^arms  the 
hands,  and  is  derivative  for  the  chest. 


/ 


73.— STANDING,  ARMS  ROTATING. 

Position.  — The    arms  ^'^■^^■ 

are  stretched  in  the  up- 
right standing  posture.  y' 

Action. — The  arms  are 
made  to  describe  circles, 
perpendicular  and  paral-  c'H ------_..... 

lei   with    the   body,   the    I     "''--- 
diameters  of  which   are    \ 
twice  the  length  of  the      \ 
arm.     After  revolving  in 
one    direction   ten   or  a 
dozen   times,   the    direc- 
tion of  the  motion  is  re- 
versed.    The  cut   shows 
the  position,  and  the  dot- 
ted circle  the  course  tra- 
veled by  the  hand. 

Effect.  —  This  move- 
ment causes  the  blood  to  be  retained  in  the  arms  and 
hands,  because  the  centrifugal  force  attained  by  the 
rotation  counteracts  the  return  of  venous  circulation ; 
while,  at  the  same  time,  the  arterial  flow  is  assisted. 
The  consequence  is,  that  the  hands  become  not  only 
warmed,  but  absolutely  swollen  with  blood,  and  the 
tendency  to  cold  hands  is  overcome.     The  movement 


231  REGION    OF    THE    AEMS. 

also  relieves  congestion  of  the  chest.  Besides  these 
effects,  all  the  muscles  and  ligaments  about  the  shoulder 
joint,  including  those  that  are  spread  over  the  chest, 
are  strengthened. 

Modification. — 1.  Oue  arm  may  be  in  wing  position, 
while  the  movement  is  performed,  as  described,  by  the 
other  arm,  but  changing  after  a  suitable  number  of 
.revolutions.  The  effect  of  this  mode  of  performing  the 
movement  is,  perhaps,  greater  than  if  both  arms  re- 
volved at  the  same  time.  The  body  accommodates 
itself  better  to  the  single  than  to  the  double  movement, 
and  the  object  is  achieved  in  a  shorter  time,  and  with 
less  tendency  to  fatigue.  This  last  advantage  will  be 
especially  appreciated  by  the  feeble  invalid. 

2.  Let  the  commencing  be  the  rack  position.  One 
arm  may  be  brought  backward  on  a  nearly  horizontal 
plane,  as  far  as  it  can  extend,  with  a  swinging  motion, 
and  while  returning  to  the  commencing  position  the 
other  arm  may  be  in  the  act  of  performing  the  same 
motion  backward  that  was  before  performed  by  the 
first.  These  alternate  motions  may  be  kept  up  till  fifteen 
or  twenty  are  performed.  The  dotted  outlines  indicate 
the  positions  occupied  by  the  arms  anteriorly  and  pos- 
teriorly in  this  movement.  The  body  is  required  to  be 
in  a  more  lax  state  in  this  than  in  the  principal  mo^^e- 
ment. 

74.-HANGING,  SWINGING. 

Position. — For  this  movement  it  is  necessary  to  pro- 
vide a  swinging  apparatus,  to  consist  of  a  pole  about 
three  feet  long,  suspended  horizontally  by  ropes  attached 
to  it  at  each  end,  and  so  high  that  it  can  be  just  reach- 
ed by  a  person  standing  upon  the  floor.  The  higher 
the  ceiling  from  which  the  apparatus  is  suspended,  the 


REGION   OF   THE   ARMS. 


235 


greater  the  arc  tlirougli  wliicli  tlie  body  ^^s-  ^t. 

swings,  and  the  more  desirable  the  ar- 
rangement. Tlie  two  hands  are  to  grasp 
the  pole,  as  represented  in  the  cut. 

Action. — ^The  person  gives  a  spring 
with  the  feet,  throwing  himself  power- 
fully forward,  and  hangs  by  his  hands. 
The  momentum  thus  acquired  causes 
him  to  swing  for  a  time  like  a  pendu- 
lum, the  feet  describing  the  arc  of  a 
large  circle,  of  wdiicli  the  suspended 
ropes  and  body  together  are  the  radius. 
This  motion  may  be  continued  as  long  as 
the  body  can  be  sustained  by  the  hands. 

Effect. — This  motion  does  not  oc- 
casion fatigue,  since  the  will  is  but 
slightly  exerted,  but  the  effects  are 
very  important.  A  powerful  derivative  eifect,  Iiaving 
reference  chiefly  to  the  central  portions  of  the  body,  is 
produced,  caused,  1.  By  the  strong  action  of  the  nnis- 
cles  of  the  hands,  arms,  and  shoulders,  required  to  sus- 
tain the  body,  the  prolonged  tension  occasioning  a 
subsequent  rush  of  the  blood  into  the  arms.  2.  The 
swinging  motion  produces  a  very  great  centrifugal 
effect,  which,  acting  upon  the  circulating  fluids,  causes 
them  to  flow  into,  and  be  retained  in,  the  lower  ex- 
tremities. In  other  words,  the  venous  circulation  is 
for  the  time  retarded,  while  the  arterial  is  accelerated, 
and  the  result  is  an  accumulation  of  blood  in  the  lower 
extremities,  expanding  the  vessels  and  increasing  the 
nutrition  of  that  region.  While  these  objects  are  being 
attained,  the  equally  important  one  of  diminishing  the 
amount  of  blood  in  central  portions  of  the  body  is  also 
secured,  and  the  circulation  is  equalized. 


236  REGION    OF    THE   ARMS. 

Another  desirable  effect  produced  by  this  movement 
is  the  elevation  of  the  ribs,  with  consequent  expansion 
of  the  chest.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  weight  of  the 
body  is  suspended  by  the  arms.  But  the  arms  being 
connected  by  muscular  attachments  w4th  the  ribs,  both 
before  and  behind,  the  body  is  really  suspended  at  the 
walls  of  the  chest  in  such  a  way  as  to  force  them  outward, 
and  to  allow  the  inspired  air  to  occupy  a  larger  space. 

It  is  evident  that  in  this  movement  most  of  the  in- 
dications for  the  treatment  of  chronic  23ulmonary  affec- 
tions of  the  various  grades  are  fulfilled.  The  same 
may  be  said  in  respect  to  the  treatment  of  affections  of 
the  liver,  and  the  dyspepsia  usually  connected  with  it. 
Hence,  for  chronic  invalids  of  nearly  every  class,  this  is 
a  movement  as  important  as  it  is  grateful  and  easily 
performed. 

75._S WING-HANG-STANDING,  TRUNK  ROTATING. 

Fig-  68.  Position. — The    hands 

\     \  grasp  the  swing,  in  the 

/      /  \      \  same  way  as  in  N'o.  74, 

'=^^--^''  \®s=C^       ^^^^  ^^^^  f^^^  remain  upon 

/  r   ,';  n  \\      tiiejioor. 

! X^  I  >  I  \ -A\        Action. — The  body  falls 

/  \;^|'_/^ \jP^  \  ^^  ^^^®  ^^^®  ^y  ^^^  weight ; 

r'^^P  I  \^^A  but   being   sustained   by 

I    f'T  V~f'J  ^^^^  swing,  it  bends  at  the 

L_K''\  /^^W^  ^^^^   ^^'  shoulders,  while 

\     'f    \  /    V  /    ^^^    ^"^^^'   ^^'    rather   the 

\  \    \  I   /  /      ^^®^'  remain  on  the  floor, 

\^  '\  \  / /^ /        directly  under  the  point 

V^^\  ^\^    I  /^' /  of  suspension. 

'j^^^^^X^^/^^^;^^^^^         Action. — The  body 

^'^^^^G^  now,  by  a  little  effort,  is 


REGION    OF    THE    ^VRMS.  237 

made  to  revolve  in  a  circle,  the  longest  diameter  of 
which  is  at  the  shoulders,  care  being  taken  to  keep  it 
looking  constantly  one  way.  It  may  revolve  several 
times  in  each  direction. 

Effect. — In  this  movement  every  part  of  the  surface 
of  the  body  is  stretched^  as  the  weight  is  thrown  upon 
it,  and  relaxed^  as  the  revolution  throws  the  weight 
upon  other  muscles.  The  intercostal  muscles  and  those 
of  the  arms  are  particularly  subjected  to  the  action,  as 
are  also  the  muscles  of  the  abdomen,  back,  and  legs. 
As  this  movement  is  accomplished  with  little  effort,  it 
is  very  grateful  and  refreshing.  It  also  develops  the 
the  chest  and  respiratory  apparatus,  and  is  useful  in 
dissipating  the  unpleasant  feeling  of  fatigue,  or  any  in- 
cipient congestion  that  ma}^  have  been  produced  by  the 
expenditure  of  too  mnch  power  in  the  practice  of  other 
movements. 

MoDiFicATiox. — Instead  of  revolving  in  a  circle,  the 
body  may  remain  stationary  at  any  given  point  in  the 
circle ;  as,  for  instance,  looking  forward.  In  this  case 
the  anterior  portion  of  the  body  is  convex,  the  feet 
being  placed  far  back,  and  strong  action  is  produced 
upon  the  muscles  of  the  chest  and  abdomen. 

76.— TEUNK  FOPvWAED-FALL  HANGING,  HOLDING. 

Position. — The  hands  grasp  firmly  some  object  about 
as  high  as  the  shoulders  ;  the  feet  and  legs  are  extend- 
ed backward,  the  toes  resting  on  the  floor ;  the  body 
takes  on  a  curved  shape,  the  convexity  being  an- 
terior. 

Action. — 1.  Tlie  trunk  straightens  itself,  so  that  it 
forms  a  line  diagonal  to  that  of  the  arms.  2.  It  then 
falls  back  into  its  curved  position.  This  may  be  re- 
peated two  or  three  times.     The  dotted  outline  in  the 


238 


KEGIOX    OF    THE    ARMS. 


cut  indicates  the 
G 0  m  m e n  cing  posi- 
tion, while  the  figure 
shows  the  position 
attained  by  stretch- 
ing. 

Effect. — This 
movement  affects 
the  hands  and  arms, 
the  chest,  the  abdo- 
men, and  the  legs, 
upon  their  anterior  portion. 

MoDiFicATiox. — The  bodj  may  take  the  position 
shown  in  the  accompanying  cut,  and  hold  for  a  few 
moments.  The  effects  are  very  similar  to  those  of  the 
above  movement,  but  perhaps  a  little  more  marked. 
The  top  of  a  bedstead  or  a  mantel  will  answer  perfectly 
well  as  a  means  for  obtaining  the  position. 


77— BACKWAED-FALL  ELBOWS-SUPPOET  LYING,   HOLDING. 

^^'s-  ''^-  Position.  — 

The  arms  ex- 
tended on  ei- 
ther side,  in 
yard  position, 
but  the  elbows 
may  be  bent ; 
the  trunk  is  in 
backward  -  fall 
position,  and  is 
supported  by  a  cliair  or  ciisliiuned  stool  under  each 
elbow,  while  the  back  of  the  heels  are  supported  by 
the  floor,  the  body  being  cai-efully  maintained  in  the 
straight  line. 


REGION    OF   THE   ARMS. 


239 


Action. — The  position  may  be  continued  for  about 
one  minute.     The  cut  shows  the  position  and  action. 

Effect. — This  movement  affects  the  back  of  the 
arms,  the  muscles  between  the  shoulders  and  under 
the  shouulder  blades,  and  also  those  of  the  back  ;  it 
strengthens  these  parts,  and  is  derivative  for  the  spinal 
cord. 


78— half-steetch  support  half-standing,  stretching. 

Position. — One  arm  is  extend-  ^'s-  7i, 

ed  horizontally,  and  being  in 
contact  with  some  object,  helps 
to  maintain  the  upright  position 
of  the  body  ;  the  other  arm  is 
stretched ;  the  leg  of  the  same 
side  resting  with  the  foot  upon 
a  stool,  while  the  other  leg  is 
free ;  the  trunk  is  erect. 

Action. — The  action  in  this 
movement  does  not  consist  in 
change  of  place,  nor  in  holding^ 
but  in  putting  all  the  muscles 
of  the  standing  side  of  the  body 
into  a  state  of  tension  ;  the  ac- 
tion of  each  muscle  being  ex- 
actly balanced  by  that  of  its  an- 
tagonist. In  other  words,  all  of 
the  muscles  of  one  side  of  the 
body  are  stretched  by  a  strong 

exertion  of  the  will.  After  the  action  has  continued 
for  a  minute  on  one  side,  the  other  side  may  undergo 
the  same  discipline.     The  cut  indicates  the  position. 

Effect. — This  movement  is  quite  fatiguing,  and  is 
strongly  derivative  in  its  effects ;  it  may  be  used  on 


240 


EEGION    OF    THE    AKMS. 


Fig.  72. 


one  side,  when  that  side  is  much  weaker  than  the  op- 
posite, as  in  jDartial  hemiplegia,  curvature  of  spine,  etc. 

79.— STEETCH-STRIDE  STANDING  OE   STAE-STANDING,  STEETCHING. 

Position.  —  The  arms  are 
stretched  upward,  and  a  little 
outward ;  the  legs  are  in  the 
stride  position,  trunk  erect. 

Action. — An  effort  is  simul- 
taneously made  by  nearly  all  the 
muscles  of  the  body  to  reach 
higher^  and  this  action  is  con- 
tinued for  a  minute. 

Effect. — This  is  a  very  fa- 
tiguing movement,  since  it  calls 
for  a  powerful  exertion  of  the 
will  to  maintain  the  simultane- 
ous action  of  so  many  muscles. 
The  effect  is  derivative,  and 
equalizing  to  the  circulation, 
and  also  to  the  nervous  and  nu- 
tritive forces,  for  it  stimulates  at  once  all  these  powers 
to  harmonious  and  vigorous  co-oj^eration.  It  drives 
the  blood  toward  the  skin,  and  if  continued,  soon  ex- 
cites perspiration. 


BEGION   OF   THE   HEAD   AND   NECK.  24:1 


EEGION  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NEOK. 

Remarks  on  the  Region  of  the  Head. — ^The  motions 
of  the  head  are  due  to  the  action  of  the  muscles  of  the 
neck,  some  of  which  have  their  attachments  at  the  base 
of  the  skuU,  and  to  the  framework  of  the  chest.  The 
neck  is  .provided  with  numerous  and  powerful  muscles, 
enabling  the  head  to  assume  an  extensive  range  of  posi- 
tions, and  to  perform  a  variety  of  most  important  move- 
ments. These  movements  are  useful,  in  a  hygienic  and 
medical  point  of  view,  chiefly  as  they  affect  the  circu- 
lation of  the  blood  to  and  from  the  head,  and  also  as 
enabling  us  to  modify,  to  a  limited  extent,  the  circula- 
tion and  nutrition  of  the  throat,  and  the  several  organs 
of  sense,  as  the  eyes,  ears,  nose,  etc.,  all  of  which  are 
liable  to  disease  or  weakness.  These  muscles  of  the 
neck  are  also  called  upon  to  assist  in  removing  certain 
natural  and  acquired  faults  of  position,  or  deformities, 
not  only  of  the  neck,  but  also  of  the  spine,  of  which  it 
is  a  part.  In  treating  of  the  several  movements  of  this 
region,  it  is  more  convenient  to  refer  them  to  the  head, 
since  it  is  the  change  in  the  position  of  the  latter  that 
constitutes  their  most  conspicuous  result,  although  it  is 
tlie  neck  that  is  the  region  to  which  the  movement  is 
really  applied. 

11 


242  REGION    OF    THE    HEAD    AND    XECK. 

Fig.   78. 


80 —HEAD  TUENING. 

Position. — ^The  body  may  be  in  either  sitting  or 
standing  position,  with  the  head  erect,  as  in  the  central 
figure  of  the  cut,  which  is  the  commencing  position  in 
all  head  movements. 

Action. — The  head  turns  upon  its  axis  to  the  right, 
so  far  as  it  can,  and  then,  in  the  same  manner  and  to 
the  same  extent,  to  the  left,  thus  twisting  the  neck. 
The  terminating  positions  of  the  moyement  are  shown 
in  the  right  and  left  figures  of  the  cut.  The  action  may 
be  repeated  six  or  eight  times  each  day. 

Effect. — ^This  movement  brings  all  the  muscles  of 
the  neck  into  strong  action,  thus  causing  them  to  press 
upon  the  vessels,  and  so  aiding  the  circulation  of  the 
blood  in  this  region. 

81.— HEAD  FOEWAED  BENDING. 

Fig- 74.  Position, — This    is    the   same   as  is 

represented  in  'No.  80. 

Action. — The  head  is  bent  directly 
forward,  as  far  as  it  can  go,  bringing 
the  chin  close  to  the  breast,  as  in  the 
cut.  It  is  then  carried  up  to  the  com- 
mencing position.  This  action  may  be 
repeated  six  or  eight  times. 
Effect. — This  movement  is  concentric  for  the  front 


BEGION    OF   THE    HEAD    AND    NECK. 


243 


part  of  the  neck,  and  eccentric  for  the  back.  It  is 
sometimes  advantageous  on  account  of  its  influence  on 
the  vertebral  vessels,  in  removing  headacbes.  It  is 
also  useful  in  affections  of  the  throat. 


Fig.  75. 


82— HEAD  BACKWAED  BENDING. 

Position. — This  is  the  same  as  that 
shown  in  'No.  80. 

Action. — ^The  bead  is  carried  back- 
ward as  far  as  possible.  It  then  returns 
to  its  first  position.  This  action  to  be  re- 
peated six  or  eight  times. 

Effect. — ^This  is  nearly  the  same  as 
that  in  No.  81.  The  Mnd  of  action,  however,  is  differ- 
ent ;  the  eccentric  action  being  in  this  case  exercised 
by  the  anterior  muscles,  while  the  concentric  is  effected 
by  the  muscles  at  the  back  of  tlie  neck. 

83.-HEAD  BACKWAED  BENDING  AND  TWISTING. 

Position. — The  same.  ^'^-  '^^• 

Action. — 1.  The  head  bends  back- 
ward, and  assumes  the  position  repre- 
sented in  fig.  75.  2.  It  then  turns  to 
the  right  while  thus  bent,  and  then  to 
the  left,  and  so  on,  alternating  the  mo- 
tion exactly  as  in  No.  80. 

Effect. — ^This  movement  acts  much  more  power- 
fully upon  the  front  of  the  neck  than  that  in  E'o.  80. 
It  is  useful  for  its  derivative  effect  upon  the  laryngeal 
mucous  membrane  in  case  of  congestion  of  that  surface. 

84— HEAD  BACKWAED  BENDING  AND  TWISTING  (SCEEW 
EAISING). 

PosniON. — rhe  head  is  bent  forward  and  sidewise. 
Action. — The  head  slowly  bends  backward,  turning 


24:4 


KEGION  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NECK. 


tlie  face  -upward,  while  at  the  same 
time  the  head  turns  upon  its  axis  until 
it  looks  toward  one  shoulder.  The  mo- 
tion is  like  the  turning  of  a  screw.  The 
head  may  return  to  the  primary  posi- 
tion, and  then  rise  and  turn  in  the 
direction  opposite  to  that  previously 
taken.  This  action  may  be  repeated  each  way  '^ve  or 
six  times. 

Effect.— This  movement  is  useful  much  in  the  same 
way  as  those  previously  described.  It  is  also  useful  in 
lateral  curvature  of  the  spine ;  but  in  this  case  the 
turning  should  be  of  course  in  only  one  dii'ection. 


P  A  11  T     III, 

THE  PATHOLOGY  OF  SEVERAL  FORMS  OF  CHRONIC  DISEASE. 


THE    RELATIONS    OF    MOyEMEN"TS.. 

Kemark. — ISTo  attempt  will  be  made  in  the  follow- 
ing pages  to  go  into  any  particular  account  of  the 
symptoms  and  progressive  stages  of  the  several  affec- 
tions that  we  have  selected  as  the  ^theme  of  remark. 
Such  an  acconnt  would  so  far  swell  the  size  of  onr  vol- 
ume as  to  defeat  its  object.  Besides,  if  such  an  effort 
were  possible  within  our  present  limits,  there  are  many 
excellent  popular  treatises,  written  in  the  interest  of 
different  medical  systems,  that  embrace  a  similar  de- 
sign, and  do  such  ample  justice  to  the  subject  as  would 
render  any  further  attempt  on  our  part  in  the  same  di- 
rection a  work  of  supererogation,  to  say  the  least  of  it. 

In  the  following  chapters,  therefore,  we  have  thought 
it  best  to  presume  some  knowledge  on  the  part  of  the 
reader  in  regard  to  the  nature  and  symptoms  of  the 
diseases  noticed — a  degree  of  knowledge  sufficient,  at 
any  rate,  to  enable  him  to  refer  the  particular  com- 
plaint under  discussion  to  some  general  class.  It  should 
further  be  understood  that  the  principles  of  the  Move- 
ment-Cure, which  generally  aim  at  the  correction  of 
the  primary,  radical  causes  of  disease,  regard  the  sec- 


246  THE   RELATIONS    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

ondary  symptoms  as  merely  effects,  and  consequently 
as  demanding  less  attention  than  they  do  in  those  plans 
of  remedial  treatment  in  which  the  suppression  of  these 
is  regarded  as  the  prime  object  of  the  practitioner's 
solicitude. 

The  account  of  himself  given  by  the  patient  to  the 
physician  is  really  nothing  more  than  a  statement 
crudely  rendered  of  the  evidences  of  the  operation  of 
abnormal  causes  which  it  is  the  function  of  the  latter, 
through  this  deceptive  vail  of  symptoms,  to  recognize 
and  remove.  To  suppress  or  ameliorate  the  symp- 
toms while  the  cause  remains,  is  but  to  practice  a 
sort  of  deception  at  the  ex]3ense  of  the  patient ;  to 
sing  the  song  of  peace  !  jpeace  !  in  the  time  of  trouble ; 
to  attempt  to  purify  the  stream  while  the  work  of 
corruption  is  proceeding  busily  in  the  secret  depths 
of  the  fountain. 

It  will  be  my  chief  endeavor,  in  the  following  pages, 
to  expose  the  essential  nature  of  certain  maladies  in 
connection  with  their  causes  ;  not  in  the  light  of  the 
ordinary,  or  what  would  be  termed  orthodox  therapeu- 
tics, but  in  that  letter,  truer  light,  as  we  think,  that  is 
shed  upon  the  subject  by  the  Movement-Cure.  We  shall 
endeavor  to  make  manifest  to  the  reader's  mind,  what  is 
clearer  than  noon-day  to  the  writer's,  to  wit,  the  entire 
therapeutic  appropriateness  (and  we' use  the  word  in  its 
full,  original  meaning)  of  the"cw?^e"  to  the  many  mor- 
bid conditions  to  which  it  is  now  beginning  to  be  ap- 
jDlied  ;  and  hence  the  propriety  of  claiming  for  it  the 
distinction  of  being,  in  the  best  sense  of  the  term, 
a  philosophical  system.  It  can  not  be  said  that  the 
views  of  pathology  herein  set  forth  are  in  the  interests 
exclusively  of  either  of  the  two  great  antagonistic  theo- 
ries of  medical  science,  the  chemical  or  humoral^  or  the 


THK    KELATIOXS    OF    MOVEMENTS.  247 

vital.  The  curative  process,  properly  so  called,  is  re- 
garded as  eminently  a  physiological  process,  in  distinc- 
tion from  tlie  critical  and  artificial^  and  therefore  patho- 
logical actions  that  are  the  result  of  the  means  used  by 
nearly  all  other  schools  of  medical  practice  extant. 
These  processes,  it  has  been  shown,  present  both  chem- 
ical and  vital  features;  and  that  the  movements  promote 
these  processes,  we  have  made  it  our  business  to  demon- 
strate in  these  pages.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  function 
of  any  defective  locality  may  be  exalted  to  the  healthy 
state,  the  circulation  be  made  equable,  innervation  di- 
rected to  needy  quarters,  and  so  the  health  be  restored, 
not.  by  excitement  and  violence  (which  are  ever  fol- 
lowed by  depression  and  functional  anarchy),  but  by 
gentle,  gradual,  and  harmonious  tonic  impressions. 

These  results  are  reached  in  an  eminent  degree  by 
the  practice  of  the  duplicated  movements,  the  effects 
of  which,  I  hope  to  be  able  to  show,  may  to  a  consid- 
erable degree  be  realized  by  the  single  movements,  as 
explained  and  rej^resented  in  this  volume. 

INDIGESTIOX— DYSPEPSIA. 

Under  this  general  head  may  be  embraced  all  the 
common  chronic  disoj'ders  of  the  stomach,  with  the  re- 
sulting loss  of  muscular  power  and  disturbance  of  the 
nervous  system.  The  varieties  of  this  disorder  so 
named  are  many,  and  the  symptoms  attending  them  are 
legion  ;  but  it  is  unnecessary  here  to  go  into  a  partic- 
ular enumeration  of  them,  since,  being  dependent  all  on 
essentially  the  same  causes,  very  little  variation  in  the 
treatment  is  demanded  for  all  the  countless  phases  of 
the  complaint. 

The  digestion  of  food  may  be  regarded  as  a  central 
function,  upon  which   the  integrity  of  all  the   others 


248  THE   RELATIONS   OF   MOVEMENTS. 

are,  to  a  great  extent,  dependent,  and  all,  tnerefore, 
are  apt  to  suffer  in  consequence  of  disturbance  at  this 
point.  Indeed,  no  function  of  the  body  can  be  proper- 
ly understood  when  considered  apart  from  its  physio- 
logical connection ;  but  the  control  which  this  exerts 
over  all  the  others  is  made  painfully  evident  to  the 
se;:  es  in  case  of  any  considerable  deviation,  as  many 
a  reader  will  be  quick  to  acknowledge.  Digestion  is 
the  first  in  the  order  of  the  changes  wrought  upon 
alimentary  materials  in  the  system,  and  when  we  con- 
sider that  the  supply  of  this  material  is  under  the  con- 
trol  of  the  judgment  and  will,  the  responsibility  resting 
upon  us  for  the  healthy  performance  of  this  act  becomes 
evident. 

The  term  digestion  simply  implies  the  reduction  of 
alimentary  material  to  a  state  of  flnidity,  whereby  it  is 
rendered  fit  to  enter  the  circulation  and  supply  mate- 
rial for  the  organizing  processes  of  the  frame.  This 
act  is  effected  in  the  digestive  cavity  formed  by  the 
alimentary  canal,  which,  with  its  expansions  and  con- 
volutions, extends  qnite  through  the  body,  and  pre- 
sents an  inner  surface  of  several  square  feet.  Each 
portion  of  this  canal  is  adapted  to  perform  some  dis- 
tinct and  necessary  portion  of  this  act,  and  the  func- 
tion is  incomplete  if  any  portion  of  the  digestive  sur- 
face is  incapable  of  performing  its  particular,  allotted 
share  of  the  operation. 

This  change  is  effected  in  food  by  means  of  secre- 
tions poured  into  the  cavity  and  mingled  with  the 
food  derived  from  all  parts  of  the  digestive  surface. 
The  extent  of  this  surface  is  very  much  auormented  bv 
certain  appendages  to  it  called  glands,  whose  secre- 
tions are  conducted  into  the  cavity. 

The  amount  of  secretion  thus  daily  poured  into  this 


THE  RELATIONS  OF  M0YE1MENT8. 


249 


cavity  for  this   exclusive   purpose  is  very  large,  and 
consists  in  the  following  substances : 


-Saliva 3.30  lbs. 

Gastric  juice 14.08    " 

BUe 3.30   " 


Pancreatic  juice 44  lbs. 

Intestinal  juice 44   " 


The  aggregate  of  these  secretions  amounts  to  more  than 
twenty-one  and  a  half  pounds  of  solvent  secretions 
poured  into  the  digestive  cavity,  whose  wliole  object  is 
the  solution  of  the  two  or  three  pounds  of  food  that  is 
daily  required  to  sustain  the  functions  of  the  body. 

These  secretions,  we  all  know,  are  derived  from  the 
hlood^  and  their  cpiality  and  adaptation  to  the  purposes 
for  which  they  are  intended,  we  see  at  once,  must 
greatly  depend  on  the  quality  of  that  fluid. 

AYhile  we  are  investigating  the  causes,  and  selecting 
the  remedies  for  indigestion^  it  is  necessary  to  inquire 
into  the  separate  influence  exerted  by  these  several 
factors  that  take  part  in  the  act — namely,  {\\Qfood^  the 
secretions^  and  those  accidental  ov  iQm^0Y2iYj  co7iditions 
of  the  system  that  have  so  much  to  do  in  promoting  or 
impairing  its  health. 

1.  The  quality  of  the  food  is  a  matter  of  much  mo- 
ment, and  this  is  a  subject  that  happens  to  receive,  in 
our  day,  much  attention  from  the  popular  mind ;  but, 
unfortunately,  this  attention  proceeds  from  a  most  un- 
reliable quarter;  for,  sad  to  say,  senses  perverted  by 
long  habits  of  wrong  action  are  allied  to  the  popular 
mind,  and  hence  its  judgments  are  generally  erroneous. 
To  the  healthfully  disciplined  judgment,  enlightened 
by  science  and  experiment,  there  is  but  one  test  allowed 
for  food — taste,  fashion,  must  be  set  aside — the  only 
question  to  be  put  in  regard  to  any  given  material  is, 


*  Draper's  Physiology. 


250  THE   RELATIONS    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

Can  it  he  assimilated  f  What  is  its  degree  of  capacity 
for  supporting  all  the  functioiial  operations  of  the  sys- 
tem? And  here  let  me  say,  we  must  carefully  discrimi- 
nate between  supporting  and  exciting  functional  acts, 
for  substances  belonging  to  the  class  of  excitants, 
though  generally  mixed  with,  and  often  regarded  as, 
food,  yet  in  a  true  physiological  sense  do  not  really  bear 
this  relation.  Even  the  mechanical  and  the  imponder- 
able agents  may  excite^  but  they  certainly  do  not  sup- 
p>ort^  vital  actions.  They  occasion  waste,  possibly  to  a 
hurtful  extent ;  they  never  help  forward  in  any  direct 
way  tlie  organizing  or  reproducing  processes  of  the 
body.  The  organic  actions  of  the  body  have  two  grand 
objects  in  view  :  1st.  The  construction  of  the  instru- 
ments of  vital  action.  2d.  The  maintenance  of  the 
vital  temperature.  To  accomplish  this  there  must  be  a 
constant  supply  of  materials  capable  of  being  organized 
instead  of  those  capable  of  being  oxydized.  But  of  all 
the  products  of  the  organic  world,  whether  produced 
by  the  plant  or  derived  from  the  animal,  nature  re- 
stricts food  material  proper  to  sustain  life  to  two  dis- 
tinct types.  One  is  the  albuminous^  consisting  of  vege- 
table and  animal  aliment.,  and  its  derivatives  fihrin., 
gluten^  casein^  etc.,  and  the  saline  matters  associated 
with  these,  all  of  which  contain  nitrogen  in  a  certain 
definite  proportion.  The  other  class  contains  no  nitro- 
gen., and  is  always  of  a  bland  nature,  of  which  starch 
and  oil  are  examples. 

A  common  cause  of  imperfect  digestion  consists  in 
improper  food — that  is,  from  a  sort  of  food  that  does 
not  correspond  with  this  description.  Since  the  system 
is  able  to  dispose  of  other  matters  besides  food,  one 
portion  by  the  oxydizing  process  always  going  on 
within  it,  effecting  its  destruction,  and  another  portion 


THE   RELATIONS   OF   MOVEMENTS.  251 

by  its  insolubility,  the  distinctive  difference  betweeo 
what  is  and  what  is  not  food  is  apt  to  be  lost  sight  of, 
and  hence  the  unconscious,  but  not  the  less  harmful 
abuse. 

Another  source  of  injury  to  digestion  arises  from 
disregarding  the  proper  relative  proportion  of  the  cor- 
rect elements  in  the  use  of  food.  In  this  case,  while 
there  may  be  an  insufficiency  of  some  of  the  elements, 
others  are  in  surplus  amount,  so  that  while  the  system 
is  loaded  with  materials,  organization,  or  rather  nutri- 
tion, is  at  a  low  standard,  because  the  necessary  ele- 
ments are  not  present  in  sufficient  quantity. 

Practically,  the  danger  to  the  health  arising  under 
this  head  comes  from  two  sources :  one,  the  employ- 
ment of  too  much  soluble — that  is,  saccliarine  matter ; 
and  the  other  is  the  rejection  of  the  saline  constituents, 
which  are  fully  as  important  as  the  organic.  These  are 
apt  to  be  lost  by  mechanical  refining,  for  the  chief  por- 
tion of  the  saline  elements  of  the  edible  grains  exists 
in  the  outer  or  coarser  portions. 

It  is  also  important  that  the  amount  of  food  taken 
be  strictly  proportionate  to  the  needs  of  the  system ; 
in  other  words,  proportionate  to  its  power  of  dissolving 
in  the  stomach  and  intestines,  and  also  of  its  power  of 
elimination,  by  means  of  the  oxygen  respired.  If 
these  bounds  be  exceeded,  the  materials  thrust  into  the 
digestive  cavity  are  no  longer  food,  but  a  harmful 
foreign  mass,  perhaps  even  poisonous  matter,  affording 
to  the  local  nerves  a  cause  of  irritation  that  w411  affect 
the  whole  system,  and  also  to  the  blood  a  quantity  of 
matter  rife  with  chemical  tendencies,  over  which  vitality 
can  exercise  but  imperfect  control. 

2.  The  secretions  constitute  the  next  great  factor  in 
the  digestive  process  to  be  considered.     It  is  by  these 


252  THE   EELATIONS    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

that  the  solution  of  food  is  effected.  If  these  secre- 
tions are  deficient  in  quantity  or  vitiated  in  quality 
from  any  cause,  an  imperfect  sohition  of  food  must  re- 
sult. A  deficiency  in  quantity  can  never  really  exist, 
because,  being  furnished  by  the  vital  powers  of  the 
organism,  the  quantity  must  always  be  graduated  to 
the  vital  need,  so  that,  practically,  the  want  of  a  healthy 
relation,  in  this  respect,  resolves  itself  into  an  excess  of 
quantity  of  food ^  the  consequence  of  which  was  sho^vn 
when  speaking  of  the  relations  of  the  elements  of  food. 
There  can  be  no  proper  digestion  unless  the  peculiar 
chemical  affinities  of  the  true  digestive  secretions  are 
able  to  overpower  all  tendency  to  other  chemical  action 
in  the  digestive  mass. 

The  cause  of  a  deterioration  of  the  quality  of  the 
digestive  secretions  arises  partly  from  the  cause  above- 
mentioned,  and  partly  from  a  morbid  condition  of  the 
blood,  and  of  the  general  nutritive  offices  of  the  body 
connected  therewith  ;  in  other  words,  from  the  general 
imperfect  evolution  of  vital  activity  in  the  system, 
hereafter  to  be  noticed. 

All  the  causes  above  enumerated  have  in  them- 
selves an  intrinsic  and  direct  injurious  tendency,  but  I 
am  inclined  to  believe  that  the  train  of  unpleasant 
symptoms  resulting  from  indigestion  is  due,  to  a  large 
extent,  to  consequent  disturbance  of  the  nervous  system. 
Tlie  nervous  susceptibilities  of  the  digestive  organs  are 
aroused  by  the  various  causes  noticed,  and  soon  be- 
come habitually — morbidly  active.  The  perce2)tions 
not  only  become  unnaturally  acute  but  erroneous,  and 
the  judgment  is  insensibly  led  to  make  false  decisions 
in  regard  to  the  conditions  of  the  system.  Stomach  ir- 
ritation is  reflected  through  the  nervous  system  to  all 
the  bodily  organs,  and  nutritive  changes   in   remote 


THE    KELATIOXS    OF    MOVEMENTS.  253 

parts  of  the  body  are  injurior.sly  influenced  tliereby. 
But  what  is  of  more  importance,  the  ganglionic  centers^ 
situated  near  the  stomach,  and  posterior  to  it,  whose 
function  it  is  to  preside  over  dig-estion,  become  in- 
flamed, and  rendered  incapable  of  performing  their 
ofiice.  There  is  an  insanity  of  digestion,  quite  as 
much  a  disease  as  that  of  the  brain,  and  more  diflicult 
of  cure.  The  difficulty  in  either  case  consists  in  with- 
drawing the  morbid  causes,  which  are  apt  to  be  self- 
perpetuating  in  their  nature. 

The  morbid  activity  of  the  digestive  organs  disturbs 
the  digestive  process  as  we  have  seen  by  its  direct  in- 
fluence, but  this  is  only  a  portion  of  the  troublesome 
effects.  The  attention  is  concentrated  continuously 
upon  the  stomach  and  the  digestive  process.  This  is 
contrary  to  nature,  and  is  sure  to  disturb  still  further 
the  process.  Xo  good  digestion  is  possible  while  sen- 
sations in  the  stomach  are  habitually  aroused  by  food, 
improper  in  kind  or  amount,  by  stimulating  beverages, 
or  by  drugs. 

There  are  two  symptoms  attending  the  state  of  things 
here  described,  besides  the  ordinary  ones  of  loss  of 
power,  local  or  stomach  symptoms,  pain,  acidity,  etc., 
but  these  appear  only  in  aggravated  cases.  One  is, 
sensitiveness  or  soreness  at  the  pit  of  the  stomach  upon 
deep  pressure  ;  the  other  is,  a  peculiar  sensation  of  buz- 
zing or  ringing  in  the  head,  generally  referred  to  the 
region  of  the  ears.  There  are  many  evidences  that  the 
latter  symptom  is  due  to  the  connection  of  the  nerves 
of  organic  life  with  the  cerebrum.  The  removal  of 
these  symptoms  is  one  of  the  earliest  proofs  of  the  res- 
toration of  the  digestive  power. 

.  3.  Another,  and  not  the  least  important  cause  of 
indigestion,   consists  of  a  defect  in  the  general  vital 


254  THE    RELATIONS    OF    :M0YEMENTS. 

actions  of  the  system.  Yiewed  with  reference  to  the 
whole  system,  digestion  may  be  regarded  as  being  de- 
pendent upon  the  general  nutritive  actions  that  are 
constantly  j)roceeding  in  every  portion  of  the  body. 
These  actions  make  digestion  necessary,  and  give,  at 
the  same  time,  its  peculiar  character  to  the  secretion 
provided  for  this  purpose.  The  Moid  of  digestive  ac- 
tion, as  well  as  the  quality  of  the  product^  will  there- 
fore depend  on  the  degree  of  perfection  with  whicb  all 
the  other  processes  of  the  system  are  performed;  for 
each,  as  we  have  seen,  contributes  to  the  blood  the  last 
result  of  its  action,  and  it  is  from  blood  thus  replenish- 
ed and  enforced  that  the  digestive  secretions  are  drawn. 
Thus  it  is  that  an  imperfectly  elaborated  blood,  loaded 
with  the  results  of  the  imperfect  vital  action  of  the  tis- 
sues, is  returned  to  the  stomach  and  intestines,  and  is 
capable  of  affording  only  morbid  secretions,  which 
must  irritate,  debilitate,  and  finally  render  diseased  and 
sensitive,  these  important  and  central  organs.  It  will 
be  recollected  that  the  amount  of  the  digestive  secre- 
tions that  is  daily  poured  into  the  digestive  cavity, 
nearly  equals  that  of  the  whole  mass  of  the  blood  from 
which  they  are  derived,  so  that  the  morbid  effects  that 
it  is  capable  of  exciting  may  be  concentrated  upon 
these  delicate  and  important  parts. 

Hence,  the  cause  of  indigestion  is  not  confined  to  im- 
proper food,  but  it  is  also,  in  a  degree,  referable  to 
those  voluntary  habits  which  are  connected  with,  and 
exercise  an  immense  control  over,  the  vital  manifesta- 
tions of  the  general  system.  It  is  to  this  source  that  the 
quality  of  the  digestive  fluids  is  ultimately  referable, 
because  they  are  produced  from  the  blood  common  to 
all  parts,  and  by  means  of  the  exercise  of  vital  power 
belono^ino'  to  the  local  oro-ans,  so  that  when  the  vital 


THE    RELATIONS    OF    MOVEMENTS.  255 

energy  of  the  general  system  is  low,  the  digestion  is  sure 
to  suffer  as  a  direct  consequence.  It  is  plain,  then,  that 
the  digestive  process  depends  no  less  upon  liow  we  act, 
then  it  does  upon  lohat  we  eatj  and  therefore,  that  no 
amount  of  dieting,  however  correct,  per  se,  will  he  capco- 
Ue  of  doing  more  than  palliate  some  of  the  symptoms 
of  indigestion,  and  can  never  cure  it  so  long  as  the 
movements  of  the  body  are  insufficient  in  amount  or 
faulty  in  Mnd. 

In  cases  of  indigestion  arising  from  this  cause,  the 
amount  of  j)ain  suffered  in  the  region  of  the  stomach 
affords  no  true  indication  of  the  severity  of  the  disease. 
Indeed,  there  is  generally  but  little,  or  perhaps  no 
pain  referable  to  that  organ,  even  though  the  digestive 
power  be  very  small.  The  perceptive  j^ower  of  the 
nerves  is  deteriorated  along  with  the  general  power  of 
the  system. 

The  indications  of  disease  afforded  through  the  nerves 
are  very  irregular  and  unreliable,  and  this  fact  serves 
greatly  to  embarrass  the  efforts  that  may  be  made  to- 
ward a  cure.  The  dyspeptic  patient  is  generally  tanta- 
lized, for  instance,  by  a  morbid  craving  for  food,  and 
there  is  little  or  no  sense  of  satisfaction  experienced 
when  food  is  taken,  so  that  he  never  knows  wlien  to 
leave  off  eating,  nor  when  to  begin.  He  also,  in  this 
condition  of  the  nerves,  craves  piquant  substances  and 
concentrated  food,  which  is  often  the  worst  for  him, 
and  shows  that  the  feelings  of  the  dyspeptic,  especi- 
ally those  accompanying  this  phase  of  the  disorder, 
are  entirely  untrustworthy.  Such  a  patient  should 
hrst  instruct  his  judgment,  and  learn  to  rely  upon  it, 
and  to  distrust  his  setisations  scrupulously,  and  also 
consider  that  the  physician  whose  prescriptions  are 
directed  to  the  mere  palliation  of  liis  present  sufferings, 


266  THE    FtELATIOKS    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

is  not  a  safe  professional  adviser.  The  dictates  of  the 
cultivated  judgment  must  be  strictly  submitted  to,  even 
though  opposed  to  his  perverted  feelings,  if  so  be  he 
would  avoid  the  abysses  of  suifering  toward  which  his 
disease  is  pressing  him,  and  into  which  thousands  are 
daily  plunging,  never  to  rise  till  Death  comes  to  their 
relief,  or  his  brother,  Palsy ^  quiets  the  tortured  nerves 
with  his  benumbing  touch. 

We  are  now  prepared  to  understand  what  are  the 
proper  means  to  be  employed  for  the  purpose  of  over- 
coming, or,  to  use  the  phrase  to  which  the  popular 
mind  has  been  so  long  accustomed,  of  curing  these 
particular  affections.  These  consist,  in  the  first  place, 
in  attention  to  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  food. 
In  indigestion,  the  capacity,  not  of  the  stomach  only, 
but  of  the  whole  system^  to  receive  food,  is  impaired. 
The  quantity  of  food  that  may  be  taken  by  the  system 
always  must  depend  on  the  general  habits  of  the  indi- 
vidual as  well  as  upon  his  condition  at  the  particular 
time ;  on  circumstances  exterior  to  the  body,  as  tem- 
perature, as  well  as  those  within  it,  as  mental  and 
bodily  activity.  With  the  consciousness  of  a  lack  of 
nutrient  force  pervading  the  system,  it  is  very  difficialt 
to  resist  the  inclination  to  perform  that  act  which  for 
the  time  being  generally  relieves  the  feeling. 

On  account  of  the  morbid  sensations  in  the  stomach, 
there  is  perhaps  greater  inclination  to  err  in  quality 
than  in  quantity  of  food  taken.  As  this  matter  is 
treated  with  some  elaborateness  in  another  j^lace,  it 
need  not  be  further  discussed  here.  We  will  now  only 
caution  the  dyspeptic  by  suggesting  that  he  can  never 
expect  his  health  and  strength  to  return  to  him  while 
his  system  is  receiving  through  the  stomach  such  mat- 
ters as  conflict  with  the  tendency  of  the  acting  parts 


THE    RELATIONS    OF    MOVE^SIENTS.  257 

of  the  body  to  organize  themselves,  whether  these  may 
be  chemical  products  of  morbid  action,  or  food  contain- 
ing noxious  elements,  as  too  much  alkali,  salt,  spices, 
etc.,  or  a  larger  quantity  than  can  be  eliminated  by  the 
ordinary  physiological  processes. 

Especiall}^  to  be  deprecated  in  this  disease  is  the  use 
of  drugs,  even  of  the  mildest  kinds.  The  temporary 
relief  sometimes  gained  by  this  means  is  quite  certain 
to  be  followed  by  a  proportionate  impairment  of  pow- 
er ;  and  the  gravest  features  of  the  disease  are  con- 
firmed by  an  habitual  recourse  to  such  palliative  expe- 
dients, and  the  unfortunate  invalid  so  treated  is  apt 
to  lapse  into  a  lamentable  and  sometimes  hopeless 
hypochondriasis.  Even  cases  which  recover  after 
(generally,  it  may  be  said,  in  spite  of)  the  use  of  drugs, 
serve  but  as  dangerous  precedents. 

It  has  been  intimated  that  voluntary  action  is  the 
most  important  means  for  maintaining  or  restoring  the 
integrity  of  the  digestive  function.  This  fact  has  al- 
ways been  popularly  recognized,  and  in  some  imperfect 
manner  it  has  always  entered  into  medical  prescrip- 
tions of  every  class. 

The  general  reasons  why  movements  should  have  so 
important  an  influence  upon  the  health,  have  been  ex- 
plained in  a  former  chapter,  and  are  contained  in  the 
normal  activity  which  is  thereby  induced  in  the  assim- 
ilative and  depurative  functions  of  the  system — the 
higher  vital  tone  imparted  to  the  essential  machinery 
of  life,  of  which  the  digestive  organs  constitute  so  im- 
portant a  part. 

It  is  particularly  to  be  insisted  upon  that  the  di- 
gestive power  augments  with  every  augmentation  of 
the  resjnratory  action,  whether  induced  by  exercise  or 
through  continued   exposure  to  low  temperature,  be- 


258  THE    RELATIONS    OF    MOVEMENTS. 

cause  this  act  lias  the  direct  efl'ect  of  deterging  the 
blood,  and  causes  the  product  of  vital  action  to  be  elim- 
inated through  the  emunctories,  thus  relieving  the  sys- 
tem of  those  matters  that  would  otherwise  contaminate 
and  poison  it.  The  dyspeptic,  like  the  consumptive, 
is  generally  a  person  whose  habits  of  life  have  been 
such  as  injuriously  limit  the  amount  of  air  respired. 
Persons  who  confine  themselves  to  the  atmosphere  of 
warm  rooms,  and  who  seldom  expose  themselves  to 
currents  of  cool  out-of-door  air,  find  it  very  difiicult  to 
elude  the  disease  in  question.  Exercise,  and  espe- 
cially that  afiforded  by  well-directed  oiiovements,  has 
the  efl'ect,  we  repeat,  of  urging  the  blood  to  the  sur- 
face. Free  contact  with  the  air,  aided  by  baths,  tends 
to  the  same  result.  These  means  greatly  stimulate 
the  respiratory  process,  and  scatter,  at  the  same  time, 
those  central  congestions  which,  if  they  give  no  further 
trouble,  serve  at  least  to  cherish  the  dyspeptic  condi- 
tion of  the  digestive  organs. 

While,  then,  it  is  a  patent  and  an  admitted  fact  that 
exercise  contributes  more  than  all  other  things,  drugs 
included,  to  the  restoration  of  the  dyspeptic  invalid 
(we  have  the  united  testimony  of  physicians  of  all 
schools,  as  well  as  of  public  opinion,  to  this  truth),  the 
admission  fails  of  eflPecting  the  good  it  should  effect  in 
consequence  of  the  prevalent  crude  and  unphilosophical 
notions  that  obtain  generally  in  regard  to  the  whole 
subject  of  exercise  as  a  remedial  agent.  Every  one  is 
conscious  that  much  of  the  forced  exercise  he  obliges 
himself  to  undergo,  so  far  from  being  beneficial  and 
recuperative,  proves  decidedly  injurious,  and  so  he 
jumps  sagely  to  the  conclusion  that  Ids  ■particular 
case  is  an  exception,  and  that  the  more  quiet  he  keeps, 
the  better.     This  difficulty  arises  from  ignorance  of  the 


THE    RELATIONS    OF    MOVEMENTS.  259 

principles  we  have  tried  to  explain,  l^otliing  is  clear- 
er than  that  when  the  nutrition  is  imperfect,  the  j)ower 
of  exertion  must  be  proportionally  limited.  In  pro- 
portion as  the  ninscular  power  decreases^  it  becomes 
necessary  to  increase  the  efibrt  of  the  will  in  order  to 
accomplish  a  given  effect.  This  necessitates  an  inju- 
rious expenditure  of  nervous  power,  at  the  same  time 
causes  a  preponderance  of  nervous  over  Tnuscular 
action,  which  is  fatal  to  the  health.  Ko  exercise  is 
proper  which  does  not  tend  directly  to  augment  the 
capacity  for  exertion,  by  increasing  muscular  nutri- 
tion ;  but  this  power  is  not  increased,  but  on  the  con- 
trary diminished  materially  if  immoderate  demand  be 
habitually  made  upon  the  nervous  system. 

Partial  exercise,  that  is,  exercise  of  some  one  portion 
of  the  body  exclusively,  particularly  if  it  be  a  central 
portion,  as  frequently  happens  in  some  of  the  trades 
and  professions,  is  also  detrimental ;  for  it  is  apt  to 
excite  and  maintain  congestion  in  those  delicate  cen- 
tral organs  already  affected  by  disease,  or  full  of  the 
seeds  of  it,  while  it  withdraws  the  circulation  from 
the  feet  and  peripheral  parts.  It  is  in  such  cases  as 
these  that  discouragement  is  most  apt  to  be  expe- 
rienced in  view  of  the  effect  of  exercise. 

When  persons  are  conscious  of  receiving  injury  in 
this  way,  they  should  not  conclude,  as  they  frequently 
do,  that  all  exercise  must  be  in  the  nature  of  things 
injurious.  Even  much  stronger  exercise,  if  of  the 
right  kind,  and  involving  j^arts  remote  from  the  seat 
of  the  disease,  may  be  taken,  not  only  with  impunity, 
but  with  the  highest  advantage.  There  is  no  more  im- 
portant lesson  than  this  for  the  invalid  world  to  learn. 

All  passive  exercise,  such  as  riding  on  horseback,  or 
in  carriages,  or  by  railroad,  and  also  by  sailing,  are 


260  THE   RELATIONS   OF   MOVEjSIENTS. 

generally  very  advantageous  in  this  disease.  These 
passive  movements  husband  the  will-power,  remove 
impediments  in  the  caj^illary  circulation,  and  assist 
those  actions  in  relation  with  which  all  nutrition  takes 
place.  Tlie  aeration  of  the  blood  is  also  greatly  assist- 
ed, as  well  absorption,  both  from  the  digestive  surface 
and  from  the  system  generally.  In  this  way  all  the 
j)owers  of  the  body  are  equalized,  and  the  organic  or 
formative  processes  are  promoted. 

Special  movements  are  well  adapted  to  fulfill  all  the 
indications  in  this  immensely  large  class  of  diseases. 
The  prescription  should  be  so  made  as  to  affect  all 
parts  of  the  body  successively,  commencing  with  the 
respiratory  region,  and  including  at  last  the  feet,  legs, 
abdomen,  liver,  and  the  stomach.  This  latter  organ 
should,  at  first,  be  attacked  cautiously  and  tentatively, 
or  be  let  alone  entirely.  A  difiicult  case  of  indigestion 
requires  the  duplicated  movements,  both  because  there 
is  too  little  strength  for  the  single  ones,  and  because  of 
the  amount  of  control  over  the  circulation  which  it  is 
necessary  to  acquire,  and  to  which  the  single  movements 
can  not  attain.  But  the  single  movements  are  eminently 
useful  for  a  large  class  of  persons  that  need  to  guard 
against  the  approaches  of  disease,  or  to  overcome  its 
milder  forms ;  also  for  the  after-treatment  of  a  case 
cured  by  duplicated  movements.  The  plan  of  treat- 
ment in  this  disease  does  not  materially  differ  in  its 
mpre  important  particulars  from  that  which  is  appro- 
priate in  pulmonary  affections.  The  most  important 
indications  in  both  are  to  expand  the  chest,  stimulate 
the  circulation  in  the  extremities,  also  in  the  peripheral 
portions  of  the  body,  and  to  promote  the  concoction  of 
well  vitalized  blood  in  all  the  tissues  throughout  the 
framework. 


THE    KELATIONS    OF    MOVEMENTS.  261 

EXAMPLES  OF  PRESCRIPTIONS.* 

1.  Half- wing,  curve  (weight  held),  kick-support  half- 
standing,  trunk  sidewise  bending.     Change.     ISTo.  48. 

2.  Forward-fall  head-support  standing,  leg-raising. 
Change.     25. 

3.  Wing  stride-standing,  curtseying.     9. 

4.  Yard-sitting,  arms  twisting.     72. 

5.  Support  half-standing,  leg-rotation.    Change.    23. 

6.  Yard-kneeling,  arms-swaying.     46. 

7.  Sidewise-lying,  hips-raising.     Change.     62. 

8.  Half-wing,  half-stretch,  short-sitting,  trunk-twist- 
ing.    37. 

9.  Half-lying,  abdomen-kneading.     66. 

10.  Hanging,  holding. 

After  a  formula  like  the  above  has  been  used  for  a 
while,  movements  that  affect  the  central  portions  of  the 
body  may  properly  be  used. 

1.  Arms  angle  reclined  kneeling,  arms  stretching.  44. 

2.  Shelter,  back  lying,  legs  raising.     59. 

3.  Shelter,  sidewise-bent,  stride-standing,  trunk  ro- 
tation.    59.  •  • 

4.  Stretch,  half-walk,  half-kneeling,  trunk  backward 
bending.     48. 

5.  Sidewise-lying,  leg-raising.     28. 

6.  Wing-stride  kneeling,  ringing.     45. 

7.  Half-wing,  half-stretch,  walk-kneeling,  trunk- 
twisting.     42. 

8.  Half- standing,  leg  backward  raising.     19. 

9.  Wing-sitting,  legs  twisting.     24. 

*  The  figures  at  the  end  of  the  line  describing  the  movement  refer  to  its  number 
as  arranged  in  Part  II.  of  this  work. 


262  NERVOUSNESS. 


NEKYOUSNESS. 

The  sufiering  of  many  clironic  invalids,  especially 
those  afflicted  with  disorders  of  the  digestive  organs, 
consists  in  general  not  so  much  in  absolute  pain  as  in  a 
peculiar  and  somewhat  indefinite  morbid  sensation, 
which,  for  want  of  a  more  significant  term,  they  de- 
nominate nei'vousness. 

NervouHness  is  apt  to  be  regarded  by  people  in  health 
as  a  trivial  symptom.  This  opinion  is  founded,  per- 
liaps,  on  the  peculiar,  and  often  even  ludicrous  nature 
of  the  phenomena,  mental,  moral,  and  physical,  which 
accompany  it.  If,  however,  if  be  regarded  with  refer- 
ence to  tiJe  real  sufi'ering  exjierienced  by  the  invalid, 
or  to  the  permanent  nature  of  the  malady,  it  must  be 
admitted  to  be  one  of  the  most  serious  and  important 
of  the  diseases  which  the  physician  is  ever  called  upon 
to  treat. 

In  regard  to  the  essential  nature  of  the  affection, 
there  would  not  seem  to  be  room  for  much  difference 
of  opinion.  When  the  result  of  physiological  action 
is  imperfect,  we  are  at  liberty  to  presume  that  there 
must  be  a  fault  in  some  one  or  more,  or  all  of  the  pro- 
cesses whereby  it  is  produced ;  and  such  faults  are 
often  called,  in  a  general  way,  a  perversion  of  the  true 
function  which  it  is  the  office  of  the  part  to  perform. 
IS^ervous  symptoms  may  be  attributable  to  imperfect 


NEKV0USNE8S.  263 

nutrition  of  the  nerve-centers  in  which  all  nerve-force 
originates ;  and  this  again,  as  we  have  seen,  is  depend- 
ent on  the  other  physiological  functions  whose  work  it 
is  to  maintain  the  general  nutritive  processes  of  the 
body  in  harmonious  co-operation. 

Xervons  symptoms  exist  in  many  grades  of  intensity, 
even  in  the  same  person ;  sometimes  they  arise  through 
depressed,  sometimes  through  irregular,  and  sometimes 
through  greatly  heightened  functional  actions  of  the 
nerve-centers.  The  impressions  which  these  centers 
receive  affect  the  consciousness  at  times  to  a  degree 
greatly  beyond  that  to  which  it  is  accustomed.  This 
may  not,  however,  be  entirely  due  to  the  physiological 
state  of  the  centers  themselves  ;  but  in  many  cases 
probably  the  intensified  consciousness  is  owing  to  a 
general  morbid  condition  of  the  whole  system,  of  which 
the  nerves  of  sensation  make  report,  in  their  own  pecu- 
liar and  unmistakable  way. 

In  nervousness,  the  judgment  itself  suffers  sadly 
from  the  irregular  action  of  the  nervous  system,  for  it 
is  obliged  to  depend,  to  a^  great  extent,  on  the  Evidences 
which  the  senses  afford.  Now,  the  more  the  sensa- 
tions and  feelings  are  excited,  the  greater  becomes 
their  control  over  the  higher  powers  in  council ;  and 
their  perverted  action  insures  wrong  mental  decisions. 
In  nervous  disease,  the  sensorial  powers  immensely 
preponderate,  and  the  whole  man  is  overwhelmed  with 
influences  due  to  the  action  of  a  depraved  and  rampant 
nervous  system. 

It  unfortunately  happens,  that  the  state  of  the  nerves, 
and  consequently  that  of  the  mind,  re-acts  on  the  phys- 
iological condition  in  such  a  way  as  to  perpetuate  this 
condition  of  things  in  spite  of  all  that  can  be  done 
through  the  most  judicious  medical  treatment.     To  the 


264  NERVOUSNESS. 

mind  of  the  suffering  indiyidnal,  no  evidence  in  regard 
to  liis  condition  and  wants  equals  tliat  of  the  senses ; 
and  these  senses  being  perverted,  the  subject  is  con- 
stantly inclined  to  make  improper  choice  of  means  and 
materials  for  the  suj^plj  of  his  wants  and  the  rectifica- 
tion of  his  disorders.  He  eats  improperly,  drinks  im- 
properly, acts  improperly ;  because  the  nerves  that  in 
health  speak  truth,  now  have  taken  to  speaking  falsely. 
Under  the  guise  of  friendship  they  deal  treacherously 
with  him,  and  before  he  well  knows  what  he  is  about, 
he  has  been  led  into  all  sorts  of  errors  and  vices  of 
conduct,  from  the  effects  of  which  it  may  take  him  a 
long  time  to  recover. 

Imperfection  in  the  various  nutritive  actions  has  been 
mentioned  above,  as  a  common  cause  of  nervous  dis- 
orders ;  and  it  was  also  intimated  that  such  diseases  are 
most  liable  to  occur  in  persons  of  intellectual  habits, 
and  of  delicate  and  refined  tastes  and  sensibilities. 
The  reasons  for  this  are  very  obvious.  The  aspirations 
for  honor  or  fame,  fulfilled  or  otherwise,  and  the  per- 
plexities "and  trials  consequent  thereupon,  of  which 
such  persons  are  always  the  subjects,  occasion  a  great 
waste  of  the  vital  power  which  should  go  to  the  nutri- 
tion of  the  organs.  The  intense  ardor,  indeed,  with 
which  afiairs  are  conducted  by  the  great  mass  of  the 
people  of  this  country,  obliges  the  nervous  systems  of 
men  and  women  to  act^  that  is,  to  sufi'er  waste  and 
repair,  to  a  degree  greatly  disproportionate  to  tl  with 
which  actions  proceed  in  the  other  vital  structures. 
The  consequence  of  this  is,  that  the  organic  or  vegeta- 
tive life  of  all  other  tissues  of  the  body  is  depressed. 
A  general  depressed  tone  of  vitality  accompanies  all  ex- 
cessive or  inharmonious  action ;  and  where  the  causes 
continue  to  act,  results  must  follow,  as  we  see  them  in 


NEKVOUSNESS.  265 

the  multiform  nervous  complaints  about  us.  One  thing 
we  may  set  down  as  certain  and  incontrovertible : 
nervous  diseases  do  not  occur  in  the  absence  of  nervous 
abuse.  It  matters  not  how  the  invalid  may  protest  to 
the  contrary  as  respects  his  own  particular  case,  the 
existence  of  the  symptoms  in  question  is  conclusive 
evidence  against  him.  The  ignorance  of  the  sufferer, 
alas !  does  not  reverse  physiological  laws.  That  he  has 
only  been  led  by  the  dicta  of  a  conventional  system  is 
not  a  plea  that  will  serve  to  bring  about  a  commutation 
of  the  sentence  already  pronounced  upon  him.  He  may 
bring  forward  the  evidence  of  the  senses  in  favor  of  his 
habits,  and  the  approval  of  the  consciousness ;  but 
these  arguments  only  prove  a  perverted  state  of  the 
senses,  which  his  bad  habits  have  fostered. 

The  victim  of  this  form  of  disease  is  apt  to  com- 
plain that  his  suffering  is  greater  than  that  occasioned 
by  other  diseases.  He  should  remember  that  the  ar- 
rangements of  his  system  which  give  rise  to  pain  are 
conceived  in  the  highest  wisdom,  that  the  experience 
of  pain  is  designed  in  mercy  by  our  Creator,  and  that 
the  objects  of  such  experience  are  not  fulfilled  till  he 
has  been  stimulated  by  his  sufferings  to  trace  out  their 
sources,  and  thus  enabled  to  pursue  a  wiser  course  in 
future.  In  this  light,  pain  is  really  the  invalid's  kind- 
est instructor,  and  as  strictly  a  blessing  as  enjoyment, 
though  a  blessing  in  disguise.  This  class  of  diseases 
furnishes  to  the  physician  a  deeper  study  than  he  has 
generally  the  time  or  patience  to  investigate  thorough- 
ly, and  the  sufferer  seldom  meets,  from  any  quarter, 
with  the  amount  of  intelligent  sympathy  which  his 
case  deserves. 

The  nervous  powers  may  be  abused,  and  nervous  dis- 
ease induced  by  causes  operating  through  either  the 

12 


266  NERVOUSNESS. 

physical  or  the  mental  system.  The  first  class  of  causes 
affect  the  sensory  nerves,  and  those  of  organic  life,  by 
direct  impressions  made  by  improper  substances.  The 
habitual  use  of  fragrant  and  pnngent  seasonings  and 
inspiring  beverages,  which  are  stimulating  and  tempo- 
rarily refreshing  but  not  nutritious,  is  a  most  common 
mode  of  abusing  the  nerves.  The  organic  needs  of  the 
system  demand  only  materials  that  are  strictly  nutri- 
tive. Whatever  is  received  into  the  stomach  of  a  dif- 
ferent quality  may  impress  the  nerves  and  rouse  their 
action,  and  very  agreeably,  perhaps ;  but  this  action  is  not 
in  the  direction  of,  nor  satisfSdng  to,  the  healthful  wants 
of  the  system.  This  is  so,  because  the  stimulant  sub- 
stance is  not  adapted  to  the  purposes  of  growth  and  de- 
velopment ;  thus  is  established  a  depraved  habit  of  the 
central  nerves,  from  which  spring,  as  from  a  poisoned 
fountain,  those  morbid  feelings,  wrong  thoughts,  and 
insane  judgments  that  characterize  so  many  in  every 
community. 

Another  cause  of  nervous  distemper,  and  perhaps 
quite  as  important  as  any  other,  is  one  perfectly  sim- 
ilar in  mode  of  operation  to  that  last  mentioned,  and 
this  is  medication  in  general.  The  physician,  whether 
he  so  intends  or  not,  addresses  his  remedies  mainly 
to  the  already  too  sensitive  nerves.  For  as  the  percep- 
tion of  suffering  is  mainly  through  these,  so  by  address- 
ing this  department  of  the  organism  is  the  conscious- 
ness of  pain  frequently  most  readily  overcome.  In- 
deed, the  cause,  in  the  estimation  of  both  physician  and 
patient,  is  of  secondary  importance^  but  both  unite  in 
seeking  present  freedom  from  pain,  or  what  in  general 
supplies  the  place  of  it,  obliviousness  to  the  existence  of 
the  morbid  condition.  But  though  quietude,  artih- 
cially  induced,  may  be  graceful  for  the  time,  the  in- 


NERVOUSNESS.  267 

jury  done  to  the  misused  nerves  is  permanent.  Though 
slight  and  almost  inappreciable  at  first,  this  injury  in- 
creases witli  the  repetitions  of  the  cause,  and  a  diseased 
habit,  degrading  the  whole  physiological  and  moral 
man,  is  induced.  This  remark  is  directed  against  no 
particular  method  or  school  of  medication,  but  it  is 
equally  applicable  to  all  systems,  that  of  the  Water- 
Cure  included,  so  far  as  they  seek  to  attain  their  pur- 
poses by  making  strong  impressions  upon  either  the 
internal  or  external  nerves  of  sensation,  or  those  of  or- 
ganic life. 

The  second,  not  perhaps  second  in  importance,  of  the 
two  great  classes  of  causes  affecting  the  health  of  the 
nervous  system,  we  term  the  raental.  If  we  take  de- 
light in  those  pleasures  that  are  derived  through  the 
senses,  those  that  are  obtainable  by  means  of  the  emo- 
tional nature  exercise  an  equal,  or  even  greater,  fasci- 
nation. From  the  sensorial  we  rise  to  the  region  of  the 
feelings,  and  thence  to  that  of  pure  intellect,  but  each 
of  these  fountains  of  enjoyment  depends,  after  all,  upon 
a  material  and  physiological  source  for  supply.  The 
purest,  holiest,  and  most  commendable  impulses  and 
actions,  if  cherished  or  pursued  without  a  wise  regard 
to  physiological  interests,  work  mischief,  and  death  at 
last.  This  is  because  all  the  organic  powers  run  to  the 
support  of  those  actions  which  do  most  loudly  call  for 
them.  Men  are  too  apt  to  shut  themselves  up  in  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  wondrous  tenement  of  their  being. 
Some  domicile  themselves  in  the  emotional,  some  in 
the  intellectual  apartments,  and  never  think  of  occu- 
pying, much  less  of  furnishing  and  keeping  in  order, 
the  other  portions  of  the  building. 

In  this  class  may  be  reckoned  the  multitude  of  hu- 
man desires  and  ambitions  fulliUcd  and  disappointed— 


268  NERVOUSNESS. 

the  perplexities,  jealousies,  and  strifes  incident  to  the 
battle  and  race  of  life,  as  well  as  the  solicitudes,  the 
alternating  hopes  and  fears  resulting  from  the  political, 
moral,  and  religious  movements  in  the  community. 
In  Europe,  where  these  latter  questions  are  questions 
of  the  state,  in  which  the  mass  of  the  people  are  not 
expected  or  allowed  to  take  any  considerable  interest, 
and  where,  also,  the  condition  of  the  people,  as  regards 
the  pursuits  of  life,  is  mainly  fixed,  these  diseases  are 
much  less  prevalent. 

The  causes  above  stated  are  amply  sufficient  to  give 
a  nervous  character  to  the  diseases  of  chronic  invalids. 
Especially  mast  this  be  true,  for  reasons  named,  in  our 
own  country.  The  reader  will  perceive  the  want  of 
relevancy  of  the  ordinary  medical  means  to  meet  the 
exigencies  of  such  cases.  It  is  a  condition  which  dis- 
creet, conscientious  physicians  declare  to  be  beyond  the 
province  of  ordinary  medical  skill,  while  they  still  re- 
gard it  as  amenable  to  the  milder,  yet  more  potent 
influences  of  hygiene,  such  as  change  of  climate,  scenery, 
and  mode  of  life.  Hence,  such  are  the  means  j)rinci- 
pally  advised  by  the  more  experienced  and  careful 
among  physicians,  and  often  with  great  advantage, 
though  it  must  be  confessed,  at  other  times,  with 
wholly  unsatisfactory  results.  It  is  reasonable  to  p]'e- 
sume  that  incapacity  for  restoration  in  the  invalid  is 
Twt  the  cause  of  failure  in  these  attempts,  but  the  real 
cause  of  the  failure  lies  in  the  imperfect  or  improper 
system,  or  to  that  want  of  system  that  characterizes  tlie 
endeavors  of  many  physicians  in  bringing  these  im- 
portant means  to  bear  upon  the  sufferer. 

Those  Avho  have  conceived  a  tolerably  correct  idea  of 
the  character  and  modus  operandi  of  movements  must 
be  convinced  that  they  are  eminently  adapted  to  this 


NERVOUSNESS.  269 

class  of  affections.  Practically,  tlie  treatment  by  move- 
ments operates  with  all  the  certainty  and  directness  of 
effect  of  a  specific.  The  value  of  the  treatment  by  the 
Movement-Cure  has  become  apparent  to  the  thoughtful 
and  scientific  of  many  differing  schools  of  pathology. 

And  why  should  it  not  be  so  ?  If  it  be  conceived  by 
the  practitioner  that  the  indications  for  treatment  in  a 
given  case  are  for  detergents^  most  abundantly  do  the 
movements  supply  the  means  for  accomplishing  these. 
If,  in  another,  the  general  nutrition  needs  to  be  stim- 
ulative, the  movements  furnish  the  means  in  amplest 
measure  for  accomplishing  this.  If  congestion  is  to 
be  removed,  where  will  you  find  instrumentalities  that 
will  do  it  more  readily  and  thoroughly  than  the  move- 
ments ?  If  the  peripheral  circulation  is  to  be  exalted, 
here  are  certain  unfailing  modes  of  securing  this  ob- 
ject. 

The  principles  involved  in  the  Movement-Cure  fur- 
nish a  ready  explanation  of  the  power  exerted  by 
movements  over  the  many  forms  of  nervousness.  The 
doctrine  of  hcdance  or  equipoise.,  in  the  relative  activity 
of  functions,  will  be  more  fully  explained  hereafter. 

The  system  of  movements  has  it  in  its  power  to  elect 
what  function  or  force  shall  predominate  in  the  man 
brought  under  its  influence.  The  several  organic  ac- 
tions may  be,  as  tliose  of  nutrition,  of  the  circulation, 
of  waste,  etc.,  waked  up,  so  to  speak,  by  movements  in 
any  part  or  parts  where  they  have  become  languid  and 
insufiicient,  while  at  the  same  time  undue  action  in 
the  nerves  is  brought  under  control. 

It  is  important  to  notice  that  nervous  symptoms, 
wlien  they  come  on  with  acute  paroxysms,  are  most 
frequently  owing  to  visceral  obstructions  and  derange- 
ments, the  nature  of  which,  though  often  apparent,  are 


2Y0  NERVOUSNESS. 

sometimes  obscure.  A  morbid  change  suddenly  occur- 
ring in  the  contents  of  the  alimentary  canal  may  gen- 
erate a  peculiar  product  that  poisons  the  blood  or  irri- 
tates the  nerve-centers  of  organic  life,  producing  symp- 
toms sometimes  severe  and  occasionally  of  a  strange 
and  fantastic  character.  These  acute  paroxysms  gen- 
erally subside  spontaneously  in  a  short  time,  and  medical 
interference  wit-h  them  is  of  but  little  account,  though 
it  often  gets  a  great  deal  of  undeserved  credit.  The 
treatment  by  movements  should  be  directed  to  the  per- 
fecting of  the  digestive  powers,  to  the  augmentation  of 
the  functional  activity  of  the  liver,  and  to  the  restora- 
tion of  the  secretions  generally.  By  thus  preventing 
the  occurrence  of  the  morbid  conditions  named,  these 
troublesome  attacks  may  be  avoided.  And  if  ever  an 
ounce  of  prevention  is  worth  a  pound  of  cure,  it  surely 
is  found  to  be  so  in  our  experience  of  nervous  disor- 
ders— to  the  patient  particularly.  To  the  doctor^  in- 
deed, especially  if  he  happens  to  be  possessed  of  a 
homeopathically  small  practice,  and  an  infinitesimal 
conscience,  it  may  look  difierently. 

The  Movement-Cure  supplies  the  means  for  arousing 
directly  the  action  of  the  nerves,  but  this  is  not  usually 
called  for  in  these  cases.  Usually  it  is  only  necessary 
to  treat  the  invalid  of  this  class  with  reference  to  his 
general  health,  to  the  condition  of  the  stomach,  liver, 
bowels,  circulation  of  the  head  and  feet,  etc.  The 
patent  disorder  is  usually  a  concomitant  and  symptom 
of  some  other — perhaps  far  graver — affection  which 
the  judicious  and  acute  physician  will  discover,  and 
when  this  is  overcome,  the  nervousness  will  surely — 
gradually,  it  may  be — sometimes  very  quickly — subside. 

If  the  invalid  reader  has  read  carefully  the  chapters 
treating  of  the   rules   and  principles  which   are  laid 


NERVOUSNESS.  271 

down  as  tlie  basis  of  the  movement  practice,  lie  will 
now  be  a])le,  witliont  much  difficulty,  to  frame  a  pre- 
scription suited  to  his  own  particular  case.  We  take 
it  for  granted,  of  course,  that  he  ]30ssesses  a  reasonable 
degree  of  intelligence  and  judgment. 

Seminal  Disease. — This  peculiar  and  distressing  af- 
fection is  an  indication  of  a  diseased  state  of  the  nerves, 
rather  than  of  the  organs  to  which  it  is  commonly  re- 
ferred. It  very  frequently  accompanies  that  state  of 
general  nervousness  described  above;  but  sometimes 
those  nerve-centers  that  are  situated  in  the  lower  sec- 
tion of  the  spinal  cord,  from  which  these  organs  draw 
their  powder,  are  tlie  principal  seat  of  the  trouble.  In 
either  case  there  is  a  very  great  amount  of  mental  de- 
pression and  lassitude  accompanying  this  disease,  the 
person  so  afflicted  being  generally  unfitted  for  busi- 
ness and  society,  and  for  any  of  the  enjoyments  of  life. 
The  abuse  of  this  portion  of  the  nervous  system  prob- 
ably brings  down  upon  the  sufferer  regrets  more  bit- 
ter and  a  remorse  more  stinging  than  that  of  any  oth- 
er— a  fact  which  indicates  the  important  relations  these 
functions  sustain  both  to  the  material  and  the  mental 
system  ;  and  we  all  can  understand  how  it  is  that  intense 
mental  pain  should  make  a  part  of  the  penalty  attached 
by  nature  to  such  abuses.  But,  independently  of  cer- 
tain special  and  well-known  causes,  the  affection  often 
appears  as  one  of  the  resnlts  of  general  nervous  debil- 
ity or  irregular  distribution  of  nerve-power  ;  and  in  all 
cases  its  treatment,  to  be  successful,  must  be  general 
rather  than  topical.  Indeed,  topical  treatment,  in  these 
cases,  is  often  much  worse  than  useless. 

Persons  afflicted  with  these  symptoms  are  commonly 
the  easiest  dupes  in  the  world  of  audacious  charlatanry. 


272  NERVOUSNESS. 

Their  intense  desire  for  restoration  disposes  them  to 
be  credulous,  and  to  grasp  at  straws,  while  the  nec- 
essary weakness  of  the  investigating  faculties  which 
accompanies  the  disease,  alike  unfits  them  for  the  per- 
ception of  their  true  condition  and  for  a  choice  of 
proper  remedial  means.  Thus,  frequently,  the  victim 
continues  to  swallow  nostrums  which,  by  increasing 
the  nervous  irritability  of  his  system,  can  only  aggra- 
vate his  disorder,  till  finally  he  becomes  a  confirmed 
hypochondriac,  or  some  more  formidable  disease  sets 
in,  and  death  ends  his  woes. 

The  prime  indication  in  this  afi'ection  is  to  allay 
nervous  excitability.  The  mode  of  eflecting  this  has 
already  been  pointed  out.  The  treatment  required  in 
this  class  of  cases  does  ..not  differ  essentially  from  that 
required  for  general  nervousness  or  for  neuralgia. 
The  morbid  nutrition  of  the  nerve-centers,  upon  which 
this  and  the  other  forms  of  nervous  disease  depend, 
can  not  be  perpetuated  at  the  same  time  with  full  and 
complete  nutrition  of  the  muscles,  and  the  general  sat- 
isfactory state  of  the  organic  life  which  attends  this 
condition  of  the  muscles.  In  persons  much  emaciated, 
and  especially  those  who  have  passed  far  into  the  hy- 
pochondriacal condition,  the  general  health  must  be  so 
far  restored  that  these  latter  symptoms  shall  disappear 
before  the  difficulty  in  question  can  be  entirely  re- 
moved. But  if  the  health  be  not  too  far  wasted,  the 
relief  of  this  difficulty  is  in  general  very  speedy.  In 
some  cases,  treated  by  duplicated  movements,  the  dis- 
ease has  been  cured  without  difficulty. 

It  can  hardly  be  expected  that  the  single  movements 
will  be  so  efficient  in  the  treatment  of  this  malady  as 
the  duplicated,  in  cases  especially  where  the  nerves  are 
greatly  disordered.     Yet  I  doubt  not  their  judicious 


NERVOUSNESS.  273 

use  would  prove  all-sufficient  in  a  large  number  of 
cases,  if  persons  now  resorting  to  other  expedients — 
expedients  that  can  not  bear  the  test  of  common  sense 
and  true  science — would  but  try  these  simpler  and 
truly  rational  means. 

Neuralgia. — This  is  a  disease  characterized  by  great 
suffering ;  but  it  is  usually  unaccompanied  with  the 
other  ordinary  concomitants  of  inflammation,  such  as 
swelling,  heat,  and  redness,  and  frequently  there  is  an 
absence  even  of  soreness.  Hence  it  is  presumed  that 
the  cause  of  the  pain  is  confined  to  the  nervous  struc- 
ture itself,  and  is  not  referable  to  any  morbid  condi- 
tion of  the  vital  structures  to  which  the  painful  nerve 
is  distributed.  jS'euralgia  may  attack  any  portion  of 
the  body,  whether  internal  or  external ;  it  may  be  con- 
fined to  a  particular  locality,  or  it  may  affect  the  gen- 
eral nervous  system  through  all  its  ramifications. 

To  understand  this  affection  at  all,  it  is  necessary  to 
inquire  first  into  the  nature  and  causes  of  jyain.  As 
this  phenomenon  is  exhibited  by  the  sensory  nerves,  it 
is  evident  that  it  bears  a  relation  to  their  ordinary 
function.  Indeed,  pain,  as  well  as  sensation  in  general, 
has  its  uses,  which  consist  in  informing  the  mind,  not 
only  of  the  nature  of  objects  in  contact  with  the  nerve, 
but  also  of  the  incompatibility  of  certain  of  them  with 
the  vital  purposes. 

We  know  but  little  of  the  chemistry  of  the  inter- 
cellular fluids.  It  is  not  unlikely  that  the  peculiar 
quality  these  juices  in  some  depraved  states  of  the  sys- 
tem acquire  may  give  rise  to  the  symptom  in  question, 
without  sensibly  afl'ecting  vital  structures  of  any  other 
kind.  However  this  may  be,  the  affection  seldom 
yields  to  ordinary  medical  influences ;  but  it  is  gen- 

12^ 


274  NERVOUSNESS. 

erallj  treated  with  reference  merely  to  its  palliation — 
b}'  means  which  obliterate,  for  the  time,  the  conscious- 
ness of  pain,  rather  than  remove  its  cause.  This  can 
be  done  by  stupefying  drugs ;  but,  alas !  the  pain  re- 
turns when  the  effects  of  the  anodyne  pass  off. 

It  is  absurd  to  entertain  the  expectation  that  this  dis- 
ease will  vanish  while  the  nutritive  processes  are  car- 
ried on  in  an  imperfect  way.  The  system  must  be 
relieved  of  its  burden  of  effete  matter,  and  arterial 
blood,  rich  in  oxygen,  must  again  find  its  way  freely  to 
every  structure  before  any  permanent  benefit  can  be 
experienced. 

How  it  is  that  movements  effect  the  removal  of  neu- 
ralgic pain,  will  be  obvious  upon  a  little  reflection. 
The  analogies  afforded  by  certain  physiological  phe- 
nomena throw  light  upon  this  matter.  For  instance, 
the  amount  of  force  put  forth  by  a  muscle  corresponds 
with  the  amount  of  change  that  takes  place  in  that 
muscle  during  its  action.  In  like  manner  we  argue 
from  manifestations  of  nervous  power  the  extent  of  the 
changes  going  on  in  the  substance  of  the  nerves,  both 
centers  and  conductors.  Pain,  however  severe,  is  but 
the  result  of  functional  play,  and  is  the  representative 
of  nerve-power,  and  consequently  of  nutritive  change 
in  the  inner  tissue  of  the  nerve  itself.  If  the  nerve  be 
so  much  diseased,  or  have  undergone  such  a  structural 
change  as  not  to  be  able  to  perform  its  function,  one  is 
no  longer  conscious  of  pain  in  the  part.  Pain,  then,  is 
not  simply  a  result  of  action,  but  of  excessive  action  of 
the  nerves  in  the  direction  in  which  they  manifest 
their  power,  and  it  consequently  implies  excessive, 
though  perhaps  perverted,  nutrition  of  the  nerve-sub- 
stance. 

The   therapeutic  indications   deducible  from    these 


NERVOUSNESS.  276 

principles  are  plain.  Tlie  restoration  of  nervous  action 
to  the  healthy  standard  depends  on  a  depression  of  the 
activity  of  the  nerves  involved.  This  efiect  readily  fol- 
lows the  excitement  of  muscular  action.  For  it  is 
found  that  in  proportion  to  the  increase  of  the  nervous 
activity,  is  there  an  abatement  of  muscular  nutrition. 
The  limb  afflicted  with  sciatica  becomes  weak,  and  it 
is  noticeable  that  the  neuralgic  subject  generally  has 
but  little  muscular  power ;  the  nutritive  effort  is  con- 
centrated upon  the  excited  nerves.  That  this  pervert- 
ed nutrition  of  the  nerve-substance  is  an  important 
element  in  neuralgia  is  forcibly  proved  by  the  imme- 
diate subsidence  oftentimes  of  neuralgic  pain  when  the 
activity  of  contiguous  muscles  has  become  exalted. 
That  this  is  so  is  unquestionable,  whatever  theory  may 
be  adopted  in  regard  to  the  philosophy  of  the  matter. 
It  is  a  most  significant  fact  that  robust  people  are  but 
little  liable  to  attacks  of  neuralgia.  Those  most  afflict- 
ed with  the  disease  in  question,  are  the  weakly ;  those 
who  have  imperfect  digestion,  sallow  complexions,  and 
are  poorly  nourished.  To  perfect  the  nutritive  opera- 
tions, we  consider  the  most  imj)ortant  indication  in  our 
treatment  of  these  cases.  To  effect  this  purpose,  the 
movements  are  entirely  sufficient.  By  these  the  func- 
tions of  the  outlets  of  the  body  are  encouraged,  and 
waste  matters  are  dismissed  ;  so  that  those  matters 
wanted  from  the  alimentary  canal,  to  subserve  nutri- 
tive purposes,  are  selected  and  conveyed  by  the  blood 
to  their  various  points  of  destination.  This  is  espe- 
cially the  case  with  those  saline  elements  of  the  blood, 
without  which  the  organizing  processes  can  not  take 
place. 

The  most  painful  cases  of  neuralgia  are  those  attribu- 
table to  mineral  poisoning,  incident  to  the  practice  of 


276  NERVOUSNESS. 

various  trades,  such  as  the  working  of  gold  with  mer- 
cury, or  other  metals,  or  their  salts.  The  use  of  mineral 
drugs,  as  a  medicine,  is  also  a  fruitful  source  of  this 
affection.  Many  a  person,  in  consequence  of  a  course 
of  mercury,  is  ever  after  subjected  to  attacks  of  neu- 
ralgia. Even  in  these  obstinate  cases,  the  movements 
would  probably  prove  useful,  since  no  other  means  are 
so  effectual  as  these  in  dislodging  and  conveying  foreign 
matters  from  the  system. 

The  prescription  for  a  case  of  neuralgia  should  be  so 
arranged  as  not  only  to  include  every  part  of  tlie  body, 
affecting  all  the  blood-purifying  and  blood-making  pro- 
cesses, but  especially  so  as  to  act  upon  the  part  subject 
to  pain.  With  duplicated  movements  the  application 
can  be  nicely  adjusted  to  the  needs  of  the  local  nutri- 
tion, and  an  important  part  of  the  prescription  will  be 
the  passive  element,  consisting  of  stroking,  clapping, 
punching,  etc.,  as  the  case  may  require.  The  single 
movements  will  be  the  next  best  substitute,  and  the 
passive  portion  may  be  applied  by  one's  self  to  such 
regions  of  the  body  as  can  thus  be  reached.  It  is  not 
necessary  to  say  that  when  the  neuralgic  disorder  is 
local,  such  movements  should  be  chosen  as  will  act  on 
the  muscles  of  the  part,  especially  upon  those  near  to 
the  seat  of  the  pain. 


SCROFULOUS   AFFECTIONS.  277 


SCROFULOUS    AFFECTIOISrS. 

The  scrofulous  diathesis  manifests  itself  in  a  great 
variety  of  symptoms,  differing  according  to  constitution 
and  age.  In  children,  it  is  denoted  by  a  peculiar  pallor 
of  countenance,  dullness  of  complexion,  liypertrophied 
or  inflamed  mesenteric  glands,  and  tumid  abdomen, 
bowels  alternately  loose  and  costive,  capricious  appe- 
tite— frequently  too  urgent — shrunken  limbs,  fetid 
breath,  indisposition  for  play.  Eruptions  of  various 
kinds  may  occur  upon  the  skin  of  the  face  or  other 
parts  of  the  body,  and  swellings  upon  or  about  the 
neck  of  an  indolent  character  often  appear.  The  scrof- 
ulous child  often  presents  a  haggard,  almost  wild  ap- 
pearance, and  its  blue  veins  are  painfully  prominent. 
Sometimes  the  head  becomes  abnormally  developed, 
accompanied  occasionally  by  a  precocity  of  intellect, 
which  may  be  accounted  for  by  the  larger  amount  of 
nutrition  diverted  to  the  head,  in  consequence  of  im- 
pediments in  the  peripheral  circulation,  while  the  ex- 
tremities are  at  the  same  time  illy  nourished.  'Not 
infrequently  serous  effusion  and  death  by  dropsy  are 
the  final  results  of  this  unnatural  flow  of  blood  and 
nervous  influence  to  the  head. 

In  youth,  the  most  striking  symptoms  of  the  affection 
are  enlarged  glands  of  the  neck,  fragility  of  form,  nar- 
rowness of  the  chest,  and  a  strong  tendency  to  cough 


278  SCKOFULOUS    AFFEC'lIONS. 

and  lung  disease,  which  not  unfrequeutly  terminate  in 
pnhnonaiy  consumption. 

In  adults,  the  morbid,  action  is  apt  to  center  in  the 
lungs,  in  disease  which,  as  commonly  treated,  is  gen- 
erally incurable. 

The  intelligent  reader  hardly  needs  to  be  told  that 
in  this  malady  there  is  a  period  anterior  to  that  of  its 
outward  manifestation,  when  it  exists  in  an  unrecog- 
nized and  latent  form,  and  is  associated  immediately 
with  its  producing  causes,  when  vicious  physiological 
action  is  clearly  seen  to  depend  upon  vicious  atomic 
relations  ;  a  period,  in  short,  when  sufficient  knowledge 
and  a  correct  practice  would  furnish  an  effectual  bar  to 
its  further  progress.  But  as  such  knowledge  is  only 
acquired  under  the  spur  of  feelings  resulting  from  the 
presence  of  the  disease  in  its  developed  state,  we  must 
be  content  to  bring  into  requisition  as  curative^  means 
that  ought  to  have  ^yqx^^  pre^Dentlve. 

It  is  evident  that  in  this  disease  the  results  of  the 
vital  processes  are  incompletely  attained.  The  mesen- 
teric glands  and  lymphatic  vessels  become  clogged 
with  the  materials  of  an  imperfect  nutrition,  while  the 
skin  and  lungs  execute  their  functions  in  an  unsatis- 
factor}"  manner.  The  result  is,  either  that  the  nutri- 
tive elements  become  imperfectly  vitalized,  or  else  that 
the  matters  destined  to  be  cast  out  as  waste  from  the 
system,  fail  to  become  converted  into  the  usual  soluble 
forms  of  carbonic  acid,  water,  and  urea,  the  legitimate 
products  of  these  important  processes.  Hence  occur 
the  excess  of  albuminous  material,  and  the  imperfect 
and  irregular  cells  that  characterize  the  scrofulous  de- 
posits of  the  lungs,  glandular  system,  etc.  Disease 
being  essentially  incomplete  or  ineffectual  action  (pa- 
thology being  simply  a  modified  physiology),  it  can 


SCROFULOUS    AFFi:CTiOXS.  279 

occur  only  tlirougli  defect  of  the  conditions  essential  to 
the  2:)erfect  development  of  the  system  in  all  its  parts 
and  functions.  The  nature  of  the  mischievous  agents 
that  concur  in  the  production  of  these  conditions  is 
learned  only  by  a  study  of  the  disease  during  its  de- 
A-elopment  and  subsequent  progress. 

In  this  way  we  discover  among  the  prominent  causes 
of  this  disease,  insufficiency  of  pure  air^  lights  and  ex- 
ercise^ and  want  of  cleanliness. 

We  have  only  to  look  into  the  abodes  of  poverty  and 
squalor  for  confirmation  of  this  statement.  Every  city 
physician  has  abundant  opportunities  for  studying  all 
forms  of  this  disease  in  connection  with  these  causes. 

But  the  wealthy,  and  those  who  have  it  in  their 
power  to  command  the  conditions  of  health,  are  quite 
as  apt  to  be  afflicted  with  scrofula  in  one  or  other 
of  its  forms,  and  in  their  case  it  is  evidently  the  result 
of  the  same  causes  that  produce  it  among  the  poor. 
For  the  real  hygienic  condition  of  those  whose  circum- 
stances and  social  position  are  so  ditierent,  are  often 
very  much  alike.  For  while  the  one  class  is  deprived 
of  fresh  air  and  sunlight  by  being  confined  in  low  and 
crowded  localities,  the  other  suffers  an  equal  depriva- 
tion through  the  agency  of  shutters,  heavy  window- 
drapery,  and  interior  rooms,  aggravated  by  the  choking 
dust  and  corrupt  air,  which  are  the  inevitable  con- 
comitants of  fashionable  upholstery  and  cai-peting.  In 
both  cases,  respiration  is  rendered  ineffectual,  through 
lack  of  healthful  motion  and  purity  of  the  air,  and 
these  effects  are  aggravated  by  want  of  exercise  and 
good  habits  on  the  part  of  the  persons  thus  exposed. 

We  must  call  the  reader's  attention  to  the  fact,  that 
it  is  not  the  uncleanness  which  is  external  to  the  body 
that  exercises  the  most  deleterious  influence  upon  the 


280  SCKOFULOUS    AFFECTIONS. 

health.  It  is  not  till  matters  foreign  to  the  j)nrposes 
of  the  body  become  constituents  of  its  substance,  that 
they  can  interfere  to  any  great  extent  with  the  vital 
operations.  The  liability  of  being  poisoned  through  the 
lungs  is  evidently  immeasurably  greater  than  of  being 
poisoned  through  the  skin,  for  volatile  and  soluble 
poisons  are  brought  in  contact  with  the  blood  through 
the  one  avenue,  while  through  the  other  there  can  pen- 
etrate only  insoluble  and  solid  matters.  Indeed,  no 
amount  and  thoroughness  of  washing  and  bathing  are 
etfectual  if  other  habits  are  such  as  to  preclude  a  free 
access  of  air  to  the  skin  and  lungs.  There  are  no  hy- 
gienic or  medical  procedures  which  can  possibly  com- 
pensate, or  begin  to  compensate,  for  this  want.  Thor- 
ough cleanliness  preserves  the  blood  as  well  as  the 
external  cuticular  covering  uncontaminated.  The  illy 
clad  children  of  the  street,  though  they  may  suffer  un- 
told deprivations,  and  be  subjected  to  the  most  un- 
wholesome dietetic  regimen,  yet  for  the  most  part 
enjoy  good  health  ;  because,  though  unwashed,  they 
are  essentially  purified  within  through  the  wholesome 
effect  of  the  air  to  which  they  are  through  so  many 
hours  of  the  day  exposed  ;  while  the  occupants  of  the 
dark  and  dusty  chamber  (a  luxurious  one,  it  may  be) 
are  sickly  and  scrofulous  from  the  contrary  condition 
of  things.  Even  the  dumb  animal,  caged  and  treated 
after  a  similar  cruel  fashion,  suffers  from  scrofula  and 
consumption,  and  manifests  symptoms  throughout  the 
progress  of  the  disease  similar  to  those  under  which 
his  lellow  human  sufferer  languishes. 

The  interesting  question  in  regard  to  the  origin  of 
scrofula  is  frequently  broached.  There  is  no  doubt 
but  that  hereditary  influences  may  j)roperly  be  recog- 
nized as  among  the  most  important  conditions  deter- 


SCROFULOUS    AFFECTIONS.  281 

mining  this  form  of  disease.  For  the  original  form  of 
the  body  is  undoubtedly  inherited,  and  the  narrow 
chest  of  the  scrofulous  child  not  less  than  the  color  of 
his  eyes  or  contour  of  his  face.  But  the  practice  of  the 
Movement-Cure  instructs  us  that  the  shape  and  size  of 
the  members  and  regions  of  the  body  may  be  wonder- 
fully modified  by  judicious  training,  as  may  the  slight- 
er temporary  or  local  effects  of  physiological  lapses  be 
counteracted  by  appropriate  medical  means.  There 
is,  indeed,  much  reason  to  believe  that  if  all  the  con- 
ditions of  health  were  supplied  to  the  greatest  extent 
possible,  they  would  quite  neutralize  the  power,  im- 
mense as  it  is,  of  bad  hereditary  influences,  and  re- 
store the  faulty  constitution,  after  a  generation  or  two, 
to  its  pristine  vigor.  But  we  all  know  how  fearfully 
rapid  is  the  decline  of  persons  of  originally  defective 
constitution,  when  subjected  to  unfavorable  influences. 
The  knowledge  of  such  quicksands  in  the  channel  of 
life  should  be  effectual  in  inciting  persons  to  make  that 
acquaintance  with  the  physiological  chart  that  shall 
enable  them  to  avoid  the  dangers  that  are  ever  threat- 
ening to  wreck  them  or  their  j)Osterity  after  them. 

With  the  indications  for  the  treatment  of  scrofula 
that  are  derived  from  a  careful  examination  of  its 
causes,  it  is  strange  that  that  such  palliatives  of  symp- 
toms as  gross  animal  oils,  alcoholic  and  narcotic  stim- 
ulants, iodine,  etc.,  should  ever  have  been  proposed  as 
curatives.  How,  we  ask,  can  any  agent  prove  cura- 
tive while  the  causes  above  mentioned  continue  to  op- 
erate in  full  force?  "Wliat  is  evidently  required  is, 
the  securing  of  a  greater  degree  of  energy  in  all  the 
formative  or  organic  actions  of  the  system.  Especially 
must  those  agencies  which  favor  the  oxydizing  pro- 
cesses in  the  blood  and  solid  tissues  be  brought  into 


282  SCKOFULOUS    AFFECTIONS. 

active  play,  sucli  as  lights  exercise^  and  wliolesome  and 
invigorating  food.  With  these  indications  fulfilled, 
there  are  no  others  left  for  the  drng  to  accomplish,  i 
Tiirongli  the  assimilation  of  oil  or  spirits,  the  disease 
may  be  temporarily  masked,  and  iodine,  holding  mncli 
the  same  chemical  relation  to  the  system  as  oxygen, 
only  less  potent,  may  do  some  good,  bnt  it  mnst  needs 
be  temporary  and  uncertain. 

Movements  affect  the  scrofulous  subject  more  like  a 
specific  than  any  other  known  means.  They  give  di- 
rection and  energy  to  the  vitalizing  processes  thi-ough- 
out  the  body,  cause  a  renewal  of  the  fluids  of  the 
clogged  glandular  system,  and  so  relieve  glandular 
congestion,  and  are  the  most  direct  and  powerful 
means  for  supplying  oxygen  to  the  impoverished  blood. 
In  this  way  the  non-vitalized  and  imj^erfectly  vitalized 
matters  of  the  blood,  and  of  the  body  generally,  are 
reduced,  and  the  system  relieved  from  them  ;  the 
chest  is  enlarged,  and  the  power  of  the  system  to  con- 
tinue its  multiform  operations  in  a  healthful  manner, 
maintained  and  augmented. 

The  scrofulous  subject  needs  to  press  into  his  service 
every  available  hygienic  resource.  He  can  not  effectual- 
ly combat  the  advancing  disease  simply  by  attending  to 
one  or  two  particulars  of  remedial  hygiene.  By  so  doing 
he  will  be  as  apt  to  encourage  the  approaches  of  the 
malady  as  to  oppose  them.  He  should  jDarticularly 
heed  such  suggestions  as  we  have  advanced  under  the 
head  of  Hygiene,  regarding  abstinence  from  all  drugs, 
condiments,  heating  beverages,  stimulauts,  etc.,  and 
should  adhere  to  a  simple  nutritious  diet,  selecting 
such  food  as  possesses  tlie  particular  elements  he  needs. 
He  must  not  compel  his  digestive  apparatus  to  reduce 
needless  matters  to  the  necessary  forms  in  which  they 


SCKOFULOUS    AFFECTIONS.  283 

may  find  their  exit  from  the  body  ;  for  all  such  mat- 
ters require  the  oxygen  that  might  and  ought  to  be 
employed  in  eliminating  the  disease. 

The  strength,  in  these  cases,  is  generally  already  im- 
paired, and  the  patient,  consequently,  should  avoid 
such  exercises  as  tend  to  exhaust  the  physical  powers. 
Iliding  and  driving  are  particularly  beneficial  to  liim, 
because,  while  so  engaged,  he  is  not  only  in  contact 
with  the  best  air  constantly  renewed,  but  the  shaking 
that  he  thus  gets  is  particularly  useful  in  assisting  the 
clogged  and  sluggish  circulation,  both  of  the  glandu- 
lar system  and  of  the  general  capillaries.  Long  jour- 
neys, if  the  circumstances  of  the  patient  permit  of 
such  indulg-'ence,  are  highly  useful,  because  thereby 
the  above-mentioned  advantages  are  not  only  secured, 
but  they  are  continued  for  a  length  of  time.  Besides, 
the  invalid  is  thus  carried  beyond  the  sphere  of  the 
particular  influences  that  at  first  planted  and  afterward 
served  to  foster  his  disease.  We  can  not  be  too  ex- 
plicit or  emphatic  upon  this  point. 

It  has  been  noticed  that  in  this  disease,  as  in  con- 
sumption, want  of  compass  in  the  breathing  organs  is  a 
prominent  impediment  to  recovery,  though  it  is  proba- 
ble that  defective  action  of  these  organs  is  the  more 
common  one.  The  deficiency  in  dimensions  may  be 
either  congenital  or  acquired.  In  either  case  it  is  sus- 
ceptible of  remedy,  and  it  should  be  one  of  the  first 
objects  of  our  attention  in  entering  upon  the  treatment 
of  such  a  case,  whether  the  subject  be  either  child, 
youth,  or  adult.  The  circumference  of  the  chest  and 
waist  may  be  astonishingly  increased  by  proper  dis- 
ciplinaiy  measures,  and  the  several  cubic  inches  of 
increased  capacity  that  is  thus  afforded  to  the  lungs  of 
course  increases  the  respiratoi-y  ability  in  a  conimen- 


284  SCROFULOUS    AFFECTION'S. 

surate  degree.  The  change  in  the  health  for  the  better, 
after  entering  upon  snch  a  course,  immediately  becomes 
manifest.  The  food  is  thereby  not  only  reduced  to 
fluidity,  and  enabled  to  pass  the  digestiv^e  surfaces  into 
the  blood,  but  becomes  transformed  into  the  healthy 
vital  element  of  the  body,  instead  of  those  low  organic 
forms  which  afford  an  obstruction,  instead  of  an  assist- 
ance to  the  healthy  growth  of  the  system.  A  higher 
vital  tone  and  energy  is  thus  secured,  and  good  health 
is  the  natural  and  necessary  consequence. 

The  duplicated  movements  are  demanded  if  the  case 
be  a  formidable  one,  and  these  should  be  continued  for 
several  weeks,  or  until  evidences  of  improvement  be- 
come apparent.  At  a  later  day,  or  even  to  begin  with, 
if  the  illness  be  not  severe,  the  single  movements  may 
be  employed  with  profit. 

The  movements  prescribed  for  a  scrofulous  patient 
should  be  similar  to  those  recommended  for  pulmonary 
affections,  but  they  may  from  the  first  be  used  some- 
what more  energetically.  All  portions  of  the  body 
should  be  included  in  the  movements  taken,  so  that  all 
the  organs  and  functions  of  the  system  may  share  the 
effect.  But  the  sjpecial  indication,  or  indications,  of  the 
case  should  not  be  slighted.  If  there  be  a  tendency 
of  blood  to  the  head  or  w^eakness  of  eyes,  the  prescrip- 
tion should  begin  with  movements  for  the  lower  ex- 
tremities, afterward  for  the  arms  and  chest.  If  there 
be  constipation,  movements  adapted  to  this  particular 
complaint  should  be  included.  If  there  be  no  special 
indications,  it  should  begin  with  movements  for  the 
chest. 

The  following  fornmla  will  serve  as  an  example  : 

1.  Wing  sitting,  feet  rotation.     7. 

2.  Stride  sittino^,  arms  twistine;.     65. 


SCROFULOUS    AFFECTIONS.  285 

3.  Swing  holding,  rotating.     75. 

4.  Stride-kneeling,  swaying.     39. 

5.  Doorway-stretch,  span-standing,  walking.     58. 

6.  Stretch-kneeling,  trunk  rocking.     45. 

T.  Heel-support  kneeling,  trunk  forward  falling.   12. 

8.  Support  half-standing,  leg  rotating.     23. 

9.  Half-stretch,  half-wing  stride-sitting,  trunk-twist- 
ing. Change.     37. 

10.  Backward-stretch  lying,  weight  holding.     68. 


286  PULMONARY   AFFECTIONS — CONSUMPTION. 


PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS— CONSUMPTION. 

The  principles  of  the  Movemeiit-Cure  cast  new  and  ; 
important  light  upon  the  nature  of  most  of  the  grave  ■ 
affections  belonging  to  this  class.  By  simplifying  the  ! 
pathology  of  these  diseases  the  patient  can  be  brought  i 
to  understand,  as  well  as  the  physician,  if  he  will  read  ' 
with  care,  the  suggestions  that  are  made,  and  the  value  • 
of  the  practice  here  taught  will  be  demonstrated  at  i 
every  step.  We  give  the  outlines  of  a  treatment  ap-  '■ 
propriate,  direct,  and  efficacious — a  treatment  satisfac-  < 
tory  to  both  patient  and  physician.  The  practice  of  i 
movements  affords  new  indications  to  the  practitioner,  ' 
as  well  as  furnishes  new  means  for  fulfilling  such  as  ! 
are  recognized  by  the  schools.  ' 

Yiewed  in  the  light  (or  darkness)  afforded  by  ordinary  i 
medical  science,  the  diseases  that  we  are  now  consider-  ^ 
ing  are  involved  in  much  mystery.  Those  thus  afflict-  ' 
ed,  as  is  well  known,  almost  infallibly  continue  to  de- 
cline, in  spite  of  the  most  vigorous  application  of  all  the  ■ 
means  known  to  and  recommended  by  the  highest  medi-  ! 
cal  authorities  of  the  land.  Persons  possessed  of  what  ; 
is  termed  the  "  consumptive  habit,"  are  regarded  as 
fated,  even  before  the  disease  makes  its  appearance  in  I 
any  decided  manner.  This  fact  indicates  the  extent  ; 
of  our  knowledge  of  the  pathology  of  these  cases,  and  ' 
it  takes  no  argument  to  show  that  the  conditions  from 


PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS — CONSUMPTION.  287 

which  originate  the  disease  in  question,  are  miserably 
misunderstood. 

A  too  common  reference  of  the  disease  to  remote 
and  intangible  causes  disposes  of  the  case  and  pre- 
cludes further  investigation.  Thus,  people  are  in  the 
habit  of  saying,  and  with  a  learned  look  sometimes, 
that  such  subjects  have  originally  defective  constitu- 
tions^ are  exposed  to  a  poisoned  atmosphere,  inhabit 
'  unfavorable  localities,  are  unfortunately  endowed  with 
too  great  intellectual  activity,  etc.,  without  explaining 
how  it  is  that  the  constitutions  of  some  persons  and  not 
of  others  are  affected  by  these  circumstances.  Physi- 
cians, taking  advantage  of  popular  ignorance  and  mis- 
conceptions, content  themselves  with  pleasing  their 
patients  by  the  exhibition  of  all  sorts  of  injurious  palli- 
atives, and  resort  to  devices  that  at  the  best  but  do  the 
sufferers  some  temporary  good.  The  short-sighted  and 
hopeful  invalid  is  satisfied  to  be  made  to  feel  hetter  for 
the  time,  and  often  mistakes  the  transient  relief  for  Re- 
turning health.  The  plan  of  treatment  commonly  pur- 
sued is  effectual  for  vailing  the  real  nature  and  rela- 
tions of  these  affections  from  the  minds  of  both  phy- 
sician and  patient,  '^o  wonder  that  such  small  pro- 
gress is  made  in  the  pathology  and  treatment  of  these 
diseases,  or  that  nostrums  and  quacks,  and  their  vic- 
tims, should  so  abound  in  the  community !  The  poor 
invalid,  to  be  sure,  is  troubled  at  times  with  many  sad 
doubts  in  regard  to  the  efficacy  of  these  cure-alls^  and 
he  goes,  tossed  by  his  doubts,  from  one  nostrum  to  an- 
other, and  sometimes  will  swallow  a  dozen  at  once, 
supposing  that  in  so  doing  he  is  increasing  the  chances 
of  hitting  upon  the  right  thing  at  last.  By  such  whole- 
sale dosing  the  poor  victim  is  rapidly  and  surely  get- 
ting rid  of  whatever  restorative  capacity  the  ravages 


28S  PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 

of  disease  may  have  left  him.  And  so  it  generally 
happens,  that  between  popular  and  professional  igno- 
rance, and  the  empiricism  that  is  the  result  of  both, 
persons  threatened  with  diseases  of  the  lungs  seldom 
escape  a  fatal  termination. 

We  ought  not  to  expect  curative  effects  which  are 
real  and  permanent  in  diseases  of  this  class,  unless  we 
direct  our  treatment  point  blank  at  the  radical  causes. 
It  will  avail  us  little  to  attend  exclusively  to  the 
symptoms  as  they  appear,  looking  for  nothing  beyond 
these.  We  must  trace  out  the  circumstances,  and  phys- 
ical, mental,  and  social  conditions  in  wdiich  the  disease 
has  its  origin,  and  settle  ourselves  in  the  conviction, 
that  no  medical  means  whatsoever,  that  fall  short  of  re- 
moving these,  can  be  of  any  positive  and  permanent 
service.  Then,  and  not  till  then,  we  shall  be  prepared 
to  combat  with  remedies  of  unquestionable  applicability 
and  potency  those  incipient  forms  of  the  disease  which, 
when  the  subject  is  only  under  the  influence  of  pallia- 
tives, must  inevitably  pursue  a  regular  and  destructive 
course  of  growth. 

My  observations  in  pulmonary  afiections — and  they 
have  been  extensive — have  brought  me  to  the  conclu- 
sion, that  the  tendency  to  ijuhnonary  affections  is  al- 
ways in  inverse  ratio  to  the  amount  of  respiratory 
power.  My  belief  in  this  doctrine,  which  is  now  daily 
gaining  converts,  is  amply  confirmed  by  evidence  both 
of  a  physiological  and  pathological  character.  There 
is  no  dispute  in  regard  to  the  nature  and  relations  of 
the  morphological  products  of  the  disease,  nor  as  to  its 
general  diagnostic  features,  and  what  may  seem  to  be 
exceptions  to  the  above  rule,  are  found  upon  further 
investigation  rather  to  confirm  it  than  otherwise. 

1.  One  of  the  first  signs  confirmatory  of  this  view 


PULMONARY   AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION.  289 

of  tlie  disease  is  the  greatly  diminished  size  of  tne  chesty 
noticeable  in  those  in  whom  chronic  pulmonary  disease 
has  resulted  fatally.  I  have  been  at  the  pains  to  make 
careful  examination  of  the  skeletons  of  a  number  of  per- 
sons known  to  have  died  of  consumption,  and  found 
the  circumference  of  the  chest  to  be  from  three  to  five 
inches  less  than  that  in  persons  of  the  same  height, 
who  died  of  other  diseases.  In  the  frequent  measure- 
ments made  by  me  in  the  treatment  by  movements,  I 
have  found  the  same  fact  to  exist  invariably ;  the  con- 
sumptive is  always  either  narrow-chested  or  else  de- 
formed, one  side  (that  diseased)  being  shrunken.  This 
condition  of  things  is  so  patent  to  all  observers,  that  a 
resort  to  measurements  to  prove  it  has  seemed  super- 
fluous. 

2.  Another  invariable  condition  attendant  upon  this 
disease  is  diminished  mobility  of  the  walls  of  the  chest. 
The  chest  seems,  sometimes,  to  heave  with  considerable 
force,  but  a  closer  observation  shows  that  the  motion  is 
confined  to  a  limited  portion  of  its  walls,  while  the 
average  extent  of  motion  is  less,  generally  very  much 
less,  than  normal.  The  change  is  always  apparent  in 
the  relative  extent  of  the  inspiratory  and  expiratory 
movements,  but  the  observer  is  apt  to  be  deceived  in 
regard  to  the  total  amount  of  mobility  of  the  breathing 
organs.  The  efficiency  of  the  respiratory  act  is  far 
from  being  in  exact  proportion  to  the  amount  of  effort 
made  to  effect  this  act.  The  necessity  for  effort  proves 
the  presence  of  an  impediment  to  the  performance  of 
ihe  act,  as  well  as  the  fact  that  the  amount  of  respira- 
tion is  less  than  the  system  requires. 

3.  Tlie  increased  frequency  of  the  pulse  is  an  evidence 
of  the  diminished  efficiency  of  the  respiratory  apparatus. 
The  action  of  the  circulatory  organ  is  not  under  the 


290  PULMONAEY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 

direct  control  of  tlie  will,  and  it  is  a  law  of  the  economy 
that  the  circulation,  or  at  least  the  activity,  of  the  ar- 
terial system  increases  with  the  increased  need  of  the 
system  for  oxygen ;  as,  for  instance,  in  a  healthy  per- 
son during  strong  exertion  either  of  the  muscles  or  of 
the  hrain.  The  principle  holds  as  well  in  disease, 
which  in  fact  is,  as  we  have  said,  but  metamorphosed 
physiological  action.  When  the  respiration  has  for  a 
time  been  imperfect,  as  under  the  influence  of  an  ele- 
vated temperature,  or  through  the  ingestion  of  too  great 
a  quantity  of  food,  the  pulse  of  respiration  afterward 
raj)idly  quickens,  so  as  to  bring  the  blood  more  speedily 
and  thoroughly  in  contact  with  oxygen.  This  is  one 
of  the  conditions  in  acute  disease.  Similar  effects  are 
brought  about  by  drugs.  So  also  when,  by  disease 
of  the  lungs,  the  respiratory  capacity  is  materially  di- 
minished, or  when,  through  a  want  of  due  development 
of  the  muscles  engaged  in  the  respiratory  act,  the 
amount  of  air  breathed  is  too  sin  all,  the  pulse  neces- 
sarily becomes  quicker,  in  orde.  to  insure  the  contact 
of  the  blood  and  air  along  the  diminished  respiratory 
surface. 

4.  The  pulse  becomes  slower,  and  a  sense  of  relief 
and  rest  is  always  experienced,  by  any  accident  or 
device  that  facilitates  the  aeration  of  the  blood.  This 
object  is  often  secured  by  a  removal  of  the  invalid  to 
a  locality  where  there  is  exposure  of  the  person  to  winds, 
as  for  instance,  to  the  Western  prairies,  to  southern 
climes,  to  islands  of  the  sea.  An  ocean  voyage  is  often 
of  great  benefit.  If  an  invalid  suffering  from  hectic  rides 
on  a  fair  day  in  a  carriage,  his  pulse  becomes  appreciably 
slower.  K  a  consumptive  be  exposed  to  an  increase 
of  atmospheric  pressure  of  six  or  eight  pounds  to  the 
square  inch,  the  pulse  is  also  retarded,  because  this 


PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION.  291 

pressure  facilitates  the  changes  eitected  in  respiration. 
Herein  lies  the  efficacy  of  what  is  termed  the  com- 
jpressed  air  hath.  Thus  the  most  distressing  syin]> 
toms,  in  the  several  forms  of  pulmonary  disease,  are 
shown  to  arise  from  insufficient  respiration, 

5.  Another  and  hardly  less  conclusive  evidence  of 
the  truth  of  the  doctrine  here  laid  down  is  found  in 
the  means  required  to  overcome  this  disease.  If  move- 
ments are  made  to  serve  the  purpose  of  increasing  the 
aerating  power  of  the  lungs,  the  pulses  are  found  soon 
to  decrease  in  frequency,  the  strength  begins  to  re- 
turn, and  all  the  more  distressing  symptoms  gradually 
abate,  and  in  a  degree  proportionate  to  the  amount  of 
energy  imparted  to  the  respiratory  efforts.  Even  dur- 
ing a  single  trial  of  a  prescription  of  duplicated  move- 
ments, the  pulse  will  often  fall  ten  or  more  beats  per 
minute.  If  they  are  followed  up,  the  capacity  of  the 
chest  soon  begins  to  augment,  and  along  with  this  in- 
crease of  breathing  power  various  cheering  signs  appear. 

The  amount  of  air  ]-espired  in  a  chest  collapsed 
by  disease  or  disuse,  compared  with  the  amount  re- 
spired after  being  expanded  and  strengthened  by 
training  it,  would  be  very  difficult  to  compute,  even 
approximately.  This  increase  of  efficiency  is  the  effect 
of  two  causes  acting  conjointly  ;  one  of  these  is  the  in- 
creased amount  of  residual  air  contained  by  the  lungs  ; 
the  other,  the  increased  amount  of  motion  secured  to 
the  walls  of  the  chest  and  the  diaphragm.  If  we  sup- 
pose that  by  this  gain  in  their  mobility  the  lungs  are 
enabled  to  admit  only  a  single  inch  more  of  air  at 
each  respiration,  in  the  coui-se  of  the  day,  the  increase 
would  amount  to  fifteen  cubic  feet !  Even  this  trifling 
amount  of  increase  in  respiratory  power,  the  reader  can 
readily  conceive,  would  be  capable  of  effecting  a  great 


292  PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 

change  in  the  quality  of  the  blood  and  the  general  nu- 
trition of  the  system.  But  when  this  is  multiplied  by 
several  cubic  inches — a  result  often  attained — the  good 
accomplished  is  great  indeed.* 

The  habits  of  life  of  the  consumptive  invalid  are 
such  as  constantly  to  repress  the  development  of  the 
lungs,  or  a  defect  here  may  be  due  to  original  con- 
formation. The  diminished  capacity  of  the  chest  of 
course  implies  imperfect  respiration.  A  direct  conse- 
quence of  this  insufficient  respiration  is  increase  of 
the  frequency  of  the  pulse.  The  maintenance  of  this 
accelerated  speed  of  the  pulse  occasions  a  wear  of  and 
perpetually  increasing  demand  upon  the  powers  of  the 
organism  incompatible  with  that  quiet  play  of  the  func- 
tions, which  is  health.     Had  we  no  facts  to  prove  it, 


*  The  following  remarks  of  Lehmann  are  stronglj^  confirmatory  of  the  view  here 
given : 

"  While  the  advances  of  the  science  of  medicine  have  taught  us  that  of  all  the 
vast  accumulation  of  remedies  which  in  the  course  of  time  have  been  collected  to- 
gether, very  few  are  of  any  value  at  the  bedside,  and  while  the  enlightened  practi- 
tioner is  disposed  to  attach  at  least  as  much  imporlaace  to  a  rational  dietetic  as  to  a 
specifically  therapeutic  mode  of  treatment,  the  value  of  investigations  on  normal 
respiration,  in  reference  to  the  science  of  medicine,  can  nev<  r  be  overrated;  for 
when  once  the  fact  is  universally  admitted  that  tlie  first  thing  to  be  considered  in 
many  diseases  is  to  furnish  a  copious  supply  of  oxygen  to  the  blood  which  has  been 
loaded  with  imperfectly  decomposed  substances,  and  to  remove  as  speedily  as  pos- 
sible the  carbonic  acid  which  has  accumulated  in  it,  these  observations  will  have 
afibrded  us  the  true  remedial  agents  which  exceed  almost  any  other  in  the  cer- 
tainty of  their  action.  We  may,  perhaps,  aid  a  tuberculous  patient  quite  as  much 
by  recommending  him  to  respire  a  moist  warm  air,  as  if  we  prescrib  d  Lichen  Car- 
ragheen, or  01.  jecoris  Aselli. 

"  Instead  of  tormenting  an  emphysematous  patient,  suffering  from  congestion 
and  hemorrhoidal  tendencies,  with  aperient  and  saline  mineral  waters,  we  might 
relieve  him  far  more  effectually  by  recommending  him  to  practice  artificial  aug- 
mentation or  expansion  of  the  chest  in  respiration  (filling  the  lungs  several  times  in 
the  course  of  an  hour),  or  to  take  exercise  suited  to  produce  this  result,  while  we 
should  forbid  the  lise  of  spiritiioiis  driiiA'S,  and  7wt  j')reHerihe  tinctures  which 
might  hinder  the  necessary  excretion  of  carbonic  acid.  We  abstain,  however, 
from  offering  any  further  illustra'ions  of  these  assertions,  since  the  reflecting  i  hysi- 
cian  will  not  blindly  follow  any  guide,  while  the  mere  empiricist  can  never  learn 
thoroughly  to  heal  any  disease,  whatever  his  knowledge  of  physiology  and  patho- 
logical chemistry." — Physiologi  al  Chemistry,  vol.  ii.,  p.  471. 


PULMOXAKY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION.  293 

we  should  suppose  from  analogy  that  congestion  of  the 
pulmonary  tissues  would  be  likely  to  occur  from  the 
excessive  labor  imposed  upon  this  organ,  and  a  dete- 
rioration of  the  morphological  elements  of  the  blood, 
and  a  consequent  deposition  in  the  form  of  tubercle 
need  not  be  an  unlooked-for  consequence. 

When  the  respiration  is  below  the  requirements  of 
the  system,  either  one  of  two  things  may  occur  :  either 
f       the  blood,  not  being  purified,  and  the  secretions  becom- 
I       ing  clogged  and  changed  in  quality,  colds,  or  the  more 
grave  and  decided  forms  of  fever,  follow^,  with  a  quick- 
ening of  the  pulse  and  of  the  respiratory  movements, 
and  failure  of  the  appetite  ;  or  the  oxydizing  action 
j       being  less  energetic,  the  materials  accumulated  in  the 
'       blood  may  be  able  to  resist  it.     Tubercle  seems  to  be  a 
degraded  form  of  vitalized  matter  which  continues  to 
resist  the  oxydizing  agencies  at  work  within  the  blood. 
The  quick  pulse  and  breath  are  never  able  to  balance 
each   other   perfectly.     If,  now,  in   this  condition  of 
things,  an  increase  of  respiration  can  take  place,  unac- 
companied by  the  evils  resulting  from  quick  breathing 
and  the  rapid  pulse,  the  chances  of  restoration  are  at 
once  immensely  increased. 

The  available  power  a  person  enjoys  does  not  equal 
the  absolute  product  of  vital  action ;  it  is  only  that 
part  of  the  total  force  of  the  system  which  remains 
after  the  amount  is  expended  which  is  needed  for  or- 
ganic purposes.  It  is  clear  that  when  the  rate  of  the 
pulse  is  one  hundred  and  twenty,  and  the  respirations 
thirty-two  per  minute,  the  expenditure  of  force  is  much 
greater  than  when  the  pulse  is  sixty  and  the  respira- 
tion sixteen. 

It  follows,  from  this  theory  of  the  pathology  of  pul- 
monary disease,  that  the  chief  remedial  indication  is, 


294  PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 

to  increase  the  size  of  the  chest  and  the  mobility  of  its 
walls. 

The  arrangements  of  nature  are  designed  to  secure 
the  perfect  performance  of  the  respiratory  act,  and  con- 
sist of  means  which  affect  the  size  and  mobility  of  the 
chest. 

1.  TemperatuTe. — The  lower  the  temperature  to 
which  the  body  is  exposed,  the  greater  the  impression 
made  by  it  upon  the  whole  sensory  surface.  This  im- 
pression is  a  direct  stimulant  to  respiration.  Whetiier 
the  impression  affects  the  whole,  or  only  a  limited  por- 
tion of  the  surface,  the  result  is  the  same ;  for  a  given 
amount  of  heat  expended,  an  equivalent  amount  of  air 
is  respired.  The  average  temperature  of  the  atmo- 
sphere is  forty  to  fifty  degrees  below  that  of  the 
body. 

2.  Exercise. — This,  in  the  plan  of  nature,  is  rendered 
as  necessary  as  temperature.  All  movements,  wheth- 
er spontaneous  and  involuntary  or  voluntary,  necessi- 
tate the  use  of  oxygen  derived  from  the  blood  by  the 
acting  vital  organs.  Hence  the  degree  of  perfection 
reached  by  the  respiratory  act  is  strictly  proportionate 
to  the  vigor  of  the  muscular  action  ;  and  we  find  that 
such  action  powerfully  promotes  respiration,  and  im- 
proves the  mobility  of  the  walls  of  the  chest. 

Properly  directed  exercise  may  prove  advantageous 
to  the  respiration  in  two  ways  :  1.  By  directly  increas- 
ing this  action.  2.  Indirectly,  by  developing  and  per- 
fecting the  mechanism  by  which  this  act  is  performed. 

Chronic  pulmonary  diseases  are  of  tvx'o  principal 
forms :  congestion  and  ulceration  of  the  pulmonary 
nervous  surface — the  surface  in  contact  with  the  air ; 
and  a  deposit  of  non-vitalized  organic  matter  in  the 
parenchyma  of  these  organs.      Both  forms  are  refer- 


PULMOXAllY    AFFPXTIONS CONSUMPTION.  295 

able  to  tlie  imperfect  aeration  of  the  blood  at  tlie  point 
where  this  fluid  accnmulates,  waiting  for  its  noxious 
matters  to  become  eliminated  by  the  means  above 
pointed  out,  and  both  forms  disappear  generally  upon 
the  restoration  of  the  natural  movements  of  the  walls 
of  the  chest. 

Tlie  reader  must  be  warned  against  I'ushing  upon 
the  inference  here,  that  indiscriminate  movements  may 
be  employed  in  this  disease.  N'othing,  in  fact,  is  like- 
ly to  prove  more  harmful,  in  diseases  of  the  lungs, 
than  improper  use  of  exercises,  while,  if  they  are  prac- 
ticed in  accordance  with  the  principles  and  under  the 
conditions  prescribed  by  the  Movement-Cure,  injurious 
eiiects  are  scarcely  possible.  To  enable  us  to  guard 
against  these  harmful  results,  let  us  analyze  the  respira- 
tory process. 

Respiration  is  composed  of  two  distinct  actions — in 
the  filling  of  the  lungs  witli  air,  or  inspiration^  and 
the  exclusion  of  a  portion  of  the  air  contained  by  these 
organs,  or  expiration. 

Inspiration  is  eftected  by  the  contraction  and  con- 
sequent depression  of  the  diaphragm,  and  the  simul- 
taneous contraction  of  the  muscles  lying  between  and 
covering  the  ribs,  which  elevates  them  and  turns 
them  outward.  Expiration  is  produced  simply  by 
the  relaxation  of  these  same  muscles,  allowing  the 
walls  of  the  chest  to  return  to  the  position  they  oc- 
cupied at  the  commencement  of  inspiration,  thus  nar- 
rowing the  space  included  in  the  chest,  and  driving 
out  the  air. 

These  actions  are  properly  enough  compared  to  those 
of  a  innnp  j  but  the  venous  blood  is  exposed  to  similar 
conditions  with  those  securing  the  rush  of  air  into  the 
lungs,  and  it  of  course  acquires  the  same  tendency  to- 


296  PFLMONAEY    AFFECTIOIS'S CONSUMPTION. 

ward  the  chest,  so  as  to  meet  the  air  which  it  is  in- 
tended to  receive. 

It  follows  that  if  the  respiratory  act  be  forced  be- 
yond a  certain  moderate  extent,  while  other  portions 
of  the  body  are  at  comparative  rest,  this  tendency  of 
blood  to  the  chest  will  be  beyond  the  2^ower  of  the 
heart  to  control,  and  the  pulmonary  organs  become 
congested.  As  a  consequence,  various  disagreeable 
sensations  are  experienced  about  the  chest,  and  these 
may  be  followed  by  serious  indisposition ;  inflamma- 
tion may  set  in,  or  rupture  of  vessels  may  occur.  Espe- 
cially if  the  pulmonary  organs  be  weak  or  previously 
diseased,  the  eftect  of  such  movements  thus  taken  may 
be  disastrous  and  irrej)arable.  Such  consequences 
have  sometimes  followed  the  use  of  the  inhaling-tube, 
so  often  recommended  to  invalids  of  this  class. 

The  indications  for  the  treatment  of  pulmonary  af- 
fections plainly  are,  firsts  to  remove  the  congestion 
that  always  lingers  about  the  chest  in  these  com- 
plaints, and  certainly  to  guard  against  the  possibility 
of  its  occurrence.  This  is  easily  accomplished  by  the 
aid  of  the  duplicated  movements,  and  also,  if  the  pa- 
tient retain  a  moderate  amount  of  strength,  by  the 
single  movements.  The  prescription,  to  begin  with, 
must  include  in  its  first  part  such  movements  as  are 
strongly  derivative  applied  to  the  extremities,  wliile 
the  central  organs  should  be  approached  cautiously. 
Only  after  a  marked  effect  has  been  produced  upon 
the  extremities  should  we  employ  such  movements  as 
tend  to  expand  the  chest,  because  these  draw  the  blood 
from  the  extremities.  A  physician  of  tact  will  so 
manao-e  as  to  combine  these  effects  of  derivation  and 
expansion  from  the  first,  thus  greatly  facilitating  the 
progress  of  the   patient.      After  the   derivative   pro- 


PULMONAKY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION.  297 

scription  has  been  continued  for  some  time,  with  an 
improvement  of  all  the  symptoms,  those  which  in- 
crease the  size  of  the  chest  may  be  applied  more 
boldly,  never  omitting,  howevei',  to  alternate  them 
frequently  with  those  of  the  first-named  kind. 

It  is  always  best  for  the  patient,  if  treating  himself, 
to  commence  proceedings  by  taking  accurate  measure- 
ment of  his  chest,  both  at  its  upper  section  and  at  its 
lower,  or  across  the  short  ribs.  By  repeating  the 
measurement  occasionally  from  time  to  time,  he  will 
be  able  to  judge  of  the  amount  of  improvement  he  is 
making,  and  thus  encourage  himself  more  than  he 
possibly  could  by  merely  noticing  the  improvement 
in  his  feelings,  because  he  is  impressed  with  the  idea 
of  the  permanent  character  of  this  result.  In  using 
the  duplicated  movements,  some  invalids  have  expe- 
rienced an  increase  in  the  circumference  of  the  chest 
of  an  inch  or  more  for  each  of  three  or  four  consecu- 
tive weeks.  But  even  when  much  less  than  this  is 
gained,  nearly  all  patients  will  attain  results  that  will 
be  quite  satisfactory  and  cheering,  especially  if  com- 
pared with  the  results  effected  by  other  kinds  of  med- 
ical treatment. 

The  reader  must  not  suppose  that  all  the  good  ac- 
complished in  this  way  for  the  lungs  is  indicated  by 
the  dilatation  of  the  chest.  The  contracted  and  dis- 
eased lungs  are  incited  by  the  stimulus  of  the  move- 
ments to  take  on  a  more  efficient  action  ;  the  vitalizing 
air  is  made  to  penetrate  and  dilate  the  collapsed  air- 
cells,  or  to  displace  the  secretions  with  which  they  are 
filled.  The  improvement  from  this  cause,  even  before 
the  circumference  of  the  chest  has  perceptibly  in- 
creased, is  in  many  cases  very  decided.  Many  re- 
spectable phvsicians,  who  have  examined  my  patients 

13* 


2y8  PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION. 

while  under  treatment,  have  testified  to  this  fact  very 
emphatically,  as  this  is  the  improvement  that  is  easily 
detected  by  the  skillful  auscultator. 

For  the  consumptive  jDatient  a  formula  of  movements 
like  the  following  may  be  employed. 

EXAMPLES  OF  PRESCRIPTIONS. 

1.  Stretch  (weight  held),  backward  lying,  holding. 
68. 

2.  Wing-walk  standing,  forward- knee  bending  and 
stretching.     Change.      14. 

3.  Door-way  standing,  walking.     58. 

4.  Arms  angle  (weight  held),  reclined  walk-kneeling, 
arms  stretching.     43. 

5.  Sitting,  arms  sidewise  raising.     47. 

6.  Stretch-stride  kneeling,  trunk  transverse  sway- 
ing.    45. 

7.  Stretch  grasp,  forward  fall  standing,  trunk  bend- 
ing and  stretching.     76. 

8.  Half-stretch  stride  sitting,  trunk  twisting.  Change. 
37. 

9.  Yard-stride  sitting,  arms  twisting.     39. 

10.  Trunk  support  half  standing,  leg  twisting.    13. 

The  movements  should  be  varied  to  meet  the  exigen- 
cies of  each  particular  case.  If  there  be  great  feeble- 
ness, a  formula  like  the  following  would  be  more 
appropriate  to  begin  with  : 

1.  Wing  long  sitting,  feet  rotation.     5. 

2.  Rack  grasp  standing,  feet  stretching.     1. 

3.  Standing,  arm  perpendicular,  rotating.     73. 

4.  Yard  kneeling,  arms  horizontal,  swaying.     39. 

5.  Streteh  half-walk,  half-kneeling,  trunk  backward 
bending.     48. 

6.  Step  half-standing,  trunk  sidewise  bending.     i9. 


PULMONARY    AFFECTIONS CONSUMPTION.  299 

7.  Support  half-standing,  curtseying.     10. 

8.  Elbow-sup2)ort,  backward  fall  standing,  holding. 
77. 

9.  Hanging,  swinging.     74. 

10.  Hang  standing,  trunk  rotating. 

It  is  useful  for  the  invalid  thus  practicing  to  apply 
at  the  same  time  rapid  and  light  friction  over  the 
whole  surface  of  the  body,  with  free  exposure  of  the 
naked  person  to  the  air,  as  often  as  twice  every  day, 
and  to  lave  the  chest  thoroughly  with  a  coarse  towel 
wetted  with  cold  water.  He  should  also  bathe  the 
whole  person  in  water  as  cool  as  he  can  well  bear,  say 
80°  or  90°,  and  he  may  likewise  take  a  hip  bath  at 
75°,  for  ten  minutes,  to  excite  the  respiration ;  both 
these  daily  if  the  strength  will  allow. 

In  addition  to  the  above  the  swing  may  be  used  for 
five  or  ten  minutes  several  times  every  day. 


300  PABALYSIS    OF   THE   NEKVES    OF   MOTION. 


PARALYSIS    OF    THE    NERVES    OF    MOTION. 

The  Movement' Cure  supplies  new  ho]3e  to  the  vic- 
tims of  this  peculiarly  obstinate  afiection.  It  does  not 
merely  add  another  to  the  catalogue  of  "  promising" 
remedies,  but  the  patient  who  tries  it  is  often  at  once 
convinced  of  its  appropriateness  to  his  condition,  he  is 
inspired  with  a  new  confidence.  Hundreds  who  had 
become  disheartened  by  witnessing  the  futility  of  ordi- 
nary medical  treatment  have  had  their  courage  thus 
renewed  as  if  by  magic.  We  reject  such  remedies 
as  strychnine,  stimulants,  galvanism,  electricity,  for  al- 
thougli  the  aj^pli cation  of  this  class  of  remedies  may 
afford  encouragement  by  their  temporary  effects,  and 
may  seem  occasionally  to  do  a  great  deal  of  good,  yet 
experience  proves  that  by  such  practice  the  recuper- 
ative powers  are  in  the  end  exhausted,  and  the  case 
becomes  less  amenable  to  treatment  than  it  otherwise 
would  be. 

The  treatment  of  paralysis  by  duplicated  movements, 
by  myself  and  by  others  under  my  observation,  has 
resulted  favorably  in  a  large  majority  of  instances  ; 
many  have  had  members  that  had  become  useless  and 
burdensome,  partially,  some  entirely  restored  to  their 
original  integrity  and  usefulness,  while  many  others 
have  left  my  hands  in  the  confident  hope  that  their 
own  efforts  persistently  followed  up  would  finally  re- 
sult in  complete  restoration.     So  far  as  I  have  learned, 


PAKALYSIS    OF   THE   NERVES   OF   MOTION.  301 

these  patients  liave  continued  to  improve  to  a  satisfac- 
tory extent.  One  of  tlie  most  encouraging  cases  on  my 
list  is  that  of  a  gentleman  who  came  to  me  with  com- 
plete paraplegia  of  over  two  years'  standing,  who  after 
thi'ce  weeks'  instruction  i-eturned  home,  and  applied  tlie 
knoAvledge  he  had  acquired  to  such  purpose,  that  in 
a  short  time  he  was  restored  to  health  and  the  pursuit 
of  his  professional  avocations.  We  may  understand 
the  j)eculiar  appropriateness  and  success  of  the  treat- 
ment if  we  will  take  the  pains  to  examine  the  pathology 
of  the  disease. 

Modern  physiology  explains  the  cause  of  j)aralysis  to 
be  some  defect  in  the  health  of  nerve-centers  located  in 
the  spinal  cord  and  at  the  base  of  the  brain,  from  which 
the  incentive  to  muscular  action  proceeds.  These  cen- 
ters consist  of  the  gray  substance  of  the  cord,  and  they 
hold  communication  by  means  of  countless  radiating 
nerve  fibers  with  all  the  muscular  tissue  of  the  body. 

The  actual  pathological  state  of  these  nerve- centers  in 
paralysis  is  often  a  matter  somewhat  obscure.  Some- 
times it  is  found  upon  examination  that  the  walls  of 
the  caj)illary  vessels  supplying  the  part  with  nutrition 
have  been  ruptured,  and  effusion  of  a  clot,  pressure, 
and  a  sudden  shock,  depriving  the  parts  or  muscles  con- 
nected therewith  by  means  of  the  nerve  fibers,  of  power, 
is  the  consequence.  The  extent  of  the  paralysis  will 
in  this  case  depend  on  the  location,  as  those  portions 
of  the  body  connected  with  the  cord  helow  the  seat  of 
disease  suffer  from  its  eftects. 

Another  cause  may  be  sei'ous  effusion  into  the  mem- 
brane  inclosing  the  cord,  wh/ch  may  by  its  pressure  gra- 
dually produce  similar  symptoms.  Sometimes,  again, 
a  disease  of  the  substance  of  the  cord  occurs  called  soft- 
ening, which  destroys  the  function  of  the  cord  and  of  the 


302  PAKALYSIS    OF    THE    ^EKVES    OF    MOTION. 

parts  connected  with  it.  The  reader  will  understand 
from  this  that  the  muscles  are  not  primarily  affected, 
but  their  action  becoming  suspended,  they  are  deprived 
of  nutrition,  and  consequently  become  weak  and  flabby, 
and  are  often  greatly  diminished  in  bulk.  JS^either  are 
the  nerve  filaments  which  conduct  the  nerve  influence 
from  its  central  seat  necessarily  implicated.  They  cease 
to  conduct  impressions,  simply  because  they  receive 
none  in  the  disabled  state  of  the  central  organ. 

The  reader  may  now  be  ready  to  inquire,  with  a 
skeptical  smile,  "  How  can  exercise  of  the  muscles, 
which  are  not  the  seat  of  the  disease,  restore  functional 
power  to  the  disabled  nerve  ?" 

The  following  considerations  will  serve  to  throw 
some  light  upon  what  may  perhaps  appear  a  rather 
dark  subject. 

1.  Tlie  spinal  column  is  inclosed  in  the  bony  case 
formed  by  the  vertebral  column,  in  Avhich,  the  more 
effectually  to  protect  it  from  injury  from  external 
sources,  it  is  suspended,  and  surrounded  through  its 
entire  length  by  fluid.  By  this  arrangement,  injury  to 
the  cord  from  any  sudden  twist  or  shock  is  prevented. 

But  this  is  not  all.  x\long  the  exterior  surface  of 
the  column  is  situated  the  laro-est  and  stron2:est  mus- 
cular  mass  belonging  to  the  body,  which  is  employed 
in  sustaining  and  giving  flexibility  and  mobility  to  the 
trunk.  Every  action  of  these  muscles  necessarily  af- 
fects the  cii'culation  of  the  contained  and  contiguous 
vessels,  and  modifies  also  the  condition  of  the  organs 
contained -i^^zV/^m  the  vertebral  canal.  Xow  the  lateral, 
forward,  backward,  and  diagonal  inclinations  of  the 
body  in  the  duplicated  and  the  single  movements  are 
eminently  derivative  for  the  cord  itself,  and  serve  as  a 
powerful  means  for  relieving  congestion  of  the  spinal 


PARALYSIS    OF    THE    NEKVES    OF    MOTION.  303 

membranes  and  nerves,  or  even  for  removing  serous 
etfusioii. 

2.  But,  in  perhaps  a  majority  of  cases,  tlie  spinal  le- 
sion has  been  recovered  from  spontaneously,  as  the 
result  of  the  patient  waiting  which  is  enlbrced  by  the 
very  nature  of  the  atfection  ;  still,  the  power  of  motion 
is  not  as  a  consequence  restored.  Whether  nature  has, 
after  a  time,  effected  so  favorable  a  change  in  the  case, 
we  can  have  no  means  of  directly  knowing  ;  we  must 
be  content  to  wait  for  the  results  of  treatment  to  en- 
lighten us  on  this  point.  Whether  it  has  or  has  not, 
the  paralysis  generally  continues,  because  the  con- 
ductor, having  once  ceased  to  perform  its  duty,  contin- 
ues inoperative  even  after  the  original  source  of  nerve- 
power  is  restored  by  time.  It  is  evident  that  the  mus- 
cles will  remain  inactive  so  long  as  the  nerves  refuse 
to  convey  motive  force  to  them.  It  is  inferred  that 
this  state  of  things  may  often  exist  for  the  simple  rea- 
son that  very  frequently  paralysis  is  speedily  removed 
by  movements,  while  this  could  not  possibly  happen 
if  the  cord  itself,  the  source  of  all  muscular  power,  re- 
mained diseased.  The  cure  does  not,  in  this  case,  con- 
sist so  much  in  the  removal  of  disease  as  in  the  restora- 
tion of  a  function.  This  only  is  wanted  :  the  power  to 
move  /  the  germ  of  the  power  still  exists  ;  this  is  to  be 
encouraged  and  cultivated.  The  disabled  muscles  must 
he  QROvedj  and  he  helped  to  move  theTnselves^  till  they 
have  regained  the  ability  to  work  unassisted.  So  are 
children's  muscles  trained  at  the  outset  of  life.  What 
more  iiatural,  simple,  and  philosophic  ! 

Thus,  again,  the  will  is  enabled  to  send  its  mandates 
like  lightning  from  the  brain  to  every  portion  of  the 
physical  domain,  and  at  once  healthful  and  harmonious 
action  is  restored  to  the  whole  economy. 


304  PARALYSIS    OF    THE    NKEVES    OF    MOTION. 

The  duplicated  movements  affect  the  diseased  nerves 
often  in  a  most  favorable  manner.  They  may  be  ap- 
plied along  the  conrse  of  the  conductor  or  over  the 
spinal  centers. 

The  Movement-Cm-e  overcomes  this  formidable  dis- 
ease by  removing  any  pressure  that  may  exist  at  the 
nerve-centers,  by  restoring  the  flow  of  nervous  force 
to  its  original  channels,  while  the  general  expenditure 
of  nerve-power  is  at  the  same  time  carefully  husband- 
ed ;  by  tranquilizing  the  whole  system,  and  especially 
the  diseased  organs  ;  and  by  re-establishing  the  condi- 
tions for  healthy  nutrition  throughout  the  body.  The 
Movement-Cure  deprecates  the  employment  of  all 
means  whatsoever  designed  merely  to  stimulate  the 
nerves  to  functional  activity,  whether  applied  to  the 
general  system  or  to  diseased  parts.  It  would  evoke 
no  manifestation  when  there  is  not  behind  an  abundant 
capacity  to  sustain  it,  supplied  through  the  nutrient 
energies  of  the  organism,  the  grand  primary  source  of 
all  functional  power.  It  discards  all  beverages,  ex- 
cepting simple,  unadulterated  water  ;  the  use  of  to- 
bacco, which  observation  proves  to  be  frequently  the 
cause  of  the  disease  ;  the  use  of  condiments  of  all 
kinds,  which  only  task,  never  replenish,  the  nerve- 
l^ower.  For  the  same  reason,  it  enjoins  abstinence 
from  all  exciting  business,  and  everything  calculated 
to  arouse  the  emotions  or  awake  anxious  or  laborious 
tliought ;  for  these  things  tend  certainly  to  debilitate 
the  nervous  system,  and  must  necessarily  aggravate 
disease  where  it  exists,  and  counteract,  in  a  greater 
or  less  degree,  the  beneficial  effects  of  the  move- 
ments. 

It  is  a  queslioi!  that  deserves  serious  consideration, 
whether  the  pre\'alence  of  this  form  of  disease  is  not 


PAKALYSIS    OF    THE    NERVES    OF    MOTION.  305 

referable,  to  a  mucli  greater  extent  than  the  public 
seem  to  be  aware,  to  the  habits  of  the  individual. 
Excessive  venery^  every  practicing  physician  knows  to 
be  a  fruitful  source  of  this  disease.  The  refl.ecting 
mind,  indeed,  may  well  ]3onder  how  it  is  that  so  many 
escape  with  only  milder  and  comparatively  tractable 
forms  of  nervous  disease,  when  it  considers  the  self- 
indulgent  habits  of  so  many  in  the  community. 

In  the  treatment  of  these  cases  the  duplicated  move- 
ments are  nearly  indispensable  in  the  beginning.  It  is 
absolutely  necessary  that  the  patient  understand  the 
various  princij)les  and  methods  of  the  cure^  in  order 
that  as  he  advances  in  strength  and  in  self-command  he 
may  be  able  to  take  the  treatment  into  his  own  hands 
and  conduct  it  to  the  desired  consummation. 

The  prescription  must  embrace  hendings,  fallings^ 
etc.,  in  such  positions  as  call  the  muscles  of  the  back, 
and  especially  of  the  neck,  into  active  play.  It  should 
also  include  attempts  at  the  restoration  of  power  in  the 
defective  members.  It  is  found  that  the  livei'  is  nearly 
always  affected  in  cases  of  this  disease,  perhaps  often  as 
a  consequence  of  it,  induced  by  mere  inaction.  It 
should  be  roused  into  activity  by  regulating  and  re- 
stricting the  diet,  together  with  the  appropriate  move- 
ments ;  many  of  the  duplicated  movements  of  the  pas- 
sive kind  are  important  here,  for  the  toning  up  not 
only  of  defective  nerves,  but  also  of  those  organs  whose 
actions  are  limited  through  lack  of  nervous  supply,  as 
well  as  to  sooth  and  tranquilize  the  nerves  themselves. 
Snch  movements  are  to  be  applied  very  cautiously  in 
the  vicinity  of  nerve-centers,  more  freely  along  the 
conductors. 

It  is  important  to  direct  tlie  attention,  and  with 
it  the  nerve-force,  into  the  affected  part,  by  means  of 


306  PAEALYSIS    OF    THE    NERYES    OF    MOTION. 

attempts  to  move  the  debilitated  or  disabled  part. 
These  attempts  must  be  successful  in  order  to  be  lene- 
ficial^  and  the  lacking  power  must  be  supplied  by  an 
assistant.  Unless  the  patient  sees  a  result  accomplish- 
ed by  his  own  endeavors,  he  will  be  disheartened  and 
give  over  his  efforts.  If  a  paralytic  can  not,  for  in- 
stance, raise  his  hand,  he  must  at  least  try.  The  effort 
will  of  course  be  fruitless  till  the  power  to  raise  the 
last  ounce  of  the  weight  is  developed,  and  the  invalid 
does  not  hnow  that  he  exerts  any  power  until  he  has  ex- 
erted enough  to  accomplish  his  purpose.  But  if  assisted^ 
he  can  be  made  to  feel  that  he  overcomes  a  part  of  the 
resistance,  and  is  thence  encouraged  to  continue  and 
multiply  his  efforts. 

The  paralytic  invalid  must  be  cautioned  against 
making  violent  efforts,  or  attempting  quick  move- 
ments ;  all  his  motions  should  be  deliberate  and  gentle. 
The  time  of  the  movement  shoidd  not  only  be  pro- 
longed, but  the  part  moved  should  be  sustained  during 
a  period  of  rest  at  the  terminal  position.  In  this  way 
the  object  of  the  movement,  which  consists  in  establish- 
ing and  improving  the  communication  between  the 
nerve-centers  and  muscles,  is  secured  as  far  as  is  possi- 
ble. It  is  only  further  necessary  to  repeat  the  same 
movement  at  the  same  time,  in  the  same  way,  daily, 
and  an  increased,  if  not  a  perfect  control  of  the  weak- 
ened part  is  quite  certain  to  result.  But  if,  on  the 
contrary,  the  movements  be  taken  at  irregular  times, 
or  practiced  rapidly,  violently,  or  carelessly,  the  fund 
of  power  will  be  exhausted  rather  than  increased,  and 
injury  will  result  rather  than  benefit  to  the  experi- 
menter. 

These  remarks  apply  to  duplicate  as  well  as  to  single 
movements.     It  is  only  necessary  to  add  tliat  the  ap- 


PARALYSIS    OF    THE    NERVES    OF   MOTION.  307 

plication  of  single  movements  is  limited,  but  being 
employed  according  to  the  invalid's  ability  in  the  mode 
and  with  the  cautions  above  indicated  to  the  afflicted 
extremity,  the  result  will  amply  repay  in 
health  the  attention  thus  devoted. 


308  CONSTIPATION,  DIARRHEA,  AND   PILES. 


OONSTIPATIOX,    DIARKHEA,    AND    PILES. 

Among  business,  jDrofessional,  and  studious  men,  and 
those  engaged  in  sedentary  avocations,  no  condition  is 
more  common  than  that  of  constipation  of  the  bowels, 
and  none  more  disregarded.  With  these  classes  of  per- 
sons constipation  is  the  first  notice  given  of  the  com- 
mencement of  a  state  of  chronic  ill  health  that  often 
proves  permanent,  rendering  them  miserable  perhaps 
for  life.  The  approach  of  this  affection  is  insidious, 
and  it  may  exist  even  when  the  subject  of  it  is  not 
aware  of  the  fact,  for  though  his  evacuations  may  be 
regular,  yet  the  residual  matter  occupies  a  much  longer 
time  in  its  passage  through  the  canal  than  is  compat- 
ible with  health. 

This  symptom  is  often  accompanied  by  disorder  of 
the  stomach,  and  it  is  also  frequently  connected  with 
nervous  irritability,  prostration,  hypochondria,  etc.  It 
is  apt  to  accompany  the  first  stages  of  pulmonary  dis- 
ease, and  indeed  nearly  all  persons  afiiicted  with  chronic 
disorders  are  troubled  with  costiveness. 

Prominent  among  the  causes  of  this  condition  are, 
sedentary  habits^  anxiety  of  mind  and  severe  thinhing^ 
a  prolonged  use  of  improper  food^  and  the  indulgence 
in  aperients  and  other  drugs.  Constipation  may  be 
connected  with  other  symptoms  which  constitute  the 
main  disease,  but  generally  it  is  the  fruit  of  one,  or  of 
a  combination  of  the  causes  above-mentioned.    Persons 


CONSTIPATION,   DIARRHEA,   AND    PILES.  309 

of  active  habits  who  do  not  undnly  burden  themselves 
with  the  cares  and  anxieties  of  this  mortal  life,  are  not 
apt  to  be  afflicted  in  this  manner. 

We  may  easily  nnderstand  how  the  above-mentioned 
causes  operate  to  the  production  of  this  distressing  re- 
sult. The  organs  whose  function  it  is  to  expel  the  in- 
soluble matter  of  the  canal,  need  to  be  acted  upon  by 
the  superficial  muscles  of  the  abdomen,  whicli  are 
brought  into  play  only  in  vigorous  exercise  of  the 
limbs  and  trunk.  Of  course  these  organs  in  the  sed- 
entary are  denied  this  mechanical  stimulus.  Mental 
anxiety  diverts  the  nutritive  material  from  the  di- 
gestive organs,  and  employs  it  in  a  remote  portion  of 
the  body,  the  brain,  and  thus  robs  tliese  organs  of  the 
nutrition  necessary  for  a  proper  performance  of  their 
duties.  Improper  food  poisons,  rather  than  nourishes 
the  body,  induces  congestion  of  the  alimentary  canal 
by  the  irritation  it  sets  up,  and  the  effects  upon  the 
system  of  the  products  of  the  chemical  changes  it  un- 
dergoes in  that  canal.  Cathartic  drugs  are  foreign  to 
tlie  vital  purposes,  wear  down  the  delicate  vital  sus- 
ceptibility, and  aggravate  the  disease  for  which  they 
are  applied.  The  relief  they  afford  is  of  the  most 
transitory  and  deceitful  kind ;  their  direct  and  perma- 
nent effects  are  entirely  pathological,  and  tlieir  contin- 
ued use  is  well  known  to  be  eminently  subversive  of 
the  vital  welfare. 

Under  the  combined  influence  of  improper  habits 
and  aperient  drugs,  the  invalid  is  apt  to  go  on  from 
bad  to  worse,  unless  arrested  in  his  career  by  some  ac- 
cident, till  seized  by  acute,  violent,  and  perhaps  fatal 
disease,  or  till  he  lapses  into  a  state  of  nervous  disor- 
der most  difficult  to  overcome.  Many  persons  are  con- 
s', ant  slaves  to  the  enema^  the  only  substitute  which 


310  CONSTIPATION,    DIAKRHEA,    AND    PILES. 

they  know  for  tlie  pill  or  bolus.  This  is  perhaps  a  more  i 
harmless  remedy,  but  it  is  still  but  an  unsatisfactory  ; 
palliative  at  the  best.  Indeed,  we  can  not  well  cure  | 
the  disease  which  causes  the  retention  of  fecal  matter, 
while  we  confound  this  symptom  with  the  disease  ; 
itself.  I 

As  might  be  inferred  from  what  has  been  said  re-  '■ 
specting  the  causes  of  constipation,  it  is  not  usually  I 
attributable  to  a  defect  of  any  one  part.  We  must  look  ' 
for  these  causes  at  several  distinct  points,  and  then  we  ; 
shall  be  able  to  remove  them  by  simple  means  happily  : 
at  our  command.  I  will  enumerate  a  few  of  these  ' 
causes :  ; 

1.  Weakness  of  the  muscular  coat  of  the  alimentary  i 
canal  exists,  in  consequence  of  which  its  vermicular  . 
and  expulsive  power  becomes  insufficient. 

2.  There  is  generally  defective  power  of  the  lower 
section  of  the  spinal  cord.     The  defective  power  of    ■ 
the  expulsive  muscles,  especially  those  of  the  inferior   i 
portion  of  the  tube,  results  partly  from  want  of  nervous   ^ 
supply  from  this  source.    ,This  is  the  natural  conse-   ■ 
quence  of  the  nervous  fund  being  too  largely  drawn 
upon  from  other  quarters — the  brain,  the  stomach,  etc.   ; 
What  is  chiefly  wanted  to  overcome  this  obstacle  is, 
that  this  draft  should  cease,  and  also  that  appropriate 
means  be   used  to  give   employment  to  the  nervous  ; 
power  in  the  part  of  the  body  where  it  is  especially 
needed.      The   lower   section   of  the   cord  should  be 
roused  to  action  chiefly  by  means  of  the  muscles  sup-  : 
plied  from  this  source— sometimes  also  by  more  direct  i 
operations. 

3.  There  frequently  exists  congestion  of  the  mucous 
Qnenihrane  of  the  alimentary  tube,  in  some  portion  of  ; 
its  course,  which  causes  a  deficiency  of  the  required  i 


CONSTIPATION,    DIAEKHEA,    .VND    PILES.  311 

secretions.  This  state  of  the  mucous  membi-anes  calls 
for  the  exercise  and  development  of  the  abdominal 
coverings,  for  the  purpose  of  drawing  off  the  blood 
from  the  congested  into  the  acting  parts,  and  thus 
relieving  that  state.  Motion  applied  to  the  mem- 
brane, or,  rather,  to  the  organs  of  whicli  the  membrane 
is  a  part,  is  also  indicated  for  the  purpose  of  assisting 
the  capillary  action  in  the  membrane. 

4.  The  abdominal  muscles,  whose  function  it  is  to 
assist  the  expulsive  efforts,  are,  in  constipation,  flabby, 
doughy,  and  weak.  They  fail  both  to  maintain  the 
abdominal  contents  in  tlie  proper  situation,  and  to  act 
with  sufficient  force  to  aid  materially  in  the  contrac- 
tion of  the  tube.  This  state  may  be  readily  remedied 
by  such  exercises  as  are  adapted  to  develop  these 
muscles. 

5.  The  liver  is  generally  torpid  and  congested.  Some- 
times this  state  is  indicated  by  tenderness  in  the  region 
of  this  organ.  This  condition  manifests  imperfect  ox- 
ydation  of  the  blood,  and  a  consequent  retention  of 
matters  that  ought  to  have  been  reduced,  through  res- 
piration, to  a  soluble  and  volatile  form,  and  dismissed 
from  the  body.  These  retained  matters  are  proximate 
elements  of  the  bile  which  the  liver  is  incapable  of 
taking  up  in  sufficient  quantity.  The  tissues  are  vrant- 
ing  in  moisture ;  the  refuse  materials  of  the  system  are 
not  thoroughly  reduced,  as  they  should  be,  to  carbonic 
acid  and  water.  To  remedy  this  state,  such  move- 
ments as  improve  the  respiratory  action  are  demanded, 
together  with  a  curtailment  of  the  amount  of  food 
taken.  In  this  way  the  harmonious  co-operation  of 
the  digestive  and  respiratory  functions  is  restored. 

6.  In  this  form  of  disease,  coldness  of  hands  and  feet 
also  exists.     This  results  from  too  great  a  plethora  of  the 


312  CONSTIPATION,    DIARRHEA,    AND    PILES. 

large  central  blood-vessels.  Movements  for  the  ex- 
tremities to  draw  the  blood  toward  them,  are  neces- 
sary to  effect  a  wholesome  distribution  of  the  circu- 
lation. 

From  this  view  of  the  nature  of  the  impediments  to 
be  overcome,  the  reader  will  see  at  a  glance  tlie  entire 
appropriateness  of  movements  in  the  treatment  of  this 
most  common  and  troublesome  affection. 

Let  us  now  briefly  consider,  by  w^ay  of  contrast,  the 
Qiiodus  opercvndi  of  an  aperient  medicine  : 

1.  The  drug  being  mixed  with  the  homogeneous  con- 
tents of  the  intestinal  tube,  and  impregnating  the 
whole  of  the  contained  mass,  unfits  it  for  the  purpose 
for  which  nutritive  matters  are  designed ;  the  absorb- 
ents, therefore,  refuse  to  take  up  these  matters  thus 
contaminated.  Hence  nutrition  is  suspended,  and  there 
is  for  the  time  a  general  decline  of  strength. 

2.  The  mass  now  having  become  offensive  to  the 
organic  instinct,  is  acted  upon  by  the  emnnctories  with 
great  power,  which  action  is  the  ready  and  only  way 
of  freeing  the  system  from  impending  harm.  By  this 
means  the  whole  intestinal  mass,  rendered  partly  fluid 
by  imperfect  digestion,  is  forced  rapidly  through  the 
entire  length  of  the  tube. 

3.  Some  portion  of  the  offensive  matter  has  been  al- 
ready absorbed  into  the  blood,  but  it  is  directly  re- 
turned to  the  canal  as  being  the  appropriate  way  of 
egress.  This  portion  is  mingled  with  serum  drawn 
from  the  blood,  so  as  to  dilute  the  noxious  principle, 
and  thus  prevent,  in  a  degree,  the  injury  resulting 
from  its  immediate  contact  with  vital  parts. 

4.  In  the  operations  just  described,  but  one  advan- 
tage has  been  gained,  and  this  is  incidental  and  indi- 
rect, and  occurs  in  this  way :  While  the  nutrition  is 


CONSTIPATION,   DIAKRHEA,   AND    PILES.  313 

prevented  in  the  manner  described  from  entering  the 
bh^od,  the  resinration  continues  as  usual.  It  follows 
that  the  effete  and  noxious  matters  of  the  system, 
which  are  most  prone  to  become  destructive,  have 
been  reduced  in  the  ordinary  way,  that  is,  in  the 'man- 
ner in  which  these  actions  happen  in  health,  so  that 
they  have  rapidly  made  their  exit  from  the  system. 

Or,  in  other  words,  the  effects  produced  by  cathar- 
tics are  of  the  same  kind,  only  inferior  to  those  pro- 
duced by  abstinence  from  food.  All  the  good  effects 
of  the  process  are  much  more  j^romptly,  surely,  and 
easily  obtained,  without  loss  of  strength,  without  abuse 
of  the  digestive  organs,  by  abstinence.  In  the  cathartic 
process  nothing  has  been  accomplished  in  the  way  of 
removing  any  of  the  difficulties  above-mentioned,  and 
which  are  the  true  cause  of  constipation,  and  by  con- 
sequence, this  difficulty  exists  in  a  greater  degree  after 
the  operation  of  the  medicine  than  before.  The  promi- 
nent system  has  been  relieved,  only  for  the  moment, 
while  the  disease  thus  masked  has  acquired  fresh  power. 

All  the  indications  for  the  radical  cure  of  constipa- 
tion are,  on  the  other  hand,  completely  fulfilled  by 
movements.  If  the  case  be  of  great  severity,  the  dupli- 
cated movements  are  called  for ;  but  the  single  move- 
ments are  competent  to  subdue  the  complaint,  where 
there  are  no  perplexing  complications,  if  applied  with 
due  accuracy,  care,  and  discretion. 

The  following  formula  of  movements  will  be  found 
powerfully  remedial  in  an  ordinary  case  of  constipa- 
tion : 

1.  Wing-stride  back-support  standing,  curtseying. 

2.  Wing  legs  angle  standing,  trunk  vibration. 

3.  Wing  legs  angle  backward  lying,  thighs  rotation. 

4.  Wing  backward  lying,  legs  rotation. 

14 


314  CONSTIPATIOA',   DIAIiRIIKA,   AND    PILES. 

5.  Elbow  and  foot  sidewise  lying,  liips  raising. 

6.  Stretch  kneeling,  trunk  sidewise  swaying. 

7.  Forward  fall,  head  support  standing,  leg  raising. 
Change. 

8.  Backward  lying,  abdomen  deep  kneading. 

9.  Forward  bent  support  standing,  chin  knocking. 

10.  Shelter  long  sitting,  trunk  forward  bending. 

11.  Wing  stride  short  sitting,  leg  outward  stretching. 
Change. 

12.  Shelter  backward  kick  lying,  legs  separating  and 
closing. 

All  the  above  movements  affect  with  more  or  less 
directness  the  abdominal  and  pelvic  contents.  There 
are  several  others  which  act  more  remotely  upon  the 
same  parts.  In  making  a  formula  of  treatment,  some 
three  or  four  of  the  above  movements  may  be  selected, 
and  these  should  be  connected  with  such  others  as  are 
derivative  movements  for  the  feet  and  hands,  of  a  char- 
acter suited  to  the  strength  of  the  patient. 

EXAMPLE  1. 

1.  Standing,  arms  swaying. 

2.  Wing  sitting,  legs  twisting. 

3.  Half-wing,  half-stretch,  step  standing,  trunk  twist- 
ing.    Change. 

4.  Wing,  leg  angle,  backward  lying,  thigh  rotation. 

5.  Wing-stride  standing,  curtseying. 

6.  Forward  bent  support  standing,  chin  knocking. 

EXAMPLE  2. 

1.  Arms  angle  kneeling,  arms  stretching-. 

2.  Support  half  standing,  leg  rotation.     Change. 

3.  Wing  kick  backward  lyiug,  legs  separation  and 
closing. 


CONSTIPATION,   DIAEEHEA,   AXD    PILES.  315 

4.  Wing  backward  lying,  legs  rotation. 

5.  Leg  angle  swing  standing,  trunk  perpendicular 
vibration. 

6.  Backward  lying,  abdomen  deep  kneading. 
These  movements  may  be  repeated  if  necessary.     As 

auxiliary  to  tlie  treatment,  the  enema  of  tepid  water 
may  be  employed  from  time  to  time ;  but  its  habitual 
use  should  be  avoided.  The  tepid  hip-bath  may  also 
be  used  occasionally,  if  found  agreeable  to  the  patient. 
The  reader  will  understand  the  futility  of  employing 
movements  to  restore  the  health  of  the  digestive  organs, 
while  he  is  not  at  the  same  time  careful  to  control 
his  general  habits,  so  that  his  general  course  of  living 
shall  contribute  to  the  same  end.  If  he  is  an  habitually 
careless  liver  he  will  scarcely  succeed  in  accomj^lishing 
much  good  for  himself,  however  excellent  may  be  the 
curative  means  he  may  resort  to,  or  however  faithfully 
and  judiciously  he  may  apply  them,  nor  ought  he  to 
expect  it.  ^Nature's  laws  were  never  made  to  be  broken. 
The  transgressor  need  never  hope  to  escape  the  penalty 
of  his  folly.  Mature  pays  no  such  premium  on  wrong 
doing.  Every  page  of  the  history  of  every  race,  com- 
munity, and  individual  contains  a  warning  addressed 
in  thunder  tones  to  nature's  offending  children.  ''The 
day  thou  eatest  thereof  thou  shalt  surely  die  !"  It  is 
terrible  to  think  in  how  many  men,  this  very  day,  has 
death  begun  its  retributive  work  ! 

DiAKRHEA. — Several  causes  may  be  concerned  in  the 
production  of  this  symptom,  and  they  may  act  either 
singly  or  concurrently.  1.  Debility — general  relaxa- 
tion of  the  tissues— is  always  present,  and  this  condi- 
tion, as  we  have  seen,  is  invariably  referable  to  some 
imperfection  of  the  primary  actions  that  develop  vital- 


316  CONSTIPATIOX,    DIAEKHEA,    AND    PILES. 

itj.  2.  The  presence  of  crude  and  irritating  matters 
in  tlie  alimentary  canal,  occasioning  spasmodic  or  un- 
certain action  of  the  muscular  coat,  wliile  at  the  same 
time  absorption  of  the  contents  is  prevented  by  the 
morbid  state  of  the  membrane,  and  the  alimentary 
mass  is  consequently  rapidly  dismissed.  3.  In  case  of 
sudden  j^oisoning  of  the  hlood^  either  from  spontane- 
ous metamorphosis,  as  in  cholera,  or  the  accidental  or 
prescribed  use  of  some  injurious  drug,  the  alimentary 
canal  furnishes  the  most  ready  outlet  whereby  such 
destructive  matters  may  be  eliminated.  Oftentimes 
diarrhea  is  manifestly  a  curative  operation  on  the 
part  of  nature.  In  these  latter  cases  the  symptoms 
generally  amount  to  something  more  than  is  generally 
understood  by  the  term  diarrhea.  The  flux,  in  these 
cases,  is  generally  suflicient  to  remove  the  offensive 
cause,  whereupon  the  health  is  restored.  4.  An  ulcer- 
ated patch  may  exist  in  the  canal,  and  occasion  diar- 
rhea. 5.  The  relaxation  of  the  abdominal  parietes  and 
contents,  by  the  consequent  pressure  upon  the  perineum 
and  sphincter  muscles,  may  excite  action  of  the  lower 
bowel  and  occasion  urgent  desire  to  go  to  stool  and 
much  straining — a  reflex  nervous  effect  of  pressure 
upon  the  sphincter.  In  this  case  there  is  prolapsus  of 
the  bowels,  either  concealed  or  ajpparent. 

In  each  of  the  above  cases,  except  Avhere  the  action 
is  manifestly  acute,  what  is  needed  is  the  production 
of  a  greater  tonicity  of  the  vital  structure.  The  vital 
organization  is  depressed  and  incomplete,  and  the  true 
remedy  must  be  something  that  will  restore  vital  power 
and  activity.  The  fluids  of  the  system  must  be  con- 
veyed from  the  digestive  center  outward  to  the  re- 
mote parts  of  the  body,  and  so  become  applied  to 
normal  use.     The  arterial  action  is  low  and  requires 


CONSTIPATION,    DIAKRIIEA,    AND    PILES.  317 

to  be  energized ;  there  is  venous  plethora  and  feeble 
respiration.  The  muscular  tissue  is  lax  and  weak, 
and  all  the  organizing  processes  of  the  body  are 
carried  on  slowly  and  unsteadily.  All  these  diffi- 
culties are  met  and  overcome  by  the  application  of 
movements. 

It  is  necessary  that  at  lirst  the  movements  ]3rescribed 
should  be  of  the  passive  sort.  It  is  for  this  reason 
that  those  of  the  duplicated  kind  are  so  efficacious. 
Such  exercises  as  riding,  sailing,  etc.,  are  eminently 
serviceable  to  move  the  blood  in  the  clogged  capilla- 
ries, and  thus  restore  their  normal  power.  All  vibra- 
toiy  movements  applied  to  the  abdomen  produce  good 
effects,  and  the  extent  of  these  good  effects  are  found 
to  correspond  with  the  thoroughness  and  faithfulness 
with  which  they  are  applied.  One  may  vibrate  and 
knead  his  own  abdomen  in  either  or  any  of  the  sev- 
eral ways  already  noticed  with  much  benefit.  At  the 
same  time,  it  is  very  useful  to  apply  movements  to  the 
extremities  for  the  purpose  of  drawing  the  blood  away 
from  the  central  organs ;  also  to  promote  the  respira- 
tory process  in  order  to  restore  the  purity  of  this  fluid. 
If  the  case  be  one  of  ulceration  of  the  bowels,  long, 
persistent,  and  careful  constitutional  treatment  is  re- 
quired. Short,  cold  sitting-baths  ought  always  to  be 
lesorted  to  frequently  to  aid  iIil'  respiration  and  to  en- 
courage the  contractile  efforts  of  the  bowels. 

Piles. — This  affection  consists  often  of  a  distention 
of  the  veins  at  the  posterior  termination  of  the  mucous 
lining  of  the  intestine.  It  is  accompanied  by  a  sensi- 
tiveness caused  by  a  sluggishness  of  the  abdominal 
circulation,  and  generally  an  engorgement  of  the  liver 
may  be  presumed.     The  condition  of  the  liver  is  such 


318  CONSTIPATION,    DIAEEHEA,    AND   PILES. 

as  to  retard  the  flow  of  blood  in  the  portal  vems, 
which  return  the  blood  to  the  heart  from  the  digestive 
tube  ;  hence  the  lower  twigs  of  the  veins  that  contrib- 
ute to  the  portal  circulation  become  distended — an 
event  which  is  greatly  favored  by  the  influence  of 
gravity,  which  also  retards  the  upward  flow  of  the  con- 
tents of  these  vessels.  Abdominal  plethora  is  also 
generally  present.  Inflammation  succeeds  distention 
of  the  hemorrhoidal  veins,  and  they  often  become 
hardened,  nlcerated,  and  disposed  to  bleed  easily. 
Sometimes  a  considerable  loss  of  blood  occurs  from 
this  cause. 

Sometimes,  also,  there  is  prolapsus  of  the  rectum, 
which  greatly  aggravates  the  disorder  on  account  of 
the  constant  straining  efibrts  the  patient  is  impelled  to 
make  to  evacuate  the  bowels,  which  drives  the  blood 
down,  or,  rather,  retards  its  upward  flow,  and  the  ves- 
sels of  the  sphincter  become  strangulated. 

The  plain  indications  of  treatment  are,  first,  to  re- 
lieve the  liver  of  congestion,  and  reduce  the  abdom- 
inal plethora  by  an  abstemious  diet.  This  aids  the 
contraction  of  the  surcharged  vessels,  and  also  removes 
the  impediment  to  the  onward  flow  of  the  blood.  Sec- 
ondly, to  draw  the  abdominal  contents  upward  to  re- 
lieve the  pressure  upon  the  sphincter.  Thirdly,  to 
remove  the  capillary  congestion  of  the  parts. 

Surgical  aid  may  sometimes  be  demanded,  undoubt- 
edly, in  grave  cases  of  this  disease  ;  but  after  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  Movement-Cure  have  become  well  under- 
stood, the  proper  subjects  for  such  treatment  will  be 
scarce  in  the  land. 

In  lieu  of  the  duplicated  movement,  single  move- 
ments may  be  employed  for  this  afl'ection  to  great  ad- 
vantage.    The  object  sought  in  their  application  should 


CONSTIPATION,    DIARRHEA,    AND    PILES.  319 

be  to  affect  the  liver  and  arouse  the  abdominal  circu- 
lation to  greater  activity.  The  following  movements 
are  recommended  for  this  purpose  : 

Elbow  and  toes  lying,  holding,  or  hips  raising. 

The  following  movement  is  also  useful : 

Wing,  leg-angle  backward  lying,  hips  raising. 

Also : 

Stretch  gmsp  forward  fall-standing,  holding. 

Stretch  (weight  held)  backward  lying,  holding. 


320  DEFORMITIES    OF   THE   SPINE. 


DEFORMITIES    OF    THE    SP^NE. 

The  application  of  the  Movement-Cure  to  tlie  correc- 
tion of  spinal  curvatures  is  especially  successful  and 
satisfactory.  ISTot  tliat  the  relief  obtained  in  these 
cases  is  more  certain  than  in  many  others,  or  that  the 
difficulty  to  be  overcome  is  so  much  greater,  but  be- 
cause we  are  constantly  furnishing  to  the  friends  of  the 
patient  ocular  demonstration  of  the  good  effects  of  the 
treatment — effects  of  a  kind  that  admit  of  no  dispute. 
One  clearly  marked  instance  of  cure  of  this  kind,  in 
the  popular  estimation,  is  more  creditable  to  the  skill 
and  resources  of  the  practitioner,  and  redounds  more 
to  his  honor,  than  would  any  amount  of  skill  and  judg- 
ment expended  uj)on  the  more  difficult  task  of  pre- 
venting the  occurrence  of  these  or  other  maladies,  or 
even  in  curing  many  other  forms  of  diseases  of  less  con- 
spicuous character. 

In  order  to  arrive  at  just  conclusions  regarding  the 
treatment  suitable  for  this  class  of  invalids,  it  is  neces- 
sary, first,  to  inquire  into  the  origin  of  spinal  deformi- 
ties. This  is  to  be  sought  in  the  anatomical  character 
and  relations  of  the  column  itself  and  of  its  supports. 
Tlie  column  consists  of  twenty -four  light,  spongy  bones, 
resting  by  their  flat  surfaces  upon  each  other,  witli  a 
cushion  of  elastic  cartilage  between.  This  interposi- 
tion of  cartilao-e   is  necessarv  in  order  to  secure  tlie 


DEFOKMITIES    OF   THE   SPINE.  321 

requisite  amoimt  of  flexibility  and  elasticity,  to  enable 
it  to  resist  the  shocks  to  which  it  is  so  often  subjected, 
and  to  give  the  trunk  that  pliability  and  freedom  of 
motion  necessary  in  assuming  the  various  positions  and 
performing  the  various  actions  of  man's  daily  life. 

We  see  at  once,  from  the  form  and  construction  of 
the  spinal  column,  that  of  itself  it  could  not  possibly 
maintain  an  erect  position,  but  would,  unless  supported, 
be  falling  into  shapes  and  inclining  in  directions  that 
might  be  quite  at  variance  with  the  will  or  wishes  of 
the  individual.  But  in  the  living  body  this  column  is 
entirely  under  the  control  of  muscles  wliich  are  at- 
tached to  it  at  many  points,  and  which  give  a  degree 
of  motion  in  any  direction  to  every  portion  of  it,  and 
are  caj)able  of  supporting  it  in  every  position.  The 
muscular  connections  of  the  spinal  column  with  other 
parts  are  extensive  and  various ;  the  arms  and  legs  are 
connected  with  it  by  muscles,  and  consequently  the 
character  of  their  motions  is  related  to  the  positions  of 
the  spine,  and  the  movements  of  these  members,  as  we 
shall  see,  are  to  a  considerable  extent  capable  of  modi- 
fying its  form. 

The  spinal  column,  in  its  normal  condition,  is  far 
from  being  straight ;  it  has  several  curves  :  one,  for- 
ward at  the  neck,  another  at  the  lumbar  region,  and 
one  backward,  in  its  dorsal  section,  and  another  at  the 
loins.  These  curves  increase  the  elasticity  of  the  col- 
umn, and  are  necessary  to  the  symmetry  of  the  body, 
and  are  evidently  intended  to  favor  the  natural  action 
of  the  muscles,  if  they  are  not  produced  thereby,  as 
some  affirm. 

It  is  manifest  from  this  that  a  lateral  curvature  of 
the  spine  is  not  primarily  a  fault  of  the  column  itself, 
but  of  certain  inusdes  whose  function  it  is  to  control 

14* 


322  DEFORMITIES    OF    THE    SPINE. 

the  movements  and  general  posture  of  the  trunk.  If 
the  natural  curves  of  the  spine  exceed  their  appointed 
limit,  there  will  result  some  deformity  of  shape ;  this 
occurs  from  weakness  of  muscles  which  should  maintain 
the  column  in  a  posture  more  nearly  straight.  In  this 
case  the  weight  of  the  body  is  not  well  supported,  and 
the  supple  column  yields  at  the  weakest  point. 

Lateral  curvatures  are  however  more  positive  evi- 
dence of  muscular  weakness,  and  form  a  class  of  cases 
for  which  the  movements  furnish  an  entirely  satisfac- 
tory remedy. 

Lateral  curvatures  may  be  single  or  double.  In  the 
former  case  the  middle  portion  of  the  column  deviates 
from  the  straight  line,  causing  the  body  to  form  a  more 
convex  line  upon  one  side  than  upon  the  other  ;  while 
in  the  latter  case  the  shape  of  the  column  somewhat 
resembles  the  italic  y,  deviating  from  the  straight  line 
one  way  at  the  upper  portion,  and  in  the  opposite  di- 
rection at  its  lower  portion,  the  one  acting  as  a  sort  of 
counterpart  to  the  other.  In  far  the  greater  number 
of  cases  the  superior  convexity  is  to  the  right,  and  the 
inferior,  or  that  of  the  lumbar  region,  to  the  left. 

There  is  also  a  twisting  of  the  trunk,  the  side  of  the 
projecting  shoulder  being  carried  backward  so  that  the 
transverse  plane  of  the  chest  and  pelvis  do  not  agree. 
Spinal  deformities  assume  very  many  different  shapes, 
scarcely  two  cases  being  exactly  alike  ;  all  of  these  re- 
quire a  competent  physician  to  distinguish  and  prop- 
erly prescribe  for.  The  cause  for  the  greater  frequeucy 
of  right  lateral  curvatures  is  evidently  connected  with 
the  greater  use,  and  consequently  power,  of  the  right 
arm  and  the  muscles  of  the  right  side,  which  causes 
the  dorsal  vertebrae  to  be  drawn  with  greater  fi-e que ncy 
and  force  in  that  direction. 


DEFORMITIES    OF   THE    SPINE.  323 

Another  influence,  generally  unsuspected,  is  also 
active  in  deternniiing  curvatures  to  tiie  right,  and  this 
is,  the  greater  habitual  use,  and  consequently  greater 
development,  of  the  right  than  of  the  left  leg.  There 
exists  in  most  persons  the  same  disj)osition  to  a  greater 
proportional  use  of  the  right  leg  as  of  the  right  arm. 
One  puts  the  right  leg  forward  oftener,  and  more  fre- 
quently rests  upon  it,  than  the  left — a  habit  that  is  not 
a  matter  of  usual  observation,  but  the  ill  efiects  of  this 
habit  in  persons  possessing  weak  muscles,  though  in- 
sidious, are  certain.  While  one  is  thus  resting  upon  a 
single  leg,  the  horizontal  plane  of  the  pelvis  is  caused 
to  incline  toward  the  side  imperfectly  supported  ;  con- 
sequently the  spinal  column,  which  rises  from  the  plane 
of  the  pelvis  at  right  angles,  is  forced  to  deviate  from 
the  perpendicular  and  to  incline  to  the  same  side. 
But  since  this  direction  of  the  spine  would  soon  carry 
the  center  of  gravity  of  the  body  beyond  the  base, 
which  would  cause  it  to  fall,  it  necessarily  curves  in 
the  opposite  direction,  and  goes  far  enough  beyond  the 
perpendicular  axis  of  the  body  to  compensate  for  the 
deviation  to  the  left.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  effect  of 
this  is  to  increase  the  amount  of  the  curve  in  the  tho- 
racic reo-iou. 

The  reader  will  now  understand  that  lateral  curva- 
ture of  the  spine  is  the  product  of  one  of  two  causes. 
Either  the  weakness  of  the  muscles  is  so  great  as  to 
leave  the  column  unsupported,  in  which  case  it  yields  to 
the  weight  of  the  superior  portion  of  the  body,  or  the 
greater  use  and  development  of  one  side  of  the  body 
interferes  with  the  harmonious  action  of  the  opposing 
muscles  of  the  two  sides,  and  the  different  portions  of 
the  column  are  constantly  forced  into  opposite  direc- 
tions.    In  either  case  the  change  in  the  shape  of  the 


324  DEFOEMiriES   OF   THE   SPrCfE. 

bones  must  ultimately  take  place,  and  the  deformity 
mider  all  ordinary  treatment  continues,  and  the  exe- 
cutive power  of  the  body  is  permanently  impaired. 
The  character  of  the  deformity,  however,  is  subject  to 
mucii  variation,  scarcely  any  two  cases  being  alike; 
it  may  be  modified  by  a  variety  of  cu-cimistauees — 
such,  for  example,  as  the  natural  shape  of  the  body, 
the  infiuence  of  particular  habits  and  postui-es,  such  as 
a  habit  of  reclining  on  one  side,  studying,  writing,  or 
other  occupations  that  employ  chiefly  one  or  the  other 
side  of  the  body,  whether  in  tbe  sitting  or  standing 
posture ;  and  it  may  even  follow  as  the  effect  of  dis- 
eases of  the  internal  organs. 

Curvature  of  the  spine  may  also  result  from  the 
scrofulous  diathesis.  In  this  case  ulcerative  absorp- 
tion of  some  portion  of  the  vertebral  column  takes 
place,  most  commonly  at  the  front  in  the  dorsal  region, 
where  the  inner  edges  of  the  contiguous  vertebrae  are 
subjected  to  the  most  pressure.  The  effect  of  this  is  to 
cause  the  vertebra  in  which  this  process  is  going  on 
to  acquire  more  of  a  wedge  shape,  or,  perhaps,  the  in- 
ner edge  of  the  bone  is  quite  worn  away,  allowing  the 
column  to  bend  at  this  point  and  producing  an  unsight- 
ly prominence  or  angle.  In  this  case  the  cartilage 
being  removed,  the  bones  become  irremediably  united, 
or,  technically  speaking,  anclojlofsed. 

In  all  the  above-mentioned  cases,  while  the  causes 
here  set  forth  continue,  the  deformity  has  a  tendency 
to  increase,  which  it  sometimes  does  to  an  extent  which 
becomes  extremely  prejudicial  to  the  health.  Tlie  in- 
ternal organs  may,  in  consequence,  become  misplaced, 
so  much  so  as  to  prevent  the  performance  of  tlieir  func- 
tions, or  the  spinal  cord  may  become  compressed,  pro- 
ducing neuralgia  or  partial  paralysis  of  the  lower  ex- 


DKFOIiMI'I'IKH    OJ-'    'IJIK    HJ'INE.  325 

tremities.  "No  nMiic^licH  Hiij>|>li(;<l  1]ir(>ij;_'-li  the  stomach 
are  of  tlie  least  avail  \]itw,  aud  generally  the  only  re- 
course of  the  physieian  has  Ijeen  artificial  supports  and 
mechanical  extension. 

The  result  of  the  kind  of  treatment  liere  refeiTed  to, 
usually  at  lirst  flattering,  is  afterward  anything  but  satis- 
factory. The  reason  is  apparent.  The  mechanical  sup- 
port affords  relief  to  the  fatigued  parts  and  removes  the 
undue  and  j^ainful  pressure  on  one  side.  But  this  very 
recourse  is  an  effectual  barrier  to  the  nutrition  and  de- 
velopment of  the  natural  muscular  supjjorts,  in  conse- 
quence of  which  their  condition,  instead  of  improving, 
is  certain  to  grow  worse,  and  the  disease  and  accom- 
panying deformity,  instead  of  being  removed,  are  per- 
petuated. The  great  majority  of  the  spinal  supporters 
in  vogue  were  contrived  to  take  the  jjlace  of  the  muscles 
and  to  do  their  duty,  which  is  manifestly  an  impossi- 
bility, and  their  influence  is  nnqualitiedly  harmful,  if 
not  actually  fatal.  They  subject  the  tender  and  sickly 
child  or  youth  to  a  torture  that  is  not  only  unneces- 
sary, but  to  the  last  degree  injurious  to  the  general 
health. 

Spinal  deformities  are  the  fruit  of  muscular  weakness, 
which  the  reader  knows  is  the  product  of  imperfect 
muscular  nutrition,  often  relerable  to  a  vicious  stomach 
and  defective  digestion.  The  trouble  is,  no  doubt,  often 
aggravated,  and  indeed,  in  some  eases,  induced  by  ir- 
regular innervation,  ju-oducing  spasm,  ov  at  least  a 
rigidity  and  tendcMicy  to  spasm  o\'  certain  muscles. 
But  in  all  ordinary  casi^s  the  therapeutic  indications 
are  simph>,  plain,  and  unri|ui\  oral,  and  consist  in 
devtlopuKj  thi'  jHni\  r  of  I  Ik  (/itj(sfir<\  it)uJ  csjKcially 
of  the  ;y^//.^v7/A/>' .vv/.vA;//,  thns  enabling  the  latter  to  do 
the  duties  it  lias  liitlicrlo  Jailed  \o  luTlbrm.     Tlie  means 


326  DEFORMITIES    OF    THE    SPINE, 

for  etrectiiig  these  objects  do  not  consist  in  any  wonder- 
ful and  nauseating  decoctions  to  be  swallowed  at  cer- 
tain times  of  the  day  and  night,  nor  in  mechanical  sup- 
ports and  complex  modes  of  extension,  but  simply  in 
exercise  under  proper  regulations  and  restrictions  ;  in 
other  words,  in  the  practice  of  movements^  which  are 
the  only  proper  and  efficient  means  of  calling  the 
needed  nutrition  into  the  disabled  parts,  so  as  to  cause 
their  development  and  reinstate  them  in  health  and 
power. 

In  directing  the  treatment  of  deformities  by  single 
movements,  it  is  only  necessary  to  say  that  the  move- 
ments should  be  directed  exclusively  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  weaker  parts.  For  instance,  in  right  lateral 
curvature,  the  movements  should  be  directed  to  the  left 
side,  and  in  the  ordinary  exercises  of  the  invalid  the 
left  side  should  always  have  the  preference,  while  much 
exertion  of  the  muscles  of  the  right  should  for  a  while, 
at  least,  be  avoided.  If  studious  attention  be  paid  to 
this  suggestion,  the  nutrition  of  the  two  sides  of  the 
body  will  soon  be  equalized,  and  their  muscular  forces 
balanced. 

It  is  not  difficult  by  means  of  duplicated,  and  even 
by  single,  movements  to  improve  the  shape  of  the 
spinal  column  to  a  certain  extent  in  nearly  every  case 
that  will  present  itself,  and  if  the  vertebrae  are  in 
sound  condition,  the  restoration  of  symmetry  to  the 
form  will  be  complete.  But  if  the  vertebrse  have 
become  considerably  diseased  and  misshapen,  the  de- 
gree of  improvement  attained  will  be  less.  In  such 
case  judicious  mechanical  aid  is  useful,  but  this  must 
not  be  afforded  at  the  expense  of  the  muscles.  This 
assistance  should  be  directed  solely  to  the  rectifi- 
cation of  the  shape  of  vertebral  bones,  and  consists 


DEFORMITIES    OF   THE    SPINE.  327 

simply  in  applying  pressure  to  the  projecting  point, 
wherever  that  may  be.  This  is  accomplished  by  means 
of  ingeniously  contrived  instruments,  nicely  adapted  to 
the  purpose.  But  these  aids  are  never  to  be  used  save 
in  connection  witli  approj^riate  and  vigorously  applied 
movements,  for  without  these  the  artificial  appliances 
are  valueless,  if  not  harmful. 

In  a  case  of  simple  curvature  to  the  right,  the  invalid 
may  employ  such  movements  as  the  following  with 
great  advantage : 

1.  Hanging  (left  arm). 

2.  Curtseying  (left  leg). 

3.  Left  curve  (weight  held)  wing,  step  standing, 
trunk  to  the  right  bending  (four  times). 

4.  Left  stretch,  right  wing  backward  lying,  legs  to 
the  left  guiding. 

5.  Left  stretch,  right  wing  stride  short  sitting,  trunk 
to  the  right  bending. 

6.  Left  stretch,  right  wing  stride  sitting,  trunk  for- 
ward falling. 

7.  Stretch  grasp  to  the  left  fall  standing,  holding. 

8.  Shelter  stride,  to  the  right  bent  sitting,  trunk  ro- 
tation. 

9.  Stretch  right  side  balance  lying,  holding. 


328  FEMALE   DISEASES. 


FEMALE    DISEASES. 

The  women  of  America,  probably  to  a  greater  extent 
than  those  of  any  other  comitry,  suffer  from  diseases 
peculiar  to  the  sex.  I  am  convinced  from  observation  as 
well  from  the  testimony  of  distinguished  medical  men 
and  others  at  home  and  abroad,  that  such  diseases  of 
this  class  are  far  less  common  in  European  countries 
than  here.  Diseases  of  this  class  are  likewise  scarcely 
known  among  the  rude,  uncultivated  people  of  any 
part  of  the  world. 

There  would  indeed  appear  to  be  something  in  the 
habits  and  customs  of  our  domestic  life  particularly 
calculated  to  engender  and  foster  these  distressing  and 
disastrous  maladies.  We  shall  hardly  succeed  in  as- 
certaining the  causes  of  the  prevalence  of  these  affec- 
tions among  us  by  entering  upon  an  analysis  of  isolated 
facts  or  of  the  habits  of  the  individual  or  of  society. 
It  is  probable  that  these  causes  are  numerous,  and  of 
such  a  nature  that,  regarded  singly,  they  would  seem 
very  unim2:)ortant.  AYe  are  nevertheless  justified  in 
making  the  inference  from  analogy  as  well  as  from 
facts  that  the  class  of  diseases  under  consideration,  like 
so  many  others,  are  to  be  regarded  simply  as  the 
effect  of  such  causes  as  tend  to  restrain  or  impede  the 
development  of  the  physical  system  and  interfere  with 
its  functional  actions.  We  may  enumerate  as  prom- 
inent among  these  causes,  dark  rooms,  rooms  overheat- 


FEMALE    DISEASES.  329 

ed,  illy  ventilated  apartinents^  luxurious  iipholstery^ 
fold  air^  such  labor  as  necessitates  tlie  excessive  exer- 
cise of  single  regions  of  the  body,  habits  of  indolence. 
To  these  may  be  added  others  of  another  class,  but 
quite  as  important,  that  often  co-operate  with  these, 
although  alone  sufficient  to  produce  the  results.  Tliero 
are  causes  derived  from  the  mental  and  nervous  system  / 
of  these  may  be  mentioned,  Iwusehold  cares  and  anxie- 
ties, the  annoying  whims  and  caprices  of  unruly  serv- 
ants, the  foolish  rivalries  of  fashionable  and  unfashion- 
able society,  the  excitements  of  parties,  balls,  the  theater, 
sentimental  novels,  and  tragical  romances. 

A  prime  cause  of  the  universal  deterioration  of  the 
organic  systems  of  our  women  we  believe  to  be  ascrib- 
able  largely  to  the  undue  culture  and  development  of 
the  sensibilities  resulting  from  their  too  great  devotion 
to  the  light  literature  of  the  day.  The  morbid  effect 
which  this  style  of  reading  does  confessedly  exert  upon 
the  mind  must  extend  to  the  body,  which  it  controls. 
The  extent  and  complexity  of  the  sympathetic  actions 
of  the  female  system,  under  the  influence  of  this  love- 
lorn and  trashy  sentimentalism,  can  only  be  estimated 
by  one  who  has  studied  the  feminine  branch  of  human 
nature  in  its  most  obscure  and  embarrassing  phenom- 
ena. By  the  means  here  adverted  to,  the  nerves  con- 
nected with  and  controlling  the  most  delicate  and 
sympathetic  function  of  the  female,  are  subjected  to  a 
morbid  influence,  resulting  but  too  often  in  grave  local 
as  well  as  general  disorder. 

The  symptoms  attendant  upon  the  class  of  diseases 
under  consideration  are  such  as  might  naturally  be  ex- 
pected to  result  from  the  causes  above  mentioned.  The 
laxity  of  muscular  fiber  in  these  cases  is  a  conspicuous 
feature.     This  is  manifested  even  in  the  expression  of 


330  FEMALE   DISEASES. 

tlie  countenance  and  in  the  style  of  tlie  carriage.  There 
is  always  inability  to  walk  any  considerable  distance 
without  fatigue,  which,  as  a  general  rule,  is  felt  mostly 
in  the  back  and  loins,  and  thence  down  the  limbs. 
Generally  the  pain  in  the  back  is  very  persistent.  The 
act  of  ascending  stairs  is  not  only  laborious  and  diffi- 
cult, but  is  followed  by  an  aggravation  of  the  distress- 
ing symptoms  peculiar  to  the  complaint.  There  is 
also,  generally,  tenderness  of  the  lower  portion  of  the 
abdomen,  accompanied  by  a  dragging  sensation  and 
pain,  urinary  derangement,  sensitiveness  of  the  lower 
extremity  of  the  spinal  column,  often  by  annoying  dis- 
tress in  the  head,  and  other  symptoms,  local  and  gen- 
eral, of  an  extent  and  severity  proportionate  to  the 
gravity  of  the  case. 

The  mental  phenomena  attendant  upon  this  disease 
are  not  less  conspicuous  than  those  just  described.  'Ner- 
vous excitability  and  irritability  of  mind,  with  fre- 
quent depression  of  spirits,  are  among  the  commonest 
symptoms.  Hysterical  paroxysms  frequently  occur 
after  unusual  fatigue  or  mental  exertion.  One  great 
cause  of  the  depression  experienced  is  the  conviction 
the  patient  usually  labors  under,  that  her  troubles  are 
incurable.  She  feels  that  her  disease  must  progress, 
and  the  unsatisfactory  effects  of  the  oft- tried  pill  and 
powder  tend  strongly  to  confirm  her  in  a  state  of  de- 
spondency and  depressing  irresolution. 

The  ordinary  physician,  as  well  as  the  specialist,  for 
whom  the  disease  in  question  affords  a  grand  field  for 
experiment,  reaps  glorious  harvests  from  this  class  of 
cases.  The  ill  success  of  treatment  constantly  expe- 
rienced only  seems  to  stimulate  to  trials  of  new  doctors 
and  new  remedies ;  and  so,  while  the  patient  grows 
worse  the  good  doctor  grows  rich. 


FEMALE    DISEASES.  331 

In  common  medical  practice,  the  attempt  is  often 
made  to  sustain  tlic  body  with  mechanical  supporters. 
These  are  destructive  to  the  health  of  the  muscles,  and 
hence  to  that  of  the  general  system.  It  employs  stim- 
ulant and  tonic  drugs,  the  temporary  effect  of  wliich 
deceives  the  patient,  and  the  ultimate  effect  impairs  the 
assimilative  and  the  general  vital  power.  It  ])re- 
soribes  inactivity^  or  suspension  of  the  natural  func- 
tions, as  the  grand  condition  for  recruiting  the  strength. 
It  employs  local  cauterization,  which,  thougli  it  re- 
lieves the  congested  membi'fine  to  which  it  is  applied, 
yet  in  the  end  draws  the  circulation  to  the  part  in 
greater  amount,  and  hence  favors  the  congestion  it  is 
employed  to  relieve.  It  makes  use  of  internal  sup- 
ports, which  distend  and  irritate  the  parts,  and  disturb 
their  natural  functions.  These  means  alternately  tan- 
talize the  sufferer  with  hopes  and  depress  her  wdtli 
fears,  and  prevent  both  herself  and  her  medical  adviser 
from  attendino-  to  the  real  fundamental  causes  of  her 
misery,  and  from  the  employment  of  the  appropriate 
means  for  its  radical  relief. 

The  existence  of  the  symptoms  above  enumerated  do 
not  always  indicate  the  existence  of  local  congestion- 
nor  local  disease.  Even  in  cases  where  they  are  pres- 
ent in  a  marked  degree,  I  have  often  been  obliged  to 
differ  from  physicians  whose  judgment  I  sincerely  de- 
sire to  respect,  in  regard  to  the  presence  of  organic  dis- 
ease. And  even  when  there  is  ulceration  of  the  neck 
of  the  uterus,  hypertrophy  of  that  organ,  leucorrhea, 
etc.,  the  gravity  of  the  case  does  not  reside  in  these 
symptoms,  but  in  the  lack  of  mtal  energy  wdiich  per- 
mits these  symptoms  to  occur.  The  common  pi-actice 
demonstrates  every  day  that  tliese  signs  continually 
return   when   they  have  been  treated  by  the  above- 


332  FEMALE    DISEASES. 

mentioned  methods.  Xo  reliable  and  permanent  cure 
can  be  effected  wliile  the  disease  is  regarded  as  resid- 
ing in  the  symptoms,  which  should  be  considered  as 
only  proofs  of  its  existence. 

A  serious  objection  to  the  ordinary  practice  in  uterine 
diseases  is  the  frequently  repeated  examinations  which 
it  necessitates.  The  rehned  woman  shrinks  from  these 
as  from  martyrdom,  and  with  reason.  In  the  method 
of  cure  advocated  in  this  treatise,  such  examinations 
are  dispensed  with,  except  so  far  as  they  may  be  neces- 
sary in  forming  a  diagnosis  in  a  difficult  case. 

Let  us  now  take  another  view  of  this  class  of  diseases. 

The  real  and  essential  pathology  of  these  cases  con- 
sists in  such  conditions  as  defective  muscular  nutrition 
and  tone,  defective  peripheral  circulation,  central  con- 
gestion, defective  innervation,  heightened  nervons  sus- 
ceptibility, and  bad  digestion,  the  latter  three  of  which 
conditions  are  dependent  on  the  first  three  mentioned. 

The  condition  of  the  muscles  should  not  be  judged 
of  by  the  amount  of  force  exerted  under  any  strong 
mental  excitement;  for,  with  the  impulsive  nervous 
habit,  induced  by  the  disease,  great  efforts  of  short 
continuance  may  be  put  forth,  but  the  high  degree  of 
nervous  action  necessary  to  such  display,  proves  the 
real  lack  of  muscular  power.  Such  exertion  is  always 
followed  in  these  cases  by  exhaustion  and  permanent 
debility. 

The  causes  of  the  above-mentioned  states,  consti- 
tuting the  disease,  have  been  already  alluded  to,  and 
consist  of  defective  early  (3ulture,  uncorrected  by  sub- 
sequent attention  to  the  needs  of  both  the  physiologi- 
cal and  moral  nature.  Society  consigns  the  conditions 
upon  which  a  woman's  caj)acity  for  usefulness  in  life 
mainly  depends,  to  habitual  neglect  and  practical  con- 


fp:male  diseases.  333 

tempt.  Do  we  wonder  that  women  complain  of  weak 
abdominal  muscles  ?  Why  should  these  muscles  be 
strong  when  so  little  used  ?  and  how  can  they  be  other- 
wise than  weak  when  they  have  been  subjected  to 
the  constant  bandaging  necessitated  by  the  prevailing 
mode  of  dress  ?  Do  any  wonder  that  she  is  pale  and 
is  addicted  to  sighing  and  tremors,  while  she  sits  the 
whole  day,  or  a  great  2^art  of  it,  at  her  needle-work  or 
book,  or  languidly  reclines  upon  the  lounge  ?  If  she 
takes  exercise,  she  is  very  careful  that  the  important 
regions  in  question  shall  be  disturbed  thereby  as  little 
as  possible.  If  driven  by  ennui^  she  walks  /  the  pelvis 
is  carried  as  tenderly  as  if  made  of  glass.  We  admit 
there  is  a  great  deal  to  excuse  the  connnon  aversion 
which  women  feel  for  any  descri]3tion  of  exercise,  when 
the  affection  exists  in  any  degree  of  severity,  for  the 
whole  contents  of  ilie  abdominal  cavity  which  the 
jnuscles  were  made  to  sustain  are  suffered  to  obey  the 
law  of  gravity,  owing  to  the  extensive  relaxation  and 
weakness  of  these  sup[)orts,  and  the  consequences  are, 
as  shown  to  some  extent  in  the  external  appearance  of 
the  abdomen,  a  depression  of  the  epigastric  region,  and 
a  proportionate,  unnatural  fullness  of  the  hypogastric 
region.  The  lumbar  portion  of  the  spinal  column  is 
dragged  painfully  forward,  which  displacement  is  com- 
pensated by  an  ugly  rotundity  of  the  shoulders,  which 
gi^tses  the  head  an  aAvkward  forw^ard  pitch. 

The  muscles  of  tlie  abdomen  in  all  these  cases  are 
soft  and  doughy  to  the  touch,  thin  and  inelastic. 

The  exterior  shape,  however,  conveys  but  a  slight 
idea  of  the  extent  of  the  muscular  weakness  of  this 
class  of  invalids,  for  there  are  a  number  of  other  mus- 
cles quite  beyond  the  reach  of  direct  observation,  which 
are  equally  important  to  the  liealtli  of  these  parts  with 


334 


FEMALE   DISEASES. 


those  of  the  abdomen ;  such  as  the  internal  muscles 
of  locomotion,  the  rotary  muscles  of  the  thigh,  and 
especially  those  of  the  floor  of  the  pelvis. 

The  health  of  the  pelvic  organs  is  dependent  lo  the 
same  extent,  as  are  those  of  the  abdominal,  upon  tlie 
oscillatory  motion  communicated  by  the  diaphragm  in 
respiration.  A  decrease  of  this  motion  favors  conges- 
tion in  the  capillary  cir-  Fig.  79. 
culation  of  those  organs 
which  have  but  little  mo- 
tion from  causes  within 
themselves,  and  which, 
therefore,  become  depend- 
ent on  that  received  from 
neighboring  muscles. 

It  appears  from  this 
statement  that  the  health 
of  the  pelvic  organs  is  de- 
pendent very  much  upon 
the  mechanical  effects  pro- 
duced upon  them  by  res- 
piration. But  the  health 
of  the  chest  and  that  of 
Outline  of  the  the  abdomcu  are  associat- 

FEMALE    FOEM,    WITH  t    .  ^ 

WEAK  MUSCLES  AND  ed  lu  auothcr  mauuer.    A 

SYMPTOMS   OF  PELVIC 

DISEASE.  glance  at  the  outlme  cuts 

shows  that  with  the  distention  of  the  lower  portion  of 
the  abdominal  walls,  and  the  gravitation  of  the  contents, 
the  diaphragm,  which  is  the  superior  boundary  of  the 
abdominal  cavity,  must  also  descend.  The  ribs  neces- 
sarily become  much  depressed,  and  the  cavity  of  the 
chest  becomes  narrowed,  and  the  breathing  capacity 
consequently  diminished,  l^ow,  if  the  ribs  be  elevated, 
the  diaphragm,  which  is  connected  with  them,  will  of 


OtJTLINE  OF  A 

HEALTHFUL  FEMALE 

FORM. 


FEMALE   DISEASES.  335 

course  be  raised,  and  there  will  be  nothing  to  force 
from  their  23lace  the  contents  of  the  abdominal  and 
pelvic  cavities. 

We  need  not  repeat  the  statement,  that  the  proper 
digestion  of  food  and  healthful  blood  are  also  depend- 
ant on  vigorous  respiration.  ]J^ow,  at  the  bottom  of 
;ill  this  general  muscular  weakness  of  the  female  lies 
this  faulty  condition  of  the  blood.  But  foul  blood  does 
a  worse  thing  than  produce  weakness  ;  it  creates  con- 
gestion, and  just  where  this  congestion  shall  occur  is 
decided  by  the  law  of  gravity ;  the  most  depending 
organs,  especially  such  as  enjoy  no  voluntary  muscu- 
lar contractility,  as  the  uterus,  are  most  likely  to  take 
on  this  state.  The  peculiar  congestion  precedhig  and 
accompanying  the  menstrual  flux  may  become  chronic 
from  imperfection  of  the  vital  operation,  and  add  to 
the  trouble.  When  we  consider  the  universality  of 
these  causes  noticed,  we  can  only  wonder  that  so  many 
of  the  women  of  our  day  and  country  manage  to  escape 
these  difficulties. 

Tlie  remedy  suited  to  tliis  large  and  distressing  class 
of  complaints  is  suggested  by  their  pathology.  Indeed, 
it  is  in  cases  of  disj^lacements  of  various  kinds,  con- 
gestion, ulceration,  etc.,  of  the  womb,  and  affections 
of  other  organs  associated  with  it,  as  the  bladder  and 
ovaries,  that  the  treatment  by  movements  has  been 
proved  efficacious  far  beyond  any  other  known,  whether 
surgical  or  medical.  JBy  movements,  the  organs  may 
•be  raised  to  their  normal  position,  and  their  retention 
in  place  is  not  dependent  upon  any  mechanical  ap- 
paratus, but  upon  their  restored  powder — this,  too,  with- 
out any  of  those  indelicate  manipulations  being  neces- 
sary which  are  required  by  the  common  treatment. 
By  means  of  the  most  simple  instructions  relative  to 


3m6  female  diseases. 

the  principles  and  practice  of  movements,  the  condi- 
tion of  the  health  of  the  region  in  qnestion  is  placed 
under  the  control  of  the  jpatient  herself.  The  very 
amiable  reader  may  donbt  the  propriety  of  thus  inter- 
fering with  the  doctor's  business,  but  there  must  be  a 
satisfaction  even  to  the  most  amiable  in  doing  thor- 
oughly for  one's  self  what  the  most  learned  doctor  can 
do  for  her  not  one  half  so  well. 

The  indications  of  treatment  in  these  cases  are  gen- 
erally the  following : 

1.  To  elevate  the  ribs  and  diaphragm,  and  increase 
the  space  of  the  superior  portion  of  the  abdominal 
cavity. 

2.  To  contract  the  space  of  the  inferior  portion  of 
the  same  cavity  by  causing  a  permanent  contraction 
of  the  muscular  walls  of  this  region. 

3.  To  develop  the  small  muscles  about  the  thighs 
and  those  constituting  the  floor  of  the  pelvis. 

4.  To  remove  the  blood  from  the  internal  weak  and 
therefore  congested  parts  to  peripheral  parts,  abdom- 
inal coverings,  and  extremities. 

5.  To  restore  health  to  the  mental  and  nervous  sys- 
tems by  diminishing  nervous  irritability. 

6.  To  impart  vital  energy  to  the  whole  system  that 
sliall  be  radical  and  permanent. 

The  particular  movements  required  to  fulfill  these 
indications  depend  much  upon  the  temperament  as 
well  as  the  condition  of  the  health  of  the  patient.  If 
there  be  great  feebleness,  the  duplicated  movements 
are  indispensable  to  the  successfnl  treatment.  At 
least,  they  must  be  employed  in  its  beginning.  If 
there  be  mnch  tenderness  of  the  abdomen,  as  there 
frequently  is,  vibratory  and  other  j)assive  movements 
for  the  central  portions  of  the  body  will  be  intersper.^ed 


FEMALE   DISEASES.  337 

with  sucli  as  are  more  active,  applied  to  the  extremi- 
ties. After  a  few  days  the  extremities  will  be  better 
supplied  with  blood,  and  the  visceral  congestion  will 
be  diminished  to  a  corresponding  extent,  so  that  press- 
ures^ hendings^  etc.,  will  not  only  be  easily  borne,  but 
be  very  grateful  to  the  patient.  After  this  is  accom- 
plished, the  patient  may  carry  on  the  cure  alone  if  cir- 
cumstances make  it  necessary  ;  or  she  may  begin  the 
treatment  with  the  single  movements,  if  the  disease  be 
not  far  advanced,  with  such  as  the  following,  for  in- 
stance, confident  of  speedy  beneficial  effects. 

EXAMPLES  OF  PRESCRIPTION. 

1.  Stretch  (weight  held)  backward  lying,  holding.   68. 

2.  Elbow  and  toe  lying,  holding,  or  hips  raising.    58. 

3.  Wing  backward  lying,  legs  raising.     26. 

4.  Wing  legs  angle  half  lying,  thighs  rotation.     31. 

5.  Wing  legs  angle  lying,  hips  raising.     30. 
Repeat — 

1.  Keclined  arms  angle  kneeling,  arms  up  stretch- 
ing.    43. 

2.  Stretch  long  sitting,  trunk  forward  falling.     53. 

3.  Stretch    twist   sitting,    trunk    oblique    backward 
falling.     34. 

4.  Head    rest   forward  fall    standing,   leg    raising. 
Change.     22. 

5.  Forward  bent  standing,  chine  knocking.    32. 

6.  Wing  long  sitting,  legs  twisting.     24. 

7.  Elbow  and  foot  side  lying,  hips  raising.     62. 

8.  Wing  short  sitting,  leg  outward  stretching.     16. 

9.  Shelter  backward  lying,  legs  rotation.     29. 

10.  Wing  sitting,  feet  rotation.     5. 

In  selecting  movements  for  these  affections,  the  na- 
ture of  each  case  must  be  carefully  considered.     Gren- 

15 


338  FEMALE   DISEASES. 

erallj,  appropriate  movements  sliould  be  applied  to 
the  extremities  at  first  almost  exclusively.  The  feebler 
the  case,  the  fewer  the  movements  directly  affecting 
the  central  organs  should  be  employed.  The  move- 
ment should  be  taken  once  a  day,  and  if  there  be  suffi- 
cient ability,  'No.  2  of  the  first  example,  or  IN'os.  1  or 
3  of  the  second,  may  be  repeated,  according  to  the 
mode  already  described,  several  times  in  the  course  of 
the  day. 

If  the  patient  be  afilicted  with  amenorrhea.^  the  fol- 
lowing movements  are  useful : 

Wing  chine  lean  stride  standing,  curtseying.     9. 

Support  half  standing,  curtseying.     10. 

Forward  fall  head  support  standing,  leg  raising.    22. 

Support  half  standing,  leg  rotation.     Change.     23. 

Half  wing  support  standing,  leg  outward  raising.    21. 

Shelter  backward  lying,  legs  raising.     26. 

Shelter  trunk  backward  lying,  legs  rotation.     29. 

Forward  bent  standing,  chine  knocking ;  and  the 
foot  and  leg  movements  generally. 

The  auxiliary  means  are  important  here.  The  pa- 
tient must  observe  a  proper  and  healthful  diet,  abjure 
all  condiments  and  stimulants ;  and  all  indigestible  mat- 
ters and  articles,  within  their  chemical  and  physiologi- 
cal relations,  may  properly  be  styled  ^6>(?r,  however  re- 
cherche  and  costly.  (See  article  on  Diet.)  She  must 
also  ride  and  walk  in  the  open  air,  without  regard  to 
the  humidity  or  disagreeable  temperature  of  the  atmos- 
phere— should  also  be  rubbed  with  the  wet  hand  over 
the  whole  cutaneous  surface,  and  then,  after  drying 
with  a  towel,  with  the  dry  hand,  and  if  convenient,  a 
shower  sitting-bath  may  be  used  for  two  minutes,  once 
or  twice  in  the  course  of  tlie  day. 

K  she  has  anteversion,  or  retroversion,  or  otlier  seri- 


FEMALE   DISEASES.  339 

ons  displacements,  her  movements  should  be  prescribed 
by  a  competent  physician.     Let  this  be  remembered. 

By  following  the  above  rules  and  directions,  the 
woman  afflicted  with  the  diseases  of  this  chass  will  gen- 
erally, in  a  few  days  or  wrecks,  find  her  strength  to  be 
greatly  improving,  and  she  will  again  be  enabled  to 
mount  stairs  without  difficulty,  a  faculty  most  desir- 
able in  this  age  of  tall  dwellings.  She  w^ill  feel  the 
blessed  influx  of  health  through  all  the  tissues  of 
her  frame.  She  will  rejoice  and  be  glad  ;  and,  if  of  a 
grateful  turn,  will  be  very  sure  to  sing  the  praises  of 
her  deliverer,  the  Movement- Cure. 

The  above  formulas  are  given  as  examples  only,  and 
are  not  to  be  regarded  as  appropriate  to  every  imag- 
inable case. 


84:0       MISCELLANEOUS   APPLICATIONS   OF   MOVEMENTS. 


MISCELLANEOUS  APPLICATIONS  OF  MOVEMENTS. 

Movements  to  Remove  Fatigue. — It  is  not  necessary 
for  one  to  wholly  abstain  from  motion,  in  order  to 
secure  rest  from  fatigue.  On  tlie  contrai'v,  .1  e  con- 
tinuance of  exercise  in  many  cases  is  more  favor- 
able to  restoration  than  a  state  of  total  inaction 
would  be,  provided  always,  that  other  than  the 
fatigued  parts  be  called  into  action.  Hence  the  ad- 
vantage of  a  frequent  change  of  occupation,  especially 
for  the  weakly.  One  can  accom]3lish  a  vast  deal 
more  in  a  given  time  by  varying  his  work  occasion- 
ally, than  by  expending  his  strength  uj^on  any  one 
particular  kind.  All  animals  instinctively  stretch 
themselves,  that  is,  cause  the  muscles  situated  remote- 
ly from  the  central  organs  to  act,  in  order  to  get  relief 
from  the  sense  of  fatigue.  The  oj^erators  in  the  foreign 
Movement-Cure  institutions,  instead  of  resting  as  labor- 
ers commonly  do,  after  two  or  three  hours  of  the  sever- 
est exercise,  ajpjply  movements  to  each  other^  in  order  to 
become  rested,  selecting  such  portions  of  the  body  as 
were  least  brought  into  action  by  their  professional 
manipulations.  A  favorite  movement  with  the  female 
assistants,  I  observed,  was  that  termed  hachward  and 
leg  lying^  holding.  In  this  movement  the  legs  are 
fixed,  the  body  in  the  backward  lying  position,  while 
the  trunk  is  unsupported,  causing  powerful  action  of 
the  muscles  of  the  abdomen,  in  consequence  of  vdjicli 


MISCELLANEOUS    APPLICATIONS    OF    MOVEMENTS.        311 

fatigue  of  tlie  back  (from  wliich  they  most  suffer)  is  re- 
moved. All  patients,  and  especially  the  female  por- 
tion, testify  to  the  readiness  and  permanency  with  which 
habitual  back-ache  is  thus  removed.  In  explanation  of 
this  we  need  only  refer  tlie  reader  to  the  principles  laid 
down  in  the  first  part  of  this  work.  Severe  action  of 
any  portion  of  the  body  is  effectual  in  calling  the  circu- 
lation, and  especially  the  nervous  influence, //'<9m  other 
portions  of  the  body,  which  in  the  instance  in  question 
are  congested  by  the  previous  exercise.  By  causing 
different  portions  of  the  body  to  act  alternately,  they 
are  enabled  to  act  equally,  their  functions  are  harmon- 
ized, and  the  sense  of  fatigue  is  removed. 

The  system  of  movements  regards  the  body  as  a 
reservoir  of  force  ^  upon  which  every  action  makes  a 
a  certain  demand.  If  the  demands  ujDon  the  system 
for  expenditure  be  moderate^  the  supply  is  readily  kept 
up  equal  to  the  demand  by  means  of  the  unceasing 
operations  of  the  organizing  processes.  If  the  demand 
caused  by  the  exertion  of  power  be  excessive,  or  if  it 
proceed  from  several  different  portions  of  the  system 
at  the  same  time,  then  the  organizing  processes  are  not 
equal  to  it,  2iX\di  fatigue  is  the  consequence.  Immunity 
fi-om  fatigue  is  experienced  always  in  proportion  to  the 
degree  of  perfection  attained  by  the  nutritive  or  organ- 
izing processes. 

It  must  not  be  inferred  from  the  above  remarks,  that 
movements  are  always  the  appropriate  remedy  for 
fatigue.  If  the  fatigue  be  general,  absolute  repose  is 
of  course  necessary. 

To  Stop  ISTose-bleed. — The  remedy  for  this  affection 
is  very  simple ;  nothing  more  is  generally  necessary 
than  to  7'aise  hoth  arms  to  upioard  stretch  ])osition. 


3i2       MISCELLAl^EOUS   APPLICATIONS   OF   MOVEMENTS. 

The  efficacy  of  this  action  for  the  purpose  named,  ad- 
mits of  easy  demonstration,  but  why  the  effect  follows, 
is  not,  at  first,  so  apparent.  We  would  explain  it  in 
this  way.  It  may  be  observed,  that  if  the  arms  be 
raised  to  the  perpendicular  upright  position,  and  then, 
after  remaining  uplifted  for  a  short  time,  be  permitted 
suddenly  to  dro])^  the  hands  will  be  found  suffused 
with  blood.  Since  a  much  greater  impediment  than 
usual  is  presented  to  flow  of  the  blood  to  the  uplift- 
ed hands,  occasioned  by  the  opposition  of  the  force  of 
gravity,  the  effort  of  the  arterial  vessels  upon  which 
this  increased  labor  devolves  becomes  necessarily 
much  greater  than  before ;  and  since  the  arterial  press- 
ure in  direction  of  the  arms  is  increased,  that  toward 
the  head  is  correspondingly  lessened.  When,  now,  the 
impediment  (consisting  of  gravity)  is  removed,  while 
the  arterial  impulse  is  continued,  the  blood,  rushing  to 
the  hands,  produces  a  marked  derivative  effect  upon  the 
circulation  of  the  head,  and  consequently  the  flow  from 
the  ruptured  capillaries  of  the  nasal  membrane  ceases. 
Another  Qnode  of  stopping  nose-bleed,  presented  by 
Branting,  is  as  follows  :  The  subject  takes  a  fcdl  stride 
sitting  i^osture^  the  nose  is  grasped  and  rapidly  vibrated, 
while  at  the  same  instant  the  trunk  rises,  and  returns 
to  the  erect  position.  This  action  may  be  repeated 
several  times. 

To  Induce  Yomiting. — The  method  of  causing  the 
stomach  to  discharge  its  contents  by  means  of  irritating 
the  fauces  was  known  long  before  Marshall  Hall  ex- 
plained the  reflex  powers  of  the  nei'vous  system,  upon 
which  the  action  of  vomiting  depends.  This  means  of 
dislodging  the  contents  of  the  stomach  is  generally 
adequate  for  the  purpose,  in  those  cases  where  this  effect 


MISCELLAlfEOUS   ArPLICATIONS    OF  MOVEMENTS.       343 

is  really  desirable.)  provided  it  be  managed  with  suffi- 
cient tact.  It  is  nuicli  better  in  most  cases  than  to  ir- 
ritate the  stomach  with  powerful  drugs,  which  course 
is  necessarily  followed  by  great  debility  of  the  organ, 
even  if  lucky  enough  to  escape  inflammation,  or  more 
serious  chronic  disease. 

The  proper  method  in  these  cases  is  to  ply  the 
stomach  with  lukewarm  water  in  large  doses,  and  often 
repeated,  no  matter  how  much  this  may  be  in  opposi- 
tion to  the  feelings  and  in  spite  of  the  protestations  of 
the  patient.  When  the  feeling  of  nausea  has  arisen  to 
a  good  degree,  something  (the  finger  will  do)  may 
be  applied  to  the  back  part  of  the  mouth.  This  will 
generally  cause  the  stomach  to  contract  spasmodically, 
and  eject  its  contents.  Should  it  refuse  to  do  so,  the 
hand  of  an  attendant  may  be  applied  to  the  stomach, 
just  below  the  pit,  and  by  making  a  sudden,  but  not 
violent  kneading  motion  in  an  upward  direction,  a 
contractile  action  of  the  stomach  is  suddenly  induced, 
and  its  contents  are  discharged. 

To  Remove  Chilblatxs. — This  annoying  afl:ection,  in 
ordinary  cases,  may  be  quickly  removed.  The  ])rinciple 
of  cure  is  that  concerned  in  the  removal  of  congestion 
of  internal  organs  by  means  of  vibratory  movements. 
The  mode  of  operation  is  pointed  out  in  N'o.  6,  page 
164:.  Or,  the  leg  of  the  afflicted  foot  may  rest  upon 
the  knee  of  another  person,  who  deals  rapid  but  light 
blows  upon  the  bottom  of  the  foot,  it  being  protected 
by  a  shoe  or  boot. 

The  reason  why  the  congestion  of  the  capillaries  con- 
stituting the  disease  is  dissipated  by  this  treatment,  is 
quite  obvious.  The  actual  condition  consists  not  only 
of  a  dilatation  of  the  capillaries,  but  also  in  a  change 


34^1:       MISCELLANEOUS    APPLICATIONS    OF   MOVEMENTS. 

in  tlie  quality  of  the  blood  and  the  occurrence  of  the 
gelatinous  corpuscle^  characteristic  of  inflammation, 
which,  with  the  normal  blood  corpuscle,  become  ad- 
herent to  the  walls  of  the  capillaries,  effectually  clog- 
ging the  channel  and  preventing  the  onward  flow. 
The  motion  communicated  in  the  manner  described 
excites  the  contraction  of  the  distended  walls  of  the 
vessels,  and  at  the  same  time  detaches  adhering  cor- 
puscles, which  of  course  are  carried  through  by  the 
current  sweeping  onward  from  the  heart.  The  fresh 
blood  entering  brings  the  conditions  for  restoring  the 
normal  state  of  the  parts.  The  same  reasoning  proba- 
bly holds  true  for  the  application  of  passive  vibration 
by  the  duplicated  movements^  in  all  cases  of  congestion, 
and,  if  properly  managed,  of  inflammation  even,  wher- 
ever situated. 

To  Relieve  Headache. — 1.  Energetic  friction  ap- 
plied over  the  longitudinal,  lateral,  and  basilar  sinuses 
will  frequently  relieve  this  affection.  The  reason 
seems  to  be,  that  contraction  is  thus  induced  in  the 
venous  walls,  which  consequently  urge  the  blood  for- 
ward, relieving  them  of  their  distention.  Tliis  may  be 
done  by  one's  self,  or  by  another.  The  2:)rocedure  is 
as  follows  :  partly  close  the  hands,  placing  the  backs 
of  the  fingers  in  contact,  raise  the  hands  to  the  head, 
placing  the  tips  of  all  the  fingers  over  the  longitudinal 
suture^  or  middle  line  of  the  head.  IS^ow  carry  the 
fingers,  thus  placed,  backward  and  forward  on  the  mid- 
dle line,  making  considerable  friction  upon  the  scalp. 
The  fingers  may  now  divide  and  pass  down  the  back 
of  the  head  at  each  side  to  the  base,  and  then  along  the 
base  at  the  roots  of  the  liair,  continuing  the  same  de- 
gree of  friction  through  the  whole  course. 


MISCELLANEOUS    APPLICATIONS   OF   MOVEMENTS.        345 

2.  If  a  hand  be  very  tightly  applied  about  the  head, 
and,  after  remaining  a  few  minutes,  be  suddenly  re- 
moved, a  similar  effect  is  experienced.  This  effect  is 
probably  due  to  the  impulse  thus  afforded  to  the  circu- 
lation in  the  venous  sinuses. 

3.  Movements  tending  to  warm  the  feet  are  always 
useful  in  headache. 

4.  Headache  is  more  frequently  caused  by  a  fault  in 
the  quality  rather  than  in  the  quantity  of  the  blood 
— in  which  case,  all  those  means  whose  influence  is  to 
purify  or  deterge  the  system  ought  to  be  used,  and  to 
an  extent  corresponding  with  the  gravity  of  the  case. 
In  moderate  cases,  a  long  walk  in  the  open  air  is  suffi- 
cient. If  this  is  not  enough,  aljstinence  must  be  prac- 
ticed till  the  stomach  is  purified,  the  liver  relieved  of 
the  tenderness  and  congestion  that  usually  in  such 
cases  exists,  and  the  secretions  set  free.  To  promote 
vomiting,  in  the  mode  above  described,  is  sometimes 
necessary  ;  but  persons  liable  to  periodical  attacks  of 
this  affection  should  learn  to  avoid  them  by  an  im- 
proved hygiene,  rather  than  to  cure  them  by  any  pro- 
cess. Nervous  headache  requires  rest  and  sleep,  which 
may  be  induced  by  duplicated  movements. 

Worms  in  Children. — These  parasites  feed  upon 
the  imperfectly  digested  residual  of  the  alimentary 
tube,  and  they  can  never  occur  without  the  existence 
of  such  food  for  their  sustenance.  It  is  the  had  diges- 
tion^ giving  rise  to  worms,  rather  than  the  worms  them- 
selves, that  constitute  the  disease,  and  it  is  evident 
that  they  can  not  exist  when  the  cause  is  wanting. 
The  appetite  of  the  child — which  in  these  cases  is  al- 
ways voracious — must  be  restrained,  and  the  action  of 
the  digestive  organs  promoted,  in  order  that  all  the 

15* 


SttG       MISCELLANEOUS    APPLICATIONS   OF   MOVEMENTS. 

food  taken  shall  be  completely  disposed  of.  When 
this  is  effected,  the  parasites  will  be  expelled.  The 
abdomen  of  the  child  must  be  subjected  to  a  thorough 
hieading^  as  described  in  a  former  chapter,  three  or 
four  times  a  day,  ten  or  fifteen  minutes  at  each  time. 

The  abdomen,  in  these  cases,  is  generally  tumid,  but 
the  kneading  increases  the  natural  motion  of  the  mus- 
cular walls  of  the  canal,  promotes  absorption,  and  re- 
stores a  healthy  tone  to  all  the  viscei-al  contents.  The 
child,  if  possible,  should  also  be  made  to  ride  much  in 
a  springless  vehicle  in  the  open  air.  Worms  are  often 
expelled  from  the  bowels  after  a  few  days'  practice  of 
the  plan  here  directed,  and  this  result  should  be  re- 
garded as  a  consequence^  rather  than  the  cause^  of  the 
restoration  to  health. 

Heknia. — ^This  occurs  generally  in  consequence  of 
weakness  of  the  muscle  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  ab- 
domen, the  hernial  region.  The  fibers  of  these  mus- 
cles are  liable  to  separate,  upon  a  sudden  muscular 
effort  being  made,  tlius  permitting  the  intestine  to  pro- 
trude. In  many  cases  of  this  affection  the  truss  has 
■»  ^  --  -^.'QT^pnsed  with,  and  the  difficulty  removed,  through 
tile  -  of  the  dupli- 

cated movem.  .    ,,...,.. 

The  proper  moveu  -)}igqfVt] 

Half  stretch,  half  wing,  liaii  Kicxx  .    ^  ".;f.:   '..;:,; 

twisting.  This  movement  is  at  first  to  be  performed 
with  one  side  only,  the  trunk  twisting  toward  the  re- 
laxed side,  that  is,  the  side  of  which  the  foot  is  raised. 
After  some  progress  is  made,  the  twisting  should  be 
done  in  the  oj)posite  direction.  The  kneeling  twisting, 
Nos.  42  and  48,  also  Nos.  56,  26,  and  61,  might  be  em- 
ployed to  good  advantage. 


MISCELLANEOrS    APPLICATIONS    OF   MOVEMENTS.        347 

Frolai'sus  OF  THE  Wo^iB  AJ^D  BowELs. — 111  all  cascs 
of  this  kind  tliertj  is  great  weakness  of  the  muscles  of 
the  chest,  aMomen,  jjerineicm,  etc.  The  affection  is 
immediately  relieved  by  practicing  the  movement  Ko. 
Gl.  To  strengthen  the  parts  that  are  weak,  so  as  to 
prevent  a  return,  the  muscles  belonging  to  all  the  re- 
gions above  mentioned  require  to  be  developed  by 
judicious  practice  of  the  movements  aifecting  the 
parts.  To  accom]3lish  this  object,  such  movements  as 
the  following  are  recommended  :  N'os.  43,  47,  48,  56, 
36,  30,  and  31. 

To  Kelieve  Back-ache. — When  caused  by  fatigue, 
such  movements  as  cause  the  abdomen  to  act  are  use- 
fuh  But  this  symptom  is  often  caused  by  laxity  of 
inuscles,  allowing  the  visceral  contents  to  gravitate. 
In  this  case  the  movements  above  recommended  for 
prolapsus  will  be  found  effectual. 

Amexorkhea. — All  processes  tending  to  strengthen 
the  body,  tend  to  overcome  menstrual  obstruction. 
The  movements  particularly  to  be  recommended  are, 
:N"os.  14,  18,  27,  29,  30,  31,  and  32,  and,  indeed,  such 
movements  are  also  useful  for  constipation. 

To  Excite  Action  of  the  Lower  Bowel. — A  move- 
ment highly  useful  for  this  purpose  is  wide  stride  leg 
angle  standing,  trunk  vibration,  E'o.  65.  The  position 
for  this  movement  is  tbe  same  as  the  terminating  posi- 
tion of  ISTo.  9.  Also  the  examples  I^os.  29,  31,  and  32 
are  very  useful,  as  well  as  kneading,  ^o.  ^%. 


348  vAEiors  common  exercises. 


DIFFERENT    EFFECTS    OF    VARIOUS    COMMOJT    EXER- 
CISES UPON"  PERSONS  m  HEALTH. 

"Walking. — This  is  the  most  agreeable  and  natural 
of  all  exercises.  In  walking,  the  body  is  free  and  un- 
constrained, most  parts  of  it  are  subjected  to  gentle 
action  with  but  a  slight  degree  of  expenditure  of  mus- 
cular or  of  nervous  force,  these  powers  being  econo- 
mized to  the  greatest  extent,  and  the  action  may  con- 
sequently be  continued  for  a  longer  period  than  almost 
any  other  that  engages  the  will.  Walking  causes  the 
blood  to  circulate  freely  in  the  extremities,  skin,  and 
lungs,  to  refresh,  nourish,  and  invigorate  these  parts, 
strengthens  the  spine,  and  relieves  all  tendency  to  con- 
gestion of  the  internal  organs  and  head.  It  also  sup- 
plies the  most  perfect  condition  for  mental  action  and 
enjoyment.  It  is  almost  the  only  exercise  which  in- 
valids of  nearly  all  classes  may  engage  in  without  a 
prescription.  But  it  does  not  supply  all  the  system 
requires  of  exercise.  It  fails  to  call  into  sufficient 
action  either  the  abdominal  or  the  breathing  organs, 
and  other  exercises  adapted  to  these  purposes  are  re- 
quired by  those  who  have  no  occasion  to  engage  in 
work. 

Running. — A  good  run  of  a  few  moments  is  very 
exhilarating  to  the  spirits  and  stimulating  to  the  frame. 
It  causes  a  great  expansion  of  the  chest,  and  a  power- 


VARIOUS    COMMON    EXERCISES.  34:0 

fill  pressure  of  tlie  blood  into  tlie  capillaries  of  the  gen- 
eral system  as  well  as  those  of  the  lungs.  It  rapidly 
produces  a  large  amount  of  animal  heat,  soon  causes 
the  surface  to  be  wet  with  perspiration,  and  increases 
the  discharge  by  the  kidneys.  Although  a  good  tonic 
for  the  well,  especially  for  those  who  have  a  capacious 
chest,  it  too  rapidly  exhausts  the  powers  of  the  feeble, 
and  might  produce  unpleasant,  and  perhaj)S  dangerous 
pulmonary  congestion  in  persons  of  narrow  and  feeble 
breathing  organs. 

Dancing. — Tliis  exercise  has  been  employed  by  all 
nations  in  all  ages,  to  exhilarate  the  mind,  and  to  give 
expression  to  the  feeling  of  abounding  good  health, 
which  there  is  no  doubt  it  contributes  to  maintain.  It 
has  the  advantage  over  most  other  exercise,  in  being  so- 
cial. Being  accompanied  by  music,  both  the  mental 
and  muscular  powers  of  all  those  engaged  are  united  in 
executing  the  same  movements,  which  is  consequently 
effected  without  much  exertion  of  the  will,  so  that 
it  secures  a  large  amount  of  exercise  with  but  trifling 
fatigue.  Dancing  harmonizes  with  the  general  plan 
of  the  organic  movements  of  the  body,  in  being  also 
rythmical,  so  that  it  is  here  allied  to  the  involuntary 
movements.  Dancing  ought  to  be  cultivated  in  every 
family,  as  an  antidote  to  the  effects  of  the  wearisome 
toil  and  worry  of  our  modern  life. 

Sewing. — This  and  many  other  sitting  occupations 
in  wliich  females  engage,  call  chiefly  into  action  the 
superior  portion  of  the  body,  while  the  trunk  and 
lower  extremities  are  left  nearly  motionless.  Those 
who  are  thus  occupied  should  therefore  counteract 
the  ill   effects  flowins^  from  a  too  co:istaiit   attention 


350  VAKIOUS    COMMON    EXERCISES. 

to  such  labors,  by  much  walking  in  the  open  air,  to 
equalize  the  circulation.  The  health  is  much  endanger- 
ed in  persons  of  naturally  feeble  constitutions  by  the 
restraint  exercised  upon  the  action  of  the  diajyhragm 
and  respiratory  and  abdominal  muscles  by  excessive  use 
of  the  needle.  Those  who  are  compelled  to  devote 
themselves  to  such  labors  should  habitually  practice 
such  movements  for  the  lower  extremities  and  trunk  as 
are  described  in  this  work. 

Sewing  with  the  machine^  on  the  contrary,  affects 
chiefly  the  lower  extremities,  and  no  doubt  there  are 
numerous  instances  in  w4iich  the  life  of  the  feeble  sew- 
ing-woman has  been  preserved  by  this  machine,  through 
its  tendency  to  remove  that  incipient  congestion  of  the 
chest  and  lungs,  which  is  the  certain  prelude  to  pul- 
monary disease.  It  also  affords  more  time  to  engage 
in  other  and  more  genial  occupations.  This  exercise 
is,  however,  insufficient  for  the  purposes  of  health,  since 
it  does  not  contribute  enough  to  the  expansion  of  the 
chest  of  the  weakly  female. 

Agricultural  Labors. — ^The  healthful  tendencies  of 
these  employments  are  proverbial,  when  engaged  in  by 
the  well,  and  even  by  those  slightly  ailing.  The  ener- 
getic action  of  the  extremities  throws  the  circulation  into 
these  parts,  while  the  amount  of  force  expended  neces- 
sitates a  large  supply  of  air,  and  consequently  a  great 
expansion  of  the  chest.  The  respiration  is  generally 
not  materially  quickened,  but  the  air  entering  the  lungs 
is  retained  and  somewhat  compressed,  in  consequence 
of  the  great  exertion  required  by  such  exercises  as  saw- 
ing and  chopping  wood,  mowing,  raking,  pitching, 
shoveling,  and  many  other  operations  required  of  the 
1'armer.      Tlie  health  of    the  feeble  is^  howevei,  en- 


VAKIOUS    COMMON    EXERCISES.  351 

daiigered  by  engaging  in  many  of  tliese  kinds  of  exer- 
cise, especially  if  pursued  too  continuously,  for  then  tliey 
would  be  likely  to  induce  congestion  of  delicate  parts 
of  the  body.  The  weakly  must  remember  that  the  de- 
velopment of  strength  depends  on  a  careful  steady  jpro- 
cess  of  training^  and  it  is  destructive  for  them  to  exert 
more  power  than  the  system  is  capable  of  easily  sup- 
plying. Such  persons  must  therefore  undergo  the 
processes  whose  tendency  is  gradually  to  fit  them  for 
greater  exertion. 

Painting,  Sculptuee,  Engraving.  —  Labor  of  this 
kind  generally  requires  the  conjoint  exercise  of  the 
brain  and  sensorial  nerves,  as  well  as  that  of  the  arms 
and  chest.  When  these  parts  are  used  to  an  immoder- 
ate degree,  to  the  neglect  of  exercise  of  the  lower  ex- 
tremities, it  becomes  harmful.  Such  occupations  ought 
therefore  to  be  alternated  with  a  great  deal  of  walking, 
and  other  such  appropriate  exercises  as  are  described 
in  their  proper  place. 

Study. — Tlie  health  enjoyed  by  the  studious  class  is 
generally  conceded  to  be  below  that  of  the  laborer.  It 
would  be  wrong  to  infer  from  this  that  study  is  in  itself 
unwholesome.  On  the  contrary,  the  exercise  of  the  in- 
tellectual powers  is  entirely  compatible  with  good 
health  and  long  life.  The  cause  of  ill  health  in  tliese 
cases  lies  in  omitting  to  exercise  the  general  muscular 
system,  and  permitting  the  nervous  to  be  almost  exclu- 
sively worked,  for  this  disturbs  the  equipoise  of  the 
system. 

It  is  not  enough  in  order  that  the  studious  may  se- 
cure the  conditions  of  good  health  and  long  life,  that  he 
occasionally  relieve  the  fatigued  brain  and    disturbed 


352  VAEIOUS    CO:^EMON    EXERCISES. 

circulation  by  a  forced  walk.  He  should  develop  a 
reserve  force  to  enable  him  to  withstand  the  accidents 
that  are  continually  occurring  in  life,  which  every 
one  is  being  forever  unexj)ectedly  called  uj^on  to  en- 
counter. He  must  resolve  on  the  start,  that  life  shall 
not  be  a  wretched  ineffectual  conflict  with  disease, 
yielding  no  satisfactory  experience  or  real  profit,  but  a 
hopeful,  determined,  steady,  manly  march — a  stout 
persistent  contest  with  foes  without. 

Life  is  a  race,  a  warfare.  A  man  needs  all  his  fac- 
ulties and  gifts,  and  they  can  not  be  too  highly  trained. 
His  whole  intellectual,  physical,  and  moral  nature 
should  be  disciplined  to  the  highest  possible  degree. 
He  can  not  afford  to  dispense  with  a  single  weapon 
that  nature  has  furnished  for  his  use.  A  man  to  do 
much  good  in  the  world  must  have  a  good  stomach, 
and  a  long  wind,  and  a  stout  grip,  as  well  as  staunch 
principles  and  a  shrewd  brain.  He  must  expand  and 
invigorate  his  narrow  and  feeble  chest ;  the  relaxed 
diaphragm  must  be  toned  up  ;  the  weak  abdominal 
muscles  energized  ;  the  liver,  and  kidneys,  and  pores 
be  made  to  do  their  duty  as  well  as  the  thinking 
organ. 


MOVEMENTS   ADAPTED   TO    SCHOOLS.  353 


CIiHjttr  ®tocitt}j-tljrce. 

MOVEMENTS  ADAPTED  TO   THE  USE   OF  SCHOOLS. 

'No  argument  would,  seem  to  be  requisite  to  convince 
tlie  world  of  the  importance  of  physical  culture  for 
children  and  youth,  while  that  of  mental  culture  is  so 
generally  acknowledged  as  the  basis  of  civilization  and 
the  condition  of  progress.  Why  the  former  has  been 
so  much  left  to  chance,  or  whim,  or  to  charlatanry, 
while  so  much  attention  is  paid  to  the  latter,  is  quite 
unaccountable.  This  inconsistency  has  been  long  ap- 
parent to  the  instructors  of  you^i,  and  various  attempts 
have  been  made,  in  modern  times,  to  develop  all  the 
powers  and  faculties  of  the  human  system  equally  and 
in  connection.  These  endeavors  have  met  with  but 
moderate  success — a  success  probably  far  inferior  to 
that  realized  by  the  ancients. 

The  prevalence  of  incorrect  ideas  on  this  subject 
which  characterizes  the  times,  makes  it  necessary  that 
something  should  be  done  to  attract  the  attention  of 
the  people  to  ih.om  princijyles  which  have  been  so  long 
and  so  studiously  ignored. 

The  difficulties  in  the  way  of  the  successful  training 
of  the  mind  and  body  together,  have  been  both  prac- 
tical and  theoretical.  The  faults  in  the  ordinary  prac- 
tice of  gymnastics  have  been  pointed  out  (page  124). 
Besides  being  heterogeneous,  disorderly,  liable  to  abuse, 
and  injurious  to  weak  organs,  such  exercises  require 
expensive  apparatus,  much  space,  and  denumd  more 


354  MOVEMENTS    ADAPTED    TO    SCHOOLS. 

time  for  their  successful  practice  than  can  always  be 
conveniently  devoted  to  them. 

Well  qualified  teachers  are  also  necessary.  The 
l^hysical  powers  of  the  child  can  no  more  properly  be 
directed  without  care  and  study  than  can  the  mental ; 
and  the  consequences  of  misdirection  are  far  more 
likely  to  be  permanently  injurious  in  the  former  than 
in  the  latter  case. 

Calisthenics,  for  the  reason  that  they  have  not  been 
considered  obnoxious  to  some  of  the  above  objections, 
have  occasionally  been  used  in  schools  ;  but  the  class 
of  exercises  bearing  this  name  really  are  scarcely  less 
objectionable,  for  they,  too,  require  a  greater  propor- 
tional action  of  the  nerves  than  of  the  muscles;  and 
hence,  though  the  respiration  and  circulation  may 
thereby  be  driven  up  to  a  higher  degree  of  activity, 
yet  the  nerve-forces,  already  overtasked  by  study,  are 
thus  too  rapidly  ex23ended.     (See  page  112,  et  seq.) 

The  government  of  the  kingdom  of  Sweden  and 
Norway,  with  great  wisdom,  long  ago  directed  the  use 
of  gymnastics  in  all  the  common  schools  throughout 
the  realm.  The  intention  of  this  decree  has  never 
been  satisfactorily  realized,  owing  to  causes  that  we 
have  explained.  Prof.  Branting,  Director  of  the  Cen- 
tral Gynmastic  Institute,  pupil  and  successor  of  Lmg, 
has  attempted  to  introduce  there  wdiat  he  terms  the 
Sitting  Gymiiasiic  Exercises.  To  this  end,  he  has  pub- 
lished a  formula  of  movements  intended  to  be  per- 
formed in  the  intervals  of  the  lessons,  without  appa- 
ratus of  any  kind,  noiselessly,  and  even  sometimes 
without  the  pupils  leaving  their  seats.  Tliese  move- 
ments may  be  resorted  to  at  any  time,  as,  wdien  the 
school  has  been  long  confined,  or  sufiTeriiig  froin  too 
severe   and  continuous   application.     These  exercises 


MOVEMENTS   ADAPTED   TO    SCHOOLS. 


355 


are  entirely  accordant  with  the  principles  advocated 
in  the  present  work,  and  consist,  ih  the  main,  of  move- 
ments analogous  to  examples  herein  given.  The  Swe- 
dish movements  are  not,  however,  exactly  adapted  to 
our  use  on  account  of  the  diflerence  in  the  arrangement 
of  seats  in  the  schools  of  the  two  countries.  I  would 
therefore  propose  a  formula  slightly  difi'erent  from  the 
Swedish,  but  essentially  the  same,  which  it  is  hoped 
will  be  found  not  only  practicable,  but  salutary. 

ORDER  OF  COMMAND  FOR  THE  FREE-SITTING  MOVEMENTS. 


No. 

Nnme  of  MoveiriL-iitci. 

Woids  of  Command. 

I. 

Primary    Sit- 

To movements  attend. 

ting  Position. 

n. 

Half    Stretch, 

1. 

Left  hip— hold. 

Half      Wing 

2_ 

Right  arm — upward  stretch. 

Sitt'g,  Trunk 

3'. 

To  the  right— turn. 

T^VISTING. 

4. 

Forward — turn. 

5. 

Change  position  of  arms. 

6. 

To  th'e  left— turn. 

7. 

Forward — turn. 

8. 

Arms  downward — stretch. 

m. 

Heel  Rest   Sit- 

1. 

Hips — hold. 

ting,     Ankle 

2. 

Knees — stretch. 

Stretching 

3. 

Ankle  stretch--bend,  one  !  two  ! 

AND  Bending. 

4. 

Rest. 

IV. 

Stretch   Stride 

1. 

Arms  upward  stretch,  one  !  two  ! 

Sitting,  Head 

0 

Head  backward  bend,  forward  bend,  one !  two ! 

Forward  and 

3.' 

Head  upward  stretch. 

Backward 

4. 

Arms  downward  stretch,  one  !  two  ! 

Bending. 

V. 

Wing  Stride 

1. 

Hips — hold. 

SiTTLNG,  KkEE 

2, 

Left  leg— raise. 

Stretchlxg. 

?K 

Left  knee— stretch. 

4. 

Knee — bend — stretch,  one  !  two  ! 

5. 

Change  position  of  legs. 

6. 

Right  knee— stretch— bend,  one  !  two 

7. 

Rest. 

VI. 

Stride   Sithng, 

1. 

Arms  forward — stretch. 

Arms  Upward 

2. 

Arms  upward — raise,  one  !  two  ! 

AND  B.\ckw'd 

3. 

Arms  downward — stretch. 

Raising. 

\ai. 

Stretch   Stride 

1. 

Arms  upward  stretch. 

Sitting,  Head 

2. 

Head  turn  to  right,  to  left,  one  !  two  ! 

Rotation. 

356  MOVEMENTS    ADAPTED    TO    SCHOOLS. 

ORDER  OF  COMMAND— Continued : 


No. 

Name  of  Movements. 

Words  of  Command. 

vni. 

Stretch   Stride 

1. 

Arms  upward  stretch. 

Sitt'g,  Trunk 

2 

Ti-unk  to  left— bend. 

Side  WISE 

;T 

To  the  right  bent,  one  !  two  ! 

Bending. 

4. 

Rest. 

IX. 

Shelter  Stride 

1. 

Hands  to  the  head — grasp. 

Sitt'g,  Trunk 

«) 

Trunk  to  left— turn. 

Twisting. 

t 

To  right— turn,  one  !  two ! 

4. 

Rest. 

X. 

Wing     Stride 

1. 

Hips— hold. 

Sitting,  Legs 

2. 

Knees — stretch. 

Twisting. 

3. 

Legs  inward — turn. 

4. 

Outward — turn,  one  !  two  ! 

5. 

Rest. 

In  executing  the  above  movements,  the  scholars  re- 
main in  their  seats.  At  the  first  word  of  command 
they  drop  their  books,  and  proceed  to  imitate  the  slow 
movements  of  the  teacher,  who  stands  in  front,  in  full 
view  of  all  the  pupils.  At  the  signal,  one/  two!  a 
vocal  exercise  commences.  At  the  word  rest^  the 
hands  of  each  pupil  fall  to  his  sides,  and  the  body  re- 
turns to  its  natural  sitting  posture. 

The  intelligent  teacher  will  be  able  to  change  the 
formula  from  time  to  time  as  occasion  may  seem  to 
require,  or  form  entirely  new  ones,  by  selecting  appro- 
priate examples  from  Part  II.  of  this  book.  In  this 
way  he  may  be  always  supplied  with  a  variety,  and 
avoid  wearying  his  pupils  with  a  monotonous  routine. 


PART     IV- 

H  Y  G  I  E  ^^  E  . 


THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIENE. 

By  the  term  Hygiene  we  mean,  simply,  tliat  assem- 
blage of  rules  and  regulations  applied  to  our  conduct 
and  mode  of  living  which  teaches  us  what  in  our 
modes  and  practices  is  right  and  what  wrong — what 
is  and  what  is  not  conformable  to  physiological  law. 
Of  the  importance  of  knowing  something  about  this 
matter,  we  do  not  feel  called  upon  to  give  any  formal 
demonstration. 

The  absurdity  of  employing  medical  treatment  for  the 
cure  of  disease,  while  at  the  same  moment  a  dozen  dis- 
ease-producing causes  are  in  active  operation,  needs  no 
proof.  The  inconsistency  of  such  procedure  seems  still 
greater  when  the  remedial  treatment  consists  in  a  special 
ajyjMcation  of  Hygiene^  such  as  the  Movement-Cure  has 
been  explained  to  be.  Hence  a  work  like  the  present, 
designed  for  popular  instruction  on  a  particular  branch 
of  Hygiene,  would  be  incomplete  and  almost  useless 
if  the  importance  of  attendiog  to  the  subject  in  all  its 
particulars  and  relations,  both  as  i\, preventive  of  disease 
and  as  a  remtcly^  were  not  pointed  out  and  enforced. 

We  take  it  for  granted  that  a  compliance  witli  tbe 


358  THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIENE. 

conditions  of  health  is  within  the  ability  of  every  indi- 
vidual ;  and  further,  that  such  compliance  is  spon- 
taneous and  intuitive  in  a  natural  and  unperverted 
condition  of  the  system.  For  it  would  be  monstrous 
to  suppose  that  God,  who  is  the  great  and  all-wise 
Friend  of  his  creatures,  should  so  impress  his  original 
constitution  as  to  bias  him  at  the  outset  in  the  direction 
of  error  and  misery.  Such  a  supposition  would  be 
compounded  of  absurdity  and  blasphemy  in  about 
equal  parts. 

Food^  drink ^  ah\  temjperature^  lights  exercise^  and 
mental  pursuits  are  subjects  that  have  entered  more 
or  less-  into  previous  discussions,  but  it  is  due  to  their 
importance  that  a  portion  of  them,  at  least,  should  re- 
ceive some  more  especial  attention  in  this  place. 

Food. — That  is  food,  which,  being  introduced  into 
the  stomach,  is  capable  of  sustaining  the  vital  actions 
of  the  system.  We  may  consider  food  in  relation  to 
quantity^  quality^  modes  of  'preparation^  times  of  eat- 
ing^ etc.  It  fails  to  serve  its  purposes  in  proportion  as 
it  deviates  in  the  above  particulars  from  a  correct 
standard. 

Quantity. — ^The  matters  which  serve  nutritive  pur- 
poses are  removed  from  the  system  through  the  instru- 
mentality of  oxygen  ;  consequently,  the  quantity  proper 
to  be  used  is  limited  by  respiration  and  those  causes 
which  influence  this  act.  We  are  wholly  unconscious 
of  the  rate,  and  even  of  the  existence,  of  the  oxydizing 
processes  going  on  w^ithin  the  body  by  which  its  con- 
stituents are  removed,  and  so  are  guided,  in  our  use  of 
food,  almost  entirely  by  our  sensations.  The  necessi- 
ties of  the  system,  indeed,  are  absolute,  but  the  sensa- 


THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIENE.  359 

tions  are  subject  to  variation  and  modification  from 
many,  and  different,  and  ever- varying  causes ;  so  that 
to  decide  as  to  the  proper  quantity  of  food  to  be  eaten 
at  a  given  time  may  be  a  matter  of  nmch  difficulty, 
especially  in  those  persons  whose  gastric  nervous  sys- 
tems have  become  deranged. 

Errors  in  quautity  are  liable  to  occur  from  the  fol- 
lowing causes  : 

1.  In  disease,  whether  acute  or  chronic,  the  amount 
of  oxydized  products  eliminated  from  the  system  is 
much  reduced,  and  the  amount  of  food  taken  should  be 
correspondingly  diminished.  In  acute  disease,  the  re- 
sults of  lessened  affinity  of  the  blood  for  oxygen  are 
rendered  conspicuous  in  the  character  of  the  urine,  the 
fur  of  the  tongue,  and  the  quickened  pulse  and  respira- 
tion— which  latter  is  an  attempt  to  compensate  for  this 
lessened  affinity.  In  either  case  no  restoration  is  pos- 
sible while  there  continues  an  excess  of  food  over 
respiration. 

2.  Bodily  inactivity  reduces  the  need  of  the  system 
for  food,  and  the  ill  eflect  of  partaking  of  the  same 
amount  as  when  actively  employed,  soon  becomes  ap- 
parent in  lessened  vigor  of  health. 

3.  Elevated  temperature  necessarily  diminishes  the 
amount  of  carbonic  acid  and  water  produced  in  the 
system,  and  consequently  the  amount  of  food  required 
is  less  than  is  demanded  at  low  temperatures. 

4.  Confinement  in  close  rooms,  out  of  the  reach  of 
currents  of  air,  diminishes  the  amount  of  air  taken 
into  the  system  both  by  skin  and  lungs,  and  conse- 
quently less  food  is  needed. 

5.  Anything  taken  into  the  stomach  that  unduly 
stimulates  it,  such  as  spices,  sweets,  and  the  various 
condiments,  as  well  as  drugs  prescribed  for  the  pur- 


360  THE   PHILOSOPHY    OF   HYGIENE. 

pose,  perverts  and  blunts  the  sensibility  of  tlie  or- 
gan, and  inclines  it  to  solicit  an  undue  quantity  of 
food. 

All  that  portion  of  alimentary  material  taken  into 
the  system  over  and  above  its  wants,  must  be  regarded 
as  so  much  foreign  matter  over  which  the  organism 
can  at  best  exercise  an  imperfect  control. 

Xo  absolute  rule  can  be  given  in  regard  to  the 
amount  of  food  which  the  system  requires.  To  attempt 
to  give  any  such  rule  would  not  only  require  a  super- 
human acquaintance  with  all  the  internal  and  invisible 
present  actions  and  relations  of  the  system,  but  also 
the  ability  to  anticipate  those  changes  in  its  condition 
that,  under  the  influence  of  accidental  circumstances, 
may  within  a  brief  period  occur  to  it.  But  while  the 
digestive  powers  are  unperverted  by  bad  habits  or  by 
disease,  there  is  little  occasion  for  concern  in  regard  to 
this  matter,  since  the  sensations  intended  to  control 
the  alimentary  process  aiford  a  reliable  indication  of 
what  the  needs  of  the  system  are.  When,  however,  the 
sensations  and  instincts  are  blunted  or  perverted  by 
the  above-mentioned  causes,  there  is  always  great  lia- 
bility to  err  in  this  matter. 

Quality. — Food  consists  in  part  of  material  capable 
of  being  organized  or  transformed  into  the  vital  struc- 
ture— in  part  of  matters  which  are  not  imbued  with 
this  vital  quality,  but  are  only  oxydized  in  the  body, 
and  thereby  reduced  to  a  form  easy  of  elimination. 
The  former  class  contains  nitrogen — the  latter  does  not. 
The  nitrogenized  class  is  of  uniform  composition,  rep- 
resented by  albumen^  and  by  its  modifications,  ^'^/'^Vz-, 
gluten^  casein^  etc.  No  other  substances  containing 
nitrogen   are  capable  of  being  transformed  by  vital 


THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIENE.  361 

operations  into  tlie  instruments  of  life.  The  non-nitro- 
genized  class  is  represented  by  starchy  8ugar,  vegetable 
acids ^  etc. 

Certain  saline  matters,  forming  the  ash  of  food,  are 
equally  indispensable  in  the  organizing  processes  of  the 
body  as  the  others  named. 

The  errors  common  in  the  quality  of  food  are  chiefly 
the  following : 

1.  The  distinction  between  food  proper  and  other 
matters  destined  to  oxydation  in  the  system,  is  fre- 
quently lost  sight  of.  In  this  way  such  substances  as 
alcohol,  and  its  various  mixtures,  have  come  to  be  con- 
sidered as  food. 

2.  A  good  proportion  of  the  saline  constituents  of 
food  is  generally  lost  in  the  mechanical  separation 
effected  by  the  miller.  This  is  a  great  error,  for  which 
the  system  must  suffer.  As  well  might  an  abundant 
harvest  be  expected  to  spring  up  from  a  worn-out  soil 
as  that  the  organizing  processes  of  the  system  shall  be 
perfectly  conducted  while  a  portion  of  the  elements 
essential  to  the  process  is  deficient. 

3.  The  habitual  use,  especially  by  the  sedentary,  of 
much  soluble  food — of  food  soluble  in  water — is  a  fruit- 
ful source  of  evil.  The  system  provides  secretions  in 
pro2)ortion  to  its  need  for  nourisJiment.  ]N"ow  if  food 
be  taken  already  dissolved,  or  soluble  in  water,  it  must 
pass  into  the  circulation,  though  it  may  prove  exceed- 
ingly injurious,  and  the  system  has  no  means  of  pro- 
tecting itself  against  it. 

Ordinary  food  is  not  soluble  except  by  these  secre- 
tions, and  therefore,  if  eaten  in  proportion  beyond  the 
need  of  the  system,  is  cast  off  in  a  disguised  form,  and 
is  not  liable  to  produce  injury,  even  though  in  excess 
as  to  some  of  its  elements. 

16 


362  THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIENE. 

4.  Yerj  common  is  the  erroneous  supposition  that 
the  spices,  etc.,  that  are  added  to  food  are  essential  or 
useful  parts  of  it.  Such  matters  only  detract  from  the 
nutritive  vahie  of  food,  and  do  harm  by  forcing  the 
system  to  labor  in  their  elimination. 

5.  A  disproportion  in  the  nutritive  elements  received 
into  it  to  the  needs  of  the  system,  is  a  common  error. 
Indulgence  in  sweets,  while  it  loads  the  blood  with 
hydro-carbons,  diminishes  the  relative  proportion  of  the 
nitrogcEized  and  organizable  constituents  of  food — 
therefore  renders  it  poorer  in  quality. 

Salt.  —  Physiologists  agree  that  the  salt  of  the 
animal  fluids  does  not  require  constant  replenishing, 
but  is  retained  by  the  blood  to  serve  its  purpose  in  the 
economy  over  and  over  again.  Accordingly,  the  lower 
animals  require  salt  only  occasionally.  That  which 
appears  in  the  excretions  is  therefore  mainly  but  the 
excess  of  the  needs  of  the  system,  and,  if  given  in  large 
quantity,  it  can  not  but  overtask  and  diminish  the  vital 
power.  Christison  regards  salt  as  poison,  and  gives 
several  cases  of  poisoning  by  it. 

The  common  practice  of  employing  preparations  of 
the  alkalies,  soda,  potash,  etc.,  to  a  large  extent  in 
food,  is  extremely  prejudicial  to  health.  These  are 
potent  chemicals,  and  can  not  act  otherwise,  when  in 
excess,  than  to  deteriorate  the  quality  of  the  blood. 
Alkalies  have  an  affinity  for  fibrin,  and  destroy  its 
coagulating  property,  and  by  their  strong  affinities 
they  oppose  the  vital  force  and  detract  from  its  influ- 
ence, and  hence  supply  an  important  condition  of  dis- 
ease. The  excessive  use  of  saline  substances,  whole- 
some enough  in  the  natural  and  proper  quantity,  is  the 
gravest  error  in  modern  dietetics. 


THE   PHILOSOPHY   OF   HYGIENE.  363 

The  various  causes  above  emimerated  tend  power- 
fully to  modify  the  regular  vito-chemical  actions  of  the 
system,  frequently  arresting  the  oxydizing  process  at 
some  point  short  of  the  final,  in  which  the  materials 
which  have  served  the  vital  chemistry  are  prepared  for 
dismission  from  the  system.  These  modifications  and 
this  retention  are  the  origin  of  morbid  matter,  and  are 
the  causes  of  disease. 

What  the  system  needs  is  such  a  mixture'^  of  the  difier- 
ent  elementary  ingredients  of  food  as  shall  correspond 
with  that  characterizing  those  edible  plants  upon  which 
all  herbivorous  animals  depend  for  their  sustenance. 

Pkeparation  of  Food — Cooking. — Man  has  been  call- 
ed the  cooking  animal.  This  does  not  indicate  that  his 
nutritive  wants,  considered  in  a  physiological  light, 
difi"er  from  those  common  to  all  animals,  but  that,  by 
the  use  of  his  reason,  he  may  husband  his  expenditures 
for  the  purely  animal  wants,  and  so  gain  time  and 
opportunities  for  the  cultivation  of  his  intellectual  and 
moral  capacities.  The  object  of  cooking,  then,  is  not 
to  change  the  intrinsic  chemical  qualities  of  edible 
substances.  So  far  as  such  changes  are  produced  in 
the  processes  of  cooking,  the  nutritive  qualities  of  the 
food  are  not  benefited,  but  rather  injured.  A  few  in- 
stances may  be  excepted,  where  noxious  qualities  be- 
longing to  plants  are  destroyed  by  the  elevated  temper- 
ature required  for  cooking.     The  legitimate  province 

*  "  It  seems  placed  beyond  a  doubt  by  these  experiments,  that  the  proportions  in 
which  these  factors  of  nutrition  are  mixed  in  the  food,  exert  the  most  decided  in- 
fluence on  the  welfare  of  the  organism,  and  that  the  intermixture  of  the  different 
factors  of  nutrition  is  essential  for  the  metamorphosis  of  matters.  Great  as  are  the 
fluctuations  which  nature  allows  In  these  proportions,  an  undue  preponderance 
of  one,  or  other  of  the  fictors  ahcayx  acts  injuriously  upon  the  due  course  of  the 
processes  of  nutrition.  No  single  part  of  this  process  can  go  on  without  the  concur- 
rence of  all  these  factors."— Ze/iwaM?^ 


364  THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIENE. 

of  cooking  may,  in  general,  be  regarded  as  confined  to 
overcoming  the  mechanical  impediments  to  digestion, 
so  as  to  render  the  nutritive  properties  of  the  substance 
promptly  available  to  the  digestive  organs.  This  is 
efiected  by  the  aid  of  heat  and  moisture.  By  this 
means  the  areolar  structure  of  meats  (composed  of  gela- 
tin) is  softened  or  dissolved,  starch  granules  are  open- 
ed, woody  fiber  divided  and  rendered  soft,  gluten 
swollen  and  rendered  porous  and  pervious  to  the  diges- 
tive fluids,  and  the  mechanical  labor  of  the  digestive 
organs  reduced  to  the  lowest  practicable  point.  In  this 
way  the  nutritive  elements  existing  in  food  are  all 
turned  to  an  immediate  account,  and  the  powers  of  the 
stomach  are  not  exhausted  by  mechanical  eftorts,  or  its 
nerves  irritated  by  the  same  cause. 

The  errors  of  cooking  are  chiefly  the  following : 

1.  By  long  custom  we  come  to  prefer  food  which  has 
been  subjected  to  too  high  a  degree  of  heat^  which,  by 
decomposing  it,  injures  its  nutritive  properties,  and  it  is 
thus  made  to  perform  the  part  of  a  spice.  Bread,  for 
instance,  is  toasted,  and  the  juices  of  meats  burned,  to 
gratify  an  acquired  taste,  greatly  to  the  detriment  of 
their  quality. 

2.  Injurious  additions  are  made  to  food  in  cooking, 
the  effects  of  which  have  been  previously  described. 
Sugar,  oily  matters,  alkalies,  etc.,  are  commonly  added 
to  edible  preparations,  in  utter  disregard  of  the  propor- 
tions of  these  elements  really  demanded  by  the  system. 

3.  Food  is  also  injured  by  rendering  it  so  porous 
and  soft,  that  it  is  swallowed  without  due  mastication, 
which  deprives  it  of  a  portion  of  the  saliva  so  necessary 
to  its  proper  digestion. 

Peopek  Times  fok  Eating. — It  is  diflicult  to  lay  down 


THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF    HYGIEKE.  365 

rules  upon  tliis  subject.  People  engaged  in  business 
are  generally  compelled  to  take  their  food  after  long 
intervals,  and  if  these  intervals  are  not  so  lengthy  as 
to  transgress  natural  law,  thus  inducing  alternate  ex- 
haustion and  repletion,  the  health  is  apt  to  be  favored 
thereby  rather  than  otherwise. 

In  sedentary  life,  especially  with  invalids,  whose 
thoughts  are  too  much  occupied  with  the  questions, 
what  they  shall  eat  and  what  they  shall  drink,  the 
temptations  to  take  nourishment  are  more  frequent  and 
urgent  because  not  tempered  by  wholesome  occupa- 
tions. To  guard  the  reader  against  errors  that  are  often 
very  damaging,  it  may  be  remarked  ; 

1.  That  in  a  diseased  state  of  the  stomach  or  system 
in  which  physiological  actions  are  either  perverted  or 
retarded,  generally  both,  the  demand  upon  the  diges- 
tive organs  for  a  supply  of  nutritive  material  thereby 
lessens,  and  the  digestive  process  itself  is  conducted 
with  less  energy,  and  so  the  need  for  food  is  experi- 
enced less  frequently.  In  such  condition  for  one  to 
take  food  as  often  as  in  health,  must  necessarily  operate 
disadvantageously.  A  good  rule  to  observe  in  these 
cases  is,  to  take  no  food  into  the  stomach  while  a  re- 
sidual of  the  preceding  meal  remains.  The  presence  of 
the  residual,  acting  as  a  ferment,  hinders  the  succeed- 
ing digestive  effort.  It  is  even  necessary,  in  many 
cases,  that  the  distance  between  meals  for  a  time  be 
greatly  extended,  in  order  to  effect  a  wholesome  puri- 
fication of  the  solvent  fluids. 

2.  In  a  state  of  health  the  digestive  process  requires 
ti7ne  for  its  thorough  accomplishment.  It  proceeds  by 
stages,  and  an  introduction  of  food  at  the  wrong  time 
tends  to  arrest  the  process  and  render  it  abortive. 


366  THE   PHILOSOPHY   OF   HYGIENE. 

Dkinks. — Tliere  is  in  nature  but  one  substance  which 
performs  in  the  system  the  purpose  of  a  wholesome 
beverage,  and  this  is  water.  All  artificial  drinks  con- 
sist of  various  mixtures,  infusions,  or  solutions  of  other 
matters,  either  solid  or  liquid,  with  water,  which  has 
become  simply  the  medium  of  conveying  these  to  the 
system.  Thus,  tea,  coifee,  vinous  and  sj3irituous  liquors 
are  beverages  only  on  account  of  the  water  they  contain. 
To  consider  the  physiological  relations  of  these  drinks 
is  to  investigate  the  efiect  of  the  potential  chemicals  in 
question  upon  the  vital  structures.  These  effects  have 
been  shown,  in  another  place,  to  consist,  not  of  nutrition, 
but  of  irritation,  stimulation,  and  destruction  of  organ- 
ized substance,  in  various  modes  and  degrees.  Their 
use,  in  any  form,  then,  is  reasonably  inferred  to  be  in- 
compatible with  any  remedial  treatment,  although  it 
may  be  consistent  with  the  palliation  of  certain  dis- 
tressing symptoms,  generally  first  sought  by  the  drug 
method  of  medical  treatment.  All  drinks  save  water 
are  therefore  proscribed  in  a  strict  and  consistent 
hygienic  practice. 

Milk. — This  fluid  is  frequently  drunk  by  adults  as 
well  as  by  children,  for  whom  alone  it  is  intended  by 
nature.  It  consists  of  about  80  per  cent,  of  water, 
holding  about  twenty  per  cent,  of  solid  matter  in  solu- 
tion, the  largest  portion  of  which  becomes  immediately 
precipitated  upon  reaching  the  stomach.  This  propor- 
tion of  dry  solid  to  the  watery  portion  is  scarcely  less 
than  is  found  in  potatoes,  and  is  much  greater  than  ex- 
ists in  edible  fruits  and  roots.  It  is  hence  seen,  that 
though  milk  may  be  drank  when  fresh,  it  is  not  properly 
a  beverage,  in  the  strict  sense  of  this  term,  and  the  in- 
ference is  legitimate,  that  to  use  it  as  such,  is  at  best 


THE    PHILOSOPHY    OF   HYGIENE.  367 

but  to  clog  the  system,  by  loading  it  with  nutritive 
matter,  under  the  pretense  of  quenching  thirst.  This, 
to  be  sure,  may  be  of  little  consequence  to  the  growing 
or  laboring  person,  but  will  become  a  source  of  ill 
health  to  the  sedentary,  and  is  quite  incompatible  with 
a  systematic  employment  of  Remedial  Hygiene. 


TEMPERATURE. 


Physiological  Effect  of  Cold  and  Heat. — To  un- 
derstand the  real  relations  that  the  thermometric  and 
barometric  changes  of  the  atmosphere  bear  to  the  sys- 
tem, wonld  relieve  men  of  much  of  the  anxiety  they 
habitually  experience  in  regard  to  their  effects  upon  the 
health.  Invalids,  especially,  are  fond  of  ascribing  their 
depressed  spirits  to  the  state  of  the  weather,  and  often 
attempt  to  get  rid  of  a  disagreeable  sense  of  personal 
responsibility  by  persuading  themselves  that  their 
symptoms  are  attributable  to  some  uncontrollable  at- 
mospheric cause.  Tliis  is  convenient ;  but  I  am  per- 
suaded that  a  correct  understanding  of  the  intentions 
of  nature  toward  us  in  these  changes  would  lead  us  to 
regard  them,  severe  and  untoward  as  they  seem  to  us, 
when  we  sedulously  unfit  ourselves  for  their  effects,  as 
really  most  friendly  to  us,  and  wisely  and  mercifully 
adapted  to  maintain,  and  even  to  restore  the  health. 

The  average  temperature  of  the  air  in  this  climate  is 
not  far  from  55°  Fahr. — the  temperature  of  our  bodies 
98° ;  hence  the  average  difference  between  the  heat  of 
the  body  and  that  of  surrounding  things  is  not  far 
from  43° ;  but  the  thermometer  sometimes  falls  con- 
siderably below  zero,  effecting  a  great  increase  of  this 
difference,  from  which  it  is  apparent  that  it  is  the  in- 
tention of  nature  that  the  animal  body  should  be  sub- 
jected not  only  to  a  high  or  a  low,  but  to  a  variable  tem- 


TEMPERATURE.  369 

j)eratiire.  It  is  the  nature  of  lieat  to  be  forever  seeking 
an  equilibrium.  Hence  all  bodies,  whether  animate 
or  inanimate,  having  a  temperature  cihoi^e  that  of  the 
atmosphere,  soon  lose  their  excess,  unless  constantly 
replenished.  The  rapidity  with  which  an  object  loses 
heat  depends  on  the  amount  of  difference  between  its 
temperature  and  that  of  contiguous  objects.  But  the 
living  animal  body  loses  more  heat  in  a  given  time 
than  an  inanimate  body  of  the  same  size,  weight,  and 
temperature,  because  it  not  only,  like  the  stone,  parts 
with  its  heat  by  radiation  to  surrounding  things,  and 
by  contact  with  them,  but  in  other  ways  peculiar  to 
itself.  The  surface  of  the  animal  body  is  always  moist, 
and  evaporation  from  it  is  a  most  potent  cooling  agent. 
The  body  also  parts  with  its  heat  through  the  action 
of  several  excretory  organs,  and  a  great  deal  is  carried 
off  by  the  large  body  of  air  which  is  constantly  being 
warmed  in  the  lungs. 

The  loss  of  heat  which  the  body  is  thus  compelled 
to  sustain  is  perpetual,  but  is  exceedingly  variable  in 
degree.  The  temperature  of  the  atmos]:)here  not  only 
has  its  yearly  and  daily,  its  regular  and  tlierefore  its  ex- 
pected vicissitudes,  but  it  is  also  subject  to  hourly  and 
unexpected  ones.  We  never  know  that  the  tempera- 
ture will  not  rise  or  fall  in  a  few  hours  a  number  of  de- 
grees above  or  below  the  average  point  for  the  season. 
This  uncertainty  and  variableness  of  temperature  ob- 
tains to  a  greater  or  less  degree  in  all  climates,  and 
may  be  considered  as  ordained  by  the  Creator  for  the 
benefit  of  his  creatures  ;  and  we  may  suppose  that  a 
uniformity  of  temperature  would,  contrary  to  the  usual 
opinions  of  the  invalid,  be  prejudicial  to  the  health. 

Let  us  look  now  to  the  arrangements  of  the  human 
system  with  reference  to  temperature,  that  we  may  the 

16^ 


370  TEMPER  ATUKE. 

more  easily  understand  those  hygienic  principles  that 
relate  thereto. 

All  atmospheric  changes  so  impress  the  system  as 
to  modify  its  vital  and  its  vito-chemical  actions.  All 
parts  of  the  body  are  pervaded  by  sensory  nerves, 
which  receive  such  impressions  and  convey  them  in 
every  direction.  When  the  surface  of  the  body,  or  any 
portion  of  it,  receives  an  impression  of  external  temper- 
ature, every  part  of  the  organism  related  to  it  in  any 
way  is  immediately  affected  thereby. 

That  function  of  the  body  which  is  directly  related 
to  external  impressions  of  temperature,  is  the  Jieat- 
mahing  process.  The  point  of  temperature  at  which 
vital  actions  take  place  being  fixed,  and  the  bodily 
heat  being  dependent  upon  its  own  resources,  it  follows 
that  the  production  of  heat  is  accelerated  or  retarded 
to  an  extent  exactly  proportionate  to  the  loss  experi- 
enced— the  process  undergoing  an  amount  of  variation 
just  about  equal  to  that  to  w4iich  the  sensory  system 
is  subjected. 

This  regulation  of  the  bodily  temperature  is  connect- 
ed with  the  employment  of  the  materials  which  are 
necessary  to  the  production  of  vital  phenomena.  Tlie 
system  is  thus  relieved  of  any  surplus  of  heat  which  it 
may  have  acquired  by  means  of  an  increased  evapo- 
ration from  the  surface^  while  the  want  of  heat  that  is 
felt  stimulates  the  respiratory  organs  to  greater  activ- 
ity. Thus  it  appears  that  imjDressions  from  without  are 
as  sure  to  affect  the  production  of  heat,  either  to  lessen 
or  to  augment  it,  as  pressure  upon  the  key  of  the  piano 
to  elicit  a  musical  sound.  The  slio:htest  observation 
verifies  these  statements.  To  place  the  hand,  or  foot, 
or  any  portion  of  the  warm  surface  of  the  person,  in 
contact  w^ith  a  very  cold  substance,  as  a  ^^iece  of  ice. 


TEMPERATURE.  371 

instantaneously  causes  an  expansion  of  the  ribs  and  a 
depression  of  the  diaphragm,  and  consequently  an  uti- 
usually  2)rofound  inspiration^  which  is  involuntarily 
continued  till  the  heat  that  is  thus  lost  he  fully  restored. 
The  heat  of  the  body,  or  of  any  part,  may  for  a  short  pe- 
riod be  depressed  without  injury,  because  it  requires 
time  for  the  physiological  changes  now  described  to  com- 
plete their  eliects  upon  the  economy.  No  artificial  sup- 
ply of  heat  is  required  in  order  healtlifully  to  maintain 
the  bodily  temperature  ;  and  when,  by  our  fine  civilized 
modes  of  life  we  depress  the  heat-producing  operations 
of  the  body,  we  must  remember  that  at  the  same  time 
we  are  impairing  the  respiratory  acts,  and  are  doing 
ourselves  more  or  less  harm  in  proportion  to  the  extent 
of  our  misbehavior  in  this  respect. 

We  may  now  understand  some  of  the  consequences 
of  inattention  to  the  relations  borne  by  the  system  to 
temperature.  In  hot  weather,  and  in  hot  climates,  the 
respiratory  stimulus  being  less,  respiration  is  conse- 
quently diminished,  and  then  results  a  retention  of  the 
materials  that  should  be  excluded  from  the  system 
through  this  agency.  Such  materials  are  not  cotfi- 
pletely  reduced  to  carbonic  acid  water  and  urea,  but 
the  process  is  arrested  at  an  intermediate  point,  and 
the  state  popularly  termed  Vdiousness^  which  implies 
the  presence  in  the  blood  of  the  proximate  elements  of 
bile,  inevitably  succeeds,  unless  the  person  so  exposed 
becomes  very  cautious  as  to  his  diet. 

Origin  of  Colds. — The  symptom  or  the  form  of  dis- 
ease styled  "  a  cold"  can  never  occur  except  in  the  con- 
dition of  the  system  above  described.  But  it  further 
requires  that  the  body  part  with  its  heat  under  con- 
ditions which  do  not  produce  a  corresponding  increase 


372  TEMPERATURE. 

of  respiration.  In  this  case,  tlie  blood,  loaded  with  the 
materials  to  be  discharged  from  the  system,  fills  the 
capillaries  of  the  respiratory  membranes,  and  not  meet- 
ing with  the  requisite  oxygen  is  necessarily  retained, 
causing  congestion  of  the  membranes  in  question,  and 
those  other  very  unpleasant  and  annoying  consequences 
familiar  to  every  one.  A  prolonged  exposure  to  a 
cold  atmosphere  would,  in  all  of  these  cases,  render  the 
respiratory  effect  more  profound  and  efficient,  comj^lete 
the  physico-chemical  change  designed  and  commenced, 
but  now  incomplete,  and  would  effectually  prevent  the 
occurrence  of  the  symptom  in  question.  The  disease  is 
called  a  cold.,  from  the  popular  fancy  that  low  temper- 
ature is  the  occasion  of  it,  while  the  truth  is,  no  means 
are  so  effectual  as  this  for  its  cure ;  for  by  cold,  just 
those  physiological  effects  are  secured  which  are  re- 
quired to  relieve  the  system  of  the  injurious  cause. 

The  conditions  essential  to  the  production  of  the  dis- 
order in  question  may  now  be  stated : 

1.  There  must  be  a  surplus  of  materials  in  the  sys- 
tem requiring  a  certain  quantity  of  oxygen  for  their 
elimination. 

2.  These  are  moved  forward  to  the  respiratory  pas- 
sages by  the  normal  stimulus,  which,  however,  is  in- 
sufficient to  effect  its  purpose. 

This  view  of  the  cause  readily  suggests  the  remedy. 
A  more  free  and  abundant  exposure  to  low  atmospheric 
temperature,  aided  by  abundant  exercise,  is  the  best 
protection  against  colds,  and  the  best  remedy  Avhen  tlie 
disorder  is  once  contracted. 

"When  we  say  that  cool  air  is  the  most  natural 
and  important  condition  of  health,  it  is  not  implied 
that  those  arts  of  civilization  which  protect  us  against 
its  impressions  are  utterly  useless  or  mischievous.     It 


TEMPEKATURE.  ^  373 

is  onlj  the  abiise  or  the  excess  of  these  apph'ances  that 
we  need  to  fear.  The  objects  of  life,  in  the  pliysiolog- 
ical  point  of  view,  are  attained  in  the  development  of 
the  greatest  possible  amount  of  the  available  force. 
The  arts  of  civilization  can  serve  us  only  as  they  econ- 
omize our  powers,  not  as  they  impair  or  prodigally 
waste  them. 

It  is,  then,  vicissitude  of  temperature,  and  not  that 
avoiding  of  it  that  is  attempted  by  means  of  our  heated 
dwellings  and  our  thick  and  impenetrable  clothing, 
which  the  human  constitution  requires  to  preserve  its 
integrity  and  force;  and  we  shall  see  that,  to  restore 
the  health,  alternations  of  heat  and  cold,  artificially 
brought  about,  are  among  the  most  potent  instru- 
mentalities at  our  command. 

Effect  of  CoNTmrED  and  Great  Extremes. — In 
both  very  high  and  very  low  latitudes  the  physiolog- 
ical necessities  imposed  on  man  by  climate  are  not 
favorable  to  the  development  of  his  nobler  powers,  but 
he  becomes  the  slave  of  his  climatic-  condition,  as  he 
often  does,  in  temperate  latitudes,  to  his  sensorial  facul- 
ties. In  cold  climates,  because  the  system  loses  much 
heat,  it  must  produce  much,  and  man  becomes  an 
apparatus  for  the  combustion  of  carbon  ;  while  in  hot 
climates  the  system  is  compelled  to  supply  much  water 
to  the  surface  for  evaporation,  and  becomes  accord- 
ingly an  hydraulic  machine.  In  both  cases  the  due 
physiological  balance  essential  for  the  development 
of  the  highest  powers  is  wanting.  But,  on  the  other 
hand,  the  frequent  changes  of  temperature  which 
our  systems  experience  in  temperate  climates,  is  most 
compatible  with  health  and  the  highest  development 
of  the  bodily  powers. 


374  TEMPEKATUKK. 

Impoetanoe  of  Cold. — Chronic  invalids  are  gen- 
erally tlie  victims  of  the  falsest  notions  respecting 
temperature.  They  have  become,  by  long  habits  of 
eifeminacy,  incapable  of  bearing  the  amount  of  cold 
fitted  to  the  respiratory  needs  of  the  body.  They  ex- 
hibit the  greatest  suspicion  and  fear  of  the  most  benefit 
cent  designs  of  nature.  They  shrink  from  the  very  influ- 
ence which  elicits  and  vivifies  their  powers,  and  so  they 
continue  to  repress  and  cramp  their  already  weakened 
faculties.  The  importance  of  developing  to  a  suitable 
and  healthy  extent  the  heat-making  faculty  is  quite 
equal  to  that  of  exercise,  and  is  among  the  first  things 
to  which  the  attention  of  the  chronic  invalid  should  be 
directed. 

The  propriety  of  subjecting  the  system  to  the  influ- 
ence of  cold  is  not  always  to  be  decided  by  the  sensa- 
tions, for  these,  except  in  perfect  health,  are  not  to  be 
trusted  unless  corroborated  by  the  other  faculties.  The 
eflect  of  cold  is  to  infuse  into  the  system  an  agreeable 
vigor  and  elasticity ;  but  in  a  weakened  state  of  the 
system  and  perverted  condition  of  the  nerves,  the  sen- 
sations, being  abnormally  acute,  will  often  rebel.  This 
indicates  the  need  of  discipline,  the  very  process  re- 
quired to  reinstate  the  healtli.  It  is  only  under  cir- 
cumstances when  the  withdrawal  of  heat  from  the 
system  is  not  attended  with  a  corresponding  increase 
of  respiration,  that  exposure  to  cold  can  be  in  any  de- 
gree hurtful ;  for  it  is  only  then  that  the  refuse  matter 
of  the  system  is  retained  to  be  subjected  to  that  spon- 
taneous chemical  action  which  will  of  course  conflict 
with  the  vital  processes. 


The  "VVatkr-Cuee. — A  medical  pi4ctice,  of  exten- 
sive  reputation   for   its   empirical    success,  has   been 


TEMPERATURE.  375 

founded  upon  the  use  of  temperature  as  a  remedial 
means.  The  Water-Cm^e,  though  a  special,  is  a  legit- 
imate practice,  because  based  on  important,  tlioiigh 
perhaps  as  practiced,  insufficient  number,  of  the  plain 
principles  of  physiology.  The  practice  consists  in 
causing  an  artificial  demand  to  be  laid  upon  the 
system,  or  some  limited  portions  of  it,  to  produce 
heat^  and  also  in  repressing  the  natural  production  of 
heat  in  various  parts  by  withdrawing  the  incentive 
thereto.  In  this  way  the  most  important  clianges  may 
be  induced  in  the  circulation,  innervation,  and  nutrition 
of  various  portions  of  the  body,  often  sufficient,  when 
skillfully  managed,  to  restore  the  harmony  and  health 
of  the  organism. 

In  this  j)ractice,  water^  instead  of  air,  is  employed, 
because  it  furnishes  the  means  of  applying  temperature 
quickly,  vigorously,  and  extensively,  and  is  thus  emi- 
nently adapted  to  meet  the  emergencies  of  sickness, 
especially  of  acute  disease.  In  bathing,  it  is  the  tem- 
perature of  the  water,  rather  than  the  water  itself, 
which  is  to  be  regarded  as  the  source  of  the  effects 
which  we  often  realize  by  the  operation. 

The  Cold  Bath. — This  may  be  either  general^  ap- 
plied to  the  whole  surface,  or  locals  applied  to  some 
portion  of  the  body,  as  the  hands,  feet,  seat,  etc. ;  in 
either  case  the  general  effect  is  similar,  though  the  par- 
ticular effects  may  be  widely  different.  The  first  im- 
pression of  the  cold,  to  whatever  part  the  water  may 
be  applied,  acting  through  the  sensory  nerves,  causes 
the  ribs  to  become  everted,  and  a  profound  inspiratory 
effort  to  be  made.  The  respiration  continues  thus 
exalted  so  long  as  the  body,  or  any  portion  of  it,  is 
parting  with  an  unusual  amount  of  heat.     Nor  does 


376  TEMPERATURE. 

even  this  cease  immediately,  for  if  heat  be  not  pro- 
duced as  rapidly  as  it  is  being  abstracted  by  the  artifi- 
cial method  in  question,  it  continues  to  be  produced 
through  the  influence  of  greater  respiration  till  the 
equilibrium  is  restored. 

The  practical  effect  of  such  a  process  is  very  ap- 
parent, and  is  susceptible  of  demonstration.  The  water 
coming  in  contact  with  the  warm  body  has  acquired 
heat,  all  of  which  is  compensated  by  increased  respira- 
tion and  increased  respiratory  effect  upon  the  blood. 
A  sitting  bath,  the  temj)erature  of  which  is  elevated 
two  degrees,  will  have  caused  the  absorption  by  the 
blood  of  the  oxygen  from  four  or  five  cnbic  feet  of 
air,  enough  to  raise  a  half-pint  of  water  from  the 
freezing  to  the  boiling  point,  and  will  have  elimi- 
nated from  the  system  more  than  a  half  ounce  of  its 
solid  material. 

The  Warm  Bath. — Wlien  the  temperature  of  the 
air  is  considerably  below  that  of  the  body,  we  know 
that  it  receives  heat  from  it  at  only  a  very  moderate 
rate ;  but  water  does  not  feel  warm  to  us  till  its  temper- 
ature approximates  very  nearly  our  own.  At  98^  it 
ceases  to  receive  heat  from  us,  and  therefore,  when  the 
body  is  submerged  in  a  bath  of  that  temperature,  the 
ordinary  incentive  to  the  production  of  heat  ceasing  to 
act,  all  tJie  physiological  processes  are  retarded,  respi- 
ration becomes  slow  and  difiicult,  and  the  sj^stem  soon 
suffers  from  retained  matters.  If  there  has  been  pain, 
the  bath  affords  oftentimes  a  delightful  sense  of  relief, 
and  frequently  checks  morbid  action.  These  effects 
become  less  appai-ent  at  slightly  lower  temperatures; 
and  when  still  further  reduced,  the  effects  exj)erienced 
are  those  of  the  cold  bath  to  a  moderate  degree. 


TEMPERATURE.  377 

The  Hot  Bath. — In  a  bath  of  this  sort,  heat  is  im- 
parted to  the  body,  the  eiFect  of  which  is  to  compel  it 
to  take  on  a  reciprocal  action  and  return  what  it  has 
received,  by  producing  moisture  at  the  surface,  to  bo 
evaporated.  The  skin,  under  the  influence  of  the  hot 
bath,  breaks  out  in  a  copious  perspiration,  this  effect 
following  with  a  rapidity  proportioned  to  the  temper- 
ature. A¥hen  this  eflect  is  produced,  the  superficial 
capillaries  are  filed  with  blood,  and  central  portions 
of  the  body  consequently  relieved  from  their  engorge- 
ment, often,  especially  in  severe  internal  congestion,  to 
the  temjDorary  relief  of  the  complaint.  The  effeet  here 
described  can  not  long  be  continued,  for  obvious  rea- 
Bons,  without  serious  detriment  to  tlie  organism. 

The  reader  will  note  an  important  and  radical  differ- 
ence between  the  efl:ects  of  cold  and  those  of  warm 
bathing.  Cold  baths,  on  account  of  their  efi'ects  on 
respiration,  are  an  agency  for  the  removal  from  the 
body  of  its  solid  materials  ^  while  warm  and  hot  baths, 
by  the  effort  they  assist  the  system  in  making  to  relieve 
itself  of  heat,  remove  fluid  and  saline  matters  there- 
from. In  many  cases  of  disease  both  of  these  agents 
are  required. 

Local  Baths. — The  application  of  the  bath  to  a  lim- 
ited portion  of  the  body  is  governed  by  the  same  gen- 
eral principles  as  govern  its  application  to  the  whole 
surface.  But  the  response  made  by  the  system  to  the 
impression  of  the  local  bath  is  peculiar.  If  the  bath 
be  cold,  the  process  causes  the  heat  of  the  body  to 
depart  from  it  through  a  circumscribed  surface.  Now, 
since  the  heat  is  supplied  to  the  cold  part  through  the 
blood  which  flows  thitherward,  the  process  of  local 
bathing  becomes  one  of  calling,  or  deriving  the  circula- 


378  tempekaturp:. 

tion  from  the  general  system  in  the  direction  of  the  cold 
part.  This  effect  is  eminently  useful  in  aiding  similar 
effects  produced  by  movements  for  the  removal  of 
visceral  congestions. 

Effect  on  the  Nerves. — It  will  be  noticed  that  tem- 
perature, especially  a  low  degree  of  it,  acts  primarily 
upon  the  nerves,  and  it  is  through  the  intervention  of 
these  that  its  effects  upon  the  circulation,  respiration, 
nutrition,  etc.,  are  chiefly  wrought.  The  great  majority 
of  people,  whose  sensory  surface  is  too  little  exposed, 
are  greatly  benefited  by  the  stimulation  and  vigorous 
tone  that  is  afforded  by  the  daily  morning  bath.  It 
counteracts  in  the  sedentary  the  ill  effects  of  warm  air 
confined  next  to  the  person  by  clothing,  and  for  all 
who  are  not  constantly  out  of  doors,  is  an  important 
means  for  maintaining  the  health.  But  serious  ill  effects 
may,  and  very  frequently  do^  arise  from  too  much, 
and  injudicious  bathiug.  The  abuse  here  alluded  to 
arises  from  an  ignoring  of  the  principles  relating  to 
the  harmony  of  function,  insisted  on  in  this  volume.  It 
will  be  understood  that  all  impressions  made  upon  ex- 
ternal sensory  nerves  are  accompanied  by  corresponding 
action  of  the  nerve-centers  situated  in  the  brain,  spinal 
cord,  and  especially  those  of  the  trunk,  at  the  seat  of 
the  nerves  of  organic  life.  Stimulant  impressions,  if 
habitually  resorted  to,  induce  hypernutrition,  and  con- 
sequent excited  and  unbalanced  action  of  the  nervous 
system,  which  is  utterly  incompatible  with  health. 
Persons  who,  for  a  length  of  time,  subject  themselves 
frequently  to  repeated  and  intense  impressions  of  heat 
or  cold,  by  means  of  water  bathing,  abuse  themselves 
in  a  way  that  will  certainly  be  followed  by  irregular 
nervous  action,  and  the  various  grades  of  nervous  dis- 


TEMPEKATURE.  379 

ease — excitability,  depression  of  spirits,  neuralgia,  liyp- 
ocliondria,  etc.  Great  caution  should  be  used  that  this 
mode  of  stimulation  be  not  made  a  substitute  for  the 
more  common  nerve  stimulants  which  Hygiene  con- 
demns. The  Water-Oure^  so  called,  is  sometimes  prac- 
ticed in  the  reprehensible  manner  here  pointed  out, 
considerably  more  to  the  detriment  than  to  the  benefit 
of  many  patients. 

.  Compresses. — ^These  consist  of  linen  or  cotton  cloth, 
several  times  folded,  thoroughly  wetted,  and  applied  to 
some  j^art  of  the  body.  If  wrung  out  from  hot  water,  the 
application  is  termed  a  fomentation.  This  is  a  very 
grateful  application  to  painful  parts,  and  affords  relief 
on  the  principle  before  mentioned.  If  cold,  it  soon 
acquires  the  temperature  of  the  body,  and  produces  an 
effect  upon  the  parts  analogous  to  that  of  the  warm  bath. 
Wet  compresses  also  supply  the  conditions  for  osmo- 
sis^ or  interchange  of  fluids  between  the  different  struc- 
tures of  the  body.  They  hence  become  exceedingly 
useful  in  congestions^  because  the  absorption  of  fluid 
through  the  capillary  w^alls  into  the  vessels  detaches 
the  corpuscles  which  in  this  case  are  apt  to  adhere  to  the 
walls,  and  aids  the  escape  of  the  clogged  blood  from  the 
point  of  congestion.  Compresses  also  remove  the  sur- 
plus heat  of  the  part,  and  thus  supply  an  important 
condition  for  the  normal  vital  activities.  The  com- 
press should  be  continued  'upon  any  one  part  only  a 
portion  of  the  time,  otherwise  its  good  effects  will  be 
counteracted. 

PARTICULAK    DIRECTIONS    FOR    BATHING. 

The  Am  Bath. — ^This  consists  simply  in  a  full  ex- 
posure of  the  whole  body,  divested  of  clothing,  to  the 


380  TEMPERATURE. 

air  at  the  ordinaiy  temperature,  after  the  manner  rec- 
ommended bj  Dr.  Franklin.  This  may  be  continued 
a  moderate  length  of  time,  and  should  be  accompanied 
by  light,  rapid  friction  over  the  whole  surface  of  the 
body  with  bare  hands,  or  with  a  few  of  the  examples 
of  movements  contained  in  Part  II.  The  rubbing 
necessitates  much  useful  bending  and  stretching  of  the 
body  in  all  directions.  The  skin  is  greatly  refreshed 
by  this  process.     A  good  time  for  it  is  on  going  to  bed, 


The  Cold  General  Bath. — This  should  never  be 
employed  while  the  stomach  has  food  in  it,  nor  when 
the  system  is  fatigued  by  exercise ;  neither  should  it 
be  taken  while  the  body  is  cold  from  previous  ex- 
posure. If  cold  from  internal  causes,  exercise  to  in- 
crease the  respiration  should  precede  it,  and  it  should 
be,  moreover,  of  very  short  continuance. 

A  serious  mistake  prevails  in  regard  to  the  proper 
manner  of  taking  a  bath.  The  directions  usually  are, 
to  begin  by  wetting  the  head  and  face.  This  direction 
arises  from  ignorance  in  regard  to  the  true  physiology 
ical  effect  of  bathing,  and  of  the  conditions  of  the  sys- 
tem, for  the  regulation  of  which  it  is  useful. 

A  valuable  lesson  on  this  subject  may  be  learned  by 
observation  of  nature.  The  dog,  cow,  and  ox,  etc., 
whom  instinct  (a  better  reason  than  belongs  to  some 
conceited  bipeds)  teaches  to  bathe,  stand  first  in  the 
water  for  a  while,  to  cool  off  the  feet^  before  making 
a  general  plunge.  Our  feet,  even,  in  spite  of  effemi- 
nate precautions,  are  much  exposed  to  the  damp,  cold 
earth.  The  effect  of  this  is,  to  counteract  the  tendency 
of  afflux  of  the  circulation  to  the  head,  which  is  that 
portion  of  the  body  which  employs  the  most  blood,  and 


TEMPERATURE.  381 

most  continuously.  To  obviate  this  tendency,  the  feet 
and  lower  extremities  should  be  bathed  first,  longest, 
and  most.  Baths  of  all  temperatures  below  that  of 
the  body  shoukl  be  taken  by  commencing  at  the  feet. 

It  is  sometimes  said  that  bathing  or  showering  the 
head  affords  relief,  implying  an  effect  in  opposition  to 
the  principle  above  stated.  In  this  case  the  temporary 
stimulus  is  evidently  mistaken  for  a  permanent  effect, 
and  if  the  observation  be  extended,  the  result  will  be 
found  to  be  opposite  that  supposed. 

Reaction. — After  a  time,  greater  or  less  according 
to  the  vigor  of  the  system,  the  heat  abstracted  from  the 
body  by  the  bath  is  fully  restored  to  it.  This  is  pop- 
ularly termed  reaction.  The  real  beginning  of  this 
process  is  at  the  first  moment,  when  the  nerves  are  im- 
pressed v^ith  the  sensation  of  cold.  Reaction  is  often 
carried  to  a  point  beyond  the  limits  of  a  healthful 
activity,  producing  irritability  and  tendencies  to  dis- 
ease, if  not  positive  inflammation. 

The  term,  want  of  reaction^  simply  implies  that  the 
complete  restoration  of  heat  is  slowly  accomplished. 
In  such  cases,  the  effect  desired  is  more  promptly  and 
thoroughly  secured  by  the  employment  of  movements. 

Baths  should  al\vays  be  taken  deliberately,  and  not 
with  nervous  haste,  as  this  occasions  fatigue,  and  tends 
to  defeat  the  end  desired. 

Shower  and  Douche  Baths. — ^These  are  highly  use- 
ful as  local  applications,  readily  inducing  derivative 
effects  in  visceral  organs,  and  at  the  same  time  exert- 
ing the  same  general  influence  as  has  been  previously 
described.  The  shower  is  unfit  for  the  delicate,  be- 
cause it  operates  too  severely  upon  the  nerves.     A 


382  TEMPERATURE. 

small  douche  is  more  manageable  and  milder.  In 
these  baths,  the  mechanical  impression  made  upon  the 
surface  by  the  running  water  adds  to  the  stimulating 
effect.  In  every  case,  anything  like  sliock  should  be 
sedulously  avoided  as  harmful  for  the  ordinary  chronic 
invalid. 


LIGHT.  383 


LIGHT. 

The  fact  that  light  lias  powerful  hygienic,  and  even 
remedial  properties,  is  one  too  much  overlooked.  Light 
is  well  known  to  be  a  most  potent  chemical  agent,  both 
in  nature  and  in  the  arts.  It  arouses  the  vegetable 
world  into  life  and  perfects  its  products,  aiid  without 
it  all  animate  nature  would  soon  perish  for  lack  of  sus- 
tenance. In  the  arts,  modern  science  has  wonderfully 
economized  its  powers,  and  makes  it  serve  the  most 
important  uses.  It  is  a  most  potent  agent  for  deter- 
mining the  chemical  state  of  bodies,  readily  decompos- 
ing numerous  chemical  compounds,  and  re-combining 
their  elements  in  new  forms. 

That  peculiar  property  of  light  whereby  it  is  render- 
ed a  most  important  hygienic  agent,  is  manifested  in 
its  power  to  destroy  noxious  vaporous  bodies  existing 
in  the  atmosphere.  The  surface  of  the  earth,  covered 
with  vegetable  and  animal  matter  in  a  state  of  decay, 
sends  forth  under  the  influence  of  heat  and  moisture  an 
abundance  of  gaseous  matter,  which,  mingling  with  the 
air,  enters  the  lungs  to  poison  the  blood,  and  produces 
various  forms  of  disease.  Though  existing  in  quanti- 
ties too  minute  to  aifect  the  senses,  or  any  known 
chemical  test,  yet,  through  the  lungs,  these  parti- 
cles are  constantly  being  conveyed  into  the  system, 
where  they  accumulate  and  exert  their  chemical  power 
in  full  force,  in  opposition  to  the  conditions  of  health. 


384  LIGHT. 

It  is  well  known  that  in  those  localities  characterized 
by  a  degree  of  heat  and  moisture  favorable  to  the  most 
rapid  vegetable  decomposition,  fevers  of  various  kinds 
abound.  These  effects  can  occur  only  when  the  nox- 
ious j)i'oducts  in  question  are  produced  more  rapidly 
than  they  can  be  destroyed  by  the  agency  of  sunlight. 

We  receive  the  most  injury  from  insidious  and  dis- 
regarded causes.  We  seldom  give  a  thought  what 
may  be  the  consequences  of  denying  to  the  rooms  in 
which  we  dwell,  the  wholesome  and  vivifying  influ- 
ence of  sunlight,  but  on  the  contrary  take  the  most 
unwearied  pains  to  exclude  it.  In  the  absence  of  light, 
the  invisible  causes  of  disease,  entering  by  the  windows 
and  doors,  or  generated  from  the  gaseous  matters  elim- 
inated from  our  bodies,  operate  with  all  their  force. 
It  is  useless  to  try  to  counteract  the  effects  flowing 
from  these  causes  with  drugs,  or  to  combat  them  in  any 
other  way,  while  the  causes  themselves  are  operating 
in  full  force.  Commonly  the  air  and  light  are  shut 
out  together,  which  is  much  worse  than  if  the  air,  newly 
acted  on  by  the  strong  light,  were  freely  admitted. 

The  influence  on  the  constitution  of  this  custom  of 
living  in  darkness  is  most  favorable  to  the  production 
of  that  condition  of  the  blood  and  of  the  vital  habit 
from  which  springs  scrofula.  The  pale  and  dusky 
complexions,  eruptive  skins,  flabby  and  weak  muscles, 
and  general  sickly  aspect,  which  are  so  frequently  wit- 
nessed in  }Oung  children,  are,  in  many  instances,  mostly 
attributable  to  this  cause.  Of  course,  light  is  a  most 
important  agent  to  be  employed  in  the  cure  of  affec- 
tions of  this  class.  It  is  wonderful  and  delightful  to 
see  how  soon  a  pale,  attenuated,  miserable  child,  after 
being  freely  exposed  to  the  sunlight  for  several  hours 
every  day,  will  begin  to  improve,  and  the  symptoms 


LIGHT.  385 

here  described  to  disappear.  Even  scrofulous  swell- 
ing of  the  glands  of  the  neck,  or  other  parts  of  the  body, 
will  quickly  succumb  under  the  magical  influence  of 
sunlight  and  pure  air. 

Xursing  mothers,  especially,  r  '  ^  these  hygienic  in- 
fluences to  maintain  the  purity  and  vigor  of  their  sys- 
tem, that  they  may  not  lay  the  foundation  for  lasting 
disease  in  their  oftspring,  for  the  child  is  sure  to  suflfer, 
even  sooner  than  the  mother,  the  grievous  conse- 
quences of  her  physiological  errors. 

Is  it  necessary  that  the  parlors  and  sitting-rooms  of 
our  dwellings  should  be  kept  so  dark  and  unwhole- 
some ?  The  first  reason  always  assigned  by  the  house- 
keeper is,  that  only  in  this  way  can  she  preserve  the 
colors  of  her  carpeting  and  upholstery,  as  if  the  color 
of  a  carpet  or  a  curtain  was  more  precious  than  that  of 
the  cheek  and  lip.  In  a  hygienic  point  of  view,  one  is 
led  to  feel  that  these  household  comforts  and  elegancies 
do  more  harm  than  good,  that  their  advantages  are 
rather  more  than  balanced  by  their  ill  effects.  How- 
ever beautiful  and  costly,  they  are  necessarily  uncleanly. 
However  well  kept,  they  are  the  inevitable  receptacles 
of  impalpable  dust,  which  yield  invisible  clouds  at  every 
touch,  besides,  being  the  reservoirs  of  air  contaminated 
in  the  way  we  have  noticed.  Carpets,  so  common  a 
luxury  here,  are  but  little  used  in  Europe,  except  in 
England,  and  it  would  undoubtedly  greatly  promote 
the  health  of  our  own  people  were  they  to  be  abolished 
by  statute  from  every  habitation  in  the  land. 

17 


386  MENTAL   HYGIENE. 


MENTAL    HYGIENE. 

The  different  states  of  the  mind,  whether  in  its  de- 
partments of  thought  or  feeling,  are  well  known  to 
exert  a  powerful  influence  upon  the  physiological 
manifestations ;  but  unfortunately  the  consideration  of 
these  relations  has  been  too  generally  left  to  a  class  of 
writers  whose  aim  is  to  astonish  and  amuse  rather  than 
to  effect  any  practical  good  by  their  disquisitions. 

We  hear  it  constantly  asserted  by  invalids,  that  some 
peculiar  mental  trouble,  disappointment,  or  excitement 
of  feeling  was  the  original  cause  of  their  ill  health ; 
but  how  very  few  think  of  looking  for  relief,  or  are  led 
to  look  for  it,  in  a  restoration  of  order  and  harmouy  to 
the  disturbed  mind.  How  few  seem  to  know  that  the 
forces  that  exercise  such  potent  control  over  the  organ- 
ism for  the  production  of  disease,  may  be  made  equally 
available  for  the  restoration  of  health !  The  ordinary 
practice  of  medicine  inculcates  the  notion  that  the  busi- 
ness of  the  physician  is  simply  to  endeavor  to  supply 
and  regulate  certain  material  conditions,  by  meajis  of 
pill  and  powder,  and  that  when  that  is  accomplished, 
all  has  been  done  that  lies  within  the  limits  of  hum,an 
ability. 

The  truth  is,  the  influence  of  the  mind  over  the 
body  is  equally  great  in  health  and  in  disease.  'No 
thoughtful  observer  can  doubt  this.  We  have  seen 
that  voluntary  muscular  action  gives  language  to  our 


MENTAL    UYUIENE.  387 

ideas^  and  that  no  part  of  the  frame-work  of  the  body  is 
exempt  from  the  duties  of  aiding  in  the  performance  of 
this  interesting  and  wonderful  function.  The  passions, 
especially,  put  into  requisition  the  action  of  almost 
every  muscle  of  the  body  for  their  expression.  Says  a 
German  writer,"^"  ''Who  is  unacquainted  with  the  spark- 
ling eye,  the  free  respiration,  the  glowing  color,  and  the 
serene  brow  of  the  joyous?  Who  is  not  familiar  with 
the  trembling  aspect,  the  hesitating  utterance,  the  cold 
ruffled  skin,  the  bristling  hair,  the  palpitating  heart, 
the  impeded  respiration,  the  paleness,  the  low  pulse, 
and  the  thousand  other  signs  of  fear?  The  slow,  op- 
pressed breathing,  interrupted  by  sobs,  the  cold,  pallid, 
w^rinkled  skin,  the  slow  tottering  gait,  and  the  weak 
pulse  of  the  despairing?  The  deep  broad  blush  of 
shame,  or  the  pallor  of  miserable  envy  ?  The  beaming 
countenance  of  requited  love,  or  the  anguished  ex- 
pression of  disappointed  affection?  The  spasmodic 
constriction  of  throat  and  chest  which  accompanies 
jealousy  ?  The  gnawing  pain  which  torments  the  heart 
of  devilish  hate  ?  The  storm  in  the  veins  of  the  angry 
man,  his  inflamed  countenance,  his  gasping  breath, 
his  bounding  pulse,  and  wild  swollen  countenance  ?" 
All  these  external  manifestations  depend  upon  certain 
changes  effected  among  the  invisible  elements  of  matter. 
IS'ow  the  extraordinary  states  into  which  the  system 
may  be  thrown  soon  subside,  and  are  directly  suc- 
ceeded by  the  ordinary  states,  and  whether  the  im- 
pressions thus  made  be  wholesome  or  unwholesome, 
the  effects  are  not  necessarily  permanent.  But  if  these 
conditions  be  continued  for  any  considerable  length  of 
time,  the  consequences  must  be  serious,  and  may  be 

*  Dr.  Feuchtersleben. 


388  MENTAL   HYGIENE. 

even  fatal.  The  continued  indulgence  of  malicious 
feelings  by  a  person,  for  example,  will  surely  so  modify 
all  the  internal  invisible  functional  acts  of  his  system  as 
to  check  and  overcome  finally  its  vital  power  ;  and  thus 
any  latent  tendencies  to  chronic  disease  that  may  belong 
to  him  will  pretty  certainly  be  quickened  into  active  life. 
A  grave  difficulty  to  be  encountered  in  overcoming 
states  of  chronic  disease  by  ordinary  medical  means  is 
now  seen.  Diseases  are  perpetuated,  if  not  produced, 
by  causes  over  which  mere  chemical  influences  can 
not  be  presumed  to  exercise  any  positive  control.  Tliis 
fact  may  be,  often  is,  tacitly  acknowledged  by  the 
physician,  but  he  declines  to  investigate  its  relations 
so  as  to  be  able  to  turn  them  to  useful  account.  He  is 
unwilling  to  acknowledge  in  practice,  although  he  may 
admit  confidentially,  that  the  headache,  the  nervous- 
ness, the  heart  disease,  or  the  dyspejDtic  qualms  which 
he  is  called  upon  to  remedy,  are  only  indications  of 
some  peculiar  Tnorbid  state  of  the  mind  or  of  the  emo- 
tional nature  of  the  sufferer^  which  it  becomes  him  to 
meet  directly,  rather  than  to  torment  his  patient  with 
an  eternal  round  of  palliatives.  In  these  cases,  every 
medical  prescription  must  be  totally  irrelevant  (though 
written  in  the  best  Latin)  unless  it  recognizes  the  ope- 
ration of  causes  existing  in  a  sphere  quite  beyond  the 
reach  of  the  most  potent  drug.  What  fatal  mistakes 
may  not  result  when  stimuli  are  substituted  for  encour- 
agement^ and  j)^^ysic  for  rational  ideas ;  when  the  in- 
valid is  advised  to  try  the  resources  of  an  inex- 
haustible pharmacy,  instead  of  bringing  common  sense 
to  a  controlling  sway  in  the  organism !  JS'either  physi- 
cian nor  patient  can  afibrd  any  longer  to  devote  his 
attention  exclusively  to  the  superficial  and  deceptive 
signs  of  disease,  nor  to  ignore  the  fact,  that  the  body 


MENTAL    HYGIENE.  389 

is  but  the  incarnate  expression  of  the  interior,  invisible, 
imperishable  spirit,  which  is  the  man. 

We  can  not  get  rid  of  the  sequences  of  the  import- 
ant fact,  that  in  the  human  organism  spirit  governs 
matter,  by  brutishly  ignoring  it ;  nor  can  we  inno- 
cently treat  it  as  an  unimportant  matter.  Science, 
like  true  religion,  is  learning  every  day  to  live  more 
by  faith  and  less  by  sight. 

The  jests  that  used  to  be  hurled  at  the  defenseless 
head  of  the  practitioner  who  dared  to  suggest  that  the 
thoughts,  and  feelings  and  mental  habits  of  the  inva- 
lid might  need  rectifying  as  well  as  his  bile  and  blood, 
are  fast  losing  their  point.  We  are  all  beginning  to  sus- 
pect that  perhap-s,  after  all,  a  disease  may  not  be  the  less 
a  disease  because  its  source  happens  to  lie  in  an  unruly 
imagination,  or  in  excessive  activity,  or  wrong  modes 
of  thought.  And  gradually — very  slowly,  to  be  sure 
— yet  really,  we  think  people  are  waking  ujd  to  the 
conviction  that  these  intangible  causes  are  not  irreme- 
diable. They  are  beginning  to  see  and  understand 
that  by  this  close  union  and  co-operation  of  the  mate- 
rial and  immaterial  natures,  remedial  agents  may  pos- 
sibly find  access  to  either  or  both  through  avenues 
that  otherwise  could  have  no  existence.  We  have 
faith  to  believe  that  the  time  is  near  at  hand  when  the 
mental  aspects  and  relations  of  disease  will  receive  an 
amount  of  attention  equal  to  that  which  has  always 
been  given  to  the  pulse  and  tongue,  the  temperature 
of  the  skin,  and  color  and  consistence  of  the  excre- 
tions. 

Blessed  will  be  the  day  when  science  shall  purge 
her  soul  of  the  dishonor  of  leaving  this  interesting  and 
vital  subject  to  ignorance  and  charlatanry.  But  even 
the  devil  should  liave  his  due.     As  much  as  we  detest 


390  MENTAL   HYGIENE. 

quackery,  it  can  not  be  denied  that  many  quacks  meet 
with  a  success  in  the  treatment  of  some  diseases  that 
would  be  very  puzzlmg  if  we  could  not  refer  it  in 
great  measure  to  the  mental  control  they  contrive  to 
exert  over  their  patients.  In  this  respect,  in  practice, 
the  pretender  has  a  positive  and  oftentimes  an  immense 
advantage  over  the  real  man  of  science.  He  stimu- 
lates his  patient's  imagination,  awakens  his  hope,  gains 
his  confidence,  whereby  the  perturbed  mind  is  re- 
stored to  a  condition  of  tranquillity,  and  thus  a  state 
of  the  system  is  induced  most  conducive  to  that  spon- 
taneous restoration  of  its  harmony  and  power  which  is 
often  mistaken  for  the  effect  of  medicine. 

A  wholesome  co-operation  of  the  mental,  emotional, 
and  material  forces  of  the  invalid  is,  indeed,  the  grand 
desideratum,  and  if  the  charlatan  can  secure  it,  he  is 
certainly  entitled  to  the  credit  of  doing  what  his  betters 
so  often  and  so  lamentably  fail  in  their  efforts  to  accom- 
plish. 

Every  one  knows  what  benefit  is  frequently  de- 
rived from  a  simple  change  of  doctors  ;  this  benefit 
is  generally  much  greater  than  the  difference  in  the 
courses  of  treatment  will  account  for.  We  all  know 
how  salutary  are  the  influences  of  cheerful  society, 
change  of  scene,  and  exciting  incidents,  in  some  condi- 
tions of  the  system.  It  is  very  strange  that  the  abun- 
dant experiences  of  men  in  this  direction  should  not 
long  ago  have  convinced  them  of  the  existence  of  a 
principle  so  important  and  fundamental. 

We  shall  make  no  attempt  here  at  giving  specific 
directions  in  regard  to  the  best  manner  of  bringing  the 
principles  of  mental  hygiene  to  bear  upon  particular 
cases.  We  can  only  direct  en  passant  the  attention 
of  invalids  and  physicians  to  this  important  subject. 


MENTAL   HYGIENE.  391 

We  believe  that  while  some  benefit  may  be  derived 
from  discussion  of  this  great  question,  in  the  enlighten- 
ment of  idle  public  mind,  no  extensive  practical  advan- 
tage will  be  reaped  until  these  principles  are  taught  in 
our  schools  and  incorporated  into  our  medical  science. 
The  mind  itself  must  be  regarded  as  an  available 
force  capable  of  being  aroused  and  managed  in  such 
a  manner  as  efiectually  to  oppose  the  tendencies  of  the 
body  toward  disease. 

It  should  be  understood  that  the  eflorts  of  the  physi- 
cian must  be  seconded  by  the  patient ;  and  that  this 
concurrence  must  not  be  faint  and  faltering,  but  deter- 
mined and  earnest.  If  his  energies,  or  what  remains 
of  them,  can  be  thus  enlisted  in  his  own  behalf,  the 
victory  is  already  half  gained.  The  only  hopeless 
invalid  is  he  who  has  no  resolution — in  whose  soul 
faith  and  courage  have  utterly  died  out. 

A  man  may  bestow  the  greatest  care  upon  what  he 
eats  and  drinks ;  may  regulate  ever  so  nicely  his  pe- 
riods of  exercise  and  of  repose ;  learn  by  heart  whole 
treatises  on  the  art  of  living  long  ;  reflect  profoundly 
on  the  relation  of  his  feelings,  his  will,  and  his  thoughts 
to  his  general  well-being.  But  more  than  this  is  de- 
manded of  him.  He  must  learn  to  govern^  as  well  as 
to  Icnow^  himself.  Does  the  reader  say,  "Oh,  I  am 
incapable  of  such  efforts  as  are  necessary  for  this."  I 
answer :  Your  duty  in  the  premises  is  demonstrable. 
God,  who  succors  the  raven  so  tenderly,  is  not  a  hard 
master.     "  You  can  do  what  you  should  do." 


APPENDIX. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY. 

Laurent  JouBERT. .  .Treatise    on    Laughter,   containing    its    Essence, 
Paris,  1550.  Causes,  and   Marvelous  Effects — being  Curious 

Researches,  Reasonings,  and  Observations. 

J.  F.  ScALiGER The  Art  of  Gymnastics. 

Lyons,  1561. 

Leonard  Fuchs Movements  and  Repose. 

Tubingen,  1565. 

Ambrose  Rare On  Movements  and  Repose. 

Paris,  1575. 
Jules  Alessandrini  .  The  Art  of  Preserving  Health ;"  in  twenty-three 
Cologne,  1575.  Books. 

Jean  A.  Borelli Animal  Mechanics. 

Rome,  1680. 
Pierre Brisseau.  . ., Treatise  on  Sympathetic  Movements,  with  an  Ex- 
Valenciennes,  planation  of  such  as  take  place  in  various  Ner- 
1682.  vous  Diseases. 

S.  F.  Paulline Curious  Account  of   how  Blows  will  often  Cure, 

Frankfort,  1698.  promptly  and  well,  all  kinds  of  Chronic  Diseases, 

nearly  incurable  :  the  whole  Proved  and  Illus- 
trated by  Agreeable  and  Pleasant  Anecdotes,  and 
by  Particular  Remarks  and  Interesting  Notes  by 
the  Author. 

Geo.  E.  Stahl Active  and  Passive  Commotions  of  the  Blood — Of 

Halle,  1698  to  Horseback    Riding,  a  new  Method    of    Curing 

1736.  Lung  Diseases — Of  the  Medical  Use  of  Volun- 

tary Movements— Of  Movements,  Diet,  and  Cold 
Water,  the  simplest  Remedies— Several  other 
Works  on  the  same  subjects. 

De  Sauvages Rational  Mechanics  in  Medicine. 

Leyden,  1703. 

9 


394  APPENDIX. 

Fredeeick  Hoffman  .  Dissertations    on    Medical    Physics,    relating    to 
La  Hague,  1708.        Health. 

Paul-Jean  Burette.  .  The  Gymnastics  of  the  Ancients,  and  several  other 
Paris,  1717.  Works. 

Nicholas  Axdry.  . . .  Orthopoedy  ;  the  Art  of  Preventing  and  Correcting 
Paris,  1741.  Deformities  of  the  Body  in  Children  by  means  at 

the  command  of  Parents,  and  those  having  Chil- 
dren in  charge. 

FucHNER On  several  kinds  of  Passive  Movements,  appro- 
Halle,  1746  to  1748.  priate  to  certain  Diseases — On  the  Danger  of  Cor- 
poreal Movements,  when  inappropriately  Applied 
— Basis  of  Physiology,  deduced  from  Physical  and 
Mechanical  Principles — Basis  of  General  Pathol- 
ogy, deduced  from  the  Principles  of  Anatomy, 
Physics,  and  Mechanics. 

C.  J.  TissoT Surgical  and  Medical  Gymnastics. 

Paris,  1780. 

Guts  Muths Exercises  for  Youth. 

Paris,  1793. 

Charles  Loxde Medical  Gymnastics  ;  or  Exercise  Applied  to  the 

Paris,  1821.  Organs  of  the  Body  according  to  the  Laws  of 

Physiology,  Hygiene,  and  Therapeutics. 

Ed.  Webbe Mechanism  of   the   Organs  of    Locomotion  :   Re- 

Leipsic,  1836.  searches  Anatomical  and  Physiological. 

J.  A.  L.  Werner  . .  .Medical  Gymnastics  ;  or,  the  Art  of  Correcting 
Vices  of  the  Bodily  Formation,  and  of  Re-estab- 
lishing the  Form  and  Proportions  of  the  Human 
Body  according  to  the  Principles  of  Anatomy 
and  Physiology. 

Peter  Henry  Ling.  .  Treatise  on  Gymnastics,  without  Apparatus. 
1836. 

1838 Treatise  on  Sword  and  Bayonet  Exercise. 

1840 Treatise  on  the  General  Principles  of  Gymnastics. 

J.  F.  LoESCHKE Gymnastics  in  Lunacy. 

Leipsic,  1840. 

G.  Indebetoe Therapeutic  Manipulation. 

London,  1842. 

H.  RoTHSTEiN GjTnnastics  in  Sweden,  and  the  Gymnastic  System 

1841.  of  Ling. 

G.  Resmer Regular  Exercises  in  Relation  to  the  Physical  De- 

Leipsic,  1843.  velopment  of  the  Young. 

Walker Manly  Exercises. 

London.  1845. 


APPENDIX.  395 

Hartwig The  Therapatetic  Curative  Method  ;  or,  the  Treat- 

Dusscldorf,  1847.  ment  of  Diseases  by  Movements. 

Adolf  Spiers Manual  of  Gymnastics  for  Schools. 

Basle,  18i7. 

G.  M.  ScHREBER Medical  Gymnastics — Directions  for  a  Healthy  and 

Long  Life. 

Georgii Kinesitherapie,  or  Treatment  of  Diseases  by  Move- 
Paris,  1847.  ments,  according  to  Ling's  Method. 

G.  Friedrich Gymnastics,  as  a  means  of  Preserving  the  Health 

Kentley,  1847.  and  Curing  the  Diseases  of  both  Sexes. 

KoTHSTEiN Gymnastics  of  the  System  of  the  great  Northern 

Berlin,  1850.  Gymnasiarch,  P.  H.  Ling. 

M.  Roth Prevention  and  Cure  of  Many  Chronic  Diseases. 

London,  1851. 

E.  A.  RiCHTER Organon  of  Physiological  Therapeutics. 

Leipsic,  1850. 

J.  C.  Werner Basis  of  Scientific  Orthopcedie. 

Berlin,  1851. 

RoTHSTEiN Journal  of  the  Gvmnastic  "World. 

1852. 

VoN  Medicin The  Medical  Power  of  Certain  Movements  in  Ad- 

Leipsic,  1852.  vanced  Age,  as  a  Means  of  Radically  Curing 

Obstinate  Hypochondria,  Gout,  Rheumatism, 
Oppression  of  the  Chest,  Stomach  Affections, 
Hemorrhoids,  and  several  other  Diseases. 

ScHREBBB Method  of  Medical  Gymnastics,  for  the  Use  of 

Leipsic,  1852.  Physicians  and  Others,  deduced  from  Experience. 

Eulenburg The  Swedish  Curative  Gymnastics. 

Berlin,  1853. 

A.  C.  Neumann Curative  Gymnastics. 

Berlin,  1853. 

C.  J.  Heldler Vibrations  Considered  as  a  Means  of  Diagnosis  and 

Braunschwig,  1853.       Cure. 

RoTHSTEiN Free  Gymnastic  Exercises. 

Berlin,  1855. 

RiCHTER  ■ Organon  of  Physiological  Therapeutics. 

R.  W.  Idler Manual  of  Hygiene  for  the  Friends  of  Long  Life. 

Berlin,  1855. 

ScHREBER Medical  Gymnastics  for  the  Chamber ;  being  Rep- 

1855.  resentations    and  Descriptions  of   Movements, 

without  Apparatus  or  Assistance,  and  Suitable 
to  Perform  at  all  Times,  and  in  all  Places,  and 
for  all  Ages — applied  to  various  Affections. 


^^^  APPENDIX. 

SpTic  *1855 ^T^^^*«  f«^  Females  ;  an  Educational  Means 

l^ipsic,  1855.  of  Developmg  Health  and  Beauty ;  with  Advice 

to  Parents  and  Teachers 

^^^«^ Manly  Exercises. 

London,  1855. 

"on^:  1851. ^i:r:nr  ^"^  °"^ "'  ^''-■^^  "^--«  'y 

]^^l^ Hand-Book  of  the  Movement-Cure. 

p'     ^Jnl' Cinesie,  or  Science  of  Movements. 

i  aris,  185  (■ . 

^*  ^ISeo'^''^ ^^^"""^  ^""^  ^"^""^'''^  ""^  *^^  Movement-Cure. 


"BOOK.8   6E.NT,    PkEPAID,   BY    MaIL,   TO   ANY    ru8T-OFF10«   IN   THB   UnITKD   StATBS." 


A   LIST   OF  WOllKS 


FOWLER    AND    WELLS,  308    BROADWAY,  NEW  YORK. 


In  order  to  accommodaie  "  the  people"  residing  iu  all  parts  of  the  United  States,  the  I'uli- 
lishers  will  forward,  by  return  of  the  first  mail,  auj  book  named  in  the  following  list,  llu! 
postage  will  be  pre-paid  at  the  l>ew  York  office.  The  price  of  each  work,  including  pogtagi-, 
is  given,  so  that  the  exact  amount  may  be  remitted.  Letters  containing  orders  should  bo 
post-paid,  and  directed  as  follows :  FoWLER     AND     VVelLS 

30&  Bboadwat,  New  Yoek. 


WORKS  ON  PHRENOLOGY. 


Co:mbe's   Lectures   on  Phke- 

.N01.OOY.    A  complete  course.    Bouud  in  muslin,  $1  25. 

Chaet  for  Recording  various 

Uevi-lopmeuU.     Designed  for  rhrouolosists.     6  cents. 

Constitution   of    Man.   ~  By 

Ueo.  Combe.     Authorized  edithin,  with  Illustrations, 
embraciug  his  Portrait.     62  cents  ;  musliu,  87  cents. 

Defence      of     Phrenology, 

Arguments    and  Testimony.     By  Dr.  Boardman.     A 
work  lor  Doubters.     62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 

Domestic  Life,  Thoughts  on  ; 

its  Concord  and  Discord.     By  N.  Sizer.     15  cents. 

Education    Complete.      Em- 

bia-cing  Pliysiology,  Animal  and  Mental,  Self-Culture, 
and  Memory.     One  vol.     By  0.  S.  Fowler.     $2  50. 

Education,  founded  on  the  ISTa- 

ture  of  Man.     By  Dr.  Spurzheim.     Muslin,  S7  cents. 

Familiar  Lessons   on  Phre- 

KOLOGT   and    Physiolooy.     An    ex-ellent  work  for 
Children.     Beautilully  Illustrated.     $1  25. 

Love  AND  Parentage  and  Am- 

ATIVENK3S  J  applied  to  the  liuproVbment  of  Offspring. 
By  0.  S.  Fowler.     75  cents. 

Marriage;    its   History   and 

Piiilosophy,    with   directions   for    Happy   Marriages. 
Bouud  iu  i^per,  50  cents  ;  musliu,  75  cents. 

Matrimony;   or,  Phrenology 

and  Physiologv  applied  to  the  Selection  of  Congenial 
Companions  for  Life.     By  0.  S.  Fowler.     30  ceats. 

Memory    and     Intellectual 

iMPBOVKMKNT  ;   applied  to  Self-Education.     By  O.  S. 
Fowler.     Paper,  62  cents  ;  musliu,  87  ceut*. 


Moral  and  Intellectual  Sci- 

KNCE.   By  Combe,  Gregory,  and  Others.    Siusllii,  Ji  JO. 

Mental  Science,  Lectures  on, 

according  to  the  Philosophy  of  Phrenology.     By  Kev. 
G.  S.  Weaver.     Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  b7  cents. 

Phrenology    Proved,    Ilhis- 

trated,    and    Applied.      Tliirty-eeventh    edition.      A 
sttiudard  work  on  the  science.    Muslin,  $1  25. 

Phrenological      Journal, 

American,  Monthly.    Quarto,  Illustrated.    A  year,  $1. 

Phrenology  and  the  Scrii»- 

TUUES.     By  Eev.  John  Pieipont.     15  cents. 

Phrenological    Guide.     Dc- 

signed  for  the  Use  of  Students.     15  cents. 

Phrenological  Almanac.   11- 

lustrated  with  numerous  engravings.     6  cents. 

Phrenological  Bust  :  design- 
ed especially  for  Lcarnei  8.  showing  the  exact  loeation 
of  all  the  Organs  of  the  Biain  fully  developed.  Price, 
Incluiling  box  for  packiu',-,  $1  25.    [Not  mailable.] 

Phrenological  Specimens  for 

Societies  and  Private  Cabinets.     40  casts  ;  nett,  $25. 

Self-Culture  and  Perfection 

OF  Chakactek.     Paper,  62  cents;  niuHlIn,  S7cent.^. 

Self-Instructor  in  Phrenol- 
ogy and  Physiology.  Illustrated  with  one  hunilr.-.l 
enirravings.     Paper,  30  cents  ;  muslin,  50  cents. 

Symbolical  Head  and  PI  ire- 

nological  Chai  t.  In   map  form,  showing  the   Natural 
L.iuguage  of  tiie  Phrenological  Organs.     30  cents. 

Works  of  Gall  on  Phrenol- 
ogy,   o  v.ols.,  $7. 


THB  PUBI.18MBB  would  tespectfully  refer  Strwigerg,  Agents,  and  Country  Dealers  to  the  p.^cJpal  Publltb«« 
m  New  York,  Philadelphia,  Boston,  or  other  cities,  for  evidence  of  their  ability  to  fuldU  all  contracts.  They  bar. 
been  many  years  before  the  public,  engaged  in  the  i)ublishlns  business  in  the  ci 


iif  New  Yoilc. 


Fowler  and  Wells'  Publications. 


HYDROPATHY;   OH,  WATER-CURE. 


Ik  the  psople  can  be  thoronghly  Indoctrinated  In  the  general  principles  of  Dtdbopatht,  and  make  them- 
selves acquainted  with  the  Laws  of  Licb  and  Hsalth,  they  will  well-nigh  emancipate  tbemselTes  from  all 
need  of  doctors  of  any  sort.— Dr..Tball. 


By  no  other  way  can  men  approach  nearer  to  the  gods  than  by  conferring  health  on  men.— Oicseo. 


Accidents  and  Emergencies. 

By  Alfred  Smee.  Notes  by  TralL  Illustrated.  15  cents. 

Children  ;  their  Hydropathic 

Manageiaent  in  Health  and  Disease.    Dr.  Shew.  $125. 

Cholep?a  ;  its  Causes,  Preven- 

tion,  and  Cure,  and  all  other  Bowel  Complaints.   30  c. 

Consumption  ;  its  Causes,  Pre- 
vention and  Cure.  Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 

Cook   Book,  Htdkopathic. 

With  New  Recipes.  Illustrated.  By  R.  T.  Trail,  M.D. 
Paper,  62  Cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 

Domestic    Practice    of   Hy- 

i>noPATHY,wltn  15  engraved  illustrations  of  important 
subjects  from  drawings.    By  E  Johnson,  5I.D.    $1  50. 

Experience  in  Water-Cure  in 

Acute  and  other  Diseases.     By  Mrs,  Nichols.     30  cts. 

Faiviily     Physician,    Hydro- 

pathic.  By  Dr.  Shew.  A  uew  and  invaluable  work 
for  home  practice.    Profusely  illustrated.     $2  50. 

Hydropathic    Encyclopedia. 

A  Complete  System  of  Hydropathy  and  Hyeiene.  Il- 
lustrated. By  K.  T.  Trail,  M.l).  In  one  large  vol- 
ume, with  nearly  8  tlmusand  puges.     Price,  $3. 

Hydropathy  ;  oi.  Water- Cure. 

Principles  and  Modes  ot  i  I  ej.traent.  Dr.  Shew.    $125. 

Home  Treativient  for  Sexual 

Abuses,  with  Hydropathic  Manasf  raent.  A  practical 
treatise  for  botii  sexes.     By  Dr.  Tiall.     30  cents. 

Introduction  to  the  Water- 

CusK.    With  First  Principles.    15  cents. 


MlDWU'ERY  AND  THE   DISEASES 

OF  Women.    A  practical  work.    By  Dr.  Shew.    Jl  25. 

Parents'  Guide   and  Child- 

BIRTH  Made  East.     By  Mrs.  H.  Pendleton.     CO  cts. 

Philosophy  of  Water-Cure. 

By  J.  Balblrnie,  M.D.     A  work  for  beginners.     30  c. 

Practice  of  Water-Cure.   By 

Drs.  Wilson  and  Gully.   A  handy,  popular  work.    30  c. 

Pregnancy  and  Childbirth; 

Water-Cuie  for  Women,  with  cases.     30  cents. 

Results   of   Hydropathy; 


Water-Cure  in  Chronic  Dis- 
eases ;  an  exposition  of  the  Causes,  Progress,  and  Ter 
minations  of  Vaiious  Chronic  Diseasts.  By  Dr.  .1.  Jl. 
Gully.    An  imiioi  tant  work.     $150. 

Water  and  Yegetable  Diet 

In  Sciofula,  Cancel,  Asthma,  etc.  By  Dr.  Lamb.   Notes 
by  Dr.  Shew.     62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 

Water-C  itre  in  E  yery  Known 

Disease.     By  J.  H.  Rausse.     62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cts. 

WATEi?-CuRE    Manual.       A 

popular  work  OC  Hydropathy.  62  cts.  ;  musltn,  87  cts. 

Water-Cure  Ali>ianac.  Con- 
taining much  Important  matter  for  all  classes.    6  cts. 

Water-Cure    Journal     and 

Heralu  op  Refobms.     Devoted  to  Hydropathy  and 
Medical  Reform.     Piabltohed  Monthly,  at  $1  a  year. 


PowLm  AND  Wells  hare  all  worki  on  Htdbopathy,  Phtbiolosy,  and  the  Natural  Sciences  g«nes-»ny.  B«)k 
sellers  supplied  on  the  moit  liberal  tei-ms.  Agents  wanted  In  every  State,  County,  and  Town.  These  works  axe 
universally  popular,  and  tti^nsands  might  be  sold  where  they  have  never  yet  been  Introduced.  Letters  and  Orders 
•honldbe  post-paid,  and  directed  to  the  Publishers,  as  follows  : 

FOWIiER    AND    WELIiS, 

[name  the  Post  «fflce,  County,  and  State.]  808  BeOADWAT,  NeW  Yoek-. 


FoNvr.Ki?  AND  Wells'  Puklicatiok.s. 


PHYSIOLOGY,  MESMERISM,  AND  PSYCHOLOGY. 


ON    PHYSIOLOGY. 

Alcohol  and   the  Constitu- 

TioN  OF  Man.  Illustiated  by  a  Diiigram.  By  Prof. 
Tdiunaus.     30  ceuts. 

Alcoholic   Controversy.     A 

Kevlewo!"  the  Westminster  lieview  ou  the  Pkvstological 
Eiiorts  of  Toetotalism.     By  Dr.  Trail.     30  cents. 

Amativeness  ;    or,  Evils  and 

Kenieiliesof  Excesiive  and  Perverted  Sexuality,  with 
Advice  to  the  Manied  aud  Sinjcle.     1.".  cents. 

Chastity,  in  a  Course  of  Lee- 

tures  to  Youus  Jlen.     By  Dr.  Graham.     SO  coiits. 

Chronic  Diseases,  especially 

Nervous  Diseases  of  Women.  Important  work.  30  cts. 

Combe's  Physiology,  applied 

to  the  Improvement  of  Mental  and  Phyeical  Educa- 
tion.    Notes  by  Fowler.     62  cents  ;  muslin,  i>7  cents. 

Digestive,     Physiology     of. 

The  Principles  of  Dietetics.  By  Andrew  Oombe.  30  cts. 

Family    Gymnasium.      "With 

numeioud  illustrations;  Containing  the  most  im- 
proved methods  of  ajiplying  -iymnastic,  Calistheuic, 
Kinesipalhic,  aud  vocal  exercises  to  the  development 
of  the  bodily  organs,  the  iuvigoratlun  of  their  fui\c- 
tions,  the  preservation  of  health,  and  cure  of  dis- 
eases and  deformities.     By  B.  T.  Trail,  JI.D.     $1  25. 

Family  Dentist;    a  Popular 

Treatise  on  the  Teeth.    By  D.  C.  Warner,  M.D.  87  cts. 

Food  and  Diet  ;  containing  an 

Analysis  of  every  kind  of  Food  aud  Drink.  By  Dr.  J. 
I'ereira.     Muslin,  $1  25. 

Fruits    and    Farinacea   the 

Proper  Food  of  Man.  With  Notes  and  engraved  Il- 
lustrations.    By  K.  T.  Trail.  M.D.     Muslin,  $1  25. 

Generation,    Philosophy   of; 

its  Abuses,  Causes,  Prevention,  and  Cure.     30  cents. 

Hereditary  Descent  :  its  Laws 

and  Facts  applied  to  Human  Improvetnent.  0.  S.  P. 
New  Edition.     Paper,  62  cents  j  muslin,  ^7  cents. 

Infancy;  or,  the  Physiologi- 

cal  and  Moral  Management  of  Children.  Illustiated. 
By  Dr.  Coii-be.     Paper, *62  cents  ;  muslin,  ;^"  cents. 

Love  and  Parentage  ;  applied 

to  the  improvement  of  OlTspring.     30  cenis. 

Maternity  ;    or,  the  Bearing 

and  Nursing  of  Children,  including  Female  Educa- 
tion.    0.  S.  Fowler.     62  cents  ;  muslin,  £,7  cents. 

J^ATURAL  Laws  of  Man.     By 

Dr.  Spurzheim.     A  good  work.     30  cents. 


Philosophy  of  Sacred  Histo- 

KY,  considered  In  Kelallon  to  Human  Ailment  and  the 
Wines  ol  Scripture.     By  Sylvester  Uiahain.     fi. 

Physiology,  Animal  and  Men- 

tal  addled  to  lU-alth  of  Body  and  Power  of  Mind.  By 
O.  S.  Fowler.     Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 

Sexual  Diseases;   their 

Causes,  Prevention,  and  Cure  on  Physiological  Prln- 
ciplts.  Including  practical  directions  for  homo  treat- 
ment.    $1  2.">. 

Sober  and  Temperate  Life; 

with  Notes  and  Illustrations  by  Louis  Coriiaro.  30  cts. 

Syringes,  Patent  Injectinp-Li- 

Struments,  best  in  market.     $3. 

The  Science  of  Human  Life. 

By  Sylvi-ater  Giaham,  Bl.D.  With  a  Portrait  „nd  Bi- 
ographical Sketcli  of  the  Author.     $2  r.O.  " 

Tea  and  Coffee  ;  their  Physi- 
cal, intellectual,  and  Mor,aiKtrect9.  ByAlcott.  iJctB. 

Teeth;   their  Structure,  Dis- 

ease,  and  Management,  with  Engravings.  15  cents. 

Tobacco,  Works  on :  compris- 
ing E-ssays  by  Trail,  Shew,  Alcott,  Baldwin,  Burdtll, 
Fowler,  Greeley,  and  others.    Complete  In  1  vol.    62  c. 

Uterine  Diseases  and  Dis- 
placements. A  Practical  Treatise  on  the  various 
Diseases,  .Malpositions,  ■#!id  Structural  Derangements 
of  the  Uterus  and  its  Ai)pendaeHa.  By  Dr.  Trail,  il- 
lustrated with  colored  eugiavlugs,  $5  ;  not  colored,  %1. 

Yegetable  Diet,  as  sanctioned 

by  Medical  Men  and  Experience  In  all  Ages.  ]!j  Dr. 
Alcott.     Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 


MESMEEISM-PSYCHOLOGY. 

Electrical  Psychology,  Phi- 
losophy of,  in  Twelve  lectures.  By  Dr.  J.  B.  Dods. 
Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  ceuts. 

Fascination  ;  or,  the  Philoso- 

phy  of  Charming  (Magnetlsrai.  Illustrating  the  Prin- 
ciples of  Lite.     Paper,  50  cents  :  muslin,  87  cents. 

Library  of   Mesmerism    and 

PSYCHOLOST.     With   Bultahle  Illustrations.     In  two 
large  volumes  of  about  900  pages.     Price,  $3. 

Macrocosm  and  Microcosm  ; 

or,  the  Universe  Without  and  the  UniveiKe  Within.  Bv 
Fishbough.    Scientific  Work.    62  cts.  ;  muslin,  »7  els. 

Philosophy  of  Mes5ierism  and 

Clairvoyanck.  Six  Lectures.  With  Instruction.  30  c. 

Psychology  ;   or,  the  Science- 

of  the  Soul.    By  Haddock.     Illustrated.     30  cents. 


ElTasB  of  these  worki  may  be  ordered  and  received  by  return  of  the  Pirst  M.ml,  postage  prepaid  by  the  Pub- 
Ilflh«r»     Please  addresi  all  letters,  post-paid,  to  FOWIiEU     AKT*     ■WEIjIjS, 

N.  B.— Name  your  Post  Office,  County,  and  State.  308  BeOADWAT,  New  Yokk. 


FowLEK,  AJs'D  Wells'  Publicatiois's. 


PHONOGRAPHIC  AND   MISCELLANEOUS. 


Wheu  single  copies  of  these  works  are  wanted,  the  amount,  in  postage  stamps,  small  chauge,  or  bank-notes, 
may  be  inclosed  la  a  letter  and  sent  to  the  Publishers,  who  will  forward  the  books  by  return  of  the  Fikst  Mail. 


MISCELLANEOUS. 

^ViMs  AND  Aids  foe  Gikls  and 

YouN(»  Women.     By  Kev.  G.  S.  Weaver.     Price,  67  c 

Chemistry,    applied     to    Physi- 
ology, Agriculture,  ana  commerce.    By  Liebig.  25  cts. 

Dejiands  of  the  Age  on  Col- 

I.KUKS.     An  Oration.     By  Horace  Mann.     25  cents. 

Delia's  Doctors  ;  or,  a  Glance 

Behind  the  Scenes.  By  Misa  Hannah  Gardner  Creamer. 
F.ir  the  Family.     Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  S7  cents. 

Domestic  Animals  :  A  Man- 

ual  of  Cattle,  Sheep,  and  Horse  Husbandry  ;  or,  How 
to  Breed,  Rear,  and  Manage  the  Tenants  of  the  barn- 
yard.    Paper,  30  cents  ;  muslin  50  cents. 

Fruit  Culture  for  the  Mill- 

ION-  ;  or,  Hand-Book  for  the  Cultivation  and  Mauage- 
uient  of  Fiuit  Trees.  Illustrated  with  Ninety  En- 
Kraiings  by  Thomas  Gregj..  Paper,  30  cents  j  mus- 
lin, 50  cents. 

Hints    towar©  »Keforms,   in 

Lt'Ctures,  Addresses,  and  other  Writings.  By  H. 
Gj-eeley.     Second  edition,  with  Crystal  Palace.    $1  25. 

HoiiE  FOR  All  ;   the  Gravel 

Wall,  a  New,  Ch^ap,  an.'  Superior  Mode  of  Building, 
with  Engravings,  Plans,  Views,  etc.     6"  cents. 

Hopes    and    Helps    for  the 

YouNB  OF  Both  Sexes.  By  Kev.  6.  S.  Weaver.  An 
excellent  work.     Paper,  62  cents  ;  muslin,  S"  cents. 

How  TO  Write;    A  Pocket 

Manual  of  Composition 

uable  to  the  young.   Paper,  30  cents 

How    TO    Talk  ;    A    Pocket 

Manual  of  Conversation  and  Debate,  with  more  than 
Five  Hundred  Ccjnimon  Mistakes  In  Speaking,  Cor- 
rected.    Paper,  30  cents  ;  muslin,  50  cents. 

How  TO  Behave;   A  Pocket 

Manual  of  Republican  Etiquette,  and  Guide  to  Correct 
Personal  Habits,  with  Rules  for  Debating  Societies 
and  Deliberative  Assemblies.     30  cts.;  muslin,  50  cts. 

How  TO  Do  BusLNEss ;  A  Pock- 

et  Slaimal  of  Practical  Atfaiis,  and  a  Guide  to  Success 
in  Life,  with  a  Collection  of  Legal  and  Coinmeicial 
Fornif.     Suitable  for  all.     30  cents  ;  muslin,  50  cents. 

EIand-Books    for    Home  Im- 

VKOVEMENT  (Educational)  ;  comprising  "  How  to 
Wiile,"  "How  to  Talk,"  "How  to  Behave,"  and 
'•  How  to  Do  Business,"  in  one  laige  volume.     ?1  50. 

boiORTALiTT     Triumphant. — 

The  Existence  of  a  God,  with  the  Evidence.  By  Rev. 
J.  B.  Dods.     Paper.  62  cents  ;  muslin,  87  cents. 


E^NZAs  Region;    Embracing 

Desciiptlons  of  Scenery,  Climate,  Productions,  Soil, 
and  Resources  of  the  TeiTitoiy.  Interspersed  with 
Incidents  ol  Travel.     By  Max  Greene.     30  cents. 

Life   Illustrated.      A   Kew 

First-Class  Pictorial  Weekly  Family  Newspaper,  de 
voted  to  News,  Literature,  Science,  the  Arts,  etc. 
Per  year,  llj  advance,  f2  j  half  a  year,  Jl. 

Lectures  on  the  Science  of 

Human  Life.     By  Sylvester  Graham,  M J).    $2  00. 

Population,  Theory  of.     The 

L.iw  of  Animal  Fertility.  Introduction  by  Trail.  15  ct*. 

The    Farm  :    A    Manual    of 

Practical  Agriculture  ;  or.  How  to  Cultivate  all  the 
Field  Crops,  with  a  most  valuable  Essay  on  Farm 
Management.     Paper,  30  cents  ;  muslin,  £0  cents. 

The  Garden:    A  Manual  of 

Horticulture  ;  or,  How  to  Cultivate  Vegetables,  Fruits, 
and  Flowers.     Paper,  30  cents  ;  muslin,  50  cents. 

The  House:    A   Manual    of 

Rural  Architecture  ;  or.  How  to  Build  Dwellings, 
Barns,  and  Out-Houses  generally.  Paper,  SO  cents  ; 
muslin,  60  cents. 

Rural  Manuals;  comprising 

"The  House,"  "The  Farm."  "The  Gardea,"  and 
"Domestic  Animals,"  intone  large  volome.    $1   M, 

Ways  of  Life;  the  Right  Way 

ind  the  Wrong  Way.  By  Rev.  G.  S.  Weaver.  A  cap- 
ital work.     Paper,  50  cents  ;  muslin,  60  cents. 


ON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

Hand-Book  of  Standard  or 

Amkbican  Phonography.  By  Andrew  J.  Graham. 
Muslin,  ?1  50. 

The  Manual  of  Phonography. 

By  Pitman.  A  new  and  comp.ieheusive  exposition 
of  Phonography,  with  copious  illustratious  and  exer- 
cises.    60  cents. 

American   Manual  of  Pho- 

KOORAPHY  ;  being  a  complete  guide  to  the  acquisition 
of  Short-Hand.     By  Elias  Longley.     50  cents. 

Phonographic  Teacher;  be- 

Ing  an  Inductive  Exposition  of  Phonography,  with 
Insti  notions  to  those  who  liave  not  the  assistance  of 
an  Oral  Teacher.     By  E.  Webster.     In  boards.     40  cts. 

Phonographic  Copy-]3ook,  of 

Ruled  Pai>er,  for  the  nse  of  Phonographic  students. 
12  cents. 
All  works  on  Phonography  will  be  furnished  to  order. 


These  works  may  be  ordered  in  large  or  small  quantities.  A  liberal  discount  ■vrlll  be  made  to  Agkxts,  and  othen, 
who  buy  to  sell  again.  They  may  be  sent  by  Express  or  as  Freight,  ty  Railroad,  or  otherwise,  to  any  place  in  the 
United  States,  the  Canadas,  Europe,  or  elsewlieie.  Checks  or  drafts,  for  large  amounts,  on  New  York,  Philadelphia, 
or  Boston,  always  preferred.     We  pay  cost  of  exchange.     All  letters  should  be  post-paid,  and  addressed  as  follows  : 

FOWIiER    AND    WEIiliS, 

[N»Di«  the  roitoace,  Connty,  and  Stale.]  803  BeoADWAY,  New  YoKK. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DTJB  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 

STAMPED  BELOW                                   | 

RETURN      BIOLOGY  LIBRARY 

TO— i^     3503  Life  Sciences  BIdg.     642-2531 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 

2                                3 

'    l-MON 

[f  H-MON<^GRAPH 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
Renewed  books  ore  subject  to  immediate  recall 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

immediately 

'     ^?^ 

87 

V*7 

,    vk^  18131 

J/ 

"BlOInRv '  iR^' 

^y 

'  f  i-       .  * , 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DD4                                 BERKELEY,  CA  94720 

U,C,  BERKFI  Pv 

laaMmmT' 


^o^J.377a" 


8435/ 

It  I 

rs 

BIOLOGY 
LIBRARY 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


I  ' 


./ 1 


